Home
Narrowband Services - Alcatel
Contents
1. RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes Step 8 Force a protection switch to the formerly standby COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter FRCD or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW LOPROTIN HOPT ss cOre Tsa c ERCI System Response The formerly standby COMDAC starts up The report event messages on the screen are Gomdac sida Switch forced Set data memory update in progress data memory update completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete 4 18 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl a Step 9 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message oW TOWKG BOP ls cores se RESELL System Response The report event message on the screen is eomdac Side switch forced reser Step 10 Disable the protection switching of the formerly standby COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter INHIBIT or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 INHIBIT System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAC Switch ianhibired Step 11 Remove the pre loaded COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack missing or power fault Step
2. Application pack data Physical sub scriber data V5 x specific data 132 4 x E1 feeder terface identifier The cross connection user port interface is a logical cross connection 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used Figure 4 4 Functional diagram of V5 2 Logical V5 2 Each V5 2 interface contains up to 16 logical links and up to 768 V5 2 user ports entities The logical links can be cross connected to the physical E1 ports of the system the V5 2 user ports can be cross connected to the physical subscriber lines POTS ISDN BRA or V5 ISDN PRA user ports only map to a certain V5 2 inter face The association is done by setting up a logical cross connection between that port and the V5 2 interface As this cross connection is a logical association it does not allocate any bandwidth bandwidth is allocated on a per call basis by the bearer channel connection BCC protocol Difference between The main difference between V5 1 and V5 2 is that in the first case an association V5 1 and V5 2 is made directly to V5 timeslots no concentration and in the second case an as sociation is made to a certain V5 2 interface concentration capability Timeslot assignment for V5 2 is done by the bearer ch
3. is not received as part of the inout TL1 cannot determine the end of the input command from the operations system message or from the TL1SI is received but an error is detected sends a rejection message to the oper ations system or the TL1SI is received and no error is detected executes the command Issue 7 December 2000 XXXIX Brackets Parameters between brackets are optional 11 4 Input parameter default values Depending on the nature of the default value parameters can be classified into three categories 11 4 1 Parameters with a specific default value A specific value for the optional input TL1 command parameter that when not en tered in the input command is assumed to be the same default value in every use of the command by the AnyMedia Access System gt NOTE The nonvolatile data storage NVDS default value the factory default value and the original value are used interchangeably in the TL1 commands e g INIT SYS to indicate that the same value that is set at the factory after AnyMedia Access System initialization and after system re initialization is the value that the AnyMedia Access System defaults to Example RTRV EQPT TID AID CTAG The AID parameter in the RTRV EQPT command The default value is all when an AID value is not entered in the input TL1 com mand 11 4 2 Parameters with current default values A parameter with a current default value assumes the current val
4. 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 27 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows E SeSe 1 5 System displays and windows 1 5 1 Overview Display concept The GSI is built up as a graphical user interface starting from the main window Main window In the main window of the GSI all other windows are displayed when applicable Additionally this win dow contains the status display Shelf view window Part of the main window displays a main shelf or subshelf and its system components Alarms and Conditions Displays a list of all system alarms Reporting window System log Contains information captured from the system oper ations Event Log window Displays a list of events with their time and date stamp TL1SI View Displays system messages and gives the opportu nity to enter TL1 commands Title bars All output windows have a title bar containing the designation m 8 Main window The title bar displays the name of the system identifier SID and the ver sion lt SID gt Graphical System Interface Version x x Shelf view window The title bar displays the designation lt SID gt m Alarms and Conditions window The title bar displays the designation System lt SID gt Alarms and Condi tions Reporting m Event log window The title bar displays the designation System lt SID gt Event log m TL1SI View The title bar displays the designation TL1SI View 1 5 2
5. common block spec block state block Input format The input format for the ENT PLN command Is e g example ENT PLN SYS00 1t 42 1234 DROP drop 1 2 24 IS 1 The general block position is not used in the AnyMedia Access System Therefore in this position two block separating colons always follow directly after each other 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXXV Input format Example parameters Input parameter blocks ENT Verb PLN Modifier1 Command code Not used inthe ENT PLN Modifier2 command SYSO0O TID optional 1t 42 AID Staging parameter blocks 1234 CTAG optional Not used in the ENT PLN Common block command DROP drop1 2 24 Spec block Migs sade Pavicacbloens IS State block The semi colon character terminates a TL1 input message The input format section of the TL1 descriptions includes specifications which mean the following Specification Meaning Abortable The execution of the command is abortable by pressing the ESC button Privilege code The given privilege code is required for this command GSI Confirmation Required The command is only executed after an ad ditional GSI confirmation File Transfer During execution a retrievable file is pro duced Related Autonomous Message The given autonomous message is sent af ter the command execution 11 2 Input format parameters 11 2 1 Command code verb modifierl modifier2 is the command code XXXVI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211
6. 4 22 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl 363 211 112 gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established Step 5 Step 6 System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the pre loaded COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes and the pre loaded COMDAC will be the active COMDAC After the system initialization is finished create a new GSI EM con nection by selecting the LAN or the COM port Insert the formerly active COMDAC into the slot COM 1 empty slot With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded in dentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the for merly active COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no
7. Filter W Alam M DB Change W TCA LED MW Event I Switch IY Active Session I Auto Refresh W Narrowband I Broadband Figure 1 24 Event Log window 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 33 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows o ET Table 1 9 Column headings in the Event Log window Column heading Meaning Type Specifies the condition that happened that is da tabase change threshold crossing alerts Atag Reports autonomous alarms as a number that can be tracked Date Time Indicates date and time when the event has oc curred Entity Indicates the affected system entity Message Displays the respective event message Extra Info Shows the correspondent TL1 information Event Log options Several options can be selected Auto Refresh If Auto Refresh is selected the event log will be refreshed automatically If not and if the event log has to be refreshed click on the button Refresh m Narrowband If selected the narrowband related events are shown m Broadband If selected the broadband related events are shown m Save Used to store the actual event log to a file m Filter Select the event types which shall be displayed Alarm Alarms Event Events DB Change Database change events Switch Protection switching events TCA Threshold crossing alerts Active Session Active session events LED LED reports a For example COMDAC IO_HDLC or V5CC protection switches 1 34 Iss
8. Step 4 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW CFG section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 154 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection ONU mainshelf ee ee ee 3 4 63 Deleting a cross connection between ONU Subshelf feeder port and AnyMedia Mainshelf server port Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between an ONU Subshelf feeder port and an AnyMedia Mainshelf server port The related ONU Subshelf must be in administrative primary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET GRS SsUBSHELE Tt ALD L ALD2 where AID1 sobrde hoya ia AID of the subshelf feeder port AID2 SVEDE L AID of the mainshelf server port Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures
9. Issue 7 December 2000 2 13 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Verifying the COMDAC software ee 2 3 3 Verifying the COMDAC software Purpose To verify the version of the software on the COMDAC Step 1 Follow the RTRV EQPT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message RIRV BOP Ts ALD where ATD comdac all System Response The software version appears within the output parameter PVRSN in the TL1SI View Additionally the Program Equipment code PCDE is indicated Step 2 Verify that the version of the software on the COMDAC is the version specified in the engineering work order Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section RTRV EQPT in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures Step 4 In duplex mode copy software from the currently active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command CPY MEM AID where AID sh 1 AID of the shelf System Response The FAULT LED flashes at a rate of 2 Hz during software installation and extinguishes upon completion During the copy procedure a status condition CPYMEM is raised re ported by a report event Copy program memory in
10. PST IS in service Set the primary service state to IS The default is OOS Out Of Service Step 5 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT LLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures gt NOTE The far end E1 signal degrade is only applicable if CRC4 is used Step 6 Cross connect an ROC Follow the ENT CRS LLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNT CRS LETS sAID1l AIDZ where ATDI roc 1 1 The access identifier of the ROC ATD The access identifier of the timeslot which shall be used llts 1 16 1 31 where the first value is the leased line link defined in Step 4 and the second value is the agreed timeslot number 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 49 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Establishing the ROC interface Le Step 7 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS LLTS sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 8 Set the
11. Procedure Step 1 IE THEN the GSI PC is to be connected via the Go to step 2 EIA 232C interface the GSI PC is to be connected via a Go to step 4 LAN Step 2 Open the shelf doors by turning the latches Step 3 Connect the PC to the port that is marked CIT on the faceplate of the CIU see Chapter 1 1 3 page 1 5 Go to step 5 Step 4 Ensure that the GSI PC is connected to the AnyMedia Access System via LAN see Chapter 1 1 3 page 1 5 Step 5 From the Start button on the taskbar select Program Files AnyMe dia GSI System Response The GSI window opens Step 6 Connecting to the system can be initialized in two different ways for the elements see Figure 1 8 page 1 13 Click on EH in the toolbar Select the NE Operations Connect menu option in the top menu System Response The Communications window is displayed Communications COMDAC Select Link O Login User ID Password Settings Connect Learn Mode No Connection Ok Figure 1 13 Communications window 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 17 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating ee Step 7 Click on COMDAC tab if not already selected The AFM tab is used for accessing the AnyMedia Access System for ATM xDSL services which are described in the Commands and Procedures included on the customer documentation CD ROM Step 8 Select the used link IF THEN the GSI PC is
12. Protocol type in E1 data EEn data terface identifier ENT CRS UPI v5up 1 v5i 1 ENT CRS LI v5I 1 v5i 1 Figure 4 21 Provisioning data for a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber line example 4 5 5 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscribers V3 ISDN PRA subscribers in the system Connection of V3 ISDN PRA subscribers 4 80 The AnyMedia Access System supports ISDN PRA subscribers connected via V3 interface V3 ISDN PRA subscribers V3 services are provided by connecting 32 64 kbps timeslots supplied by two HDSL ports to 32 timeslots of one E1 port located on an IO_E1 pack FAC500B Both the subscriber and the service node side have to be provisioned to support V3 line For the service node side this has to be done for the E1 feeder The E1 feeder is used for V3 service only The association of a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber with a V3 interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 The HDSL logical interface can operate in several modes which have to be provi sioned at the TL1 interface For V3 service the V3 point to point mode must be provisioned for HDSL All possible services on top of an HDSL logical interface dependent on the provisioned application mode are shown in Table 4 9 page 4 75 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Provisioning of V3 A V3 ISDN PRA subscriber of the AnyMeaia Access System must be provisioned ISDN PRA on the
13. at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET CRO BCTOTTALDIGAID where XID AID2 PVAR pvar PVAR ltbc 1 1024 1 2 roc L AID of the V5 line termination bearer channel or remote opera tions channel v5ts 1 16 1 31 AID of the V5 1 timeslot VopVar 1l 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS BCTS section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 117 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5UP V5CP rr E 3 4 26 Deleting a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 x communication path Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V5 user port en
14. service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line subscriber entity according V 35 V 36 or X 21 UVLL sub scriber to OOS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED UVLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BDA UV EEN 2 ATD see Poly where AID beH 1 L024 AID of the line termination PST i006 administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED UVLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 107 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a UVLL subscriber to OOS rr E 3 4 16 Moving a UGLL subscriber out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line subscriber entity according G 703 UGLL subscriber to OOS Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in a
15. 7 Security management for narrowband services 7 1 7 1 Hierarchy of security classes 7 3 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XI arr Figures 8 Power node preventive maintenance 8 1 AB Abbreviations and Acronyms AB 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 XII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Tables About this document XVII 1 List of documents XXII 2 Customer documentation on CD ROM XXIV 3 Warning symbols XXIX 1 GSI software for narrowband services 1 1 1 1 Requirements for the GSI 1 2 1 2 Connecting cable PC to CIU 1 6 1 3 Port addresses of the telnet session 1 7 1 4 Pin assignment of the LAN connector 1 7 1 5 Program operation by mouse 1416 1 6 Toolbar functions 1 25 1 7 Options for performing GSI functions 1 26 1 8 Column headings in the alarm and conditions reporting window 1 31 1 9 Column headings in the Event Log window 1 34 2 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures 2 1 2 1 Jumper settings for the different station clock configurations 2 8 3 System modification growth degrowth for NB services 3 1 4 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 1 4 1 Predefined alarm severity levels for the alarm output relays 4 34 4 2 Alarm severity defaults 4 35 4 3 Equipment AlDs 4 44 4 4 Operations interfaces AlDs 4 45 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XIII ee Tables 4 5 Miscellaneous AIDs 4 46 4 6 Examples of secondary service states 4 53 4 7 N in dependence on the HDSL interface application mode
16. AID2 VopVvar l s2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant to be switched to Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW V5PVAR section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 258 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Verifying a V5 provisioning variant i 4 8 6 Verifying the availability of a V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedure is to verify the availability of a V5 provisioning variant in the con nected exchange without requesting a switch over For this test the specified V5 interface must be operational The system asks the connected exchange whether the specified provisioning variant is available for switch over and the result is deliv ered back to the operator The specified provisioning variant can either be un known or not ready in the exchange ready to be switched over or the switch is not ready to switch over because a re provisioning is already in progress on the spec ified V5 interface If the connected exchange does not answer the request the command will time out after 20 seconds and no result is delivered This command neither performs any availability checks within the system nor has local p
17. Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Application pack installation ee Step 9 Verify that the communication with the system works Press the LED TEST button on the CIU on the OCP in the ONU Subshelf ONU Subshelf must be operational System Response All LEDs on all installed packs in the AnyMedia Mainshelf in the ONU Subshelf light for approximately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status gt NOTE The AP can be used for service only then when it is provisioned by enter ing the TL1 command ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 gt NOTE Common units and APs are keyed differently It is not possible to plug an AP into a common unit slot and vice versa End of steps Next procedure IF THEN a Remote Operations Channel execute the Establishing the ROC ROC is used interface procedure see Chapter 2 3 19 page 2 47 a Remote Operations Channel execute Verifying proper system turn up ROC is not used procedure see Chapter 2 3 20 2 46 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Establishing the ROC interface 2 3 19 Establishing the ROC interface Purpose To create an embedded remote operation channel entity The IP parameters and the interface state for remote operations channel must be set with the SET IP command The HDLC flag monitoring timer parameter defines the period in sec onds after loss of receiving HDLC flags where the remote operations
18. Jumper MP5 Type of a Resistive load impedance Setting valid for 1202 HI symmetrical high impedance DC powered rack 120 U 120 Q AC powered rack cabinets a Default factory setting external termination resistor of 120 Q at the clock distributor required in the DC powered rack equipped b Screening of the cable will be grounded in the backplane connector 2 8 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection ee Step 3 Open the shelf doors by turning the latches Step 4 Insert the CIU into the CIU slot for the location of the slot see chap ter 5 of the Applications Planning and Ordering Guide APOG With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indenta tion on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place System Response Upon CIU power up all LEDs on the CIU light for a short interval During CIU self initialization no LEDs on the CIU light Self initialization lasts no more than one minute Step 5 When self initialization is complete and the CIU is fully operational verify that the ACTIVE LED remains lit In addition one or both power LEDs light Step 6 Using a serial straight through E
19. Port provisioning ee drop 1 1 1 drop 1 1 2 drop 1 1 3 drop 1 1 24 drop 1 2 1 drop 1 2 2 drop 1 2 3 drop 1 2 16 drop 1 3 1 drop 1 3 2 drop 1 3 3 drop 1 3 12 drop 1 16 1 drop 1 16 2 drop 1 16 3 drop 1 16 32 Figure 4 14 Functional diagram of subscriber ports example 4 5 5 Port provisioning Layered Figure 4 2 page 4 52 shows the layered structure of the AnyMedia Access client server System services This layered structure reflects a client server structure consist ing of several layers which are linked by means of relationships In this structure the lower layer acts as a server and the higher layer as a client The given struc ture implies that all shown objects exception objects of the slots layer have to be provisioned with data before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a service for example POTS ISDN BRA V5 ISDN PRA V3 ISDN PRA ALL DLL VLL GLL UVLL or UGLL structure This subsection describes information needed to provide configurations for V5 x POTS ISDN subscriber V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and ALL DLL VLL GLL UVLL UGLL subscriber service on the equipment packs and slots layer in the AnyMedia Access System Provisioning of equipment packs and slots layer 4 66 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning The provisioning of the lines and the service assignments layers are described in Chapter
20. all text of the command Example RTRV EQPT all AIDs with the The RTRV retrieve input commands generally allow the use of all to replace an right most AID pa AID parameter and any following AID parameters in an AID address If all is rameter value all chosen as any part of an AID address no address fields subsequent to the one containing all can be used The AID parameter all can only be used in a single position in the right most AID parameter When all is specified for the valid range of N M in an AID parameter all AID values in that range are applicable Example RTRV DROP drop 1 all1 This input command yields a response for all physical ports for all application packs in shelf 1 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 43 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning and service activation i ee 4 5 2 3 Equipment AIDs Equipment AIDs The following table contains the AIDs for the AnyMedia Access System equipment components Table 4 3 Equipment AIDs Entity AID Explanation Shelf identifier sh 1 shelf shelt COMDAC comdac 1 1 2 comdac shelf comdac slot Power source pwrsrc 1 a b powrsrc shelf unit Application pack ap 1 1 16 ap shelf application pack slot Physical subscriber drop 1 1 16 1 32 drop shelf application pack line drop slot port Miscellaneous contact mc 1 1 8 mc shelf contact closure E1 pack ioe 1 1 1
21. eter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions Leased line link has already been provisioned and is in the administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED LLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDSEL ALD ARPO where ATD 111 1 16 AID of the leased line link PST Io administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED LLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 208 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving unstructured LLL in service ee 4 6 46 Moving an unstructured leased line link in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line link entity to IS Assumptions Unstructured leased line link has already been provisioned and is in the adminis trative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED Ubhie ALD Str where AID OLEILI A AID of the unstructured leased line link PST Ts administrative primary service
22. rameter than the primary service state must be given Assumptions ISDN line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ILN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDSILN ZALDA eset eos where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST ao administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ILN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 174 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving V5 ISDN PRA line in serv ee 4 6 22 Moving a V5 ISDN PRA line in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V5 ISDN PRA line to IS To change the administrative primary service state no other pa rameter than the primary service state must be given Assumption V5 ISDN PRA line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED PRALN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command HD PRALN e ALD tye ePols where AID eet ke O AID of the line termination PST IS administrative primar
23. request to send to clear to send delay sets the delay inserted be tween the time that the sub scriber equipment raises RTS and the NTU responds with CTS 11MS 11 1ms delay from RTS to CTS 12BITS 12 bit delay from RTS to CTS RTS OFF ON STD request to send sets the mode of the control line for X 21 NTUs or RTS line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard RLSD ON STD receive line signal detection sets the mode of the indication line for X 21 NTUs or RLSD line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard DSRDTR ON STD data set ready and data terminal ready sets the mode of the DSR and DTR control lines This pa rameter only applies for V 24 and V 35 NTUs ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 231 Configuration management for narrowband services Changing default prov data of NTU ee REMLP DISABLED ENABLED remote loop control sets the abil ity of the NTU to initiate remote loopbacks Disabling this at tribute will cause type 3 loop backs placed on the NTU to be denied DISABLED NTU is unable to initiate a remote loopback ENABLED NTU ts able to initiate a remote loopback BYTETIM DISABLED ENABLED ING byte timing sets whether the NTU
24. 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 3 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release TTT EEE Step 6 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU System Response All LEDs on all installed packs light for approxi mately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status Step 7 Verify which alarm is raised for the O_ HDLC by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV ALM AIDTYPE where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT ALL All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NTFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 8 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LEDs of the IO_HDLC still do not illuminate then replace the IO_HDLC see Step 4 and repeat from Step 6 Step 9 Perform a side switch of the IO_HDLC packs by Switching to standby pack SW DX EQPT see Chapter 4 11 8 page 4 291 Step 10 Repeat Step 1 to Step 8 for the other IO_HDLC pack End of steps 3 2 1 2 Subprocedure for simplex IO_HDLC configuration gt NOTE This procedure will provision the currently unused IO_HDLC slot for the new pack and delete the old provisioning After the procedure the system will operate on the new IO_HDLC in the currently unused slot For a non service affecting upgrade a duplex IO_HDLC config
25. 4 5 3 3 Non V5 permanent leased lines 4 58 4 5 3 3 1 Analog leased lines 4 59 4 5 3 3 2 Digital leased lines 4 60_ 4 5 3 3 3 N x 64 kbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 4 61 4 5 3 3 4 N x 64 kbps leased lines services according G 703 4 62 4 5 3 3 5 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 4 5 3 3 6 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according G 703 4 63 4 64 4 5 4 Physical ports 4 64 4 5 5 Port provisioning 4 66_ 4 5 5 1 POTS subscribers 4 69 4 5 5 2 ISDN BRA subscribers 4 71 4 5 5 3 V5 ISDN PRA subscribers 4 74 4 5 5 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscribers 4 80 4 5 5 5 ALL subscribers 4 85 4 5 5 6 DLL subscribers 4 89 4 5 5 7 VLL subscribers 4 93 4 5 5 8 GLL subscribers 4 98 4 5 5 9 UVLL subscribers 4 103 4 5 5 10 UGLL subscribers 4 108 4 5 5 11 Remote operations channel ROC 4 113 4 5 5 11 1 ROC carried over leased line interface 4 113 4 5 5 11 2 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 x interface 4 117 4 5 6 Provisioning of managed NTUs 4 119 4 5 7 Service provisioning 4 122 4 5 7 1 V5 switched services 4 122 4 5 7 1 1 V5 1 POTS service 4 122 4 5 7 1 2 V5 1 ISDN BRA service 4 124 4 5 7 1 3 V5 2 POTS service 4 125 4 5 7 1 4 V5 2 ISDN BRA service 4 127 4 5 7 1 5 V5 2 ISDN PRA service 4 129 4 5 7 2 V3 ISDN PRA service 4 131 4 5 7 3 Non V5 permanent leased lines 4 132 4 II Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Contents 4 5 7 3 1 Analog leased lines services 4 132 4 5
26. AID of the physical drop to which the external equipment is con nected to all all drops in the AnyMedia Access System drop i drop in the mainshelf 1 16 1 32 drop 1 _ all drops onan application pack 1 16 in the mainshelf all drop 1l _ alldropson all application packs all in the mainshelf subdrop drop in a subshelf eo io ae 1 32 4 268 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving external equipment subdrop _ all drops on an application pack 1 8 in a subshelf i Of all subdrop _ all drops on on all application 1 8 packs in a subshelf ai subdrop alldrops on on all application all packs in all subshelves Step 2 If the command request completes successfully the following nor mal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID inv INV where AID drop 1 1 16 1 32 cole osae om a atl oS a 32 AID of the physical drop to which the external equipment is con nected to 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 269 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving external equipment ee INV Sire ing consisting of 1 to 80 characters Vendor specific inventory data for external equipment For HDSL drops the NTU inventory data like product name serial number HW SW version and the manu facture date Is given For U drops that have NTUs attached the re turned inf
27. AnyMedia Access System supports up to 16 V5 1 or up to 16 V5 2 or up to 16 V3 or up to 16 permanent leased line structured or unstructured interfaces in any combination not exceeding the maximum of 16 E1 feeders in the system E1 cross E1 logical cross connections provide 2 Mbps bandwidth to the interfaces A maxi connections mum of 16 E1 cross connections can be created they are limited by the maximum number of E1 feeder ports in the system 64 kbps cross 64 kbps cross connections bind a subscriber port bearer channel to a V5 1 a connections V5 2 a V3 or to an LL interface A maximum of 769 64 kbps cross connections can be created by using a V5 2 interface they are limited by the maximum num ber of Z ports in the system 768 plus the one remote operations channel ROC 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 47 Configuration management for narrowband services Services Subscriber side Network side m POTS E EMER ji TOH Application eeen i 24 lines a Interface ee e g LPP 100 Le one logical O J 5 2 V5 link J 4 x E1 Feeder O ge gt Q TO D 5 12 lines Application O Interface ia f Pack _ one logical O O 5 e g LPU112 eer V5 link so O POTS 7 32 lines Application Te Lu ie RO N Pack m l Coe e g LP Z100 Interface oo dl i ac up to 16 logical 4x E1 Feeder g 16 lines Application x D 3 e g LPU430 P N i anis E Ri Interface i 4 lines pp ication i Ean ee Pack up to
28. As soon as the system is connected to the LE the synchronization mode loop timed LPD must be installed so that the system can synchro nize itself The E1 signal which is selected as the system timing reference must be a reliable and stable signal The reference E1 signal should have synchronization traceable to a primary reference source this will usually be the case if the reference E1 sig nal is sourced by a digital switch or by a digital cross connect system Only the non active synchronization reference can be changed To change the currently active synchronization reference it must be switched to standby with the OPR SYNCNSW TL1 command see the TL1 command description in HTML for mat which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 41 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting synchr parameters EEE __ ee Procedure Step 1 Follow the SET SYNCN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SE T SYNCN Ss lt 3 SY NCNMODE LIPPE LPPRI Lpsec LPSEC where SYNCN FRNG LPD MODE synchronization mode FRNG free running LPD loop timed external synchronization LPPRI el 1 1 4 1 4 sclk 1 primary loop synchronization this reference is used first after system start el 1 1 4 1 4 E1 physical port sclk 1 station clock initial system default is e1 1 1 1 dynamic defaul
29. CESSO number of HDSL timeslots GINFO N Y performance measurement grad ing information N no grading information required Y grading information required 4 164 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 ISDN PRA line CRIT 4007015 10 01 control bit setting 0 0 SAS bit 0 SA6 bit 0 0 1 SAS bit 0 SAG bit 1 1 0 SA5 bit 1 SA6 bit 0 1 1 SA5 bit 1 SA6 bit 1 administrative primary service state ES in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT PRALN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 165 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a user port ee 4 6 16 Provisioning a user port Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 user port entity of tyoe POTS ISDN BRA V5 ISDN PRA or single channel SPLL and defines the subscriber and its identifica tion within the V5 network interface The V5 user port allocates a line termination or in case of single channel SPLL the remote operations channel Assumptions Line termination has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT
30. Define the V5 2 protection group by entering ENT V52PG see Chapter 4 6 26 page 4 179 Step 2 Define the cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 2 timeslot by entering ENT CRS PGTS see Chapter 4 6 27 page 4 180 Step 3 Define the cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel by entering ENT CRS PGCC see Chapter 4 6 28 page 4 182 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 293 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples Le 4 12 Provisioning examples The following sections provide as an example the TL1 commands necessary for provisioning a V5 1 a V5 2 an LL interface and a remote operations channel ROC 4 12 1 Example for provisioning a V5 1 POTS interface Purpose This example is to create a V5 1 POTS service with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 on IO_E1 2 link 1 communication channel 1 timeslot 1 2 3 and 16 communication path 1 and 2 application pack 13 and 14 line termination 42 43 and 44 user port 22 23 and 24 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier and the layer 3 addresses must be identi cal to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 layer 3 addresses 1000 1001 and 1002 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface ENT VOI VoL 3 3 23 VOC pe Volvo Ld 0 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack BND TOR 16e l lE Ste
31. ENTS VCC 4 5CCH347 22 22 5CCLO 45 gt 4 300 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 363 211 112 Define the V5 timeslot type EDSVSOLOoteVoOtSs l Lory verse ype CCc gt BD VOTLStiVSoCS 1 L5s 2 PI Vot SCDE C Define the cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots BN S CRS CShS or yoCces ole vo us 164 BNI CRS CClS sv 5Cce 3 2 Vorseal 15 Define the V5 communication paths BENT V5CP riyo Cp s La FrV pe yoe occ ENT VoCP rivo CD o 2 pO pLype CcrerlL ENDT V5CP sv ODA r eyo types LCEr ly ENI VSCP rivoco 3 4 1 ivoptype pstn Define the cross connections between communication paths and communication channels PNT CRo CeCC rive CoHo 1y Veer oly ENT CURS CPCEe 2iveco 3 2 v0CC 3 1 ENIS CRS CPCCl ey nOD n oar 7 O gt ENG CRS CPCC TS voc 3 4 7 5CC S 2 gt Define the application packs BPNISAP ap l 132 72 LPP LO ENIT APs jep 1 142 2 EP2A100 Define the POTS lines ENT PLN S boK 42 4 drop drop 1L L3 1 pom y ENTI PLN plc 43237psarop drop l 13 2 pem y ENI PLN be 443 2 drop drop 1 14 1 ppm n Issue 7 December 2000 4 301 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 12 Define the POTS user ports ENT VSUP v5up 22 ltype PLN 1t l1t 42 v5l3addr 1000 ENT
32. Follow the ED DAT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BO SDA Tee fe tA Bgl Eee where DATE Date is in yy mm dd format A null value defaults to the current date The initial default is Janu ary 1 1970 70 01 01 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respectively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively 38 lt yy lt 69 are invalid values TIME Time identifies the hour minute and second hh mm ss Valid values for the time are 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 where 00 00 00 is midnight A null value defaults to the current time The initial de fault is 00 00 00 Step 2 Optionally Verify the time by following the RTRV HDR GSI opera tion or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDR Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section ED DAT and RTRV HDR in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps Next procedure Setting autonomous messages to GSI AEM see Chapter 2 3 12 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 25 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting messages to GSI AEM TEE ___ ee pas Ba Setting autonomous messages to GSI AEM Purpose For setting up filters for autonomous
33. For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V3L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 210 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA line ae 4 6 48 Provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA line Purpose This procedure is to create a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber line It specifies the HDSL interface which must operate in a V3 application mode to be used Optionally the administrative primary service state of the subscriber can be given The V3 ISDN PRA subscriber is used for transporting the full 2Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected V3 link and therefore allocates all HDSL timeslots of the specififed HDSL interface No additional services on the specified HDSL interface are possible The com mand is rejected if the specified HDSL interface does not exist is not in the ad ministrative primary service state OOS the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL pack are exhausted or the HDSL interface is used by another service The created V3 ISDN PRA subscriber indicates an External Condition Mismatch as second ary service state if the service is not supported by the actual connected NTU at customer premises HiGain Modems NTU 801 or NTU 804 with firmware version 4 61 or higher Assu
34. IF THEN ACTIVE CFGID does not match go to the Setting the customer configuration procedure Chapter 2 3 5 page 2 17 ACTIVE CFGID fits go to Step 4 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 19 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Switching system configuration TET TT EE Step 4 Verify the current configuration mode Follow the RTRV CFG ISDN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV CFG ISDN System Response The CFGID shows the configuration mode the system is currently using The CFGID is 1 for a POTS only mode and 2 for a mixed POTS ISDN mode Step 5 IF THEN ACTIVE CFGID does not match go to the Setting ISDN mode configuration procedure Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 ACTIVE CFGID fits go to the O_HDLC non protection installation procedure Chapter 2 3 8 page 2 21 if applicable otherwise go to the Setting the source ID procedure Chapter 2 3 10 page 2 24 End of steps Next procedure IO_HDLC non protection installation see Chapter 2 3 8 page 2 21 if applicable otherwise Setting the source ID see Chapter 2 3 10 page 2 24 2 20 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures lO_ HDLC non protection install a 2 3 8 IO_HDLC non protection installation Purpose A O_HDLC pack is needed to frame relay D channel messages between switched ISDN subscribers connected to an AnyMedia Access System and a number of V5 communications channels and
35. In the displayed command selection window click on the button representing the command After that a window opens displaying all possible command objects Figure 1 35 1 44 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands E EDIT Select Object CONFIG GLLN ILN DFLT PL PRALN PRALN DFLT SUBSHELF OCC WOTS Figure 1 35 Example Selection of TL1 Command Objects In the displayed command objects selection window click on the button represent ing the desired command object After that a window opens for defining the parameters of the selected TL1 com mand see Figure 1 36 page 1 46 TL1 commands In the TL1 commands menu the available TL1 commands are displayed in menu menus subdivided according to the following menu options m All TL1 commands m TL1 commands for configuration management m TL1 commands for fault management m TL1 commands for security management To select a command click on the respective TL1 Commands menu option After that a window opens for defining TL1 command parameters and executing the selected TL1 command see Figure 1 36 page 1 46 1 7 3 Defining and Executing TL1 Commands Purpose For each TL1 command a window is displayed for defining the command at tributes and executing the TL1 command From this window the respective TL1 command can also be copied to a script file Chapter 1 7 6 page 1 50 Procedure Step 1 Select the TL
36. Leja AID of the subshelf feeder port AID2 Say on meee le wow areal AID of the mainshelf server port Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS SUBSHELFsection in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 93 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an ONU in service rr E 3 4 3 Moving an Optical Network Unit in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an Optical Network Unit Subshelf entity to IS The change to IS will be denied if the ONU Subshelf is not cross connected to a AnyMedia Mainshelf server port Assumptions ONU is cross connected to an AnyMedia Mainshelf server port Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED SUBSHE LE 2 Alps ise POr where AID subsh 1 8 AID of the subshelf PST as administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command descr
37. Line termination bearer channel m ISDN BRA subscriber objects ISDN BRA subscriber Line termination bearer channel m V5ISDN PRA subscriber objects V5 ISDN PRA subscriber Line termination bearer channel m V3ISDN PRA subscriber objects 4 50 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services ee 363 211 112 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber ALL subscriber objects ALL subscriber Line termination bearer channel DLL subscriber objects DLL subscriber Line termination bearer channel GLL subscriber objects GLL subscriber Line termination bearer channel VLL subscriber objects VLL subscriber Line termination bearer channel UGLL subscriber objects UGLL subscriber Line termination bearer channel UVLL subscriber objects UVLL subscriber Line termination bearer channel Logical HDSL interface objects Logical HDSL interface HDSL timeslots ROC object Remote operations channel ROC Issue 7 December 2000 4 51 Configuration management for narrowband services Services ONU provisioning P gt Service provisioning LL service cross connection ULL service cross connection V5 service cross connection SERVICE MENTS MENTS ALL DLL subscriber VLL GLL subscriber POTS subscriber k ISDN BRA subscriber V5 ISDN PRA subscr V3 ISDN PRA subscr ee EEE EEE ULL interface V3
38. SUBSH_TYPE ONUOI1 subshelf type ONU01 Optical Network Unit 8 slot subshelf Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 3 Define the cross connection between ONU feeder port and AnyMe dia Mainshelf server port by entering ENT CRS SUBSHELF see Chapter 3 4 2 page 3 93 Step 4 Move the ONU in service by entering ED SUBSHELF see Chapter 3 4 3 page 3 94 End of steps Next procedure Terminating the session see Chapter 2 3 24 2 56 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Terminating the session 2 3 24 Terminating the session Purpose To end the session with the AnyMedaia Mainshelf Procedure Step 1 On the menu bar select File Exit System Response The GSI window closes Step 2 If desired disconnect the PC from the CIU Step 3 Close the shelf doors and make sure that the latches are firmly in place Step 4 Detach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap End of steps Next procedure Setting ONU Subshelf identifier via DIP switch see Chapter 2 4 1 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 57 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting subshelf
39. The active COMDAC will initialize and copy the RAM and the NVDS to the COMDAC that was originally in standby mode System Response The report event messages on the screen are pack inittalizatroh am progress data memory update in progress pack initialization finished System software version mismatch data memory update completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete Step 21 Copy software from the active COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the original standby COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condition CPYMEM is raised reported by following report events Gopy program memory Tmi Progressi copy program memory Complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes Step 22 IF THEN the software restoration fails an alarm message copy pro gram memory failed Is raised the FAULT LED is on Repeat Step 17 If Step 17 is not successful the COM DAC could be defect Please contact your local customer support LCS there is a pack reinitialization fault the FAULT LED is permanently lit Go to Step 17 The COMDAC that was originally in standby mode with the new software load is now in service End of steps 4 12 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via
40. The number of days between exercises It has the format of x DAY and the x is between 1 and 365 For example 3 5 DAY 0 DAY means to stop the exercise The initial default value for the COMDAC exercises is one a week at 3 00 am STM lt string gt consisting of 3 to 5 characters Starting time of the day of exer cise The first exercise will start within the next 24 hours at the time specified The format is HH MM where HH hour of day ranges from 0 to 23 MM minute of hour ranges from 0 59 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SCHED EX section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 292 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning V5 2 protection ee 4 11 10 Provisioning V5 2 protection Purpose This procedure is to create a protection group 1 or 2 for a V5 2 interface to create a cross connection between the V5 2 protection group and a V5 timeslot and to create a cross connection between the V5 2 protection group and a V5 communi cation channel Assumptions V5 2 interface protection group 1 V5 2 timeslot and V5 communication channel have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1
41. a Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 363 211 112 Define the V5 timeslot type EDSVSOLOoteVoOtSs l Lory verse ype CCc gt BD VOTLStiVSoCS 1 L5s 2 PI Vot SCDE C Define the cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots BN S CRS CShS or yoCces ole vo us 164 BNI CRS CClS sv 5Cce 3 2 Vorseal 15 Define the V5 communication paths BENT V5CP riyo Cp s La FrV pe yoe occ ENT VoCP rivo CD o 2 pO pLype CcrerlL ENDT V ICPE AIV OD A r yE Cyes LCEr ly BNI VSCP etVvoCco 3 54 5 2 iV opty pe 1sdni BPNIT V5CP 23 V0CH 3 672 22 VoOplype 1sdnp ENT V5CPt3 VOC R 3 7 S33 VOpLype 1sd0ns Define the cross connections between communication paths and communication channels ENI CRS CPCCseyoCo 5 1 Vy Oaa ke ENTS ROSERO Yo CO o Aar COn ENT CRSACPCC ISV o CO aR 3y V OOR BPNT CRS CPCC 74 Vo C0 3 V OO a ENT CRS CPCCOr i VOCO 3 677 56C 6 2Z ENTORSE PCC TIV C NVI OSS Define the application packs ENTSAR apal vebPULLZ ENT AP tap 1 142 2LPU430 Issue 7 December 2000 4 305 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 4 306 Issue 7 December 2000 Define the ISDN lines BNE LENS eee es Screop dropel H 13 1 ENTS LLN e loser drop drop l 132 ENT LGN sb e e4 sa arOp drop L l Define the ISDN user ports ENT VSUP v5up 22 ltype ILN lt
42. click Browse and select another directory You can choose not to install AnyMedia Graphical System Interface by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Directory i C Program Files 4nyMedia G 51 jee Cancel Figure 1 7 Choose destination location window System Response If you accept the proposed directory structure the files will be installed in the newly created directory C Program Files AnyMedia GSI 1 10 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Software Installation from CD ROM gt NOTE lt is strongly recommended to accept the values proposed by the setup or by any Windows dialog box At the end of the installation the restart of the PC is mandatory End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 11 GSI software for narrowband services Software Installation from CD ROM M aaaea O 1 2 1 Displaying on line help Purpose To display the help that will guide you through the GSI application Procedure Step 1 From the menu bar click on Help Contents This launches the Help table of contents Step 2 Click on Touring the Windows Environment if you need informa tion on the GSI environment Step 3 Click on Getting Started for a quick start on using the GSI for doing the TL1 operations End of steps 1 12 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating 1 3 Starting and terminating the GSI and system acc
43. displayed in the field Access ID and immediately inserted into the command string which is displayed in the field TL1 Command 1 46 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands a Defining command attributes If attributes can or must be defined for the command an area for defining these attributes is given In this area the attributes and their settings are designated by abbreviations To display the meaning of an abbreviation position the cursor over the respective abbreviation The attribute values can either be defined using selection lists or by marking the used alternative Only allowed ranges and alternatives are displayed The resulting attribute values are immediately inserted into the command string which is displayed in the field TL1 Command Attribute values which are not required can be deselected by clicking in the attribute field with the right mouse button Step 3 Activate the check mark Auto Ctag if the Ctag number in the win dow is to be added to the command For the next TL1 command the Ctag will be incremented automatically Step 4 Click on Execute System Response The defined TL1 command is sent to the sys tem End of steps 1 7 4 Creating Script Files Purpose To facilitate the entry of a large number of similar TL1 commands Procedure Step 1 From the menu bar select File Scripting New Macro Script a macro script is used to perform more complic
44. example 4 5 5 7 VLL subscribers VLL subscribers in The AnyMedia Access System supports two kinds of n x 64 kbps digital leased the AnyMedia lines services over HDSL interface GLL and VLL GLL supports a digital leased Access System line via a G 703 interface VLL supports a digital leased line via a data interface which can be either V 35 V 36 or X 21 In both cases the particular interface is provided by means of an NTU which is the far end of an HDSL transmission sys tem VLL subscribers are described here the description of GLL subscribers can be found in Chapter 4 5 5 8 page 4 98 Connection of VLL VLL services are provided by connecting a number of bearer channels supplied subscribers by a VLL entity with the same number of timeslots of an E1 feeder located on an lO_E1 The VLL is provisioned on top of an HDSL logical interface The VLL ser vice can be provided in the AnyMedia Mainshelf as well as in the ONU Subshelf There are no differences concerning provisioning aspects The E1 feeder has to be provisioned to be used for permanent leased lines purposes The association of a VLL subscriber with a leased line interface is made on the service assign ments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 The HDSL logical interface can operate in several modes which have to be provi sioned at the TL1 interface VLL service depends on these modes Therefore knowledge of these HDSL specifics is required for understanding of VLL sub scriber provisio
45. i ee 4 6 37 Provisioning a cross connection between leased line termination bearer channel and leased line timeslot Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection from a leased line termination bearer channel to a leased line link timeslot Both entities must already be provi sioned and not yet be cross connected For a working n x 64 kbps leased line ser vice all bearer channels of the subscriber must be cross connected to the same leased line link and the order of the bearer channels must be kept in sequence on the leased line link Assumptions Leased line termination bearer channel and leased line timeslot have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS LLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS LLTS AID1 AID2 where ATDI ltbc 1 1024 1 31 AID of the line termination bearer channel AID2 llts 1 16 1 31 AID of the leased line link timeslot Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS LLTS sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 200 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection ULLN ULLL I 4 6
46. is normally transported via a separate network see Figure 1 3 In those cases where a separate network is not available remote operation can be performed by using a 64 kbps channel remote operations channel ROC see Figure 1 4 that is part of the E1 payload connectivity to the AnyMedia Access System or as an other possibility point to point networks EIA 232C over SDH F1 byte see Figure 1 1 on page 1 6 AnyMedia AnyMedia Figure 1 4 Connection of the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System via LAN 1 8 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Software Installation from CD ROM 1 2 GSI software installation from CD ROM Purpose To install the GSI tool on a PC for the first time or to install a new version of the GSI Assumptions The software and hardware requirements described in Chapter 1 1 2 page 1 2 must be given The computer and monitor must be turned on and Microsoft Windows 95 running The TL1 manual pages are located on the same CD ROM as the GSI and are copied on to your PC hard disk during installation of the GSI The GSI software is stored on CD ROM and is equipped with an install wiz ard that guides you through the process Procedure To get started proceed as follows Step 1 Place the CD ROM disk in your CD ROM drive Step 2 IF THEN the setup starts automatically Au follow the instructions in the toplay on your PC InstallShield window go to Step
47. mn k a a a a ioe1 1 all IMPROPRMVL NSA mn NSA mn SA mj NSA mn SA mj NSA mn UNXPRS T FC INT PRCDERR 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 35 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 36 Table 4 2 AID ioe1p 1 e1 1 all v5l 1 all Issue 7 December 2000 Alarm severity defaults Continued Pon SA pou NSA wr SR wr NSA MPROPRWIVE SA UNKPRS SA UNKPRS NSA T FC INT SSA TRENT NSA PRCDERR NSA as SA ais NSA Tem NSA Tenn fa Tenn NSA RASA RASA Lor SA Lor NSA tos SA tos NSA PRCDERR SSA SA NSA SA NSA SA SA NSA SA NSA NSA SA NSA NSA SA NSA SA NSA SA NSA SA NSA SA SA A Default provisioning parameters Provisioned Severity Level mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mn mj mn mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mn mj Cr 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Continued Provisioned Severity AID Condition Service Effect Level z SEET n eft n ap 1 all Z z Z z r 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 37 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Continued Provisioned Severity AID Condition Service Effect Level ap 1 all DATASYSMN N DATASYSMN N N A ap 1 2 4 6 8 10 se 12 14 16 PRCDE
48. port one on IO_E1 pack num ber two The default synchronization mode can be changed by provision ing via TL1 commands Figure 4 51 page 4 273 shows a conceptual illustration of the reference clock source selection mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System Two of the 16 E1 clock input signals or the SCI signal are selected by TL1 provisioning command as the primary and secondary reference sources The E1 inputs may originate 4 272 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Clock synchronization managm T O from digital switches or transmission equipment The SCI may be fed or derived from clock distribution equipment or transmission equipment Primary Sync Reference Source Provisionable E1 Port 1 1 E1 Port 1 2 Q l Secondary Sync Reference E1 Feeders Source or SCI Provisionable l E1 Port 4 4 Internal Clock Distribution SCI Figure 4 51 Synchronization source selection Synchronization The system initially selects the primary input as the active reference source If the switching primary reference fails the system switches to the alternate source Switching be tween references is non revertive which means that the system will not automati cally return to the primary reference when the fault clears Revertive synchroniza tion protection switching can introduce transmission hits and can produce oscilla tory behavior in
49. see Chapter 2 3 18 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 43 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Application pack installation E SeSe 2 3 18 Application pack installation Purpose Provide hardware for subscriber services and testing capabilities The procedure is valid for the AnyMedia Mainshelf as well as for the ONU Subshelf Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge A Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the AnyMedia Mainshelf doors or the ONU door by turning the latches Step 3 Detach the faceplate connector from one of the slots marked AP 01 through AP 16 as specified in the engineering work order and lay it carefully in the cable trough for ONU Use AP 1 through AP 8 and move the cable aside to the left gt NOTE Do not remove the cable tie which connects the cable screen to the ground ing finger Step 4 Remove the blank cover for the slot by releasing the latches at the top and bottom of the cover Ste
50. switch 1 1 Yes Non revertive Yes optional a Routine side switching capability is provided COMDAC Core Table 4 14 Synchronization sources protection Synch Protection Automatic Manual source mode switch Switch mode switch E1 SC 1 1 optional Yes Non rever Yes tive a After recovery an attempt is made to go back to the primary source V5 2 CC N M Non revertive Yes optional Table 4 15 V5 2 communication channel protection V5 2 communica Protection Automatic Manual tion channel mode switch Switch mode switch Yes POTS only N 1 2 mode M 1 16 V5 2 CC N M Yes Non revertive Yes POTS ISDN N 1 3 mixed mode M 1 48 optional a Only for protection group 2 4 284 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching Table 4 16 IO_HDLC protection Protection Automatic Manual IO HDLC mode switch Switch mode switch IO_E1 protection Table 4 17 IO_E1 protection Protection Automatic Manual IO E1 mode switch Switch mode switch lO _E1 1 N Yes Revertive Yes 1 lt N lt 4 optional 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 285 Configuration management for narrowband services Setting protection parameters Eee 4 11 7 Setting protection parameters COMDAC COMDAC common data and control protection is achieved by plugging in a sec protection ond COMDAC The system automatically configures to duplex mode which means tha
51. system is initializing The initialization is complete when a new win dow opens questioning for re connection Step 2 Select the Configuration Boot Download menu option System Response The GSI Boot Download Mode window opens with the following message Would you like to Connect now Step 3 Click on the Yes button System Response The Communications window opens Step 4 In the Select Link list select the communication port to which the system is connected for example select COM1 Step 5 Click on the Settings button System Response The Communication Settings window opens For the Baud Rate select the 115200 radio button 4 26 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via boot download a For Option select Single NE Mode m Click on the OK button System Response The Communication Settings window shuts System Fault If the normal Status Login window appears click on Disconnect and close the Communications window After this dese lect the Configuration Boot Download menu and restart with Step 1 Step 6 Click on Connect in the Communications window System Response The Communications window shuts The TL1SI View opens with the following message To Start the Boot Download Operation You Must Reset the COMDAC on Side 1 Now Step 7 Reset the COMDAC by pulling it out of the shelf and reinserting it again System Response In the TL1SI View
52. the following menu appears oLar d download g Quik soft reset hard reset print menu boot gt Step 8 Enter d without Return System Response A dialog box opens Step 9 Navigate to the directory on the hard disk or on the CD ROM see SRD system release description where the COMDAC software is stored Step 10 Select the NVPS_Loader file with the extension d1d specified in the SRD Comment A valid file name would be for example NVPSLoader LOW14MEG 027 dld 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 27 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via boot download o E ___ ee Step 11 Click on the OPEN button This enables the system to download the NVPS_Loader System Response The following message appears DATA TRANSFER IN PROGRESS and after a few seconds the following message DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE System Response In the TL1SI View the following menu appears lt d download l erase All Local NVDS DATA m erase Local NVDS skipping diagnostic result sectors n erase Local NVDS diagnostic sectors only O Quek print menu LOader gt Step 12 Enter d without Return System Response A dialog box opens Step 13 Navigate to the directory on the hard disk or on the CD ROM where the COMDAC software is stored Step 14 Select the program image file with the extension d1d specified in the SRD Comment A valid file name would be for example Classis dart dilid 4 28
53. to OOS The change to OOS will immediately stop all services of the ONU Subshelf which means that existing calls in the ONU Sub shelf will be disrupted and no environmental alarms of the ONU Subshelf will be detected Assumptions ONU is in the administrative primary service state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED SUB SHE LEA Rips iaa Por where AID subsh 1 8 AID of the subshelf PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 116 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5BC V5TS 3 4 25 Deleting a cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection from a V5 line termination bearer channel or remote operations channel to a V5 1 timeslot The related line termina tion entity must be in administrative primary service state OOS Out Of Service Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS BCTS GSI operation or
54. type of the application pack is LPS501 LPS503 or LPS504 For LPS501 LPS503 and LPS504 the number of timeslots is in the range of 1 to 64 gt NOTE POTS and ISDN application packs always allocate the maximum number of timeslots that is for example an LPZ100 allocates 32 timeslots 16 bit timeslots The total number of timeslots 16 bit per ONU is 96 One HDSL application pack can allocate 64 timeslots 8 bit timeslots Two adjacent odd even HDSL application packs can allocate in total 128 timeslots 8 bit Two adjacent odd even HDSL packs can allocate up to 64 8 bit timeslots For provisioning an HDSL application pack in the ONU the number of timeslots must be available Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT AP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 153 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an IO_E1 Le 4 6 10 Provisioning an IO_E1 Purpose This procedure is to create one IO_E1 pack entity It defines the expected pack type for the slot equipage the protection permission and the administrative pri mary service state Creating the IO_E1 protection pack provisions the system f
55. 1 Itbc 1024 31 2 lIts 1 1 llts 16 31 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 256 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 9 Functional diagram of VLL Logical VLL Each leased line link object may contain provisioning data for its associated E1 in entities terface which are administered through TL1 commands Up to 31 VLL bearer channels can be cross connected to one leased line link For leased line timeslots no provisioning data are necessary The leased line timeslots can be cross con nected to the physical subscriber bearer channels The association is done by set ting up up to n cross connections between the bearer channels and the leased line timeslots The bearer channels have to be in the same leased line link The maximum number n of subscriber bearer channels depends on the application mode of the specified HDSL interface and is shown in Table 4 7 page 4 61 Table 4 7 N in dependence on the HDSL interface application mode Max number of subscriber bearer Interface application mode channels PM Point to multipoint 2x15 PP Point to point 31 SP Single pair 16 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 61 Configuration management for narrowband services
56. 1 1 vots 16 31 The cross connection user port interface is a physical cross connection 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used Figure 4 3 Functional diagram of V5 1 Logical V5 1 Each V5 1 interface contains one logical link and up to 30 V5 1 user ports The entities logical link can be cross connected to the physical E1 ports of the system the V5 1 user port can be cross connected to the physical subscriber lines Per AnyMedia Access System a maximum of 480 subscriber lines for V5 1 is possible The subscriber s bearer channels map directly to timeslots on the associated V5 1 physical feeder The association is done by setting up a cross connection be 4 54 l ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services a tween that POTS ISDN subscriber bearer channel and the V5 1 timeslot beside the additional association of the whole V5 user port to a V5 1 interface 4 5 3 1 2 V5 2 service Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 It 1024 vSup 1 voup 769 Ss V5i L V516 CSL nn v5l 16 t 1 It 1024 v5up 1 vsup 769 v5i 1 V5i 16 liie pots or ee O or O C Do ay ISDN line Lo o User port Lo a Interface 2 max max O
57. 1 31 number of HDSL timeslots 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 193 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a GLL subscriber Le pet Eo p 00S 4 administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT GLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 194 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a UVLL subscriber me ee 4 6 35 Provisioning a UVLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to create an unstructured leased line subscriber entity accord ing V 35 V 36 or X 21 UVLL with its default or operator specified provisioning data It specifies the HDSL interface the network feeder source type the transmit clock option and the behavior of the control signals The HDSL interface must op erate in unstructured point to point application mode Optionally the administra tive primary service state of this line can be given The unstructured leased line subscriber is used for transporting the full 2 Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected unstructured leased line link and theref
58. 11 5 IO E1 protection 4 11 6 Protection switch characteristics 4 11 7 Setting protection parameters 4 11 7 1 Switching to protection SW TOPROTN 4 11 7 2 Switching to working SW TOWKG 4 11 7 3 Editing configuration ED CONFIG 4 11 8 Switching to standby pack SW DX EQPT 4 11 9 Setting up periodic exercises on the COMDAC SCHED EX 4 11 10 Provisioning V5 2 protection 4 12 Provisioning examples 4 12 1 Example for provisioning a V5 1 POTS interface 4 12 2 Example for provisioning a V5 1 ISDN interface 4 12 3 Example for provisioning a V5 2 POTS interface 4 12 4 Example for provisioning a V5 2 ISDN BRA interface 4 12 5 Example for provisioning a V5 2 ISDN PRA interface 4 12 6 Example for provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA interface 4 12 7 Example for provisioning an analog LL interface 4 12 8 Example for provisioning a digital LL interface 4 12 9 Example for provisioning a VLL interface 4 12 10 Example for provisioning a GLL interface 4 12 11 Example for provisioning a UVLL interface 4 12 12 Example for provisioning a UGLL interface 4 12 13 Example for provisioning an ROC carried over leased line interface 4 12 14 Example for provisioning an ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 1 interface 363 211 112 4 11 1 COMDAC protection Issue 7 December 2000 4 VII TTT Contents 4 12 15 Example for provisioning an ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 interface 4 329 4 VIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Config
59. 112 11 2 2 TID AID CTAG 363 211 112 The command code determines the action to be taken by the system as a result of receiving the input message The command code consists of up to three fields each separated by a hyphen The field with means an optional field modifier2 is an optional field Staging parameter blocks The staging parameter blocks determine the target element and the identity of the object to be acted upon by the input message 11 2 2 1 Target identifier TID optional The first staging parameter block is the target identifier TID The target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed e g SYS00 The TID input parameter has the following characteristics The TID must be the same value as the system identifier SID code as signed to the AnyMedia Access System The TID SID value is normally provisioned during system turn up m The TID SID is optional and the AnyMedia Access System accepts an in put command without a TID If the TID is not given and its value is either different from the AnyMedia Access System SID string or syntactically in correct the system will use the AnyMedia Access System SID value as part of the error response m The TID SID can have up to 20 alphanumeric characters including the and the _ characters The TID SID is case sensitive 11 2 2 2 Access identifier AID The second staging parameter block is the access ident
60. 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 55 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands E SeS 1 9 Provisioning 1 9 1 Overview Provisioning is the system activity for operations that provision the system 1 9 2 Provisioning Menu meee Faut Performance Monitoring i System Turmup Main Shelf a Communications Subshelves Equipment Profile Service Figure 1 41 Provisioning Menu Configuration Via the Provisioning menu option the following actions can be performed menu option m System Turnup The System Turnup Main Shelf Telephony menu provides functions for the initial turn up of the narrowband system This care m setting the IP addresses m setting the system identification m changing the ISDN configuration m switching the configuration m System Turn up Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM Communications Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM 1 56 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands m Equipment The Equipment Pack Telephony menu provides functions to provision narrowband applications packs and HDLC packs The Equipment Timing Source Control menu provides to set the narrow band timing source synchronization mode and to switch from the active to the standby source The Equipment Date Time menu allows to set the da
61. 1t 42 vs5efaddr 1000 ENT V5SUP v5up 23 ltype ILN 1t 1t 43 v5efaddr 1001 ENT V5UP v5up 24 ltype ILN lt 1t 44 vsefaddr 1002 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 inter face BNT CRS UPLAEVoup 22 VoL ENT CRS UPLS2v Sup 23 vo1 34 ENT CRS UPI sin 5up 245V 51 33 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 commu nication paths BNT CROSUPUP S Voup 22 VIC DS3 07 ENT CRS UPCPS Vv 0Ulp 22 Vv Cp 30 BN T CRS UPCP ss Voup aZZ pVoOCDa o i ENT CRO UPCP 34 V5Up 25 V5Cp 3 5 BNI S CRG UPCP US Vo Up 2y VOCp 3 0 ENT CRS UPCP32VoUp 2Z5 V gt Co S 77 ENT CRS UPCP voupH 24 VoCp 3 0 ENT CRS UPCP o oUp 24 V5Cp 3 6 BNI CRSE UPCPs voup 24 VoCDH 3 71 gt Define the V5 2 protection groups ENTH VoZeGtTevoZpo 3 17 ENT VSoZ2PG 2V752p0 6 2Z 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 16 Define the V5 timeslot type EDSVSOLOLeVOCS 2 LoOrT ri Vot otYyYDE L LC ED VSTSA Vot S 2I ra VOESty pe CCe Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 2 timeslots ENI CRS POIS o VoZp0 s l Vets 2Za6 ENTSCRS PGIS iI VI 2O Sn A VLS 2L Step 18 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 communication channels ENI CRO POCC TIV oC C ALN G Rmn ENT CRSSPGCCI SV o CC m 2 70200 3427 Step 19 Move
62. 2 ISDN BRA subscriber Two arrows indicate that the corresponding command performs both The definition of the entity and the definition of the cross connection between the two entities ENT AP ap 1 1 LPU112 ENT V5UP v5up 1 lt 1 Itype ILN ENT V5I v5i 1 v5type v52 ENT V5L v5l 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 Ky i Las ISDN line User port Interface o VSlink Boo of _ Physical sub V5 x specifi Protocol type in E1 data oF en PAA sciber data daa terface identifier ENT ILN It 1 drop drop 1 1 1 ENT CRS UPI v5up 1 v5i 1 ENT CRS LI v5 1 v5i 1 Figure 4 19 Provisioning data for a V5 2 ISDN BRA subscriber line example 4 5 5 3 V5 ISDN PRA subscribers Connection of V5 An V5 integrated services digital network primary rate access V5 ISDN PRA ISDN PRA subscriber has the transmission capability of up to 30 B channels 30 x 64 kbps subscribers and one D channel 64 kbps The B channels are transported in the bearer chan 4 74 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning i Ennn nels of the V5 2 interface the D channel is transported in the communication paths of the V5 2 interface A V5 ISDN PRA subscriber is connected to the net work via a V5 2 interface It is associated to a V5 2 interface where the current 64 kbps timeslots are selected by the BCC protocol on a per call basis The associa tion of the D channel to the communication paths of the V5 2 interfa
63. 2 interface with a secondary link see Chapter 3 3 14 3 page 3 82 Procedure Step 1 Move the V5 x interface out of service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 3 4 4 page 3 95 Step 2 For all associated subscribers check via RTRV CRS UPI and RTRV V5UP move the related subscriber line out of service by en tering ED PLN see Chapter 3 4 7 page 3 99 ED ILN see Chapter 3 4 8 page 3 100 ED PRALN see Chapter 3 4 9 page 3 101 or ED ROC see Chapter 3 4 20 page 3 112 Step 3 IF THEN the interface is a V5 1 interface go to Step 4 the interface is a V5 2 interface go to Step 6 Step 4 Delete all cross connections between V5 line termination bearer channels and V5 x timeslots of the related interface by entering DLT CRS BCTS see Chapter 3 4 25 page 3 117 Step 5 For ISDN lines delete the cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 communication path entity by entering DLT CRS UPCP see Chapter 3 4 26 page 3 118 Step 6 Delete all cross connections between user ports and the related V5 x interface by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 7 Optionally apply Step 5 to Step 8 of the POTS subscriber degrowth procedure on page 3 67 to delete all user ports and all POTS lines Step 8 Optionally apply Step 6 to Step 9 of the SDN BRA subscriber de growth procedure on page 3 68 to delete all user ports and all ISDN BRA lines Step 9 Optionally apply Step 4 to Step 10 of the V5 ISDN PRA subscr
64. 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 21 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures lO_ HDLC non protection install Step 4 Verify that the O_ HDLC appears correctly on the pictorial represen tation of the AnyMedia Mainshelf and that only the ACTIVE LED re mains lit on the IO_HDLC pack End of steps gt NOTE The IO_HDLC pack can be used for service only when it is provisioned by entering the TL1 command ENT IOHDLC see Chapter 4 6 12 page 4 158 Next procedure Adding IO_HDLC pack protection see Chapter 2 3 9 if applicable otherwise Setting the source ID see Chapter 2 3 10 2 22 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Adding 0_ HDLC pack protect 2 3 9 Adding IO_HDLC pack protection Purpose The second IO_HDLC pack is used to provide 1 1 protection for frame relaying D channel messages between switched ISDN subscribers connected to an AnyMedia Access System and a number of V5 communications channels and vice versa The 1O_ HDLC protection pack has to be installed in the free IO_HDLC slot see Figure 2 4 page 2 21 Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or
65. 31 vdts v5 x link timeslot V5 x communication _v5cc 1 16 1 47 vocc v5 x interface commu channel nication channel V5 x communication v5cp 1 16 1 145 v5cp v5 x interface commu path nication path V5 x user port v5up 1 769 v5up v5 x user port V5 2 protection group v52pg 1 16 1 2 v52pg v5 x interface protec tion group Leased line link Ill 1 16 Ill link Leased line timeslot Ilts 1 16 1 31 lIts link timeslot Logical HDLC termi hdlcns 1 48 hdicns channel nation network side Logical HDLC termi hdlcss 1 64 1 4 hdicss termination block nation subscriber side termination position Logical HDLC re hdic 1 hdic shelt source HDSL interface hdsl 1 512 hdsl hdsl interface HDSL timeslot hdslts 1 512 1 31 hdslts hdsl interface timeslot V3 link v3l 1 16 v3l v3 link Unstructured leased ulll 1 272 ulll link line link 4 46 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services me 4 5 3 Services Provisioning Prior to service activation on the AnyMedia Access System several data items summary need to be provisioned It is necessary to configure service types and cross con nects between logical and physical entities and vice versa Figure 4 1 page 4 48 is a functional diagram of the cross connections between the physical E1 and subscriber ports of the system and the logical entities The
66. 36 or X 21 in service by entering ED VLLN see Chapter 4 6 41 page 4 204 Step 3 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 End of steps 3 3 7 8 GLL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define up to 31 cross connections between line termination bearer channels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 2 Move the n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according G 703 in ser vice by entering ED GLLN see Chapter 4 6 42 page 4 205 Step 3 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 End of steps 3 3 7 9 UVLL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define the cross connection between UVLL subscriber and ULL link by entering ENT CRS ULLL see Chapter 4 6 38 page 4 201 Step 2 Move the UVLL subscriber in service by entering ED UVLLN see Chapter 4 6 43 page 4 206 Step 3 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 End of steps 3 58 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Connection serv node subscriber ee ee 3 3 7 10 UGLL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define the cross connection between UGLL subscriber and ULL link by entering ENT CRS ULLL see Chapter 4 6 38 page 4 201 Step 2 Move the UGLL subscriber in service by entering ED UGLLN see Chapter 4 6 44 page 4 207 Step 3 Move the HDSL interface in service by e
67. 38 Provisioning a cross connection between unstructured leased line sub scriber and unstructured leased line link Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between an unstructured G 703 V 35 V 36 or X 21 leased line subscriber and an unstructured leased line link It provides a transparent 2 Mbps cross connection including timeslot 0 through the system This cross connection is of type 1 to 1 which means that you can connect exactly one unstructured leased line subscriber to one unstructured leased line link and vice versa None of the both entities must be cross connected already Assumptions Corresponding leased line line termination and unstructured leased line link have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRo ULEE ALDIALDZ where ATOL lt 1 1024 AID of the line termination AID2 ulll 1 272 AID of the unstructured leased line link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS ULLL sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 201 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a
68. 4 ioe1 shelf E1 pack E1 protection pack ioe1p 1 ioe1p shelf E1 physical port e1 1 1 4 1 4 e1 shelf E1 pack E1 feeder side Logical Application apfdr 1 1 16 1 4 apfdr shelf application pack pack feeder port slot port Communication inter ciu 1 ciu shelf face unit Station clock sclk 1 sclk shelf IO_HDLC pack iohdlc 1 1 2 iohdlc shelf hdlc pack Logical Subshelf subsh 1 8 subsh logical subshelf Logical Subshelf ap subap 1 8 1 8 subap logical subshelf plication pack subshelf application pack slot Logical Subshelf subdrop 1 8 1 8 subdrop logical subshelf subscriber line 1 32 subshelf application pack slot port Logical Subshelf ap subapfdr 1 8 1 8 subapfdr logical subshelf plication pack feeder 1 4 subshelf application pack port slot port Logical Subshelf subcp 1 8 1 subcp logical subshelt controller pack controller pack slot Physical subshelf svrpt 1 1 16 1 svrpt shelf application pack server port slot port 4 44 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning and service activation Table 4 3 Equipment AIDs Continued Entity AID Explanation Logical Subshelf subfdr 1 8 1 1 subfdr logical subshelf feeder port controller pack slot port Logical Subshelf submc 1 8 1 8 submc logical subshelf miscellan
69. 7 3 2 Digital leased lines services 4 132 4 5 7 3 3 N x 64 kbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 4 133 4 5 7 3 4 N x 64 kbps leased lines services according G 703 4 134 4 5 7 3 5 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 4 134 4 5 7 3 6 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according G 703 4 135 4 5 7 4 Remote operations channel ROC 4 137_ 4 5 7 4 1 ROC carried over leased line interface 4 137 4 5 7 4 2 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 1 interface 4 137 4 5 7 4 3 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 interface 4 139 4 6 Provisioning commands 4 141 4 6 1 Provisioning a V5 interface 4 141 4 6 2 Provisioning a V5 link 4 143 4 6 3 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 link and V5 x interface 4 144 4 6 4 Provisioning a V5 communication channel 4 145 4 6 5 Changing V5 timeslot type 4 147 4 6 6 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot 4 148 4 6 7 Provisioning V5 communication paths 4 149 4 6 8 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 communication paths and V5 communication channel 4 150 4 6 9 Provisioning an application pack 4 152 4 6 10 Provisioning an lO _E1 4 154 4 6 11 Provisioning a POTS line 4 156 4 6 12 Provisioning an O_HDLC 4 158 4 6 13 Provisioning an HDSL interface 4 159 4 6 14 Provisioning an ISDN BRA line 4 162 4 6 15 Provisioning a V5 ISDN PRA line 4 164 4 6 16 Provisioning a user port 4 166 4 6 17
70. 8 3 Contact pairs for reducing the output voltage 8 8 8 4 Contact pairs for setting the rectifiers to standby 8 8 AB Abbreviations and Acronyms AB 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 XVI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 TL SS About this document 1 Overview Purpose This User Service Manual USM provides the following information for Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Release 1 6 m A product overview and a functional product description System turn up procedures and system modifications Configuration management m Fault Management m Maintenance m Security management Intended audience Customers who will use the USM include the following Central office technicians Network providers personnel Operators m Maintenance personnel m Technical support engineers Issue This is Issue 7 of the AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual Reason for reissue The User Service Manual has been reissued to include the following Support of unstructured 2 Mbps leased line subscriber lines UVLL UGLL via IO_E1 and HDSL pack LPS504 m Management functions for handling of managed NTUs m O_E1 pack FAC500B provisioning and protection switching m Performance management features for HDSL subscriber lines Extended integrated test and measurement options 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XVII About this document Overview i Ee Document This document has the following organization organization How ar
71. AID where AID lt 1 1024 lt all 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 33 System modification growth degrowth for NB services VLL subscriber growth ee Step 10 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT VLLN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 11 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 12 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 11 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT VLLN see Chapter 4 6 33 page 4 190 Step 12 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 7 page 3 58 End of steps 3 34 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services GLL subscriber growth ee ee 3 3 4 10 GLL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface is provisioned Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface is provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 5 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 3 an H
72. AID used teder service state EE ER SR E Se aa 2 HDSL logical interface 5 2 state L em EME e O A mH Hmmm Hmmm mH HE EE EE Port lt gt AID service state served HDSL log interface AID service state parameter served interface m 5 C Ma en eee ene O 2 ooo o l 2 OOS AUTO defaultdata ULL 8 c O o o re ee ee o a 1 m 5 ae i a ee a es ee Bag a e B 4 3 S provdata ULL2 3 a o we A E o S Ke AP IO_E1 P pack AID_ AP ype ____ service state AID packiype parameter service state_ z C E i meo powa foose o E E SS E oo ee e O rs C a 15 none tome 16 LPS504 IS Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 35 Table structure of UVLL service via IO_E1 pack 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 105 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table UVLL Data for the UVLL subscriber are stored in the UVLL subscriber table There is one UVLL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL logical in terface the service state primary and secondary the feeder source type IO_E1 and the provisioning data When a UVLL subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termination id and the HDSL logical interfa
73. ASYNC SYNC data clocking mode sets whether the NTU is operating in synchro nous or asynchronous mode This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs ASYNC asynchronous SYNC synchronous DATABITS crates once number of data bits The charac ter lengh does not include the start and stop bit This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous V14MODE BASIC EXTENDED This parameter sets whether the NTU is operating in V 14 basic or extended mode This parameter is only valid for V 24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous RISZCTS 11MS 12BITS request to send to clear to send delay sets the delay inserted be tween the time that the sub scriber equipment raises RTS and the NTU responds with CTS 11MS 11 1ms delay from RTS to CTS 12BITS 12 bit delay from RTS toCTS RTS OFF ON STD request to send sets the mode of the control line for X 21 NTUs or RTS line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 227 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a managed NTU BE SeSe RLSD FONES ID receive line signal detection sets the mode of the indication line for X 21 NTUs or RLSD line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard DSRDTR ON STD da
74. AnyMedia Access System Static routing table using the ROC by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 ENT ROUTE ee UG Ore net TZ cl Oia Owe 4 330 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 13 Define the ROC user port BPNI VSUPS4 Voup 26773 2 LEype SsPLLy1e roc 1 vol3addr 1000 Step 14 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 2 interface ENI CRS UPI voUp 26 VO1 37 Step 15 Define the V5 2 protection groups ENTITY APETI ApJ oA Ll ENT VoZ2 PG 3V2 I 2 Step 16 Define the V5 timeslot type BD VO TSA IVIC S 2 Lol tT ra Vot SCY pe CCe BD VoOlSTiIvote 2 157 tv OSL ype CC Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 2 timeslots ENT CRS PGISt voz0g S h Vots 2 16 PANE CRSO P Gio tivo 200 5 27VoCs 2H 15 Step 18 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 communication channels BNI CRSO PGCCrivoCe 5 1 V7o2Z00 s 13 ENT CRS PGCe Pi vaCC 3 2 7 V2Z2p0 3 2Z Step 19 Move the remote operations channel in service BVHROCS 2 7OCs bite raros Step 20 Move the V5 links in service MDa Slat ero ee ee ee Se ED Vo LD Vola eee Ss 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 331 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 21 Move the V5 2 interface in service MDS
75. Chapter 3 4 9 page 3 101 Step 2 Delete the cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 communication path entity by entering DLT CRS UPCP see Chapter 3 4 26 page 3 118 Step 3 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 interface entity by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 4 Delete the specified V5 user port entity by entering DLT V5UP see Chapter 3 4 28 page 3 120 Step 5 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 6 Delete the specified V5 ISDN PRA subscriber entity by entering DLT PRALN see Chapter 3 4 31 page 3 123 gt NOTE The bearer channel objects of the V5 ISDN PRA subscriber are automati cally deleted by the system gt NOTE The allocated HDSL timeslots and the D64 HDLC termination are released Step 7 If HDSL timeslots of the HDSL interface are used by other subscrib ers move the specified HDSL interface entity in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 8 If no other HDSL timeslot of the HDSL interface is used optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 9 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack
76. Configuration command is used to set the simplex duplex mode for the COMDAC This command is used to provide the ability to indicate that a specific shelf slot requires or does not require to be equipped with a pack Assumption For setting to simplex mode the second COMDAC has to be removed Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED CONFIG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BD CONE TG IAID Te PRN where AID comdac 1 1 2 AID of the COMDAC RN NR R required not required status NR not required pack R required pack not used The field required not required status is used to provision the re quired or not required pack in the system If the system is provi sioned as one required COMDAC then it is a simplex system If the system is provisioned as two required COMDACs then it is a duplex system Duplex is the default system configuration Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED CONFIG section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 290 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Switching to standby pack i 4 11 8 Switching to standby pack SW DX EQPT Purpose The SW DX EQPT
77. E AnyMedia Graphical System Interface Version 01 04 00 File Edit View IL Commands NE Operations Provisioning Fault Performance Monitoring Window Help Figure 1 17 Top menu Selection is achieved m By opening the menu by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor to the desired option in the menu or m By opening the menu via the keyboard by entering plus the under lined letter of the relevant menu to open the menu option and then entering the letter underlined in the desired menu option If a menu item is not accessible one of the following may apply m the menu item is related to a broadband function but no connection is es tablished m the related function requires a higher privileged level 1 4 2 Toolbar Overview The GSI toolbar contains often used GSI functions and can be displayed or hid den Clicking on the View Toolbar menu option shows or hides the GSI toolbar A check mark indicates that the toolbar option is selected 1 24 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Performing GSI functions Pas Abort On line Help Web browser TL1 commands for security management TL1 commands for fault management TL1 commands for configuration management All TL1 commands Open TL1SI View Open event log Retrieve alarms and conditions Retrieve current equipment Disconnect and log out of a session Connect and log in to a session Figure 1 18 GSI toolbar Functions o
78. ED VLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDSV LEEN SAD eee eS ky where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST ao administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED VLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 204 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a GLL in service E SeS 4 6 42 Moving a GLL subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according G 703 GLL subscriber to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED GLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command HD GLENSEALD ir PRSTI where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST Ss administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If t
79. End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 155 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an ONU a 3 4 64 Deleting an Optical Network Unit Purpose This procedure is to delete an Optical Network Unit subshelf entity To delete a subshelf entity it must be in administrative primary service state OOS not cross connected to AnyMedia Mainshelf server port and no application pack must be provisioned on the ONU Subshelf This procedure automatically deletes the re lated subshelf feeder port entities Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT SUBSHELF AID where AID subsh 1 8 AID of the subshelf Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 156 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V5 provisioning variant I 3 4 65 Deleting a standby V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedure is to delete a standby V5 provisioning variant The ACTIVE provi sioning variant entry is automatically deleted if the related V5 interface is deleted To delet
80. ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the V3 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 28 the object to grow is an ALL subscriber go to Step 1 of the ALL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 30 the object to grow is a DLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the DLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 31 the object to grow is a VLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the VLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 32 the object to grow is a GLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the GLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 35 the object to grow is a UVLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the UVLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 38 the object to grow is a UGLL sub go to Step 1 of the UGLL subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 40 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 21 System modification growth degrowth for NB services POTS subscriber growth M ese ee 3 3 4 3 POTS subscriber growth Assumption A V5 x interface is available Procedure Step 1 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV LI ALD where AID d1t 1 1024 Itali Step 2 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports thatthe use the ENT PLN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 3
81. Issue 7 December 2000 3 49 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 2 growth ees ee ee 3 3 6 2 V5 2 growth adding links Assumption For V5 2 it is assumed that two V5 links are already established if not establish these links according to Chapter 4 5 7 1 page 4 122 Provisioning V5 switched Services Procedure Step 1 Create a V5 link entity with its 31 timeslots The V5 link has the ini tial administrative primary service state OOS out of service All 31 timeslots are automatically created and provisioned for bearer ser vice by default Follow the ENT V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENIT VoL t ALD 22 volkLO VSLKID el EL nesd NESD LESd FESD where AID v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link V5LKID 0 255 V5 link identifier El el 1 1 4 1 4 V5 physical feeder identifier NESD ESIE E A near end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10 FESD EESTE far end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10 gt NOTE The V5 link identifier must be identical to that of the local exchange and must be unique within a V5 2 interface Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which i
82. LE interface Over time the following is observed m One of the LE interfaces is loaded with more traffic than anticipated m One of the LE interfaces is loaded with the amount of traffic anticipated m One LE interface has significantly less load than the traffic anticipated Load balancing can be achieved by moving a number of 2 Mbps feeders from the lightly loaded interface to the heavily loaded interface From a remote GSI EM TL1 commands can be sent to the system to first delete the E1 logical cross con nect associating a 2 Mbps feeder to be moved from one V5 2 interface and then to enter a new E1 logical cross connect associating the feeder with a different V5 2 This capacity rearrangement is achieved without visiting the remote site The ca pacity rearrangement is completed by entering the corresponding changes in the switch database This is a simple example and does not represent a detailed procedure for load balancing Other operations at the LE are required to verify the integrity of the changes This scenario illustrates the operational capability of the AnyMedia Access System architecture 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 13 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth M ese ee 3 3 4 Application pack and subscriber growth Purpose Application pack and subscriber growth includes installing and provisioning ser vice to an additional application pack AP The following basic operations
83. LED lights Self initializa tion lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are ps pack missing or power fault cleared pack initialization in progress data memory update in progress pack anitrala zation Tinishedy data memory update completed NVPS verification in progress system software version mismatch NVPS verification completed Issue 7 December 2000 4 23 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl o E ___ ee Step 7 Copy the newly loaded software version from the pre loaded COM DAC to the formerly active COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the standby COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condi tion CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events system software version mismatch cleared copy program memory in progress copy program memory complete data memory update in progress data memory update completed NVPS verification in progress NVES verification completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes Step 8 Force a protection switch to the formerly active COMDAC again Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter FRCD or at the
84. LZ ENT VSL Vol 2r Se lse l 3 VSLRKLDSI 3 Step 4 Define the cross connections between V5 links and V5 2 interface ENT GCGRSS LULIS S VOLS ENTSCRSSLL eivol 7 vols Step 5 Define the V5 communication channels ENT VCC et voce 3 1t2etvoced 51 ENTS VCC 4 OG GAA 84 5CC1LC 52 gt 4 308 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 363 211 112 Define the V5 timeslot type EDSVSOLOoteVoOtSs l Lory verse ype CCc gt BD VOTLStiVSoCS 1 L5s 2 PI Vot SCDE C Define the cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots BN S CRS CShS or yoCces ole vo us 164 BNI CRS CClS sv 5Cce 3 2 Vorseal 15 Define the V5 communication paths BENT V5CP riyo Cp s La FrV pe yoe occ ENT VoCP rivo CD o 2 pO pLype CcrerlL ENDT V ICPE AIV OD A r yE Cyes LCEr ly BNI VSCP etVvoCco 3 54 5 2 iV opty pe 1sdni BPNIT V5CP 23 V0CH 3 672 22 VoOplype 1sdnp ENT V5CPt3 VOC R 3 7 S33 VOpLype 1sd0ns Define the cross connections between communication paths and communication channels ENI CRS CPCCseyoCo 5 1 Vy Oaa ke ENTS ROSERO Yo CO o Aar COn ENT CRSACPCC ISV o CO aR 3y V OOR BPNT CRS CPCC 74 Vo C0 3 V OO a ENT CRS CPCCOr i VOCO 3 677 56C 6 2Z ENTORSE PCC TIV C NVI OSS Define the application packs ENT AP z apl lor 7eLP sol ICS a ENT AP frap lAl ri bP
85. NT1 is assumed and the default is thus B1_B2_D The default value of this parameter shall not be coupled to the speed of the man aged NTU if provisioned The default value of this parameter shall be the maximum the NTU is capable of supporting administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT DLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 189 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a VLL subscriber ee 4 6 33 Provisioning a VLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to create an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according V 35 V 36 or X 21 VLL with its default or operator specified provisioning data It specifies the HDSL interface the start HDSL timeslot the number of HDSL timeslots the behavior of the control signals and the transmit clock option Option ally the administrative primary service state of this line can be given The bearer channel objects of the leased line subscriber are created automatically according to the specified number of HDSL timeslots and must all be cross connected to timeslots of the same
86. OOS out of service gt NOTE The parameter protection permission defines whether autonomous IO_E1 pack protection switching is allowed for an IO_E1 service pack or not It 4 154 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an IO_E1 Te only takes effect if the system is provisioned for IO_E1 pack protection Manual protection switches are not affected Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT IOE1 section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 155 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a POTS line a SeSe 4 6 11 Provisioning a POTS line Purpose This procedure is to create a POTS line with its default values via the PLN default command ED PLN DFLT or with the provisioning data entered by the operator It specifies the physical port of an application pack which is to be used Optionally the administrative primary service state of the POTS line can be given The bearer channel object of the POTS line is created automatically by the system Assumptions Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned Procedure Step
87. Provisioning a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 x interface 4 168 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 IlIl se i Contents 4 6 18 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 communication path 4 169 4 6 19 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot 4 171 4 6 20 Moving a POTS line in service 4 173 4 6 21 Moving an ISDN BRA line in service 4 174 4 6 22 Moving a V5 ISDN PRA line in service 4 175 4 6 23 Moving an HDSL interface in service 4 176 4 6 24 Moving a V5 link in service 4 177 4 6 25 Moving a V5 x interface in service 4 178 4 6 26 Provisioning a V5 2 protection group 4 179 4 6 27 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 2 timeslot 4 180 4 6 28 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel 4 182 4 6 29 Provisioning a LL link 4 184 4 6 30 Provisioning an unstructured LL link 4 186 4 6 31 Provisioning an analog leased line 4 187 4 6 32 Provisioning a digital leased line 4 188 4 6 33 Provisioning a VLL subscriber 4 190 4 6 34 Provisioning a GLL subscriber 4 193 4 6 35 Provisioning a UVLL subscriber 4 195 4 6 36 Provisioning a UGLL subscriber 4 198 4 6 37 Provisioning a cross connection between leased line termination bearer channel and leased line timeslot 4 200 4 6 38 Provisioning a cross connection between unstructured leased line subscriber and unstructured leased line
88. Purpose This procedure is to create an empty V5 provisioning variant It specifies the re lated V5 interface and the provisioning variant identifier A provisioning variant can only be created for existing V5 interfaces The provisioning variant identifier must be unique within the related V5 interface that is it must be different from the active provisioning variant identifier and any other provisioning variant for the V5 inter face The system automatically creates an active provisioning variant entry if a new V5 interface is created The provisioning variant access identifier specified here is used in other V5 TL1 commands to identify the provisioning variant they shall act on To quickly create a basis for further changes on this newly created provisioning variant use the command CPY V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 3 page 4 256 Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT VOPVAR SAID ri ov 5i V5OL VoOpVaLr V SPVAR where AID v5pvar 1 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant Vor v5i 1 16 V5 interface identifier V5PVAR 0 127 V5 interface provisioning variant identifier gt NOTE The provisioning variant identifier specifying the number of the provisioning variant used in the V5 protocol must be unique within each V5 interface Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed informat
89. RTRV AP command reports that go to Step 9 the AP is correctly provisioned 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 15 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth Step 8 Create the application pack entity by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 gt NOTE The command ENT AP automatically creates the appropriate number of ap plication pack port entities drops supplied by the AP Step 9 Optional Perform a self test for all circuits of the AP Follow the TST CCT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command TST CCT AID where AID drop 1 1 16 1 32 AID of the physical drop A rejection message is sent if a drop circuit that is specified in the command is undergoing manual test access either monitor or split ting or if the AP that serves the requested drop circuit is missing Step 10 If the command request completes successfully the following nor mal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID CT_RESULT RESULT2 7 where AID drop 1 1 16 1 32 AID of the physical drop CT RESULT CT FAIL CT OKAY circuit test result CT FAIL circuit test failed CT OKAY circuit test passed RESULT2 lt string gt consisting of 0 to 60 characters additional test result information Step 11 If one of the tests fails replace the AP and repeat Step 9 again 3 16 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modi
90. Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Step 10 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 11 Define the POTS line by entering ENT PLN see Chapter 4 6 11 page 4 156 Step 12 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 13 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 14 Define the cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot by entering ENT CRS BCTS see Chapter 4 6 19 page 4 171 Step 15 Move the POTS line in service by entering ED PLN see Chapter 4 6 20 page 4 173 Step 16 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 123 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 17 Move the V5 1 interface in service
91. System will ba a CTAG as part of the in the CTAG is not syntacti send an output error re put TL1 message cally correct sponse If the TL1SI operations then the AnyMedia system does not assign o Access System shall a CTAG as part of the in the CTAG cannot be ob send the acknowledg put TL1 message tained from the TL1 input ment and or the output message for example response without a for the TL1S1 CTAG m The CTAG can have up to 6 alphanumeric characters m The CTAG is case sensitive 11 2 3 General block The general block position is not used in the AnyMedia Access System Therefore in this position always two block separating colons follow directly after each other 11 2 4 Message payload block s The message payload block s is are the subject matter relating to the action to be performed by the input message Some input messages such as data retriev als may have no explicit payload 11 2 4 1 Common block optional The first optional message payload block is the common block gt NOTE The common block is used as a position defined COMMON parameter block This means each parameter is positionally dependent on other pa rameter s in the same block The parameters in this block are separated by XXXVIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 11 3 Syntax Colon commas Semicolon terminator 363 211 112 commas The comma is even necessary when an optional parameter is not
92. The ATAG counter is a circular counter incremented by one for each autonomous message on a per virtual circuit basis starting from 0000 to 9999 then starting at 0000 again preceded and followed by double quote The format follows the aid common block specific block state block input command format lt terminator gt The semicolon is used for normal termination The use of the gt character means that more segments associated with this resoonse message will follow un der another header 14 4 Autonomous message example All entries that have REPT as their command verb are autonomous output mes sages Here is how the user s screen would look with the REPT Sw message dis played SYSOO 96 11 26 16 44 49 A 123 REPT SW comdac 1 comdac 2 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XLVII XLVIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Contents 1 1 General 1 1 1 1 1 Overview 1 2 1 1 2 System requirements for the GSIW 1 2 1 1 3 Network management concept connecting a PC to the CIU 1 5 1 2 GSI software installation from CD ROM 1 9 1 2 1 Displaying on line help 1 12 1 3 Starting and terminating the GSI and system access 1 13 1 3 1 Starting the GSI 1 13 1 3 2 Setting the program windows 1 14 1 3 3 Individual control elements 1 14 1 3 4 Program operation by mouse 1 16 1 3 5 Accessing the AnyMedia Access System for narrowband services 1 16 1 3 6 Terminating system access T22 13 7 Autonomous messa
93. Uport_ state user port es 5 pt fe Ss we 2 ap e T e F 2z Ez oos pow CA e N a mee fos ooo S ede Co E 5 mae oos oo wo 3 E AD ph teederid senioesiate E a jea hi o E eg C 3 EAC oE a _ TE O E eE w fee ooswor mH E E E eee E M gt 3 AID J service state served subscriber E1 feeder El een a a AID service state parameter servediink m 12 fooson n subscr2 ego EGR a 3 EEES ee e g i Posse woven rig lt z COo ee C o ee Eio OAL ae o eH Ag er CCS _ _ ne O w AP D _ lO_E1 P pack S Pep E T ADD packiype parameter service state z e a E a eo pov oae e y Z Ee C N eA EE G S ss HES A A E a eS re ae a meo o fs CF O 2 eS el ee el a 5 m fe none YY S C ee Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level D The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 18 Table structure of ISDN BRA service 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 73 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table ISDN BRA Data for the ISDN BRA subscriber are stored in the ISDN BRA subscriber table subscriber There is one ISDN BRA subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used U port the administrative service state primary and secondary the provisioning data and a reference to the user port which is supported
94. V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS CPCC 4 150 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5CP V5CC ee section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 151 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an application pack E SeSe 4 6 9 Provisioning an application pack Purpose This procedure is to create one application pack entity It defines the application pack type for a specified application pack slot and the administrative primary ser vice state This command automatically creates the appropriate number of appli cation pack port entities drops or the server ports supplied by the application pack The primary service state of the application pack is set to IS as default The provisioning of an ONU pack is rejected if the number of timeslo
95. V5 interface 4 236 4 7 2 4 Switch over to new variant procedure initiated in LE 4 236 4 7 3 Provisioning variant contents 4 238 4 7 4 Current system dataset contents 4 238 4 7 5 Provisioning variant states and integrity 4 239 4 7 6 Re provisioning V5 interface states 4 241 4 7 7 Provisioning 4 242 4 7 7 1 Provisioning model 4 242 4 7 7 2 Provisioning variant table 4 242 4 7 7 3 Addressing of provisioning variants 4 243 4 7 7 4 Changing provisioning variant states 4 244 4 7 7 5 Copying provisioning variant dataset contents into another standby provisioning variant 4 244 4 7 7 6 Deleting standby provisioning variant dataset contents 4 244 4 7 7 7 Provisioning variant integrity checks 4 245 4 7 7 7 1 Checks on cross connections in provisioning variants 4 245 4 7 7 7 2 Checks on objects in current system dataset 4 245 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 V or Contents 4 7 7 7 3 Checks on cross connections in current system dataset 4 246 4 7 7 7 4 Checks on V5 link timeslot in provisioning variants 4 246 4 7 7 7 5 Checks on V5 link timeslot in current system dataset 4 246 4 7 8 Service states and transitions 4 246 4 7 9 Fault handling 4 247 4 7 9 1 Failed startup after switch over 4 247 4 7 9 2 Switch back to old provisioning variant 4 247 4 7 10 Recovery 4 247_ 4 7 10 1 Storage of provisioning variants 4 247 4 7 10 2 Recovery during re provisioning 4 247 4 7 11 Alarms 4 248 4 7 11 1 Re provisioning in progress status condition 4 248
96. V5 line termination bearer channels and V5 1 timeslots by entering ENT CRS BCTS see Chapter 4 6 19 page 4 171 Step 5 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 communi cation paths by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18 page 4 169 Step 6 Move the ISDN BRA line in service by entering ED ILN see Chapter 4 6 21 page 4 174 End of steps 3 56 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Connection serv node subscriber ee ee ee 3 3 7 3 V5 ISDN PRA subscriber Procedure Step 1 Verify with the RTRV CRS UPI command the cross connection to the V5 2 interface specified by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV CRS UPI command reports use the ENT CRS UPI command to that the user port is not cross con enter the cross connection go to nected Step 2 the RTRV CRS UPI command reports contact the provisioning center to verify different provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Define the cross connection between V5 user port and V5 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 3 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 commu nication paths by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18 page 4 169 Step 4 Move the V5 ISDN PRA line in service by entering ED PRALN see Chapter 4 6 22 page 4 175 Step 5 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4
97. V5UP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT V5UP AID ltype LTYPE 1t LT v513addr V5L3ADDR vsefaddr V5EFADDR where AID v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port LTYPE ILN PLN PRALN SSPLL type of the line termination ILN ISDN line PIN POTS line PRALNprimary rate access line SSPLLsingle channel SPLL LT lest l OZ hs roca AID of the line termination V5L3ADDR 0 32767 layer 3 address V5EFADDR 0 8175 envelope function address gt NOTE The layer 3 address and the envelope function address must be identical to that of the local exchange gt NOTE The layer 3 address is only used for POTS subscribers and SPLL based ROC the envelope function address is only used for ISDN subscribers Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5UP section in 4 166 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a user port ee the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 167 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5UP V5l CO ee 4 6 17 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 user port
98. Verify which alarm is raised for the AP by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV ALM AIDTYPE 3 where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT A All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NITFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 6 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LED of the AP still does not illuminate then replace the AP see Step 2 and repeat from Step 4 Step 7 Verify that the application pack is correctly provisioned by entering RTRV AP IF THEN the RTRV AP command reports that use the ENT AP command to enter the the AP is not provisioned provisioning information go to Step 8 the RTRV AP command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order the RTRV AP command reports that go to Step 9 the AP is correctly provisioned Step 8 Create the application pack entity by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 gt NOTE The command ENT AP automatically creates the appropriate number of ap plication pack port entities drops supplied by the AP 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 19 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth CO S Step 9 Optional Perform a self test for all circuits o
99. Voce Vy oma o e oe End of steps 4 332 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112
100. a 0 0 0 0 submask to indicate a default route Use a required IP address with a 255 255 255 255 submask to indicate a host route 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 33 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting up IP routing Ee SUBMASK IP address for the submask The submask is a 32 bit value containing one bits for the net work ID and zero bits for the host ID After the destination address has been entered the default submask value should correspond to the class of the destination IP For example if 135 5 17 1 is entered for the des tination the default suobmask value should be the class B de fault mask 255 255 0 0 Class A 0 0 0 0 127 x x x Class B 128 x x x 191 X x x Class C 192 x x x 223 x X X where x is any number between 0 and 255 Classes D and E are not used in the system GATEWAY Gateway IP Address The gate way address is the IP address of the gateway through which pack ets are sent to the destination ad dress The gateway must be ona directly connected network or subnetwork that means the gateway s network portion of an IP address and the correspond ing interface s network portion of an IP address must match METRIC I metric number The metric number is reserved for future releases to indicate a number of hops needed to traverse to get to the required destination In current release the Metric parameter is always 1 gt NOTE If the route is via a
101. apparatus codes are not interchangeable The valid apparatus codes are COM500 COMDAC COM501 COMDAC DTP500 CIU FAC500 IO E1 IDC500 lO HDLC LPF500 OAP CPF500 OCP LPZ100 32 Z ports POTS AP LPP100 24 Z ports POTS AP LPU112 12 U ports ISDN AP LPU430 16 U ports ISDN AP LPS501 HDSL AP LPS503 HDSL AP LPS504 HDSL AP LPS510 for future use TAP100 test application pack LCC lt string gt consisting of 4 characters Interchangeability code The ICC is used to specify the forward or backward compatibility of two packs with the same pack type and apparatus code but different manufacturing versions The ICC is of the form Sm n where m is the issue number and n is the se ries number of the product In general a pack can be replaced by another pack that has the same apparatus code and the same issue number regardless of their series numbers ECI lt string gt consisting of 6 characters Equipment catalog item The ECI is a 6 character code identifying each pack The code corre sponds to the bar code label on the faceplate of the pack and is uniquely equivalent to the CLEI 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 265 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving equipment BE SeSe CLEI lt string gt consisting of 10 characters Common language equipment identifier This code identifies each pack SLN lt Sturing gt consisting of 12 characters Serial number The SLN is a 12 charac
102. are re quired m Addition of APs to empty shelf slot positions Dispatch of maintenance per sonnel to the site to insert AP m Provisioning of the AP type to the database locally or remotely at the AnyMedia Access System using the GSI EM interface m Perform an LED test and optionally an on demand test of the ports of an AP AnyMedia Mainshelf and ONU Subshelf can be installed at different locations The growth procedure for an application pack in the AnyMeaia Mainshelf differs from the growth procedure for an application pack in the ONU 3 3 4 1 Application pack growth in the AnyMedia Mainshelf Procedure Step 1 Verify that the correct AP is equipped in the correct slot based on the engineering work order IF THEN the slot is unequipped install the correct AP type go to Step 2 the slot is equipped with the incorrect contact the provisioning center to verify AP type the work order and or to determine whether the AP should be replaced the slot is equipped with the correct AP go to Step 7 type Step 2 Insert a new AP into the appropriate slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by press ing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response After the AP is inserted the FAULT LED on the AP flashes at 1 Hz during AP self initialization Self initializ
103. at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DEl GRo hals tAtDl AID where AD ltbc 1 1024 1 31 AID of the line termination bearer channel AID2 llts 1 16 1 31 AID of the leased line link timeslot Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS LLTS sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 139 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection ULLN ULLL ese ee 3 4 48 Deleting a cross connection between unstructured leased line subscriber and unstructured leased line link Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between an unstructured G 703 V 35 V 36 or X 21 leased line subscriber and an unstructured leased line link Assumptions The corresponding unstructured leased line line termination is in the administra tive primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DiI CRS UbLietALDL ALDZ where AID1 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination AID2 ulll 1 272 AID of the unstructured leased line link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command
104. available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 168 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5UP V5CP 4 6 18 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 communication path Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 user port and a V5 communication path This cross connection is only possible between V5 user ports of line termination type ILN PRALN and communication paths of type ISDNF ISDNP and ISDNS One cross connection to each communication path type for one V5 user port is allowed The user port to be cross connected must belong to the same interface as the specified v5 communication path This cross connection is of type n to n which means that you can connect many user ports to one communication path and vice versa one user port to many communication paths Assumptions V5 user port already cross connected to V5 x interface Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS UPCP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNT CRS UPCPTtALDL ALD to sl SVar PVARIS where AIDI v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port ALDA v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path PVAR VopVer 1l s2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provision
105. be cross connected to any other object The timeslot must already be of the communication channel type Assumptions V5 x communication channel and V5 timeslot have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS CCTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS CCTS AID1 AID2 pvar PVAR where AID1 woee l le 41 47 AID of the V5 communication channel AID2 v5ts 1 16 15 16 31 AID of the V5 timeslot PVAR VopVar L 52 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS CCTS section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 148 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning V5 CP 4 6 7 Provisi
106. by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot with timeslot tyoe CC by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Step 10 Define the ROC by entering ENT ROC see Chapter 4 6 52 page 4 215 Step 11 Set the IP address of the ROC by entering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 Step 12 Instruct the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 Step 13 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP set LTYPE SSPLL LT roc 1 see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 14 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 15 Define the cross connection between ROC roc 1 and V5 1 timeslot by entering ENT CRS BCTS see Chapter 4 6 19 page 4 171 Step 16 Move the ROC in service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 4 6 55 page 4 220 Step 17 Move the V5 li
107. by IDC500B see Chapter 3 2 1 page 3 2 m Replace COMDAC s COM500 by COM501 see Chapter 3 2 2 page 3 8 m Replace IO_E1 pack s FAC500 by FAC500B see Chapter 5 7 15 page 5 229 m Replace HDSL APs for example LPS501 by LPS504 see Chapter 3 3 4 page 3 14 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 1 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release 3 2 1 Replace IO_HDLC pack s IDC500 by IDC500B gt NOTE The upgrade of the O_ HDLC must be performed before the COMDAC soft ware upgrade The IO_HDLC upgrade procedure is non service affecting Procedure Step 1 Identify current IO HDLC configuration IF THEN the system is in a duplex IO_HDLC go to Chapter 3 2 1 1 page 3 2 Sub configuration procedure for duplex IO_HDLC config uration the system is notin a duplex 1 O_ HDLC go to Chapter 3 2 1 2 page 3 4 Sub configuration procedure for simplex IO_HDLC con figuration 3 2 1 1 Subprocedure for duplex IO_HDLC configuration For non service affecting upgrade in duplex configuration both IO_HDLC packs must be Provisioned In administrative primary service state IS Plugged in Fault free 3 2 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release Subprocedure Step 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap that is grounded on the shelf CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic dis
108. by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 5 7 1 2 V5 1 ISDN BRA service Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 1 ISDN BRA service Assumption The system is configured to support switched ISDN BRA services Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Step 10 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 11 Define the ISDN line by entering ENT ILN see Chapter 4 6 14 page 4 162 Step 12 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 13 Define
109. cannot be seen When software is downloaded to a pack such as the COMDAC the FAULT LED flashes at a rate of 2 Hz during the download gt NOTE Upon delivery the baud rate of the Craft Interface Terminal CIT connection at the GSI is set by default to 19200 baud The following is the recommended initial system turn up procedure This proce dure represents a typical initial system turn up scenario Each step of the proce dure is described in more detail in the following sections 1 2 3 COMDAC installation CIU installation GSI connection and logging on Verifying COMDAC software or downloading COMDAC software with boot download procedure if neces Sary Clearing Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS provisioning memory after wards the NVDS contains the default settings Setting customer configuration Issue 7 December 2000 2 1 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Introduction TET TT EE Setting ISDN mode configuration Switching system configuration 6 7 8 lO HDLC non protection installation for switched ISDN services only 9 Adding IO_HDLC pack protection for switched ISDN services only 0 Setting source Identifier of the system SID is used in TL1 commands as target identifier TID 11 Setting date and time 12 Setting up filters for autonomous messages to GSI AEM default setting for GSI via EIA 232C send messages 13 Setting the IP address if 10BaseT LAN or ROC are used 14 Setting
110. channel shall be regarded as failed Optionally the administrative primary service state can be given the default is Out of Service The remote operations channel can be cross connected to a leased line interface or to a V5 interface using the single channel semi permanent leased line capability For transport via a leased line in terface the remote operations channel is cross connected to a leased line timeslot For transport via a V5 interface a single channel semi permanent leased line V5 user port which allocates the remote operations channel is cross con nected to a V5 interface Procedure Step 1 Provision the virtual ROC Follow the ENT ROC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNI ROGCT2ALD S22 EMOn EMONI PST where ATD roc 1 AID of the embedded remote op erations channel FMON f0 255 1 HDLC flag monitoring The HDLC flag monitoring timer defines in steps of 1 the period in seconds after loss of receiving HDLC flags where the remote operations channel shall be re garded as failed To disable the HDLC flag monitoring the timer must be set to 0 PST Is in service Set the primary service state to IS The default is OOS Out Of Service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ROC section in the TL1 command description in HTML fo
111. command SW TOWKG EQPT core 1 RESET System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAG switch forced reser Step 19 Insert the COMDAC that was originally in standby mode With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the orginal standby COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initializa tion then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self ini tialization lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are pack missing or power fault cleared Apack initialization an progressi System Fault If the COMDAC fails to flash or the FAULT LED fails to extinguish the COMDAC is probably faulty Repeat Step 17 The inserted COMDAC that was originally in standby mode will run through a software restart 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 11 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl o E ___ ee Step 20
112. command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 197 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a UGLL subscriber E S 4 6 36 Provisioning a UGLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to create an unstructured leased line subscriber entity accord ing G 703 UGLL It specifies the HDSL interface and the network feeder source type The HDSL interface must operate in unstructured point to point application mode Optionally the administrative primary service state of this line can be given The unstructured leased line subscriber is used for transporting the full 2 Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected unstructured leased line link and therefore allocates all HDSL timeslots of the specified HDSL interface No bearer channel objects are created for this subscriber because no individual bearer channels must be cross connected but instead the subscriber must be cross connected to an unstructured leased line link The command is rejected if the specified HDSL interface does not exist is not in the administrative primary service state OOS the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL pack are exhausted the HDSL interface application mode does not support this service or the HDSL interface is used by another service The created un structured leased
113. communication path a 3 4 37 Deleting a V5 communication path Purpose This procedure is to delete a communication path entity of a specified V5 inter face The communication path must not serve any service which means there is no existing cross connect from a V5 communication path to any V5 communica tion channel Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5CP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Die V OCP iA Ds where AID v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5CP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 129 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5CC V5TS ee 3 4 38 Deleting a cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V5 communication channel and a V5 timeslot The V5 interface administrative primary service state must be OOS out of service The V5 timeslot type remains a communication channel To change the timeslot type to a bearer channel the ED V5TS command must be used Procedure Step 1 Follo
114. connection between remote operations channel and leased line timeslot 3 150 3 4 59 Deleting a remote operations channel 3 151 3 4 60 Deleting a routing table entry 3 152 3 4 61 Deleting an IO HDLC pack 3 153 3 4 62 Disabling the ISDN mode 3 154 3 4 63 Deleting a cross connection between ONU Subshelf feeder port and AnyMedia Mainshelf server port 2s 3 4 64 Deleting an Optical Network Unit 3 156_ 3 4 65 Deleting a standby V5 provisioning variant 3 157_ 3 4 66 Deleting a managed NTU entity 3 158 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 V BE OOOO OOOO O Contents 3 VI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services 3 1 Introduction Overview This chapter describes m The requested procedures for upgrading the AnyMedia Access System to a newer release m The modification of an already provisioned system for example adding and deleting subscribers The provisioning itself is described in Chapter 4 3 2 Upgrade to a newer release Purpose The AnyMedia Access System can be delivered in different releases which com prise a variety of features Each release contains all features of the preceding re lease and additional features For upgrading an AnyMedia Access System from one release to the next release it may be necessary to replace special packs or to load new software versions The procedures which may be necessary to upgrade the AnyMedia Access System are m Replace IO_HDLC pack s IDC500
115. correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED DLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 104 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a VLL subscriber to OOS I nnn 3 4 13 Moving an n x 64 kbps leased line according V 35 V 36 or X 21 out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according V 35 V 36 or X 21 to OOS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the pri mary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED VLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED V ELNE ALD EEC IPL where AID lt 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST OOS administrative primary service state OOs out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED VLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentati
116. cross connections between leased line termination bearer channels and leased line link timeslots by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapter 3 4 47 page 3 139 Step 3 lf managed NTUs are used for the specified digital leased line sub scriber optionally perform the managed NTU degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 18 page 3 91 Step 4 Delete the specified digital leased line subscriber entity by entering DLT DLLN Chapter 3 4 50 page 3 142 Step 5 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 6 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 7 If the LL link is not being used by another leased line subscriber op tionally perform the leased line link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 6 page 3 86 End of steps 3 72 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services VLL subscriber degrowth ee ee 3 3 12 7 VLL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified digital leased line subscriber out of service by entering ED VLLN see Chapter 3 4 13 page 3 105 Step 2 Delete all cross connections between leased line termination bearer channels and leased line link timeslots by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapt
117. customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 158 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an HDSL interface ee 4 6 13 Provisioning an HDSL interface Purpose This procedure is to create an HDSL interface entity with the operator given provi sioning data It specifies the odd numbered physical drop of an HDSL AP and the HDSL interface application mode in which the interface shall operate Optionally the administrative primary service state of this HDSL interface can be given Ac cording to the application mode the system creates automatically the HDSL timeslots for the HDSL interface Assumptions Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT HDSL AID drop DROP apmode APMODE peES LS PST ly where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface DROP Karo tat Laie pS b 32 ry SubaroOpS Lao Pat 6 a4 le S25 AID of the physical drop 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 159 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an HDSL interface ee APMODE PP V3PP UPP SP PM PPS V3PPS UPPS MRS application mode PP HDSL point to point 1 NTU 2 drops 31 timeslots PRALN GLLN VLLN V3PP HDSL V3 point to point 1 NTU 2 drops 32 timeslots includi
118. date if changes occur on the system Use the refresh button to obtain up to date information Even if the screen advises you to Loop or Unloop you can still try something else At worst the COMDAC will only reject the request Executing TL1 com TL1 commands can be selected and executed in different ways mang Entering the respective TL1 command directly in the TL1SI View m Selecting the respective TL1 commands through a GSI dialog This dialog can be started in two different ways Display the TL1 command selection window for fault management by clicking on the respective icon in the toolbar Chapter 1 4 2 page 1 24 In the TL1 command selection window see Figure 1 43 click on the button representing the used TL1 command In the opened window Figure 1 44 on page 1 60 click on the button representing the com mand object 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 59 GSI software for narrowband services 1 60 Fault Mgmt GJE DIE T a wo uo ao m et ot Fault management functions Figure 1 43 TL Commands Selection Window for Fault Management ALHCDE ATTR AIO ATTR ENY SYNCH Figure 1 44 Example Window for Selecting TL1 Command Object for the Issue 7 December 2000 SET Command Select the respective TL1 command in the TL1 Commands Fault Mgmt menu see Figure 1 45 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions S i Tl C
119. delete service of a V3 link including optionally the related subscribers and the application pack Procedure Step 1 Move the V3 link out of service by entering ED V3L see Chapter 3 4 17 page 3 109 Step 2 Move the associated V3 subscriber check via RTRV CRS V3L and RTRV LT out of service by entering ED V3LN see Chapter 3 4 10 page 3 102 Step 3 Delete the cross connection between the V3 subscriber and the V3 link by entering DLT CRS V3L see Chapter 3 4 46 page 3 138 Step 4 Optionally delete the V3 subscriber entity by entering DLT V3LN see Chapter 3 4 31 page 3 123 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 5 Delete the V3 link by entering DLT V3L see Chapter 3 4 55 page 3 147 Step 6 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 85 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Leased line link degrowth M ese ee 3 3 14 6 Lease
120. disk is only needed if a different version is to be loaded 2 4 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures COMDAC installation 2 3 System turn up procedures at AnyMedia Mainshelf location 2 3 1 COMDAC installation Purpose To provide central control functionality to the AnyMedia Mainshelf Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure NIN Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the shelf doors by turning the latches Insert the first COMDAC into the COM 1 slot position for the loca tion of the slot see chapter 5 of the Applications Planning and Or dering Guide APOG With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indenta tion on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they
121. displayed Raised Indicates the date and time when the error oc curred mm dd hh mm ss 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 31 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows ee Table 1 8 Column headings in the alarm and conditions reporting window Continued Column heading Meaning Entity Indicates the affected system entity Message Displays the respective alarm message Extra Info Shows the corresponding TL1 output Several options can be selected Auto Refresh If Auto Refresh is selected the alarm log will be refreshed automatically To force a manual refresh uncheck and then check Auto Refresh again m Narrowband If selected the narrowband related alarms are shown m Broadband If selected the broadband related alarms are shown Clear BB Alarm Only for broadband alarms see Commands and Procedures included on the customer documentation CD ROM m Save Used to store the current alarm log to a file 1 5 5 System log System log infor The system log contains the information captured from the system operations mation This information can be captured at any time you are logged on to the system To get the history log from the system select NE Operations System Log Re rieve Sys Log A filename must be specified to store the information on the local hard drive The system log file can be displayed using the NE Operations System Log View Sys Log File menu option 1 32 I
122. ee e s r a fon Z 3 Mi aie e I even gt ae es a 0 see ste 3 Ede ae e e ge ow g ab C ae aff ent E e Z z m L E E s ma e n e e iena 7 e I CE Corr CAD oeei AEE parameter EN E a E e e e a 3 a e a aa a Peer ees 8 SS ser is C es E ee C T aa e e _ mmm M eee ieee eee eC Port 2 AID service state served HDSL log interface AID service state parameter servedintertace y S E D ee SE a O 5 E 12 oosa an US H E Le o e Ce 2 5 Ee e o CE O O CO N 5 ede ke CA o e en a E s e poon a a ee S o a o SSS ab oO AP IO_E1 P pack E AD AP service state _ AID packiype parameter service state D LAE 3 ci ffo fpa foose o z E E i E e a 2 es ne Ss ns ee ee 5 ie i a eo ow 8 o ee EO Eo o B foe foe 16 LPS501 IS Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 29 Table structure of VLL service 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 95 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table VLL Data for the VLL subscriber are stored in the VLL subscriber table There is one subsc ber VLL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line ter mination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL logical interface the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When a VLL sub
123. entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 10 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 69 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V3 ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth o S 3 3 12 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified V3 ISDN PRA line out of service by entering ED V3LN see Chapter 3 4 10 page 3 102 Step 2 Delete the cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link by entering DLT CRS V3L see Chapter 3 4 46 page 3 138 Step 3 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 4 Delete the specified V3 ISDN PRA subscriber entity by entering DLT V3LN see Chapter 3 4 32 page 3 124 Step 5 Optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 6 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 7 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 8 Optionally perform the V3 link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 5 page 3 85 End of steps 3 70 Issue 7 Dec
124. entry with the specified UGLL subscriber id already exists or the HDSL logical interface is not able to sup port the UGLL service A UGLL subscriber allocates all 32 timeslots of the logical HDSL interface These timeslots must be cross connected to timeslots provided by the unstructured 2 Mbps link All 32 timeslots are cross connected internally to the same unstruc tured 2 Mbps link and the timeslot number of the UGLL subscriber must be the same as for the unstructured 2 Mbps link The 32 cross connections are done au tonomously by the system if the UGLL subscriber is cross connected to the un structured 2 Mbps link via GSI AEM Timeslot and frame integrity are maintained unstructured 2 Mbps link HDSL logical timeslots Figure 4 39 UGLL related timeslot mapping 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 111 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table ULL Data for the ULL interface are stored in the ULL interface table There is one ULL interface interface table per AnyMedia Access System The ULL interface table contains an ULL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder and the service state primary and secondary When an ULL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ULL interface id and the E1 feeder If no ser vice state is contained in the command default service state OOS is used The command to create an ULL interface is rejected
125. for example POTS or ISDN For provisioning an SPLL ROC also the layered structure as shown in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that everal objects have to be pro visioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the ROC can be used These objects are ROC V5 x interface and V5 x cross connec tion The ROC acts as a virtual port Therefore there is no equipment and slot layer for the ROC Provisioning and maintenance of the E1 feeder equipment layer and IO_E1 slot layer is the same as for PLN For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a SPLL ROG also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 43 page 4 118 Issue 7 December 2000 4 117 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning V5 interface AD protocoliype seese BW V5 user por ED LE R a a EA C E E E eae Co E o o CE T Lo a C AU Eo e _ 4 a Z gt O z V5 1 service amp z E 9 oa EE E rq s C m S a T m p Line Term ROC o WY AD eese T Sess is T T S 5 C c E erra A g an O 3 as 6 jara e E E E E E E E f A M eC M w E E E E f a M ee E M E1 feeder 5 AID service state parameter servedink _ m 3 ap o T 2 Ee e gt a e powe e z z ae cere E m 2 Pet foose w eH S 5 e E
126. for narrowband services Provisioning examples rr Te ee 4 12 10 Example for provisioning a GLL interface Purpose This example is to create a GLL interface with the following parameters E1 feeder 3 on IO_E1 4 link 6 application pack 15 port 1 HDSL interface 1 and 2 line termination 62 bearer channel 1 2 and 3 timeslot 5 6 and 7 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack BNI LORLs 0e ls lsg Step 2 Define the LL link ENT LELE S Vb oes ele la lH 4 3 Step 3 Define the application pack BNI APS Tap leros 43 LPooUls ts Lo Step 4 Define the HDSL interfaces BNT HDSL vhdsl 23 drop drop 1 15 3 apmode pom Step 5 Define the GLL subscriber BNE GLUN lt btS622 s7ndSsl hosl 2 sts L ncs gt Step 6 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot ENTSCRS LLDI ZA Vepe o7 i LLES p ENT CRS LLOTS 2c beC 62 Z2 LITS 0 6 BNT CRS EbETSs t ACO p23 LLES 0L ENT CROSLELS 22 It 62 4 LIES 6L ENTSCROS ELI S oLD 02 LLES 0107 ENT CRO LET SS r ETOO 62 G LECA 0 r9 ENT OCR oF GLTO ABEDO pA Sm le LEES Foma 4 318 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples ee Step 7 Move the GLL subscriber in service ED GLEN z SIC O24 ee 22 EO Step 8 Move the HDSL interfaces in service ED HDO Le NaS Ln Areena Loy Step 9 Move the LL link in service ED LCL G LLL eee can Rs End of steps
127. growth 3 3 6 4 Leased line link growth 3 3 6 5 Unstructured leased line link growth 3 3 Establishing the connection between service node interface and subscriber side 3 3 7 1 POTS subscriber 3 3 7 2 ISDN BRA subscriber 3dr V5 ISDN PRA subscriber 3 3 7 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber 3 0 1 9 ALL subscriber 3 3 7 6 DLL subscriber 3 58 SEAN VLL subscriber 3 3 7 8 GLL subscriber 3 3 7 9 UVLL subscriber 3 3 7 10 UGLL subscriber 3 59 3 3 8 Switch from a POTS only to a POTS and ISDN mixed configuration 3 60 3 3 9 Growth from a configuration without IO_E1 protection to a configuration with IO_E1 protection 3 3 10 Growth from a configuration without ONU to a configuration with ONU 3 63 3 64 3 3 11 Growth to a configuration with managed NTU 3 65 3 3 12 Subscriber degrowth 3 66_ 3 3 12 1 POTS subscriber degrowth 3 67 3 3 12 2 ISDN BRA subscriber degrowth 3 68 3 3 12 3 V5 ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth 3 69 3 3 12 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth 3 70 3 3 12 5 ALL subscriber degrowth 3 71 3 3 12 6 DLL subscriber degrowth 3 72 3 3 12 7 VLL subscriber degrowth 3 73 3 3 12 8 GLL subscriber degrowth 3 74 3 3 12 9 UVLL subscriber degrowth 3 75 3 3 12 10 UGLL subscriber degrowth 3 76 3 3 13 Remote operations channel ROC degrowth 3 77 3 II Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 Contents 3 3 13 1 Degrowth of a ROC carried over leased line interface 3 77 3 3 13 2 Degrowth of a ROC carried over semipermanent le
128. identifier 2 4 System turn up procedure at ONU Subshelf location 2 4 1 Setting ONU Subshelf identifier via DIP switch Purpose Check DIP switch settings for the ONU Subshelf identifiers on the ONU back plane Assumption m The AnyMedia Mainshelf is correctly configured with an OAP m The fibre cable for the optical link is correctly connected to the OAP m The provisioning procedure of the ONU Subshelf is finished see engineer ing work order Background The ONU Subshelf is equipped with a DIP switch with 8 switches The DIP switch is located on the ONU backplane near the position where the OCP is inserted The DIP switch is only front accessible if the OCP is not inserted Procedure Step 1 Dispatch to the corresponding ONU Subshelf site Step 2 Adjust the ONU Subshelf identifier via DIP switch setting on the ONU backplane to the subshelf number specified in Chapter 2 3 23 page 2 56 Switch the corresponding DIP switch to ON OFF by hand or with a small screwdriver The switch is inverse binary coded The adjust ments for the ONU Subshelf identifiers 1 to 8 can be found in Figure 2 7 page 2 59 Broken backplane IMPORTANT Broken or bent backplane connector due to reduced space Take care during the adjusting that no connectors on the backplane or the DIP switch are bent or broken 2 58 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting subshelf identifier a Viewed from front looking at
129. if any is Supported When an ISDN BRA subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termination id and the U port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The user port id is read only at this layer The user port id is en tered by the operator when a V5 user port related to this line termination is cre ated This way allows the operator to find the relationship to the upper layer The same method is used at the equipment layer If an ISDN BRA subscriber is cre ated its own access identifier is entered internally in the U port table Restrictions for the The creation of an ISDN BRA subscriber is rejected if either a table entry with the creation of an ISDN specified line termination id already exists or the specified U port is already being BRA subscriber used by another client An ISDN BRA subscriber can only serve one user port ser vice assignment a further creation of a user port service is rejected The creation is also rejected if the related application pack of the lower layer is not capable of serving an ISDN BRA subscriber or the requirements defined by its provisioning data cannot be fulfilled The checks if the related hardware can support the ISDN BRA subscriber are made in the equipment layer Example Figure 4 19 page 4 74 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a V5
130. in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 157 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an lO HDLC BE SeSe 4 6 12 Provisioning an IO_HDLC Purpose This procedure is to create one IO_HDLC pack entity It defines the expected pack type for the slot equipage and the primary service state Creating the second IO_HDLC pack entity provisions the system for IO_HDLC pack protection To en able pack protection switching the standby IO_HDLC must be in service state IS and operational The primary service state of the created pack is set to IS as de fault Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT IOHDLC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT IOHDLC J AID sss Neype HIyPe PSE where AID gt aondle 1 1 2 AID of the IO_HDLC HTYPE IDOC OO type of the IO_HDLC pack IDC500 IO HDLC administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service gt NOTE Creating a second IO_HDLC provisions the system for IO HDLC pack pro tection Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT IOHDLC sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the
131. inconsistent with the modifier 14 Autonomous response messages 14 1 Definition An autonomous response message is a message sent by the AnyMedia Access System in response to change s to the system state s 14 2 Autonomous response message format Autonomous output messages have the following format Parameter Display Position LOr SLi blank line AAASTD YYYY MM DD HH MM SS lt cr gt lt 1f gt header line ACD atag verb modifier modifier lt cr gt lt lf gt primary line AMT OCC Line lt 6r gt lt 1 ft gt secondary quoted line optional free form comment line lt cr gt lt l1f gt secondary comment line more secondary lines terminator XLVI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 14 3 Autonomous response parameters Parameter AN lt cr gt lt f gt SID YY MM DD HH MM SS ACD ATAG quoted line The format parameters are explained in the following table Explanation space carriage return and line feed the system ID of the AnyMedia Access System year month day Note 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 38 lt yy lt 69 are invalid values hour minute second alarmcode identifies the severity of the alarm or a non alarm message C critical Major minor A non alarm message The autonomous tag ATAG value is a 4 digit decimal number 0000 to 9999 that must be included in all autonomous messages
132. interface LINES B M N eoo EXTERNAL M NT ee EQUIPMENT o oe oe TH 7 ONU containing ONU controller HDLC termination lO_E1 port EQUIP MENT M JA eOISAUd for example OAP a provi sioning l order Legend Y provisioning data flow A autocreation y resource allocation PENSEE cee my ee E E ee see EE ESSE AE a ee ee ee eer ee eee eee 1 V5 ISDN PRA V3 ISDN PRA GLL VLL UGLL UVLL subscriber are provisioned on top of the logical HDSL interface Figure 4 2 Layered provisioning model of the AnyMedia Access System 4 52 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services o E N Configuration units The system is structured into several configuration units Each unit consists either of m A physical unit the hardware resource or A logical unit like lines or cross connects Service states Each unit in the system at any time has a defined service state This service state is system driven and shows the usability of the unit The normal service state is a read only value and cannot be changed by the operator Each service state con sists of two parts a primary service state displaying the general usability and a secondary service state displaying the fault reason in the event of a fault There are two primary service states m Inservice IS Out of service OOS Secondary service The secondary s
133. is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard DSRDTR ON STD data set ready and data terminal ready sets the mode of the DSR and DTR control lines This pa rameter only applies for V 24 and V 35 NTUs ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 223 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a managed NTU me ee REMLP DISABLED ENABLED remote loop control sets the abil ity of the NTU to initiate remote loopbacks Disabling this at tribute will cause type 3 loop backs placed on the NTU to be denied DISABLED NTU is unable to initiate a remote loopback ENABLED NTU ts able to initiate a remote loopback BYTETIM DISABLED ENABLED ING byte timing sets whether the NTU transmits the byte timing signal out the B pin on the X 21 interface This is only valid for X 21 NTUs where the speed is 64K or 128K Futhermore it may only be enabled if the external clock mode attribute is disabled as the byte timing and external clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 inter face DISABLED byte timing disabled ENABLED byte timing enabled EXTCLK DISABLED ENABLED external clock mode sets whether the NTU uses external clocking This attribute may only be enabled for X 21 NTUs Futh ermore it may only be enabled if the byte timing attribute is dis abled as the byte timing and ex
134. is not reported 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 27 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting messages to GSI AEM Le Step 2 Verify the confirmation response in the TL1SI View see example below Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section ENT MSGMAP in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 4 IF THEN the system is connected over execute the Setting the IP address LAN ROC and needs an Internet procedure see Chapter 2 3 13 Protocol IP address the system does not need an IP execute the O_E7 installation address procedure see Chapter 2 3 15 End of steps Next procedure Setting the IP address see Chapter 2 3 13 Example If you want to disable ALARMS autonomous messages over the TELNET 1 port enter the following command ENT MSGMAP telnetl alm disabled By default after an INIT SYS TL1 command all types of autonomous messages are enabled on all interfaces To retrieve the current enabled disabled status of the first TELNET interface use the TL1 command RIRV MSGMAP 33 telnet If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned system00 98 05 08 14 16 43 M COMPLD TELNE
135. latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the AnyMedia Mainshelf doors by turning the latches Step 3 Insert the IO_HDLC into the IO_HDLC 2 slot see Figure 2 4 page 2 21 With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top por tion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up both LEDs on the O_ HDLC light for approximately 5 s System Response The pictorial representation of the system is updated to show the installed O_HDLC pack at the connected GSI Step 4 Verify that the IO HDLC appears correctly on the pictorial represen tation of the shelf and that both LEDs are off on the IO_HDLC pack End of steps gt NOTE The IO_ HDLC pack can be used for protection purposes only when it is provisioned by entering the TL1 command ENT IOHDLC see Chapter 4 6 12 page 4 158 Next procedure Setting the source ID see Chapter 2 3 10 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 23 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the source ID ee 2 3 10 Setting the source ID Purpose To provide a unique identification to the AnyMedia Mainshelt Procedure Step 1 Follow the SET SID
136. line subscriber indicates an External Condition Mismatch as secondary service state if the service is not supported by the actual connected NTU at customer premises Assumptions m Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned m HDSL interface has already been provisioned in unstructured point to point application mode Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT UGLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT UGELN 2A D323 haosi ADSL rtarsrc PDRSRC i PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination HDSL hdsile 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface PURSRE APE 1 ITO EL feeder source AP El reserved for future use TO_E1 E1 feeder on IO _E1 pack 4 198 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a UGLL subscriber PGT TIS 009 administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT UGLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 199 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection LLBC LLTS
137. must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED DLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BD DGEON ZAID atipo where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST ES administrative primary service state Ts in service gt NOTE If the DLLN service is to be provided using a managed NTU wait 60 s be fore moving the DLLN in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED DLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 203 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a VLL in service BE SeSe 4 6 41 Moving a VLL subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according V 35 V 36 or X 21 VLL sub scriber to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the
138. of equipment for exam ple POTS m APP the apparatus code that uniquely identifies the equipment function for example LPP100 m ICC the interchangeability code stored in the form of Sm n where mis the issue number and nis the series number LEI the common language equipment identifier is a 10 character code identifying each pack type m ECI the equipment catalog item is a 6 character code identifying each pack type This code corresponds to the bar coded label on the face plate of the pack and is uniquely equivalent to the CLEI m SLN the serial number is a 12 character code that uniquely identifies each pack The SLN includes the date and place of manufacture Software identifiers Software identifiers for the COMDAC only on the initial release are as follows m PVRSN the program version of the software currently stored in the pack m PCDE the program code J code of the software currently stored in the pack Hardware Hardware identifiers for the AnyMedia Mainshelf and the AnyMedia Subshelf identifiers backplane only are as follows m TYPE the string identifier for the backplane m PVRSN the backplane version 1 The label does not contain the CLEI code for IO_E1 IO_HDLC and CIU 2 The label does not contain the ECI code for IO_E1 IO HDLC and CIU 4 260 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Inventory management Subshelf identifiers Slot st
139. of this HDSL interface are released Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V3LN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT V3LN AID where ALD 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V3LN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 124 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an HDSL interface a SeS 3 4 33 Deleting an HDSL interface Purpose This procedure is to delete one HDSL interface entity Its administrative primary service state must be OOS Additionally the timeslots of the HDSL interface must not be allocated by any service and are automatically deleted by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT HDSL AID where AID hds1l 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT HDSL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on th
140. ooo o Are E e g AP lO E1 P pack k AD Aye servies AD a peara servo a eoo To 1 FACSO0 owa OOSNAC o DE E e a 3 S e EE E a Eoo o EW as as 15 mone tone 16 fLPS504 IS Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 38 Table structure of UGLL service via IO_E1 pack 4 110 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning i Ennn Table UGLL Data for the UGLL subscriber are stored in the UGLL subscriber table There is subscriber one UGLL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL logical in terface the service state primary and secondary and the feeder source type IO_E1 When a UGLL subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must con tain at least the line termination id and the HDSL logical interface One UGLL sub scriber allocates one HDSL logical interface 32 logical timeslots which is provi sioned for unstructured 2 Mbps leased line application mode No other service can be provided by the allocated HDSL logical interface If no service state is con tained in the command default service state OOS is used If a UGLL subscriber is created its own access identifier is entered internally to the HDSL logical timeslot table The command is rejected if either a table
141. op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 206 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a UGLL in service ae 4 6 44 Moving a UGLL subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line subscriber entity according G 703 UGLL subscriber to IS Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED UGLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED UGLLN AID PST where AID Jee TIaro2a AID of the line termination PST IS administrative primary service state Is in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED UGLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 207 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a LL link in service E SeSe 4 6 45 Moving a leased line link in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a leased line link entity to IS To change the administrative primary service state no param
142. operational Assumption The administrative primary service state of the standby pack is IS and the standby pack is operational Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED IOHDLC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED TOHDEC AID 3 MODE 32 PS is where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination MODE FRCD NORM permission mode which specifies how the O_ HDLC shall be brought to OOS FRCD Forced This mode is traffic affecting in mixed POTS ISDN system configuration if no protection switch is possible NORM Normal This mode can only be used for the standby pack or for an active pack if no HDLC termination is enabled for service PST voos administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED IOHDLC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 114 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an AP out of service ee ee 3 4 23 Moving an application pack out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of one appli cation pack entity to OOS To change the admini
143. option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 135 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V52PG V5CC Le 3 4 44 Deleting a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V5 2 protection group and a V5 communication channel The related interface must be in an administra tive primary service state OOS To delete a cross connection for protection group 1 all cross connections of protection group 2 must be deleted first Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS PGCC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DiT CRS PGCC sAIDIL AIDA riir fpVvar e VAR where AID1 v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group AID2 v5cc 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel PVAR yopvar 1732 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is
144. or simplex to mixed ISDN POTS POTS only mode with no HDLC packs requires the following steps O POTSoniy mode m Removing switched ISDN services and updating other provisioning data according to POTS only communication channel restrictions m Changing the ISDN mode configuration to POTS only mode via TL1 com mand Switching the standby system configuration to active via TL1 command The system performs a restart and recovers with POTS only operation mode m Deprovisioning of both IO_HDLC s m Removing both IO_HDLC s 3 3 3 Growth scenarios Growth scenarios Three different growth scenarios are described in more detail m Adding line and feeder capacity m Adding E1 feeder via capacity activation m Load balancing 3 12 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth degrowth ee These growth scenarios assume that any necessary provisioning at the terminat ing end of the system for example an LE has been performed or will be com pleted in time to meet the planned service date Scenario 1 Adding Assume that an AnyMedia Access System is installed to service a low growth rate line and feeder area and that it is initially equipped with the minimum line and feeder capacity re capacity quired A single V5 2 interface is used When additional line capacity is required maintenance personnel is dispatched to install the necessary APs To keep the concentration ratio the same bo
145. pack missing or power fault is raised To clear this alarm and to reconfigure the system to simplex mode enter the TL1 command ED CONFIG AID NR where AID comdac 1 1 or comdac 1 2 Step 2 Enter the user ID and press Return Enter System Response The login pop up closes and the password pop up opens Step 3 Enter the password and press Return Enter System Response The password pop up closes The pictorial rep resentation of the shelf is updated to reflect a live view of the shelf Step 4 Verify that the correct packs are displayed Step 5 Verify that the ACTIVE LED remains lit on the COMDAC and the FAULT LED does not light System fault If the FAULT LED remains lit or does not stop flashing or the AC TIVE LED fails to light execute the COMDAC installation procedure see Chapter 2 3 1 page 2 5 End of steps Next procedure Setting the customer configuration see Chapter 2 3 5 page 2 17 2 16 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the customer configuration ae 2 3 5 Setting the customer configuration Purpose The system must be configured to the needs of each customer By setting the customer configuration during the system turn up procedure the correct values which differ for each customer are used by the system afterwards The customer configuration is activated by the Sw CFG command see Switching system config uration Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 Procedure S
146. page 4 169 Step 7 Delete all V5 communication paths whose cross connections were deleted in step 5 and in step 6 by entering DLT V5CP see Chapter 3 4 37 page 3 129 Step 8 Delete all V5 communication channels whose cross connections were deleted in step 4 and in step 5 by entering DLT V5CC see Chapter 3 4 39 page 3 131 Step 9 Delete the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering DLT CRS LI see Chapter 3 4 40 page 3 132 Step 10 Delete the V5 link by entering DLT V5L see Chapter 3 4 41 page 3 133 Step 11 Move the V5 x interface in service by entering ED V5I see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 Step 12 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 81 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 2 degrowth secondary link o E 3 3 14 3 V5 2 degrowth secondary link Purpose To delete the secondary link of a specified V5 2 interface Assumption The V5 2 interface has two links and the secondary link does not carry any com munication channel beside the standard standby timeslot Procedure Step 1 Move the V5 2 interface out of service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 3 4 4 page 3 95 gt NOTE This is service affecting fo
147. progress at the start and Copy program memory completed at the end Both COMDACs have the same software version and the same provision ing data afterwards End of steps 2 14 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Verifying the COMDAC software i nananana Next procedure IF THEN the version of the software is correct execute the Clearing the NVDS provisioning Memory procedure see Chapter 2 3 4 page 2 16 the version of the software is not cor install a COMDAC with correct software rect After that execute the Clearing the NVDS provisioning Memory procedure see Chapter 2 3 4 page 2 16 or execute the Software upgrade via boot download simplex mode procedure see Chapter 4 3 5 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 15 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Clearing NVDS E E 2 3 4 Clearing the NVDS provisioning Memory Purpose To restore the Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS to the factory defaults Procedure Step 1 Follow the INIT SYS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message INIT SYS System Response The FAULT LED on the COMDAC lights for ap proximately one minute Then the FAULT LED flashes at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes Execute Step 9 to Step 19 of the GSI in stallation procedure on page 2 9 gt NOTE In simplex COMDAC mode a report
148. prompt enter the following TL1 command SW LOPROTIN HOPT cOre lsa c FRCD System Response The pre loaded COMDAC starts up The report event messages on the screen are Gomdac sida Switch forced Set data memory update in progress data memory update completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete 4 24 l ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl a Step 9 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message oW TOWKG BOP ls cores se RESELL System Response The report event message on the screen is eomdac Side switch forced reser Step 10 Disable the protection switching of the formerly active COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter INHIBIT or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 INHIBIT System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAGC switch inhibited Step 11 Remove the pre loaded COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack Missing OF pover faulty Step 12 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message SW TOWKG EOP IS Core 1 4 REESE 1s System Response The report event message on the screen is comdac switch reset Step 13 Reconfigure the syst
149. provisioning information the engineering work order Step 9 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT UGLLN see Chapter 4 6 36 page 4 198 Step 10 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 10 page 3 59 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 41 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ROC growth Le 3 3 5 Remote operations channel ROC growth Two types of ROC The system supports two different types of ROC m ROC carried over leased line interface m ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 x interface SPLL ROC No ROC growth Since only one remote operations channel ROC can be defined in the system procedure no special growth procedure for the ROC is necessary but the ROC is defined by following the provisioning procedure in Chapter 4 5 7 4 on page 4 137 If a ROC is defined in the system and another type of ROC has to be provisioned first the existing ROC must be deleted The deletion of a ROC is described in Chapter 3 3 13 page 3 77 3 42 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Service node interfaces growth ee 3 3 6 Service node interfaces growth Required basic Service node interfaces growth includes installing and provisioning service to an operations additional O_E1 The following basic operations are required m Dispatch maintenance personnel to the site to insert IO_E1 for ISDN PRA subscribers via V3 interface an
150. provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS PGCC 4 182 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V52PG V5CC ee section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 183 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a leased line link BE SeSe 4 6 29 Provisioning a LL link Purpose This procedure is to create a leased line link entity with its 31 timeslots Optionally the administrative primary service state of the link can be given This command automatically creates 31 leased line link timeslots supplied by this link Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT LLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT LLL AID el K1 nesd NESD crc4 CRC4 LeSad FESD PSE 3 where AID 111 1 16 AID of the leased line link El el 1 1 4 1 4 V5 physical feeder identifier NESD EEI near end E1 signal degrade Er LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10 cyclic redun
151. provisioning variant id to be switched to is avail able in LE m requesting a switch over with the provisioning variant id to be switched to m blocking of related user ports in the LE no explicit user port block mes sages are sent by the LE m acknowledging and indicating to start the provisioning variant switch from LE m blocking V5 user ports internally in the AN m changing to new provisioning variant dataset on both sides making old current interface dataset now a standby provisioning variant m restarting V5 interface as at normal V5 interface activation 4 234 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning ee m unblocking of user ports 4 7 2 1 Verify re provisioning procedure Verification of The optional verification whether a specified provisioning variant identifier is avail provisioning able or not at the local exchange can be triggered with a TL1 command by the op variants via TL1 erator see Chapter 4 8 6 page 4 259 The possible results ready not ready be cause unknown provisioning variant or not ready because re provisioning in progress are delivered to the operator This procedure can be initiated without any preconditions in the AN that is the provisioning variant identifier does not have to be provisioned in the system before The verify re provisioning procedure is not mandatory before a switch over request to new variant initiated in A
152. relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 41 page 4 115 4 114 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services LL services used subscriber used timeslot service state ROC 1 LL TS 2 1 JIS I Go o ee I ee gt gt er T T Q D c o R ma 2 a Cc or O T O oi Sam a Line Term ROC O S pm jee O a E a p D i Es 2 D 2 T AANE l representing hardware operator can read only Figure 4 41 Table structure of LL ROC service 363 211 112 Port provisioning INAWNSISSV ADIAYGAS LL timeslot AD sevice state saN LL interface AID wsedTeeder serice siale pararetor CC T a pe p oe Ae eo a o fe eo o E1 feeder AiD service state parameter served interiace a a aa 1a foon pwe LS E a a a E a Ne O oa e e aee oo a CEE eS a INAWdINOA lO_E1 P pack AD pack ype parameter service state 1 feso prov dats OOS NAC a ae aT 3 Le ena a e e EEE eo Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters SLOTS Issue 7 December 2000 4 115 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Le Table ROC Data for the ROC are stored in the ROC table There is one ROC table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains
153. remains in the not operational service state Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT ULLL AID ete Labs PST 2 where ALD WII 1 2 72 AID of the unstructured leased line link EL apelel ti Le pat IRs F el 1 1 4 1 4 Ssubapel Tiescla 1 6 71 4 physical feeder identifier apel reserved for future use el E1 feeder on IO E1 pack subapel reserved for future use PST IS OOS administrative primary service state TS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ULLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 186 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an analog leased line ee 4 6 31 Provisioning an analog leased line Purpose This procedure is to create an analog leased line subscriber entity with its default or operator specified provisioning data It specifies a physical port of an applica tion pack which is to be used Optionally the administrative primary service state of this line can be given The bearer channel object of the analog leased line sub scribe
154. serial interface ROC or CIT the parameter value of GATEWAY must be identical to the value of the remote IP address REMIP set in the Setting the IP address procedure see Chapter 2 3 13 2 34 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting up IP routing Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ROUTE section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures Next procedure If a connection via AFM is needed execute OP 670 Set ATM Operation Channel of the Commands and Procedures included on the customer documentation CD ROM then go to O_E7 installation see Chapter 2 3 15 If a connection via AFM is not needed go to O_E7 installation see Chapter 2 3 15 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 35 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures IO_E1 installation ee 2 3 15 IO_E1 installation Purpose To provide connectivity between the AnyMedia Mainshelf and the service nodes IO_E1 packs have to be installed in the IO_E1 slots These slots are numbered lO_E1 1 through IO_E1 4 as shown below The first IO_E1 pack has to be in stalled in O_E1 slot 1 the second in slot 2 the third in slot 3 and the fourth in slot 4 This installation order h
155. services gt WY oan oe DD channel id WY J O lt ss e O pee tse fs Sim oe isa m gt C T T 53 w P ee 3 AD senicestate J Cd Z Managed NTU al E eee EE e e A eee aris 5 ee E a ee o e E z Coo E 5 ayy a Z w p m a Line Term DLL subscriber LL interface WY AD usedU port service state parameter AD usedteeder service state parameter S i fie A Cs a 2 AE a i ios e Se A E CO oe a LL To To gt CO TO S a _ Z AD senicestate served subscriber re ee ed Eo O w 2 pa Eo e ae Eo I So eW eee B Be l Z Speen S Olt subscr a e o aoo Ed oO 4 AP IO_E1 P pack S AD Pe service state AD packiype parameter service state a ae e 1 FACS00_ provdata OOS NAC o ZIT 7 a as as A O 2 EP pi E o E 7 5 a E E a aes a S a E a aes as fis fnone fme 16 f LPU2 ass Ss Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 27 Table structure of DLL service 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 91 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table DLL Data for the DLL subscriber are stored in the DLL subscriber table There is one subecn bert DLL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line ter mination id as the key to this table a reference to the used U port the service state primary and secondary
156. services Moving a POTS line to OOS ae 3 4 7 Moving a POTS line out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a POTS line to OOS To change the administrative primary service state only the primary service state and the mode must be given Assumptions The POTS line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED PLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Bp SPiN Ade 23 MODE 2 PSI where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination MODE FRCD NORM shutdown mode FRCD forced The subscriber is immediately put to OOS with disrupting an active call NORM normal The subscriber is shut down in cooperation with the connected exchange which means for example that the subscriber can finish a currently active call before the shutdown PST 009 administrative primary service state OOs out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED PLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 99 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an ISDN BRA line to OOS ee 3 4
157. services V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth Step 15 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 3 page 3 57 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 27 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V3 ISDN PRA subscriber growth ee 3 3 4 6 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber growth Assumption A V3 interface is available that is a V3 link is provisioned Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface with application mode V3PP ex ists Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hds1l 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface with application the provisioning information go to mode V3PP is provisioned Step 3 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 4 such an HDSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Create the HDSL interface entity with application mode V3PP by en tering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 4 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 41 512 AID of the HDSL interface 3 28 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V3 ISDN PRA subscriber growth ee Step 5 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 7
158. state user port Z ERNES O F 005 pwe 5 E w e a 5 DEE 4 i as ne O 5 O Z erra i E ts gt DE e s E a S a D m fea foon fT mmm E E A a f a a eC gt 3 EL feeder E AD m p l osamo oms oO 8 99 8 S a ee E E z ee a t4 O05 NAC poda o g EONO O a 8 msa o ae pme He S LT ea pl z ex CS E ap oo ra O w o IO_E1 P pack Ee Ce a AID T packiype parameter service state z E E a fso pov o0 H y Z ee ee e oS T T l g EMW ae eee ee a e rh B a eo provdata ST E ae T TS 5 B foe none 9 ESS 2 a ae Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level D The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 16 Table structure of POTS service 4 70 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning i Ennn Table POTS Data for the POTS subscriber are stored in the POTS subscriber table There is Jubeen ber one POTS subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used Z port the ad ministrative service state primary and secondary the provisioning data and a reference to the user port which is supported if any is supported When a POTS subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termi nation id and the Z port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in
159. steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 153 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Diasabling the ISDN mode ee 3 4 62 Disabling the ISDN mode Purpose This procedure is to disable the ISDN mode The system supports an active sys tem configuration which is currently used and a standby system configuration In this procedure the standby system configuration is set and activated The system performs an autonomous restart for reconfiguring after completion of the SW CFG command After the restart the active and standby system configuration are equal The command SW CFG should only be used by experienced craft personnel be cause of the service affecting system restart Assumption The ISDN mode is enabled that is the system operates in POTS and ISDN mixed configuration Procedure Step 1 Follow the SET CFG ISDN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command of b CEG LoODN si 5 lt Cr Gl where CFGID f configuration identifier 1 POTS only Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SET CFG ISDN sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 3 Follow the SW CFG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW CFG
160. strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge bh Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the ONU door by turning the latch Step 3 Insert the OCP into the most left ONU slot marked OCP for the lo cation of the slot see chapter 4 of the Applications Planning and Ordering Guide APOG With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indenta tion on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place System Response Upon OCP power up all LEDs on the OCP light for a short interval During OCP self initialization no LEDs on the OCP light Self initialization lasts no more than one minute Next procedure End of steps Connecting the optical link to the OCP see Chapter 2 4 3 2 60 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Connec
161. subscrib ers on this interface Step 4 For the link to be deleted delete the cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots of the link to be deleted by entering DLT CRS CCTS see Chapter 3 4 38 page 3 130 Step 5 For all V5 communication channels whose cross connection was deleted in step 4 delete all cross connections between V5 commu nication paths and these V5 communication channels by entering DLT CRS CPCC see Chapter 3 4 36 page 3 128 gt NOTE This will permanently stop all signaling traffic of the related V5 communica tion paths If the signaling traffic shall be retained the related V5 communi cation paths must be cross connected again to other V5 communication 3 80 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 2 degrowth link with CC channels of the V5 interface by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Then go to Step 8 Step 6 For all V5 communication paths whose cross connections were de leted in step 5 delete all cross connections between V5 user ports and these V5 communication paths by entering DLT CRS UPCP see Chapter 3 4 26 page 3 118 gt NOTE This will permanently stop signaling traffic of the related V5 user ports If the signaling traffic shall be retained the related V5 user ports must be cross connected again to other V5 communication paths of the V5 interface by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18
162. system creates this entry for the first unused provi sioning variant AID that is the actually used AID depends on the history of the system At deletion of a V5 interface the currently active provisioning variant entry in this table is automatically deleted by the system The creation of an empty standby provisioning variant is accomplished by creating a new entry in this table Standby provisioning variants can only be created if the specified V5 interface already exists and must be deleted prior to the deletion of the V5 interface itself The provisioning variant id must be unique within one V5 in terface including the active provisioning variant id During the actual re configuration at a switch over the state of the provisioning variant to be switched to is IN PROGRESS while the old active provisioning vari ant gets the state READY if it is logical consistent otherwise NOT_READY After wards the new provisioning variant has the state ACTIVE whereas the old provi sioning variant has the state READY The provisioning variant AID always identi fies the same contents of a provisioning variant regardless of any performed switch over 4 7 7 3 Addressing of provisioning variants Provisioning variant AID 363 211 112 After the creation of a provisioning variant in the provisioning variant table it can be filled with actual data Every TL1 command related to provisioning variant con tents is extended with an optional provisioning varia
163. target provisioning variant dataset in an inconsistent Status 4 7 7 6 Deleting standby provisioning variant dataset contents Deleting prov To support a quick deletion of a standby provisioning variant dataset the system variant dataset supports a delete command which deletes all contents of a standby provisioning contents variant in state PVO NOT_READY No contents of the current system dataset the current interface dataset or other provisioning variants are influenced by this deletion Afterwards the entry in the provisioning variant table can be deleted The deletion of a provisioning variant which is currently active is not allowed as such an entry is automatically deleted if the related V5 interface is deleted As this command is a kind of macro command with several NVDS actions a spe cial behavior is considered in case of failures during the command execution If the command is interrupted by a system recovery cycle because of a failure or re set the system continues the deletion of the provisioning variant dataset at the subsequent system recovery In this way the roll forward mechanism of this com mand never leaves the provisioning variant dataset in an inconsistent status 4 244 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning 4 7 7 7 Provisioning variant integrity checks 4 7 7 7 1 Checks on cross connections in provisioning variants As stated in Cha
164. the HDSL interface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 6 Step 6 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 7 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV LT AID where AID Apel 1024 Tse sl Step 8 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT V3LN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 9 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 10 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 9 Enter the provisioning information of the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber by entering ENT V3LN see Chapter 4 6 48 page 4 211 Step 10 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 4 page 3 57 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 29 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ALL subscriber growth ee 3 3 4 7 ALL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV L
165. the administrative primary service state of a V5 link entity to OOS A change of provisioning data is only allowed if the administrative primary service state of the link is OOS To change the administrative primary ser vice state only the primary service state and the mode must be given Assumptions The V5 x interface is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VS5 E ALD SS MODE IS TPSL where ALD v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link MODE DEFER FRCD NONDEFER shutdown mode DEFER deferred mode non service affecting FRCD forced all calls and all CCs on this link are interrupted service affecting on this link and if no V5 communication channel protection is available also for the complete inter face NONDEFER non deferred mode all calls on this link are interrupted service affecting on this link PST 3005 administrative primary service state OOS out of service gt NOTE The shutdown mode is applicable only when the PST is OOS 3 96 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a V5 x link out of service gt NOTE Moving the V5 2 link out of service with the modes FRCD and NONDEFER is service affecting Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed informatio
166. the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The operator cannot specify the user port id read only at this layer with this com mand The user port id is entered internally if a V5 user port related to this line ter mination is created This way allows the operator to find the relationship to the up per layer The same method is used at the equipment layer If a POTS subscriber is created its own access identifier is entered internally in the Z port table Restrictions for the The creation of a POTS subscriber is rejected if either a table entry with the spec creation of a POTS ified line termination id already exists or the specified Z port is already being used subscriber by another client A POTS subscriber can only serve one user port service assign ment a further creation of a user port service is rejected by the AnyMedia Access System The creation is also rejected if the related application pack of the lower layer is not capable of serving a POTS subscriber or the requirements defined by its provisioning data cannot be fulfilled The checks if the related hardware can support the POTS subscriber are made in the equipment layer Example Figure 4 17 page 4 71 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a V5 2 POTS subscriber Two arrows indicate that the corresponding command performs both The definition of the entity and the defini tion of the cross connection betwee
167. the cross connection between user port and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 4 124 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning a Step 14 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 1 commu nication paths by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18 page 4 169 Step 15 Define the cross connections between V5 line termination bearer channels and V5 1 timeslots by entering ENT CRS BCTS see Chapter 4 6 19 page 4 171 Step 16 Move the ISDN line in service by entering ED ILN see Chapter 4 6 21 page 4 174 Step 17 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 18 Move the V5 1 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 5 7 1 3 V5 2 POTS service Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 2 POTS service Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type by entering ED V5TS see Ch
168. the menu bar select File Exit System Response The NotePad GSI Script Facility window closes End of steps 1 7 5 Editing Script Files Purpose To add TL1 commands to an existing TL1 script file or to remove commands from an existing TL1 script file Procedure Step 1 From the menu bar select File Scripting Open System Response The open file dialog appears Step 2 Choose an appropriate file name for example tl1 txt or type this name into the file name box Step 3 Click on Open System Response IE THEN the file already exists the file is opened in the NotePad text editor window if the desired file is of the type txt or in the GSI Script Facil ity window if the desired file is of the type scr Go to step 4 the file does not exist a prompt asks whether you would like to create a new file Click on Yes to open the desired text editor window Go to step 4 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 49 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands Step 4 Type in the desired TL1 commands one per line using the identical syntax as if typing directly at the TL1 prompt gt NOTE For similar commands use the COPY and the PASTE function of the editor to create identical commands and then edit in the differences for example to keep the command the same but change the AID parameters gt NOTE Commands can be entered into a script file using the script facility function in the
169. the position where the OCP has to be inserted DIP switch e ONU Subshelf identifier 7 shown ONU Subshelf identifier adjustments ON position ON OFF position 12345678 Figure 2 7 DIP switch for ONU addressing End of steps Next procedure OCP installation at ONU Subshelf see Chapter 2 4 2 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 59 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures OCP installation at subshelf n E SS 2 4 2 OCP installation at ONU Subshelf Purpose Provide an interface between the ONU backplane and the optical link by inserting the Optical Controller Pack for ONU OCP Assumption m OAP and ONU Subshelf are provisioned at the AnyMedia Mainshelf m Optical link is provisioned at AnyMedia Mainshelf ONU Subshelf is installed and powered up see Installation Manual IM Subshelf identifier is correctly set Background After installation and the initial sanity check the OCP autonomously activates its built in self test After successful completion the OCP autonomously activates its service on its feeder port Any faults of the OCP or at the ONU Subshelf link feeder port are indicated with the faceplate LEDs The OCP is able to autono mously detect a link start up procedure initiated by the AnyMedia Mainshelf With no connection to the AnyMedia Mainshelf the OCP is the master of all ONU Sub shelf APs and holds them in an inactive state Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist
170. the potential risk for injury A Step 1 Connect the already installed fiber to the SC type fiber connector for the optical link on the OCP faceplate Consider that the SC connec tion has a guiding system so that the fiber connector can be inserted in one direction only Step 2 Be sure that the fiber is connected properly in the fiber termination box System Response The LED CLF on the OCP extinguishes be cause the optical link between the OAP and the OCP is installed End of steps Next procedure Application pack installation at ONU Subshelf see Chapter 2 4 4 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 61 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures AP installation at subshelf TEE ___ ee 2 4 4 Application pack installation at ONU Subshelf Purpose Provide hardware for POTS ISDN BRA V5 ISDN PRA V3 ISDN PRA ALL DLL VLL GLL or ADSL services and testing capabilities The procedure is the same as for the AnyMedia Mainshelf Background Regardless of an existing connection to the AnyMedia Mainshelf the packs per form their initial sanity checks and program store inventory tests with the usual faceplate LED indications To prevent the case that a malfunctioning pack is in Stalled in a disconnected ONU Subshelf without recognizing the fault on site the system uses the existing fault LED indicators of the packs to indicate recognized hardware or sanity test faults Procedure Step 1 Provide the application packs see Chapte
171. the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS LI section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 144 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 CC 4 6 4 Provisioning a V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 logical communication channel The logical com munication channel identifier must be unique within a V5 2 interface For a V5 1 interface there can be up to 3 communication channels and for a V5 2 interface there can be up to 47 communication channels gt NOTE In a POTS only configuration a maximum of 2 communication channels per interface is possible gt NOTE For future releases the number of communication channels is 47 for a V5 2 interface a maximum of 2 communication channels are possible the maxi mum number of communication channels in the present release is 16 per AnyMedia Access System Assumption V5 interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V5CC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENTS VSCO ATD 24 eV CCLI E Vo CCID where AID v5cc 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel V GCED 0 65503 logical V5 communication chan nel identifier gt NOTE
172. the provisioning information go to Step 2 the RTRV ULLL command reports that go to Step 3 the ULLL is provisioned with the cor rect provisioning information the RTRV ULLL command reports dif contact the provisioning center to verify ferent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Create a ULLL entity by entering ENT ULLL see Chapter 4 6 30 page 4 186 Step 3 Move the ULL link in service by entering ED ULLL see Chapter 4 6 46 page 4 209 Step 4 IF THEN the object to grow is a UVLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the growth procedure for UVLL subscribers on page 3 58 the object to grow is a UGLL sub go to Step 1 of the growth procedure scriber for UGLL subscribers on page 3 59 End of steps 3 54 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Connection serv node subscriber ee ee 3 3 7 Establishing the connection between service node interface and subscriber side 3 3 7 1 POTS subscriber Procedure Step 1 Verify with the RTRV CRS UPI command the cross connection to the V5 1 V5 2 interfaces specified by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV CRS UPI command reports use the ENT CRS UPI command to that the user port is not cross con enter the cross connection go to nected Step 2 the RTRV CRS UPI command reports contact the provisioning center to verify different provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2
173. transmits the byte timing signal out the B pin on the X 21 interface This is only valid for X 21 NTUs where the speed is 64K or 128K Futhermore it may only be enabled if the external clock mode attribute is disabled as the byte timing and external clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 inter face DISABLED byte timing disabled ENABLED byte timing enabled EXTCLK DISABLED ENABLED external clock mode sets whether the NTU uses external clocking This attribute may only be enabled for X 21 NTUs Futh ermore it may only be enabled if the byte timing attribute is dis abled as the byte timing and ex ternal clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 interface DISABLED external clocking disabled ENABLED external clocking enabled 4 232 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Changing default prov data of NTU ASTIMER 0 255 anti streaming timer The managed NTUs include an anti streaming mechanism which is used to prevent a faulty DTE from permanently disrupting a network of NT Us connected as a hub This timer sets the time in seconds that the RTS line must be continuously held high to acti vate the anti streaming mecha nism If this parameter is set to 0 then the anti streaming mecha nism is disabled ASRETRY 0 255 TIMER anti streaming retry timer This timer sets the time in min utes that the RTS line must be c
174. update completed verification in progress system software version mismatch NVPS verification completed Copy the newly loaded software version from the formerly standby COMDAC to the formerly active COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the active COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condition CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events system software version mismatch cleared copy copy data data NVPS NVPS program memory in progress program memory complete memory update in progress memory update completed verification in progress verification completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes and both COMDACs are synchronous afterwards 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl a Step 15 Run the NVDS database script file with the provisioning data see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 21 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl ee 4 3 4 Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in simplex mode without database evolution Purpose Software release upgrades or bug fixes via COMDAC replacement Assumptions This procedure a
175. user port entity and a V5 interface entity The line termination administrative primary service state must be OOS Out Of Service and none of its bearer channels may be cross con nected to a V5 timeslot Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS UPI GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Dit CRS UPLs TAIDI AIDA Sl pVar P VAR gt where AIDI v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port AID2 v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface PVAR VIPVaL 1l 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS UPI sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 119 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a user port a
176. via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 133 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V5 interface E SeSe 3 4 42 Deleting a V5 interface Purpose This procedure is to delete a V5 interface entity The V5 interface must not serve any service this means no cross connections must be established to this V5 inter face The V5 must not contain any objects or a defined standby provisioning vari ant in the provisioning variant table The active provisioning variant entry in the V5 provisioning variant table is automatically deleted The V5 interface must be in the administrative primary service state OOS out of service Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5I GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT V51 AID where ALD v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5I section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 134 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V52PG V52TS 3 4 43 Deleting a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V
177. windows for defining TL1 commands Chapter 1 7 6 page 1 50 Step 5 When you have completed entering TL1 commands save the file From the menu bar select File Save Step 6 Exit the editor From the menu bar select File Exit System Response The window closes End of steps 1 7 6 Using the Script Facility Function Purpose To create a script file or add commands to an existing script file Procedure Step 1 Select the TL1 command to be defined as described in Chapter 1 7 2 page 1 43 System Response The window for defining the TL1 command pa rameters is displayed Step 2 Click on Script Mode System Response The GSI Script Facility window for text is dis played Figure 1 39 on page 1 51 1 50 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands a SeS a GSI Script Facility Script Commands 0Optons sa Commands String to match k RF Timeout Value Sec E Load Pauze Time Delay 0 65 Sec E Clear Single Step Prompt On Failure E Auto Clear Stop Figure 1 39 GSI Script Facility window for text IE THEN the command is to be added to an ex continue with step 3 isting script file a new script file is to be created continue with step 4 Step 3 Click on Load The open file dialog appears Select the file extension txt to be used and open it Step 4 In the TL1 command window define the TL1 command attributes as desc
178. with used remain out TS 16 for out TS 16 for ing timeslots for VLL VLL VLL UGLL not applicable not applicable not applicable 32 bearer chan not applicable nels including TS 0 UVLL not applicable not applicable not applicable 32 bearer chan not applicable nels including TS 0 Provisioning of V5 A V5 ISDN PRA subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned ISDN PRA on the lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface subscribers allocates one or two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL ap plication pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service Therefore it is possible to check at provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capa ble of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested sub scriber type and the application pack can be checked For example the provision ing of a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber on a POTS AP is rejected at provisioning time Allocated HDSL Each provisioned V5 ISDN PRA subscriber allocates HDSL timeslots on an HDSL timeslots of V5 ISDN logical interface Per HDSL logical interfa
179. with the spec ified LL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table LL services Data for the leased line service are stored in the leased line services table There is one leased line services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains the used ROC and the used leased line timeslot and the service state When a ROC is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ROC identity and the leased line timeslot identity The TL1 command to create the ROC is rejected if ei ther the leased line timeslot entry or the ROC entry do not exist or are already be ing used by another leased line service Example Figure 4 42 page 4 117 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a ROC 4 116 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT LLL illl 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 E1 data 4xEl XE feeder ENT ROC roc 1 ENT CRS LLTS roc 1llts 1 1 Figure 4 42 Provisioning data for a ROC example SPLL ROC over V5 x interface Provisioning objects of an SPLL ROC Provisioning of an SPLL ROC Table structure of an SPLL ROC 363 211 112 4 5 5 11 2 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 x inter face The ROC carried over semipermanent leased line SPLL ROC is transported via V 5 x interface on E1 feeders which can be used for that ROC and for other pur poses
180. 000 4 195 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a UVLL subscriber me ee TYPE V35 V36 X21 data interface type v35 _ V 35 data interface V36 V 36 data interface X21 X 21 data interface TXCLK INTR INTF EXT transmit clock select INTR raising edge of internal send timing signal ST default value INTF falling edge of internal send timing signal ST EXT external terminal timing signal TT CTO OFF ON STD clear to send OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard default value DSR OFF ON STD data set ready OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard default value RLSD OFF ON STD receive line signal detection OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard default value administrative primary service state cs in service OOS out of service 4 196 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a UVLL subscriber gt NOTE Clear to send and data set ready are only applicable for data interfaces ac cording to V 35 and V 36 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT UVLLN section in the TL1
181. 024 3 D channel a a x means not relevant undefined Provisioning of A DLL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the DLL subscribers lines layer to a U port of the equipment layer located on an application pack capa ble of supporting DLL It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 89 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Le without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provi sioning of a DLL subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the applica tion pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its U ports for service Therefore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capa ble of serving the subscriber For example the provisioning of a 13th subscriber on an ISDN AP with 12 U ports is rejected at provisioning time Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked Provisioning of A managed NTU of the AnyMedia Access System may be optionally provisioned managed NTUs on the lines layer to a U port of the equipment layer located on an application pack capable of supporting DLL With a cross connection the subscriber s terminal equipment TE is connected to a service node for routing PLL service circuits In the subscriber s
182. 1 Follow the ENT PLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT PLN AID drop DROP tg TG rg RG ppm PPM bn BN fcl FCL PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination DROP LaeoOpH lato 4 laa y SUubarop lect fa6 SLF AID of the physical drop TG 4 to 8 transmit gain in decibels relative to the digital reference point in steps of 0 5 RG 12 to 3 receive gain in decibels relative to the digital reference point in steps of 0 5 PPM N Y periodic pulse metering PPM N no PPM required Y PPM required 4 156 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a POTS line ee BN fie po aoa balance network The balance test network repre sents the impedance condition to be expected from a subscriber line connected to a Z interface The definition of balance test net work s is customer specific 1 balance network 1 2 balance network 2 3 balance network 3 4 balance network 4 5 balance network 5 ECL HIGH LOW feeding current limit HIGH high feeding current LOW low feeding current PaT TIS CLO rs administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT PLN section
183. 1 Insert a new pre loaded COMDAC in the free COMDAC slot With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are pack initialization in progress data memory update in progress pack initialization finished data memory update completed NVPS verification in progress System software version mismatch NVPS verification completed System Fault If the COMDAC fails to flash or the FAULT LED fails to extinguish the COMDAC is probably faulty Repeat Step 1 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 9 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release TTT EEE Step 2 Copy software from the currently active pre loaded COMDAC this
184. 1 61 61 38 26 pack missing or power faults drop 1 1 1 EQPT MN EXT SA 70 61 61 66 66 64 U Drop errory drop 1 1 1 EQPT HN LOS A 76 61 61 66 65 47 U Interface LOSU drop 1 1 1 EQPT HN PRODERR SA 7 8 61 61 66 65 18 U Interface layer tactivation y51 1 E1 RCURY TC 78 61 61 66 64 53 Protection action has been initiated ap 1 2 EQPT CPINIT CL 6 61 61 66 03 38 pack initialization finished e4 1 1 1 E1 NN SYNC NSA CL 78 61 61 68 83 37 sync input failed cleared COH CR SYHCOOS 8 CL 76 61 61 66 63 37 syustem free running cleared oe1 1 1 EQPT CPINIT CL 78 61 61 66 63 36 pack initialization finished 4 Za Figure 1 23 System log file 1 5 6 Event Log Event Log window In the Event Log window a list of all autonomous report messages Is displayed This window can be displayed by Clicking on the respective icon in the toolbar m Selecting the Fault Events menu option ate SystemO00 Event Log _ Oy x jee iea l bated ne lEn _ Messa O beta 2242 O2 24 77 56 13 plugin time 1 7 56 13 date 98 02 24 plugin ap 1 10 type pots ap 2243 10 29 10 47 08 circuit pack missing clear ap 1 10 CLIMPROFRA MYL 54 10 29 10 47 08 circuit pack 2244 10 297 10 45 08 1 pack initialization ap 1 10 MNJMPROFR MYL 54 10 29 10 45 08 pack initial 2244 10 29 10 47 00 pack initialization cleared ap 1 10 CLIMPROPRA MYL S4 10 29 10 47 00 pack initial
185. 1 and 1002 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface BNISVoODeiVoOl S3es 5s Vovype VOly VOLT d Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack ENT lORL s20el 1 7 gt Step 3 Define the V5 link BNI SV ok ov oles Sel e Lava Zs Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface ENTSCRS LI VoL LVO Loy Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel ENTSVIGCC svoCcc s gt Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type BD VolS TivoteaL L6 t ray tS LYDE Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot PNT CRS CClS INOC a Lyoto l 16 gt 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 297 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 4 298 Issue 7 December 2000 Define the V5 communication paths ENT V OCPI V9 CO sa Lee piv Ey pe F OCEL ENT V OC PEEV IEPA EA NV pL y PES SUNT ENT V5CP 23 VoCp 3 4 74 2ivoplcype Lsdnip BENT V5CP34V5CO 3 5 24 VoOpeype 1sdns Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel ENT CRS GEC Chey oCp o 1 Voen BNEH CRO CE CCS Vo COn 35 VvoCe o i BNI CRS Cre CeCe Cp 6 4 vee o 1 BNT CRS CPCCs 3 Vo CD aa Ona e Define the application packs BIVISAP itapal elr LeU ENT APStep l L442 LPUe30 Define the ISDN lines ENI LUN stl b 423s32drop drop 1 1l3 1 ENTSILN Se Leto ss drop dropSsl
186. 1 and LOS indication for station clock SC from the CIU via UART mes 4 274 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Clock synchronization managm I sages The COMDAC software will not select a reference if it is in any of these conditions Energy detectors The COMDAC uses energy detectors on the two clock reference inputs to detect reference clock timing input faults When a hard fault on the active reference is de tected and the standby reference is available non fault conditions the COMDAC hardware selects the standby reference and reports the switch to the software Same reference The COMDAC update bus is used to ensure that the standby COMDAC selects input on both the same reference input Also the COMDAC hardware side select mechanism COMDACs determines which COMDAC is the timing master If a reference switch cannot be performed or is unsuccessful the reference phase locked loop PLL of the active COMDAC locks onto its free running mode 4 10 6 Synchronization alarms Synchronization The COMDAC checks for the out of lock condition on the active reference input faults so if both of the inputs have failed and one or both of the faults is due to the out of lock condition the software periodically polls the out of lock input s to see if the condition still exists Maintenance personnel will need to check the synchroni zation network when an out of lock event occurs for a single timi
187. 1 command to be defined as described in Chapter 1 7 2 page 1 43 System Response The window for defining the TL1 command pa rameters is displayed 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 45 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands ED 5CC Parameters TLI Command ED 5CC v5cc 1 1 00000 Access ID 1 5cc 1 1 T Env Pt Pe ee z al a 8 Y5CCID Range O up to 65503 Display field TL1 command Button for executing the command Button for switching to script mode Ctag Display field Access Identifier AID 900 Selection list for creating AID Area for defining command attributes AONO Figure 1 36 Example TL1 Commands Window gt NOTE For a detailed description of the TL1 commands and messages see either the Command and Message Manual ordering number 363 211 113 or the on line description via the menu Help Commands Procedures For a general description of a TL1 command see chapter TL1 information IF THEN the defined TL1 command is to be exe continue with the next step cuted directly the defined TL1 command is to be click on Script Mode see added to a script file Chapter 1 7 6 page 1 50 Step 2 Define the TL1 command attributes The TL1 command attributes are to be defined as follows Defining the Access ID AID The AID is to be defined using selection lists Only the al lowed ranges are displayed in these lists The resulting AID is
188. 11 Copy software from the currently active pre loaded COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the standby COMDAC currently the formerly active COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condition CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events system software version mismatch cleared copy program memory in progress copy program memory complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes Step 12 IF THEN the software restoration fails an alarm message copy program memory failed Is raised the FAULT LED is on Repeat Step 11 If Step 11 is not successful the COM DAC could be defect Please contact your local customer support LCS there is a pack reinitialization fault the FAULT LED is permanently lit Go to Step 5 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 9 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl o E ___ ee Step 13 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message SW TOWKG BOPT core 13 sRESE LT System Response The report event message on the screen is eomdac sida Switen lorced recet Step 14 Force a protection switch to the standby COMDAC currently the for merly active COMDAC again Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with pa
189. 11 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning operator PV available PV1 Ready for re provisioning operator PV not available Switch over accepted standby prov variant Switch over accepted active prov variant is not logical consistent PVO Normal Not ready for re provisioning Switch over accepted active prov variant is logical consistent Re provisioning completed new active prov variant PV2 Re provisioning in progress Figure 4 46 Provisioning variant state transitions 4 7 6 Re provisioning V5 interface states Re provisioning interface states 363 211 112 For each V5 interface three re provisioning states are defined ANO Not ready for re provisioning In this state no standby provisioning variant is set to available for a V5 in terface This state is also applicable during the time of a step by step pro cess of defining a provisioning variant This means that one or more provi sioning variants for this interface may exist but all of them are in state PVO AN1 Ready for re provisioning This state is entered if at least one provisioning variant for this interface is set to available by the operator Each provisioning variant is consistent and ready to be switched to This means that all physical and logical re sources in the system which are referred are available to be allocated To re
190. 12 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message oW OWKG EOPTL 2core iLr2sRESE LE System Response The report event message on the screen is Gomndac Switch reset Step 13 Insert the formerly active COMDAC into the slot COM 1 With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 19 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 20 gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established Step 14 Issue 7 December 2000 SW upgrade COMDAC repl System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the for merly active COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self initializa tion lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are pack pack data pack data NVPS missing or power fault cleared initialization in progress memory update in progress initialization finished memory
191. 12 Issue 7 December 2000 3 149 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection ROC LLTS ese ee 3 4 58 Deleting a cross connection between remote operations channel and leased line timeslot Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a ROC and a leased line link timeslot Assumptions The virtual ROC subscriber line termination is in the administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS LLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET CRS LETS 2A ALDZ where ATDI roc 1 AID of the embedded remote op erations channel AID2 llts 1 16 1 31 AID of the leased line link timeslot Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS LLTS sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 150 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a ROC a SeS 3 4 59 Deleting a remote operations channel Purpose This procedure is to delete an embedded remote operations channel entity It must not provide any service Assumptions ROC is in administrative primary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT ROC GSI
192. 16 logical C e eer a e g LPS501 V5 links 4 x El Feeder POTS gt A lines Application 4 Pack 5 ue ge Interface g 2 O one logical y ISDN o5 LL link 12 lines ued o L OS 2 e g LPU112 xX 0 5 ie 5 Mo Interface 2Mbps 0E 4 lines PP one logical e Pack LL link ee e e g LPS501 ink see e ee 4 x El Feeder y HDSL A 6 V3 EBS n Apri auon aos Interface pe e g LPS503 2S one logical 3 N ae V3 link S D b 4 HDSL Qe ULL f 3 5 4 lines geal 2 z Interface g LPS504 ee ee one logical ao ULL link Oc Figure 4 1 Functional diagram of cross connects within the AnyMedia Access System 4 48 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services Supported lines per Each interface contains the provisioning data for its E1 ports 64 kbps and E1 interface cross connections provide the linkage between the used protocol and the corre sponding physical interfaces Each V5 1 interface supports one E1 port 2 Mbps and up to 30 subscriber lines 64 kbps Each V5 2 interface supports up to 16 E1 ports 2 Mbps and up to 768 subscriber lines 64 kbps Each V3 interface sup ports one E1 port 2 Mbps and one subscriber line 2 Mbps Each leased line in terface supports one E1 port 2 Mbps and up to 31 analog leased lines 64 kbps digital leased line channels or VLL or GLL bearer channels Each unstructured leased line interface supports one E1 port 2 Mbps and on
193. 176 End of steps 3 3 7 4 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define the cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link by entering ENT CRS V3L see Chapter 4 6 49 page 4 212 Step 2 Move the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber in service by entering ED V3LN see Chapter 4 6 50 page 4 213 Step 3 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 End of steps 3 3 7 5 ALL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 2 Move the analog leased line subscriber in service by entering ED ALLN see Chapter 4 6 39 page 4 202 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 57 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Connection serv node subscriber ese ee 3 3 7 6 DLL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define up to three cross connections between line termination bearer channels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 2 Move the digital leased line subscriber in service by entering ED DLLN see Chapter 4 6 40 page 4 203 End of steps 3 3 7 7 VLL subscriber Procedure Step 1 Define up to 31 cross connections between line termination bearer channels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 2 Move the n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according V 35 V
194. 2 Connecting cable PC to CIU Cable component Requirement Connector to PC 9 pin female Connector to CIU 9 pin male Connecting cable 9 pin 1 1 1 6 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Connecting PC to CIU See note below DSR RTS os GSI DCD optional Connector to the GSI Connector to the CIU Note When using PPP or Multiple NE Mode this bridge may be required depending on the PC used Figure 1 2 Pin assignment of the connecting cable PC to CIU A detailed description of the cabling can be found in Chapter 4 of the Installation Manual TCP IP connection If the system is installed in locations where an Ethernet LAN already exists it can be connected to the LAN the Ethernet access provides one Telnet session Table 1 3 Port addresses of the telnet session Type Physical port Telnet 23 A 9 pin D sub female connector on the connection panel will provide the following 10BaseT LAN connections to the CIU Table 1 4 Pin assignment of the LAN connector 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 7 GSI software for narrowband services Connecting PC to CIU ee TCP IP Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet AnyMedia Figure 1 3 Connection of the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System via DCN Remote operations In remote outdoor applications management information between an AnyMedia Access System network element and the GSI located in the LE central office
195. 2 interface a ages he eee ASS Subscriber side V5 2 protection V5 2 communi V5 2 user Figure 4 5 V5 2 timeslot cation path group port 363 211 112 V5 2 V5 2 communi V5 2 line termination link cation channel Services 9 V5L8 9 9 3 g Q Q DINIDIR ml fol sf ml oi niin iin iin AI IAT IN hi h fehl Je ry fo calc a Ha ry oa a cy Oyo ou oO Vy o ou oO Vv Uo OU O EE EL Cross connection e1 1 4 1 ot ea as aaah e1 1 4 4 Cross connection v5cp 1 1 BCC f v5cp 1 2 CTRL j v5qo 1 4 PSTN i l V5cp 1 5 ISDNS i v5q0 1 6 ISDNF i v5cp 1 7 ISDNP i ISD l Cross connection Cross connection AA AAA AAA 1 It 12 It33 34 35 lt64 It993 It994 It995 It1024 t Functional diagram of V5 2 cross connects with communication channel protection Issue 7 December 2000 4 57 Configuration management for narrowband services Services Le 4 5 3 2 V3 services Logical V3 entities According to the layered model in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 the logical entities V3 link and V3 ISDN PRA subscriber are created and assigned by TL1 commands This section describes these entities subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 v3l 1 V3I 16 hdsl 1 hdsl 512 It 1 1024 2 HDSL AP HDSL Application pack interface PRA line data HDSL specific Physical sub d
196. 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 5 Delete the ULL link by entering DLT ULLL see Chapter 3 4 57 page 3 149 Step 6 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 87 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Degrowth mixed to POTS only rr E 3 3 15 Degrowth from a mixed POTS and ISDN to a POTS only configuration Procedure Step 1 Verify that all switched ISDN subscribers are deleted IF THEN the RTRV ILN or RTRV PRALN com delete all ISDN subscribers see mand reports that ISDN subscribers Chapter 3 3 12 2 page 3 68 or are defined Chapter 3 3 12 3 page 3 69 then go to Step 2 the RTRV ILN or RTRV PRALN com go to Step 2 mand reports that no ISDN subscribers are defined Step 2 Verify the current operation mode by entering RTRV CFG ISDN IF THEN the RTRV CFG ISDN command re use the SET CFG ISDN command to ports that the ISDN mode is enabled disable the ISDN mode go to Step 3 that is POTS and ISDN mixed configu ration the RTRV CFG ISDN command re go
197. 3 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 7 Move the digital leased line subscriber in service by entering ED VLLN see Chapter 4 6 41 page 4 204 Step 8 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 9 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 End of steps 4 5 7 3 4 Nx 64 kbps leased lines services according G 703 Purpose This procedure is to create an n x 64 kbps leased line service according G 703 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the LL link by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 Step 3 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 5 Define the digital leased line subscriber by entering ENT GLLN see Chapter 4 6 34 page 4 193 Step 6 Define the cross connections between line termination bearer chan nels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 7 Move the digital leased line subscriber in service by entering ED GLLN see Chapter 4 6 42 page 4 205 Step 8 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 9 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 End of steps 4
198. 3 4 28 Deleting a user port Purpose This procedure is to delete a V5 user port entity Assumptions The user port must not be cross connected Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5UP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DETS OUP aS ATD where AID v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5UP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 120 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a POTS line ee 3 4 29 Deleting a POTS line Purpose This procedure is to delete one POTS subscriber entity The entity and its bearer channel must not be cross connected to a V5 user port or a V5 timeslot Its ad ministrative primary service state must be OOS The bearer channel object of the POTS subscriber is automatically deleted by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT PLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT PLN AID where ATD lit f1 1024 gt AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For deta
199. 3 ISDN PRA line out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber to IS Assumptions The corresponding line termination is in administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V3LN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VSLN ALD ee See LS where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V3LN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 102 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an ALL subscriber to OOS I 3 4 11 Moving an analog leased line subscriber out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an analog leased line subscriber entity to OOS To change the administrative primary ser vice state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ALLN GSI operation or
200. 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 319 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples rr TF ee 4 12 11 Example for provisioning a UVLL interface Purpose This example is to create a UVLL interface with the following parameters E1 feeder 3 on IO_E1 4 unstructured link 5 application pack 15 port 1 HDSL interface 9 line termination 67 data interface type V 36 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack BNI LORLs 0e ls lsg Step 2 Define the application pack ENTSAP izan l loy Step 3 Define the unstructured leased line link BENT SUL rulisa teea leel Step 4 Define the HDSL interfaces ENT HDSi vhdsl 9072 rdrop drop 1l 13 1 apmode upp Step 5 Define the unstructured leased line subscriber BENT UVELNS 2 6 2 32 nds l pndsl oo rarsrc LOv hile type v36 Step 6 Define the cross connection between unstructured leased line sub scriber and unstructured leased line link BNP OCR UL bim tse 6 4 ue La Step 7 Move the unstructured leased line subscriber in service BDSUV GUN Shee o 7 ee 629 Se Step 8 Move the HDSL interfaces in service BDH HD eles Hho Sila ee SS 4 320 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 9 Move the unstructured leased line link in service PES as lacs el ones 22s End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 321 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning exampl
201. 4 software Operation Manual 108436338 9594 401 20448 used in combination with the WaveStar ADM 4 1 WaveStar AM 1 Application and Planning Guide a 365 372 200 IR 30EC and IR 40EC Se Product Manual 107078859 157 622 020 ries Batteries KS 23815 a For the ordering address see How to order this document b This manual is accessible from the Lucent Technologies internal webpage http access de lucent com ACCESS cdoc index html c The MPT User Manual is included in the Mass Provisioning Tool delivery Additionally it is available in PDF format on CD ROM d Ordering address Lucent Technologies 49 rue de la republique BP 26 F 76250 Deville les Rouen France Tel 33 2 32 10 70 00 Fax 433 235 74 83 23 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXIII About this document Related documentation CT SSe 3 1 Print copy hard copy Document All listed documents are available in print packaging and format 3 2 CD ROM Table 2 lists the manuals for the AnyMedia Access System which are available in PDF format on CD ROM An Adobe Acrobat Reader is provided to view them Table 2 Customer documentation on CD ROM CD ROM Comcode Ordering Number AnyMedia Access System Customer Documentation on CD ROM 108298787 363 211 1142 includes Applications Planning and Ordering Guide APOG in pdf format User Service Manual USM Vol 1 in pdf format Commands and procedures for ATM xDSL services in HTML format Commands a
202. 4 14 page 3 106 Step 2 Delete all cross connections between leased line termination bearer channels and leased line link timeslots by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapter 3 4 47 page 3 139 Step 3 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 4 Delete the specified digital leased line subscriber entity by entering DLT GLLN Chapter 3 4 52 page 3 144 Step 5 If HDSL timeslots of the HDSL interface are used by other subscrib ers move the specified HDSL interface entity in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 6 If no other HDSL timeslot of the HDSL interface is used optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 7 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 8 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 9 If the LL link is not being used by another leased line subscriber op tionally perform the leased line link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 6 page 3 86 End of steps 3 74 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UVLL subscribe
203. 4 5 5 1 page 4 69 to Chapter 4 5 5 11 page 4 113 Table structure The data which will be provisioned for the particular layers can be modeled by means of tables For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a POTS service is shown in Figure 4 15 page 4 68 and describes the relationships between the tables Table ports The table ports contains a physical subscriber line drop AID as the key to it the port state primary and secondary and a reference to the served V5 x POTS ISDN subscriber V3 ISDN PRA subscriber or ALL DLL VLL GLL UVLL UGLL subscriber Table AP The table AP contains an application pack AP AID as key to it the AP type and the AP pack state primary and secondary Table AP Slot The table AP Slot contains inventory information and the slot states of the AP slots in the AnyMedia Access System As key to the AP Slot table the application pack AP AID is used Table E1 feeder The table E1 feeder contains a physical E1 feeder AID as the key to it the E1 feeder state primary and secondary and a reference to the served link Table IO_E1 Pack The table 1O_E1 Pack contains the IO_E1 AID as the key to it the IO_E1 pack type the protection permission and the IO_E1 pack state primary and second ary Table TO_E1 Slot The table IO_E1 Slot contains inventory information and the slot states of the IO_E1 slo
204. 4 61 4 8 N in dependence on the HDSL interface application mode 4 62 4 9 Services depending on HDSL application mode 4 75 4 10 AlDs for DLL subscriber channels 4 89 4 11 Supported managed NTUs 4 120 4 12 Provisioning variant table 4 242 4 13 COMDAC protection 4 284 4 14 Synchronization sources protection 4 284 4 15 V5 2 communication channel protection 4 284 4 16 lO HDLC protection 4 285 4 17 IO E1 protection 4 285 E S 5 Fault management for narrowband services 5 1 5 1 Sample for using miscellaneous alarms to the ONU 5 17 5 2 Integrated test capabilities 5 29 5 3 Integrated tests for analog drops 5 30 5 4 AC foreign voltage range of a b wire of a drop 5 40 5 5 DC foreign voltage range of a b wire of a drop 5 40 5 6 Feeding voltage range for POTS ISDN APs 5 41 5 7 Insulation and loop resistance measurement of a b wire of a drop 5 44 5 8 Capacitance measurement of a b wire of a drop 5 47 5 9 Distance to open measurement for a specified drop 5 49 5 10 DTMF tone measured parameter for a specified drop 5 58 5 11 Pulse dial character measured parameter for a specified drop 5 58 5 12 Tone test parameter for a specified drop 5 63 5 13 Application pack test access capabilities external test head 5 83 5 14 Possible HDSL loopbacks in point to point mode and in unstructured point to point mode 5 111 5 15 Possible HDSL loopbacks in V3 point to point mode 5 113 5 16 Possible HDSL loopbacks in single pair mode 5 114 5 17 Possible HDSL loopbacks in
205. 4 7 11 2 Blocking started transient status condition 4 248 4 7 11 38 Alarm suppression 4 248 4 7 12 Re provisioning scenarios 4 248 4 7 12 1 Extension of dataset 4 248 4 7 12 2 Scenario for moving subscribers between interfaces Dual homing 4 251 4 8 Re provisioning commands 4 253 4 8 1 Provisioning a V5 provisioning variant 4 253 4 8 2 Editing a V5 provisioning variant 4 254 4 8 3 Copying a V5 provisioning variant 4 256 4 8 4 Initializing a V5 provisioning variant 4 257 4 8 5 Switching a V5 provisioning variant 4 258 4 8 6 Verifying the availability of a V5 provisioning variant 4 259 4 9 Inventory management 4 260 4 9 1 Inventory for ONU Subshelf entities 4 262 4 9 2 NTU inventory data 4 262 4 9 3 Retrieving equipment RTRV EQPT 4 263 4 9 4 Retrieving external equipment RTRV EXTEQPT 4 268 4 10 Clock synchronization management 4 271 4 10 1 External synchronization mode 4 271 4 10 2 Free running mode 4 273 4 10 3 Clock recovery from E1 feeder 4 274 4 10 4 Clock recovery from station clock interface SCI 4 274 4 VI lIssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Contents 4 10 5 4 10 6 4 10 7 4 10 8 4 10 9 Clock recovery from COMDAC Synchronization alarms Retrieving synchronization mode RTRV SYNCN Setting synchronization mode SET SYNCN Operating synchronization switch OPR SYNCNSW 4 11 Protection switching 4 11 2 Synchronization source protection 4 11 38 V5 2 communication channel protection 4 11 4 lO HDLC protection 4
206. 4 75 Provisioning of A UGLL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the UGLL subscribers lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface allo cates up to two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL applica tion pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a UGLL subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service There fore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the 4 108 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capable of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked All 32 timeslots providing the service for an unique UGLL subscriber are allocated in the same E1 feeder UGLL indepen The UGLL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders dent of V5 which are exclusively used for unstructured leased line purpose Provisioning For provisioning a UGLL service also the layered structure as shown in objects of UGLL Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that four objec
207. 5 the setup starts not automatically on go to Step 3 your PC Step 3 Select Run in the start menu Step 4 Type the following input in the command line but replace the CD ROM drive x with the name of your CD ROM drive x setup exe and press OK System Response The following window appears InstallShield Self extracting EXE Es This will install AnyMedia Graphical System Interface Do you wish to continue Figure 1 5 InstallShield window 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 9 GSI software for narrowband services Software Installation from CD ROM Step 5 If you want to install the AnyMedia Access System Graphical Sys tem Interface click on the button Yes To cancel installation click on the button No System Response During start up of the installation program the following message is displayed ArvMedia Graphical System Interface Setup iz preparing the Installs hieldir Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait k TE Figure 1 6 Setup window Step 6 Follow the instructions that appear in the dialog boxes The GSI installation program guides you through the setup The following window prompts you for the path where you wish to in stall the GSI Choose Destination Location Setup will install AnyMedia Graphical System Interface in the following directory To install to this directory click Next To install to a different directory
208. 5 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 interface entity by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 6 Delete the specified V5 user port entity by entering DLT V5UP see Chapter 3 4 28 page 3 120 Step 7 Delete the ROC by entering DLT ROC see Chapter 3 4 59 page 3 151 Step 8 If the V5 1 interface is not used by another service optionally exe cute the V5 x interface degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 4 page 3 83 End of steps 3 3 13 3 Degrowth of a ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 interface Purpose To delete a semipermanent leased line link ROC connection via V5 2 interface Procedure Step 1 Move the ROC out of service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 3 4 20 page 3 112 Step 2 Instruct the NE to delete the routing entry using the ROC within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by entering DLT ROUTE see Chapter 3 4 60 page 3 152 Step 3 Set the IP parameters for the ROC to the initial default values by en tering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 Step 4 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 interface entity by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 5 Delete the specified V5 user port entity by entering DLT V5UP see Chapter 3 4 28 page 3 120 Step 6 Delete the ROC by entering DLT ROC see Chapter 3 4 59 page 3 151 Step 7 If the V5 2 interface is not used by anothe
209. 5 2 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to delete cross connections between V5 2 protection groups and V5 timeslot objects The related interface must be in an administrative pri mary service state OOS The V5 timeslot type remains as a communication chan nel To change the timeslot type to be a bearer channel the ED V5TS command must be used Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS PGTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET CRS PGrS FAID ALD te sl eVvar _ VARI where AID1 v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group AID2 Vols 7a 16 Soy Loe oy AID of the V5 2 timeslot PVAR vVopVar 1 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS PGTS section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu
210. 5 2 timeslots ENI CRS POIS o VoZp0 s l Vets 2Za6 ENTSCRS PGIS iI VI 2O Sn A VLS 2L Step 19 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 communication channels ENI CRS POCC TIV oC C ALN Ron ENT CRSSPGCCI SV 90CC o A2 No2 pO Step 20 Move the V5 ISDN PRA lines in service ED PRALCN S DESS eee Se ED PRALN 1 tHo22 2222 53 Step 21 Move the HDSL interfaces in service ED HDS C thes Leese oe ED HDS LCs Nds 7s eS Step 22 Move the V5 links in service ED VS Li Shoe li eee Se MDa Slates tr eS Step 23 Move the V5 2 interface in service ED Vouwle SoH oa ees Se End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 311 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples rr TF ee 4 12 6 Example for provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA interface Purpose This example is to create a V3 ISDN PRA service with the following parameters link 2 E1 feeder 4 on IO_E1 3 application pack 12 HDSL interface 1 port 1 line termination 53 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack ENT FORI t lt 26eLl 3 Step 2 Define the V3 link ENT V gt bGsi Vo lA Aarra alsel Step 3 Define the application pack ENTSAP i ra p la 12533 LES S03 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface BENT HDSL thdsl 1 2 2drop drop l 12 1 apmode v3pp Step 5 Define the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber ENT V3LN A besos ss haSsl hdsel i gt Step 6 Define the cross connection
211. 5 7 3 5 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Purpose This procedure is to create an unstructured 2 Mbps leased line service according V 35 V 36 or X 21 UVLL service 4 134 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning Procedure Step 1 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the ULL link by entering ENT ULLL see Chapter 4 6 30 page 4 186 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 5 Define the UVLL subscriber by entering ENT UVLLN see Chapter 4 6 35 page 4 195 Step 6 Define the cross connections between UVLL subscriber and ULL link by entering ENT CRS ULLL see Chapter 4 6 38 page 4 201 Step 7 Move the UVLL subscriber in service by entering ED UVLLN see Chapter 4 6 43 page 4 206 Step 8 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 9 Move the ULL link in service by entering ED ULLL see Chapter 4 6 46 page 4 209 End of steps 4 5 7 3 6 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according G 703 Purpose This procedure is to create an unstructured 2 Mbps leased line service according G 703 UGLL service Procedure Step 1 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chap
212. 5 interface B It must be noted that a management con nection must exist to the system for this recovery procedure 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 251 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning Current Dataset Provisioning Variant Current system Provisioning Variant Current Dataset for interface A for interface A dataset for interface B for interface B Generate prov variant copy PVAR 10 PVAR 20 PVAR 60 PVAR 50 5 et prov variant to available for interface A PVAR 10 PVAR 20 PVAR 60 PVAR 50 Prov variant without Prov variant with subscribers to protect subscribers to protect Switch variant of interface A via TL1 command Y Set prov variant to unavailable for interface A We SE D A a PVAR 20 PVAR 10 s PVAR 60 PVAR 50 PVAR 60 NN I Failure of interface A PVAR 20 PVAR 20 PVAR 10 PVAR 50 Switch variant of interface B via TL1 command or via V5 protocol of interface B PVAR 20 PVAR 10 PVAR 50 PVAR 60 Figure 4 49 Re provisioning scenario moving subscribers between interfaces dual homing 4 252 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning commands 4 8 Re provisioning commands Commands for This section gives a detailed description of the commands used in the re provi re provisioning sioning procedures Chapter 4 7 12 procedures 4 8 1 Provisioning a V5 provisioning variant
213. 8 Moving an ISDN BRA line out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an ISDN BRA line to OOS To change the administrative primary service state only the pri mary service state and the mode must be given Assumptions The ISDN BRA line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ILN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDS ENA LDS Ss MODE Poa where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination MODE F RCD NORM shutdown mode FRCD forced The subscriber is immediately put to OOS with disrupting an active Call NORM normal The subscriber is shut down in cooperation with the connected exchange which means for example that the subscriber can finish a currently active call before the shutdown PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ILN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 100 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving V5 ISDN PRA line to OOS A T 3 4 9 Moving a V5 ISDN PRA l
214. 88 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 1 LP Z100 ENT LLL Ill 1 1 e1 1 1 1 ALL sub scriber LL link Application pack Physical sub E1 data 4xEl XE feeder data scriber data ENT ALLN It 1 drop drop 1 1 1 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 1 1 llts 1 1 Figure 4 26 Provisioning data for an analog leased line example 4 5 5 6 DLL subscribers DLL subscribers in The AnyMedia Access System supports digital leased lines DLL over the the AnyMedia U interface according to ETR 080 with or without managed NTUs With managed Access System NTUs the D channel is used for operation and maintenance and can not be used for data transmission Connection of DLL A DLL subscriber has the transmission capacity of two B channels 2 x 64 kbps subscribers and one D channel 16 kbps A DLL subscriber can be connected to the network via up to three 64 kbps leased line interface timeslots two for the B channels and one for the D channel The 16 kbps D channel is carried over a 64 kbps timeslot The association of a DLL subscriber with a leased line interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 Table 4 10 AIDs for DLL subscriber channels Bit assignment in Subscriber bearer channel leased line link AID Associated channel timeslot ltoc 1 1024 1 B1 channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Itoc 1 1024 2 B2 channel 11213 4 5161718 Itoc 1 1
215. 9 Step 16 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 2 timeslot by entering ENT CRS PGTS see Chapter 4 6 27 page 4 180 Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 communication channel by entering ENT CRS PGCC see Chapter 4 6 28 page 4 182 Step 18 Move the ROC in service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 4 6 55 page 4 220 Step 19 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 20 Move the V5 2 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 140 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 interface 4 6 Provisioning commands Commands for This section gives a detailed description of the commands used in the provision provisioning ing procedures Chapter 4 5 7 1 to Chapter 4 5 7 4 procedures 4 6 1 Provisioning a V5 interface Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 interface entity The initial administrative primary service state of the interface entity is OOS out of service The service degrade threshold defines the percentage of link faults at which an alarm is to be sent by the system The HDLC flag monitoring defines whether the communication chan nels contained in this interface shall be flag monitored The system automatically creates an entry in the V5 provisioning variant table for the ac
216. ACTIVE LED lights on the first COMDAC in serted Verify that all LEDs are extinguished on the second COM DAC inserted End of steps Next procedure CIU installation and GSI connection see Chapter 2 3 2 page 2 7 2 6 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection 2 3 2 CIU installation and GSI connection Purpose To provide testing and craft interface functionality to the system Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure Atas Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Verify that the jumpers on the CIU are set in the correct position for the correct position see Table 2 1 page 2 8 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 7 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection B See Jumpers MP4 MP5 Figure 2 1 Location of the jumpers on the CIU Table 2 1 Jumper settings for the different station clock configurations Jumper MP4
217. AID line termi nation bearer channel the last number that is the bearer channel number desig nates the channel 1 is the B1 channel 2 is the B2 channel and 3 is the D chan nel DLL independent The DLL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders of V5 which are exclusively used for this purpose Provisioning For provisioning a digital leased line service also the layered structure as shown objects of DLL in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that three objects subscribers have to be provisioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a digital leased line service These three objects are DLL subscriber LL interface and leased line service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a DLL DLL service service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 27 page 4 91 gt NOTE To ensure end to end data transmission the CPEs at both subscriber sides have to support the same formatting standards for example V 110 X 50 X 51 It is up to the network operator to select the appropriate CPE de vices the AnyMedia Access System is transparent for the mentioned data formatting standards 4 90 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning LL
218. ALN DFLT NTU parameters The default NTU parameters which are established by initialization of the nonvol atile data storage NVDS are as follows CLKMODE SYNC DATABITS 8 V14MODE BASIC RTS2CTS 11MS RTS STD RLSD STD DSRDTR STD REMLP ENABLED BYTETIMING DISABLED EXTCLK ENABLED ASTIMER 0 ASRETRYTIMER 0 Related provisioning commands ED NTU DFLT RTRV NTU DFLT Alarm output The alarm severities are predefined according to the following table relays Table 4 1 Predefined alarm severity levels for the alarm output relays Default Alarm Severity Alarm Output Relays AnyMedia Signal Level on the CIU Designation MN REL1 MN MJ REL2 MJ CR REL3 CR Related provisioning commands SET ATTR AIO RTRV ATTR AIO Alarm cut off mode The default alarm cut off mode which is established by initialization of the nonvol atile data storage NVDS is as follows ACOMODE MAN Related provisioning commands SET ACO RTRV COND Alarm severity The severity of alarm conditions is provisionable Upon initialization of the nonvol provisioning atile data storage the following severities are established Some conditions may 4 34 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters have different service effect so they occur several times in the table with different severity levels Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Provisioned Severity AID Condition Service Effect Level
219. AnyMedia Access System can provide a digital leased line service These four objects are HDSL interface GLL subscriber LL interface and leased line service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a GLL GLL service service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 32 page 4 100 gt NOTE To ensure end to end data transmission the CPEs at both subscriber sides have to support the same standards It is up to the network operator to se lect the appropriate CPE devices at both sides 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 99 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning LL services fee ee channel id A ee Se a7 ius is Ene O E gt oO wxi f SS P Q gt gt Line Term GLL subscriber GLLN zo AID HDSL in service nr of start parame z m terface state TSs TS ter u ae E S E aa R a A P 2 AD servicestate J T BRE 2 ey es amp aee oa 5 rere oa 1 AD user TS user tne ype serv state 2 a es cag A e fen s e e 5 a i z epe z 5 ar 7 e fon S iena N F e ee ee CAID used feeder service state parameter e A ea E e e 5 eee SS ee a AID used HDSL port application mode service o e ee oO state s E E E a 2 rr a me i a e e mmm mm mmm Om mmm mE Port AID service state served HDSL log interface AID_ service sta
220. B OffLine HB OffLine GSI Leam Mode Enabled Figure 1 21 Status bar 1 30 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows 1 5 4 Alarms and conditions reporting win dow Alarm window In the Alarms and Conditions Reporting window a list of all active system alarms and conditions is displayed This window can be displayed by m Clicking on the respective icon in the toolbar m Selecting the Fault Alarms menu option System SystemO00 Alarms and Conditions Reporting aofa Evtralnfo 01 07 10 45 29 ap 1 1 circuit pack Failed Narowba 01 01710 45 29 ap 1 11 circuit pack failed Narowba 01 01710 45 29 comdac 1 2 circuit pack failed Narowba 01 01710 45 29 i0e1 1 3 circuit pack failed Narowba 01 01710 45 29 i0e1 1 4 circuit pack Failed Narowba i Narrowband Hear BE Slam I Broadband Figure 1 22 Alarms and conditions reporting window Table 1 8 Column headings in the alarm and conditions reporting window Column heading Meaning Severity Indicates the severity level of the respective alarm The entries consist of an abbreviation for the alarm severity level and an LED symbol or a check mark for cleared alarms Critical alarm cr lf the alarm is active additionally a red LED is dis played Major alarm mj lf the alarm is active additionally a red LED is dis played Minor alarm mn lf the alarm is active additionally a yellow LED is
221. Chapter 4 11 8 page 4 291 3 6 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release Step 10 Move the old IO_HDLC to OOS by Moving an IO_HDLC out of ser vice see Chapter 3 4 22 page 3 114 Step 11 Delete the old O_ HDLC by following the procedure Deleting an IO_HDLC pack see Chapter 3 4 61 page 3 153 gt NOTE Deleting one of the two O_ HDLCs deprovisions the system from IO HDLC pack protection Step 12 Remove the old IO_HDLC End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 7 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release rr E 3 2 2 Replace COMDAC s COM500 by COM501 Introduction Release 1 4 of the AnyMedia Access System requires the use of the COMDAC COM501 Therefore the COMDAC s COM500 have to be replaced by COM501 Before replacing the inserted COMDAC s COM500 by the COM501 make sure that the new COMDAC s are pre loaded with the correct SW For details see the System Release Description which is shipped together with the COMDAC SW IF AND THEN the new COMDAC s you want to prepare the pre loaded COMDAC are not pre loaded upgrade one in the warehouse by following the with the correct SW AnyMedia Access Software upgrade via boot down System load simplex mode procedure see Chapter 4 3 5 page 4 26 and then at the site go to the Replacing COMDAC COM500 by COM507 procedure see C
222. D 1t 1 1024 Leal Step 8 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT UVLLN command to en line is not provisioned ter the provisioning information go to Step 9 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 10 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 9 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT UVLLN see Chapter 4 6 35 page 4 195 Step 10 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 9 page 3 58 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 39 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UGLL subscriber growth ese ee 3 3 4 12 UGLL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface with application mode UPP exists Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface with application the provisioning information go to mode UPP is provisioned Step 3 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 4 such an HDSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Create the HDSL interface entity with application mod
223. DSL sts STS nes Nis Ceeclk ExXCLA eCres CES lydsr Dsk let rsdaRKLSOI S PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination TYPE V35 V36 X21 data interface type v35 V 35 data interface V36 V 36 data interface X21 X 21 data interface HDSL hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface 4 190 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a VLL subscriber ee STS 1 31 start HDSL timeslot NTS 1 31 number of HDSL timeslots TXCLK INTR INTF EXT transmit clock select INTR raising edge of internal send timing signal ST INTF falling edge of internal send timing signal ST EXT external terminal timing signal TT Ors OFF ON STD clear to send OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard DSR OFF ON STD data set ready OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard RLSD OFF ON STD receive line signal detection OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard PST IS OOS administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service gt NOTE Clear to send and data set ready are only applicable for data interfaces ac cording to V 35 and V 36 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 191 Configurati
224. DSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Verify whether there is free capacity on the HDSL interface Follow the RTRV HDSLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV HDSLIS IAID where AID hoslts 1 s12ta 1313 AID of the HDSL interface timeslot Step 4 IF THEN the RTRV HDSLTScommand reports use the ENT HDSL command to enter that there are not enough HDSL the provisioning information for an ad timeslots on the HDSL interface which ditional HDSL interface go to Step 5 can be used the RTRV HDSLTS command reports go to Step 6 that there are HDSL timeslots on the HDSL interface which can be used Step 5 Create the HDSL interface entity by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 35 System modification growth degrowth for NB services GLL subscriber growth CO S Step 6 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 7 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 9 the HDSL interface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 8 gt NOTE The change to OOS is service affecting for en
225. December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Table V3 ISDN Data for the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber are stored in the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber PRA subscriber table There is one V3 ISDN PRA subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL logical interface and the service state primary and secondary When a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termination id and the HDSL logical interface One V3 ISDN PRA subscriber allocates one HDSL logical interface 32 logical timeslots which is provisioned for V3 application mode No other service can be provided by the allo cated HDSL logical interface If no service state is contained in the command ser vice state OOS is used If a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber is created its own access identifier is entered internally to the HDSL logical timeslot table The command is rejected if either a table entry with the specified V3 subscriber id already exists or the HDSL logical interface is not able to support the V3 service A V3 ISDN PRA subscriber allocates all 32 timeslots of the logical HDSL inter face These timeslots must be cross connected to timeslots provided by the V3 in terface All 32 timeslots are cross connected internally to the same V3 interface and the timeslot number of the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber is th
226. Define the cross connection between V5 user port and V5 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 3 IE THEN the object to grow is a V5 1 interface go to Step 4 the object to grow is a V5 2 interface go to Step 5 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot by entering ENT CRS BCTS see Chapter 4 6 19 page 4 171 Step 5 Move the POTS line in service by entering ED PLN see Chapter 4 6 20 page 4 173 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 55 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Connection serv node subscriber ese ee 3 3 7 2 ISDN BRA subscriber Procedure Step 1 Verify with the RTRV CRS UPI command the cross connection to the V5 1 V5 2 interfaces specified by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV CRS UPI command reports use the ENT CRS UPI command to that the user port is not cross con enter the cross connection go to nected Step 2 the RTRV CRS UPI command reports contact the provisioning center to verify different provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Define the cross connection between V5 user port and V5 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 3 IF THEN the object to grow is a V5 1 interface go to Step 4 the object to grow is a V5 2 interface goto Step 5 Step 4 Define two cross connections between both
227. FAULT LED flashing at 1 Hz during IO_E1 self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than one minute System Response The pictorial representation of the system is updated to show the installed IO_E1 packs at the connected GSI Step 5 Verify that the IO_E1 appears correctly on the pictorial representa tion of the shelf and that only the ACTIVE LED remains lit on the IO_E1 pack End of steps gt NOTE The IO_E1 pack can be used for protection purposes only when it is provi sioned by entering the TL1 command ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Next procedure Setting clock synchronization parameters see Chapter 2 3 17 2 40 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting synchr parameters 2 3 17 Setting clock synchronization parameters Purpose To specify the primary and or secondary source of clock synchronization Background Correct system synchronization is necessary to prevent clicks pops and dropped calls and to assure high quality data and facsimile services When the system is providing subscriber service it must be loop timed to an input E1 signal however it can be configured for free running operation to facilitate turn up and testing Free running operation is an abnormal condition gt NOTE If the system is not connected to a Local Exchange LE the system s syn chronization mode can be set to free running FRNG to avoid alarm indica tions
228. GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message Oe So ee et oe where SID This is the new name of the NE to which the command is ad dressed The SID can have up to 20 characters It may contain any combination of alohanumerics the pound the dash and the underscore _ character The default value is defined as SYSTEMOO gt NOTE The SID must be unique take the correct value from the engineering work order gt NOTE The SID should have the same value as the site ID entered for the AFM ina mixed narrowband broadband configuration The provisioning of the param eter site ID is described in the ATM xDSL GSI operation Provision Retrieve Main Shelf Parameters which can be found in the Commands and Proce dures included on the customer documentation CD ROM Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section SET SID in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps Next procedure Setting the date and time see Chapter 2 3 11 2 24 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the date and time a SeS 2 3 11 Setting the date and time Purpose To set the system date and time Procedure Step 1
229. GSI start screen and main window Main Window In the main window of the GSI all other windows are displayed No GSI window can be placed outside the main window The main window provides the top menu of the GSI described in Chapter 1 4 1 page 1 24 and if selected the toolbar and the command buttons see Figure 1 8 page 1 13 1 28 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows 1 5 3 Shelf view Shelf view window _ The shelf view window is part of the GSI main window A E C a E C1 Di Ei 1 ef La ef oa oa e W Connection area FLT ac HJ HH CLF CLF k ua u Pack area is tae a 4 10 he Lind Ssee77r sean Dr Provisioned View Figure 1 19 Shelf view window example Shelf view areas It consists of the following areas m Connection area m Pack area Depending on the GSI mode connected or not connected the shelf popu lation is displayed f not connected to the system the displayed shelf is empty The displayed shelf can be populated with generic packs by per forming the retrieve current equipment function f connected to the system the shelf is populated with the current shelf configuration The shelf view window displays the current shelf configuration including m One or two common data and control COMDAC units m One communication interface unit CIU m Upto four quad E1 interfa
230. H HE HEH HE HE EE EE M El feeder AID f service state served subscriber AID service state parameter servedink 1 CS ey E ee 12 00S AUTO pin subscr 2 errand renee ees onal eal EZA 16 32 l service state served subscriber m Poro St 2 2 oosa pm ssr z E o a foose pon o T a ee a as ere ees a z E aE ape poue a H S o Z Ha O o S S ae fee a ajoo p o e ce Aa Q z gt oo AP IO_E1 P pack ie AID_ AP ype serve state AD J packiype parameter service state 2 3 at ian a8 ae beat 00S NAC a sl 5 st PPIO0 OOS NAC J 5 X C eee es amp Q ee aa 2 go ae a a es ee eee ae is foe foe se m femm gt D o amp 5 D E AP slot IO_E1 slot E AID inventory daia service state AD femes Ho ffesam e a fossa f 2 2 fegseran 005 707 7 Ee x a a ieee eee C SONE et eee O is foe foso a is feos s Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 15 Table structure of the equipment packs and slots layer 4 68 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning 4 5 5 1 POTS subscribers Connection of POTS subscribers Provisioning of POTS subscribers Allocated Z ports of POTS subscribers Service activation of POTS subscribers Provisioning objects of POTS subscribers Table structu
231. I mostly a female 9 pin D sub connector The standard interconnection cable between GSI and CIU has been mod ified as follows Bridge Pin 1 and Pin 6 of the 9 pin SUB D connectors see Installation Manual for Rack Configurations Issue 3 LAN connector on SCP For directly connecting from the PC equipped with an Ethernet card to the LAN connector on the shelf connection panel SCP use a cable that meets the following criteria Cross over cable for 10BaseT Male RJ 45 connector on the PC side male J2 connector 9pin D sub on the SCP side Wired cross over as follows On J2 connector On RJ45 connector Pin 1 R connected to Pin 1 T Pin 2 T connected to Pin 3 R Pin 6 R connected to Pin 2 T Pin 7 T connected to Pin 6 R CONSOLE port on For directly connecting from the PC serial port s to the CONSOLE port AFM on the front of the AFM use a commercially available cable that meets the following criteria Commonly called an RS 232 cable Male DB 9 connector on one end female DB 9 connector on the other end Wired straight through Pin 1 to Pin 1 Pin 2 to Pin 2 etc 10BaseT port on AFM For directly connecting from the PC equipped with an Ethernet card to the 10BaseT port on the front of the AFM use a commercially available cable that meets the following criteria Commonly called an 10BaseT cross over cable Male RJ 45 connector on both ends Wired cross over That is
232. IA 232 cable connect the PC via its COM 1 serial port to the EIA 232C port that is marked CIT on the faceplate of the CIU Step 7 Switch on the GSI PC and start Windows 95 Step 8 From the Start button on the taskbar select Programs AnyMedia GSI System Response The GSI window opens The GSI displays the shelf with the COMDAC and CIU installed Step 9 Select the NE Operations Connect menu option in the GSI top menu System Response The Communications window is displayed 1 When using PPP or multiple NE mode a bridge may be required depending on the PC used see Figure 1 2 page 1 7 2 Windows 95 is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 9 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection Communications Select Link Se ETI Login User ID Password Settings Disconnect Connect l Learn Mode No Connection Figure 2 2 Communications window Step 10 Click on COMDAC tab Step 11 Select the port to which the cable from the CIU is connected by se lecting COM1 or COM2 gt NOTE If the system is installed in locations where an Ethernet LAN already exists it can be connected to the LAN the Ethernet access provides one telnet session For accessing the system via a telnet session see TCP IP con nection in Chapter 1 page 1 7 Step 12 Click on Settings System Response The Communication Settings po
233. ID and zero bits for the host ID After the destination address has been entered the default submask value should correspond to the class of the destination IP For example if 135 5 17 1 is entered for the des tination the default suobmask value should be the class B de fault mask 255 255 0 0 Class A 0 0 0 0 127 x x x Class B 128 x x x 191 x x x Class C 192 x x x 223 x X X where x is any number between 0 and 255 Classes D and E are not used in the system 4 218 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Creating a new routing table entry a GATEWAY Gateway IP Address The gate way address is the IP address of the gateway through which pack ets are sent to the destination ad dress The gateway must be ona directly connected network or subnetwork that means the gateway s network portion of an IP address and the correspond ing interface s network portion of an IP address must match METRIC 1 metric number The metric number is reserved for future releases to indicate a number of hops needed to traverse to get to the required destination In current release the Metric parameter is always 1 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ROUTE section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is ava
234. IP address of the ROC by following the procedure Setting the IP address see Chapter 2 3 13 Step 9 Instruct the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by following the procedure Set ting up IP routing see Chapter 2 3 14 Next procedure Verifying proper system turn up see Chapter 2 3 20 2 50 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Verifying proper system turn up a 2 3 20 Verifying proper system turn up Purpose To ensure that the system is functioning properly Assumptions m All physical connections are established m Provisioning in the Local Exchange LE for the AnyMedia Access System is completed m The AnyMedia Access System is correctly provisioned see Chapter 4 5 m Line s have been connected and activated to the Local Exchange LE Procedure Step 1 Verify that no FAULT LEDs are lit Step 2 Verify that the ACTIVE LED is lit on the following packs Active COMDAC CIU IO Eis 1O HDLC if applicable AFM if applicable Step 3 Verify that the yellow CLF LED on the IO_E1 is extinguished for all E1s connected to an LE Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU and if an ONU is used press the LED TEST button on the OCP Step 5 Verify that the LEDs on all installed packs light If any lights fail on a pack go to the Trouble clearing procedures for that pack see Chapter 5 7 Step 6 Follow the R
235. Issue 7 December 2000 4 255 Configuration management for narrowband services Copying a V5 provisioning variant E SeSe 4 8 3 Copying a V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedure is to copy the contents of a V5 provisioning variant The contents can either be copied from the current that is ACTIVE provisioning variant dataset or a standby provisioning variant into another provisioning variant In both cases the related V5 interface of the copy source and the copy destination must be equal To specify the current provisioning variant dataset as copy source either the V5 interface AID or the provisioning variant AID of the currently active provi sioning variant can be used For this copy operation the destination provisioning variant must be empty and in state NOT READY To quickly delete all contents of the copy destination use the command INIT V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 4 page 4 257 Procedure Step 1 Follow the CPY V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command CPY VSPVAR AILD1 AID2 where AIDI v5pvar 1 32 v5i 1 16 AID from which the provisioning variant contents are copied v5pvar V5 provisioning variant FOL V5 interface AID2 Voa E Ln AID of the V5 provisioning variant to which the contents are copied Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses se
236. LL interface are stored in the ULL interface table There is one ULL tenaca interface table per AnyMedia Access System The ULL interface table contains an ULL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder and the service state primary and secondary When an ULL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ULL interface id and the E1 feeder If no ser vice state is contained in the command default service state OOS is used The command to create an ULL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified ULL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already be ing used by another client Table HDSL Data for the HDSL interface are stored in the HDSL interface table There is one interface HDSL interface table per AnyMedia Access System The HDSL interface table contains an HDSL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL ports the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an HDSL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the HDSL interface id and the HDSL port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used When an HDSL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the HDSL interface timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslo
237. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations AnyMedia Access System 30 Channel Releases up to R1 6 User Service Manual Narrowband Services Binder 1 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 108298811 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies All rights reserved This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Lucent Technologies except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Ordering Information The order number for this document is 363 211 112 For more ordering information refer to How to Order Documents in the section About This Document How to Comment on This Document A feedback form is located immediately after the legal page of this document Please send or fax your comments and suggestions to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Trademarks 3Com is a registered trademark of 3Com Corporation 5ESS is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Acrobat Reader is registered tr
238. N It must be noted that the delivered result is only a snapshot and can change at anytime in the LE without further notice because it delivers information adminis tered in the connected LE 4 7 2 2 Switch over to new variant procedure initiated in AN Initiation in the AN The switch over to new variant procedure can be triggered with a TL1 command by the operator The AN sends a Switch over to variant message to the LE re questing the change to a specified provisioning variant From the AN point of view the active role of the AN of the Switch over procedure initiated in AN already stops here The receipt of the optional message Blocking started sent by the LE is the last difference of a Switch over procedure initiated in AN procedure to the next steps as defined for a Switch over initiated in LE procedure Behavior of the LE lt must be noted that this is only a request from the AN and is not necessarily granted by the LE Furthermore no reliable information can be given whether the LE has accepted the request and is preparing the switch over Only a negative re quest reject can be reported if the LE supports the V5 Cannot Re Provision mes sage On receipt of the Switch over to variant message the LE checks the avail ability of the requested provisioning variant in its database and grants the request or not m if the provisioning variant is not available the LE should respond with a Cannot Re Provisi
239. N for the HDSL interface In point to multipoint mode timeslot 16 is not created In V3 point to point and Unstructured point to point mode the full 2Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 is transparently trans ported through the system to the network interface The application modes SP PP and PM are supported by the HDSL AP LPS501 the modes SP PP PM and V3PP are supported by the HDSL AP LPS503 and the modes SP PP PM UPP and V3PP are supported by the HDSL AP LPS504 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT HDSL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 161 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an ISDN BRA line a SeSe 4 6 14 Provisioning an ISDN BRA line Purpose This procedure is to create an ISDN BRA subscriber line with its default values via the ILN default command ED ILN DFLT or with the provisioning data entered by the operator It specifies the physical port of an application pack which is to be used An ISDN BRA subscriber can be restricted to support only one B channel either B1 or B2 for ISDN traffic Optionally the administrative primary service state of the ISDN lin
240. N DARRERE l VLL bearer channels VLL subscriber LL interface 7 a T a A Z 7 2 a Za Z A Pal a Za HDSL logical timeslots Figure 4 30 VLL related timeslots relationships Example Figure 4 31 page 4 98 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a VLL subscriber 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 97 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 1 LP S501 HDSL AP Application pack data up to 4 sub ENT VLLN It 1 Adsl hdsl 1 sts 1 nts 4 ENT LLL iIll 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 HDSL VLL sub interface scriber HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data AGE feeder d scriber data ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 1 1 apmode P M ENT CRS LLTS Itoc 1 1 lIts 1 1 ENT CRS LLTS Itoc 1 2 lIts 1 3 ENT CRS LLTS Itoc 1 3 lits 1 4 ENT CRS LLTS Itoc 1 4 IIts 1 7 Figure 4 31 Provisioning data for a VLL subscriber line example 4 5 5 8 GLL subscribers GLL subscribers in the AnyMedia Access System Connection of GLL subscribers Provisioning of GLL subscribers The AnyMedia Access System supports two kinds of n x 64 kbps digital leased lines services over HDSL interface GLL and VLL GLL supports a digital leased line via a G 703 interface VLL supports a digital leased line via a data interface which can be either V 35 V 36 or X 21 In both cases the particular interface is provided by means of an NTU which is the fa
241. NTU has two primary service states IS and OOS These service states are divided into different secondary service states IS IS ECM IS MON IS TST OOS OOS NAC OOS TST The NTU has these service states in the following conditions m OOS NAC The initial state The U port is OOS m OOS The U port is IS Layer 1 is down m OOS TST The NTU or remote NTU has been looped by the AnyMedia Access System while in state OOS a non transparent loopback m S The U port is IS Layer 1 is up The drop is usable The NTU type matches the configured type m IS ECM The U port is IS Layer 1 is up The drop is usable The NTU type does not match the configured type m IS MON A non service affecting NTU alarm has been raised mg IS TST The NTU or remote NTU has been looped by the AnyMedia Access System while in state IS a transparent loopback 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 121 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning rr Te ee NTU provisioning This procedure is to provision a managed NTU for service procedure Step 1 Verify the values in the NTU default profile by entering RTRV NTU DFLT and correct them if they are not suitable by en tering ED NTU DFLT see Chapter 4 6 58 page 4 230 Step 2 Define the NTU entity by entering ENT NTU see Chapter 4 6 56 page 4 221 End of steps 4 5 7 Service provisioning Provisioning via For the provisioning of service a set of TL1 commands is provided With the
242. P is equipped in the correct slot based on the engineering work order IF THEN the slot is unequipped install the correct AP type go to Step 2 the slot is equipped with the incorrect contact the provisioning center to verify AP type the work order and or to determine whether the AP should be replaced the slot is equipped with the correct AP go to Step 7 type Step 2 Insert a new AP into the appropriate slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by press ing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response After the AP is inserted the FAULT LED on the AP flashes at 1 Hz during AP self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than one minute then the FAULT LED has to extin guish Step 3 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 4 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 7 Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the OCP gt NOTE The LED test is only working if the optical link is in operation that is the CLF LEDs on the OCP and on the OAP must be extinguished System Response All LEDs on all installed packs in the ONU light for approximately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous Status 3 18 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth ee Step 5
243. PU112 application pack to which the physical NTU is attached The NTU is used to provide a user service by creating a DLLN entity using the drop to which the NTU is attached The DLLN must be created after the NTU otherwise the ENT NTU command is rejected Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT NTU GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT NTU AID drop DROP type TYPE speed SPEED cLkmode CLKMODE databits DATABITS vL4mode V1L4MODE rts2cts RTS2CTS rts RTS clsd RLSD dsrdtr DSRDTR remlp REMLP bytetiming BYTETIMING extclk EXTCLK astimer ASTIMER asretrytimer ASRETRYTIMER where AID ntu 1 384 AID of the NTU DROP LdoroOpS lata Le ea a SUbCCOp 1 aoe lao pais 323 AID of the physical drop LY PE TER V24 ER V397ER XAL NTU type FR_V24FlexRate V 24 NTU FR_V35FlexRate V 35 NTU FR_X21FlexRate X 21 NTU gt NOTE FlexRate is a managed NTU type 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 221 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a managed NTU ee SPEED Uven 14K LOK KOR 48K 4K8 56K 64K 9K6 speed of the subscriber interface provided by the NTU 128K 128 kbps 14K4 14 4 kbps 19K2 19 2 kbps 1K2 1 2 kbps 2K4 2 4 kbps 48K 48 kbps 4K8 4 8 kbps 56K 56 kbps 64K 64 kbps 9K6 9 6 kbps Possible values of this parameter depend on the NTU type For V 35 NTUs only the speeds 48K through 128K are valid For V 24 NTUs only the s
244. Pins 1 crossed with Pins 3 Pins 2 crossed with Pins 6 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 3 GSI software for narrowband services System Requirements for the GSI Table 1 1 Requirements for the GSI Continued Hardware software Requirements Operating System Windows 952 US Version 4 00 950A or higher Windows 98 Memory minimum 64 MB of RAM 128 MB RAM is recommended Hard Disk Space 400 MB Web Browser Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer for viewing on line help a Windows 95 is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation b Windows 98 is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation c Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation d Internet Explorer is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation gt NOTE For the serial cables an angled D sub connector hood is required other wise the doors of the AnyMedia shelf cannot be closed 1 4 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Connecting PC to CIU TEE Eee ee 1 1 3 Network management concept connecting a PC to the CIU Ways to connect the The GSI can be connected to the narrowband part of the AnyMedia Access GSI System COMDAC in the following ways 363 211 112 The serial port on the PC is connected to the CIT port of the AnyMedia Access System which is located on the faceplate of the CIU pack EIA 232C connector see CIU connection either locally or remotely via a WaveStar ADM 4 1 based network or dial up
245. ROUTE section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 152 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an IO HDLC pack ae 3 4 61 Deleting an IO_HDLC pack Purpose This procedure is to delete one IO_ HDLC entity The specified IO HDLC must not serve any service that means it must be in administrative primary service state OOS Deleting the standby O_ HDLC deprovisions the I O_ HDLC pack protection for the system The last O_ HDLC can only be deleted in mixed POTS ISDN sys tem configuration if no HDLC termination is allocated by any user Assumptions IO_HDLC is in administrative primary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT IOHDLC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Dit lOHDLC ss ALD where AID iohdlc 1 1 2 AID of the IO_ HDLC gt NOTE Deleting one of the two IO_HDLCs deprovisions the system from IO_HDLC pack protection Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT IOHDLC sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of
246. RR related OAP only T FC INT A A N A N N A N A subap 1 8 1 8 N A N A N A N A N A lt Ue ee Ln SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA mj mn mn mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn mj mn Cr ene mj mj mn mn 4 38 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Continued Provisioned Severity AID Condition Service Effect Level mn an mn RAI PDI mn mn an drop t1 al mn an T BERL mn mn T BERL PDI mn an mn mn mn mn an mn an mn mn mn mn T BERL mn T BERL PDI mn mn mn SA mn T BERLN T BERLN 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 39 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 40 Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Continued Default provisioning parameters Provisioned Severity Level subdrop 1 all T BERLN PDI mn ciu 1 gt ecies pw sx sek or SYNC sa ott m RINGF JSA e sh 1 SYNCOOS SA er BKUPMEMP SA o NT JSA e onge PPR SA fos mn fa fe men fa fe pu a fe pu ha fe mooo f e La C MPRoPRMvE SA IMPROPRMVE NS fer iohdlc 1 all mens fa fe nns nsa fe T FC INT SA fer men a fe m sa fee meine ea sx ws m tos SA ts m Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning param
247. S delay Control RTS mode m Indication RLSD mode DSR DTR mode m Remote loopback inhibit mode m X 21 byte timing External clock mode 4 120 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services NTU provisioning a a 8 Anti streaming timer a Anti streaming retry timer Many of these attributes need not have a value specified when the NTU is created if no value is given then the attribute receives a default value from the NTU de fault profile The default profile may be viewed and changed by the TL1 com mands RTRV NTU DFLT and ED NTU DFLIT see Chapter 4 6 58 page 4 230 The initial values in the default profile are given in Chapter 4 4 page 4 32 Chang ing the default profile will only affect NTUs created in the future NTUs that al ready exist will not be affected even if they have attributes that have not changed from the default value Each time the NTU hardware is reset or power cycled it will reset all of these at tributes to values read from DIP switches internal to the NTU In such a situation the AnyMedia Access System downloads the NTU configurations again NTU status The user is able to retrieve the following current NTU status information information Control line status m Loopback status m Anti streaming state LED status These are all retrieved through the ISDN port using the RTRV EXTEQPT com mand see Chapter 4 9 4 page 4 268 NTU service states An
248. SLTS command reports use the ENT HDSL command to enter that there are not enough HDSL the provisioning information for an ad timeslots on the HDSL interface which ditional HDSL interface go to Step 5 can be used the RTRV HDSLTS command reports go to Step 6 that there are HDSL timeslots on the HDSL interface which can be used Step 5 Create the HDSL interface entity by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 3 32 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services VLL subscriber growth ee Step 6 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where ALD hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 7 IE THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 9 the HDSL interface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 8 gt NOTE The change to OOS is traffic af fecting for enabled services us ing this HDSL interface Step 8 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 9 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV LT
249. SW download o E n 4 3 2 Software upgrade via software download duplex mode Purpose Software release upgrades or bug fixes can be performed via software download from the GSI AEM to the COMDAC Assumptions This procedure assumes that m The operator is properly logged into the system via TELNET Two COMDACs are installed m There are no alarms in the system Procedure Step 1 IF THEN the NVDS database evolution is go to Step 2 available see SRD the NVDS database evolution is not go to procedure in Chapter 4 3 3 available page 4 16 Step 2 Create a copy of the NVDS database backup for configuration data security reasons see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 3 Step 3 Select the NE Configuration Software Download Download menu option Step 4 A GSI Software Download window opens Click on COMDAC tab Step 5 Navigate to the directory on the hard disk or on the CD ROM where the COMDAC software is stored Step 6 Select the file specified in the system release description download files have the extension di1d for CIT port in non PPP mode or bin for TELNET pre selected automatically by the GSI AEM Click on Open Step 7 IF THEN the GSI AEM is connected via TEL go to Step 8 NET the GSI AEM is connected via CIT port go to Step 10 in non PPP mode Step 8 The FTP Data Transfer Facility window opens 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 13 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgr
250. Services 4 5 3 3 4 Nx 64 kbps leased lines services according G 703 Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 Ill 1 Ill 16 hdsl 1 hdsl 512 It 1 1 1024 2 OMe elidi HDSL Application pack interface scriber HDSL specific Physical sub data scriber data 061 Euer E 4 x E1 feeder LL link E1 data f litbc 1 1 Itbc 1024 31 2 lIts 1 1 llts 16 31 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 256 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 10 Functional diagram of GLL Logical GLL Each leased line link object may contain provisioning data for its associated E1 in entities terface which are administered through TL1 commands Up to 31 GLL bearer channels can be cross connected to one leased line link For leased line timeslots no provisioning data are necessary The leased line timeslots can be cross con nected to the physical subscriber bearer channels The association is done by set ting up up to n cross connections between the bearer channels and the leased line timeslots The bearer channels have to be in the same leased line link The maximum number n of subscriber bearer chan
251. Step 13 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 14 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 129 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 15 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 commu nication paths by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18 page 4 169 Step 16 For a multilink V5 2 interface Define the V5 2 protection group by entering ENT V52PG see Chapter 4 6 26 page 4 179 Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 2 timeslot by entering ENT CRS PGTS see Chapter 4 6 27 page 4 180 Step 18 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 communication channel by entering ENT CRS PGCC see Chapter 4 6 28 page 4 182 Step 19 Move the V5 ISDN PRA line in service by entering ED PRALN see Chapter 4 6 22 page 4 175 Step 20 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 21 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 22 Move the V5 2 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 130 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisionin
252. Switch Duplex Equipment command instructs the system to perform a duplex switch from the active to the standby pack for the addressed resource The standby pack must be in service state IS and operational Procedure Step 1 Follow the SW DX EQPT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW DX EQPT AID where AID hdlc l AID of the resource hdlc 1 lO HDLC Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW DX EQPT sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 291 Configuration management for narrowband services Setting up periodic exercise rr Te ee 4 11 9 Setting up periodic exercises on the COMDAC SCHED EX Purpose The SCHED EX Schedule Exercise command instructs the system to set up an exercise schedule exercise interval and start time of the day of exercise to per form periodic exercises on the COMDAC Assumption A second operational COMDAC is installed Procedure Step 1 Follow the SCHED EX GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SCGHE DBAS ALD 2 INV Oro LTM where ALD core 1l INVL lt string gt consisting of 5 to 7 characters Exercise Interval
253. T GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RRL AL Dy where AID I 1 1024 Hs ote le Step 2 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT ALLN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 3 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 4 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 3 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT ALLN see Chapter 4 6 31 page 4 187 Step 4 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 5 page 3 57 End of steps 3 30 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services DLL subscriber growth ee ee 3 3 4 8 DLL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV LI ALD where AID 1t 1 1024 Barc al Step 2 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT DLLN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 3 the RTRV LT command reports
254. T1 ALM DISABLED TELNET1 DBCHG ENABLED TELNET1 ENV ENABLED TELNET1 EVT ENABLED TELNET1 SESSION ENABLED TELNET1 SW ENABLED TELNET1 TCA ENABLED TELNET1 LED ENABLED 2 28 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting messages to GSI AEM gt NOTE If you are connected to the system via a virtual circuit interface you will no tice that you do not get any autonomous messages even though the RTRV MSGMAP command tells you that all messages are currently en abled on that virtual circuit This is because by default there is no association in the database between the Interface Identifiers INTIDs for the OS application contexts and the virtual circuits To create this association you must use the ENT OSACMAP TL1 com mand 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 29 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the IP address E SeSe 2 39 13 Setting the IP address Purpose To configure each communication interface on the AnyMedia Mainshelf for IP communications Each address must be unique and must be in its own network or subnetwork that means the networks assigned to the interfaces must not overlap The AnyMedia Access System supports multiple communication interfaces and one or more can be active at the same time gt NOTE Make sure that you are using a value not already provisioned for another COMDAC in the network when provis
255. TRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV ALM 1 The OCP supports a LED test button which illuminates all LEDs of the OCP and all equipped packs in the ONU Subshelf NB and BB packs This test is possible only if a con nection to the AnyMedia Mainshelf is operational and will lit the LEDs for a specific time The LED test is performed under control of the COMDAC to be able to switch the LEDs to the correct state after end of the LED test 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 51 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Verifying proper system turn up ee Step 7 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section RTRV ALM in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps Next procedure thee THEN an Optical Network Unit ONU is execute the OAP installation procedure used see Chapter 2 3 21 page 2 53 an Optical Network Unit ONU is not execute Terminating the session proce used dure see Chapter 2 3 24 2 52 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures OAP installation 2 3 21 OAP installation Purpose Provide the optical link interface to connect an Optical Network Unit ONU which support
256. The logical V5 communication channel identifier must be identical to that of the local exchange gt NOTE The logical V5 communication channel identifier must be unique and is only used in the case of V5 2 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5CC section in 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 145 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 CC ee the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 146 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Changing V5 timeslot type a SeS 4 6 5 Changing V5 timeslot type Purpose This procedure is to edit a V5 timeslot entity Only timeslots 15 16 and 31 can be edited and changed to a different timeslot type The timeslot to be edited cannot have any cross connections The interface must be OOS out of service if the link is cross connected to an interface Assumption V5 x timeslot has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5TS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VSTS AID vs5ststype VSTSTYPE pvar PVAR where AID Worse Ieo e n lee 31 AID of the V5 timeslot VOTSTYPE Es OE OR V5 timeslot t
257. V5 communication channel 3 128 3 4 37 Deleting a V5 communication path 3 129 3 4 38 Deleting a cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot 3 130 3 4 39 Deleting a V5 communication channel 3 131 3 4 40 Deleting a cross connection between V5 link and V5 x interface 3 132 3 4 41 Deleting a V5 link 3 133 3 4 42 Deleting a V5 interface 3 134 3 4 43 Deleting a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 2 timeslot 3 135_ 3 4 44 Deleting a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel 3 136 3 4 45 Deleting a V5 2 protection group 3 137 3 IV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 es TTT Contents 3 4 46 Deleting a cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link 3 138 3 4 47 Deleting a cross connection between leased line termination bearer channel and leased line timeslot 3 139 3 4 48 Deleting a cross connection between unstructured leased line subscriber and unstructured leased line link 3 140 3 4 49 Deleting an analog leased line subscriber 3 141 3 4 50 Deleting a digital leased line subscriber 3 142 3 4 51 Deleting an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according V 35 V 36 or X 21 3 4 52 Deleting an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according G 703 3 4 53 Deleting a UVLL subscriber 3 4 54 Deleting a UGLL subscriber 3 4 55 Deleting a V3 link 3 147 3 4 56 Deleting a LL link 3 148 3 4 57 Deleting an unstructured leased line link 3 149 3 4 58 Deleting a cross
258. V5SUP v5up 23 ltype PLN 1t 1t 43 v5l3addr 1001 ENT V5UP v5up 24 ltype PLN lt 1t 44 v5l3addr 1002 Step 13 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 inter face ENT CRS UPL Ae Voup 22 VoL ENT CRS UPL voup A 3 vo1 34 BNI CRG UP Lei 5Sup 245V 51 33 Step 14 Define the V5 2 protection groups BNDLSVOZP GP VoOZpG S17 ENI VoZPGrevoZzpg o Z Step 15 Define the V5 timeslot type ED V5TS4 7006 Ll perre vo EStype CC BD VOLS Si VobSs 2 oL5 323 VOorSsrype CC Step 16 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 2 timeslots HNE CRS PGlSt Voz pG o 1 pV oUSs Z2 104 ENT CRo GloreVoO2pO o 4yp vote 2 lo Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V5 communication channels ENT CRO PGCCr4v5Cce 3 1l VoZ00 3 15 BN CRSO PGCC I VoCe 3 27 V592Zp0G 3 2 4 302 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 18 Move the POTS lines in service ED PLN IT 47 see Sse ED PLN 2 LIT Aortna rss ERD PECN Skea irer ES Step 19 Move the V5 links in service PDS VO Gey od bearta oLo BRS L IVIL A Ss Step 20 Move the V5 2 interface in service PDS Vole iOa reo End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 303 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples ESE 4 12 4 Exa
259. VI EKRIDS EA ENT V5Lie Vol 24r r ie lela 23 gt VOLK LDH L3 Step 4 Define the cross connections between V5 links and V5 2 interface ENT CROS LT ivo l 1 VoL ENTSCRSSLCITSVO LSZ VIL Step 5 Define the V5 communication channels EN T VoCeesyoCe s 102s VoCeLa 47 gt ENTS VICO IV CO 3 22 22 5oceicH 45 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 329 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type EDV TO rivo bo lalo Pi Vvorseype CC EDSVS TOV C A ISL Pv ES LN DEEL Step 7 Define the cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots ENT CRS CCTS sy 5Ce 3 1evoreHl 16 ENT CRS CClsetVvoCC 347 VocCe L L5 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths BNI VoCP Yt VoCp 3 Lat ts Vo ptp pee ENT Y OCP 29 Co 3 22 1s VO pL VOE FELI L BNTHVOCP r iNo ODA a VODLype Lerr ENT V5CP43VoCO 3 4 Sis Vvepleype pstn Step 9 Define the cross connections between communication paths and communication channels ENT CRo CPCCMySCp s Lyvoce 3 1 BNT CRO CPCC IIVO CO a Ar 7 0Ce e 17 ENTS CRO C PCCE S VCs o fv Ce oH BINT CRS CPCC et veep aCOaH4 7 V0 CeH 8 27 Step 10 Define the remote operations channel BNE ROCs 7O0 L gt Step 11 Assign the IP address information to the ROC SE D gt LP eToOCHdt tL PSIS Loon lf SUBMASK 239a LOO ZO Oe 202 REMI PS L924 266 Vaz INISTALTE UP Step 12 Create a default routing entry within the
260. VLL sub die pack interface scriber ULL link ata HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data AGE eder d scriber data up to 4 sub ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 1 1 apmode UP P ENT CRS ULLL It 2 ulll 1 Figure 4 37 Provisioning data for a UVLL subscriber line example 4 5 5 10 UGLL subscribers UGLL subscribers The AnyMedia Access System supports unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines ser in the AnyMedia vices via G 703 interface The interface is provided by means of an NTU which is Access System the far end of an HDSL transmission system Connection of UGLL services are provided by connecting 32 64 kbps timeslots supplied by two UGLL subscribers HDSL ports to 32 timeslots of one E1 port located on an IO_E1 pack FAC500B Both the subscriber and the service node side have to be provisioned to support unstructured 2 Mbps leased line For the service node side this has to be done for the E1 feeder The E1 feeder is used for unstructured 2 Mbps leased line service only The association of a UGLL subscriber with an unstructured leased line interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 The HDSL logical interface can operate in several modes which have to be provi sioned at the TL1 interface For UGLL service the unstructured point to point mode HDSL must be provisioned All possible services on top of an HDSL logi cal interface dependent on the provisioned application mode are shown in Table 4 9 page
261. _13S 2 ENI LUN bi 44 234 drop drop 1 14 1 Define the ISDN user ports ENT VSUP v5up 22 ltype ILN 1t l1t 42 v5efaddr 1000 ENT V5UP v5up 23 ltype ILN lt 1t 43 v5efaddr 1001 ENT V5UP v5up 24 ltype ILN lt 1t 44 vsefaddr 1002 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 1 inter face ENT CRS UP LT ty UO AAN Lm ENT CRS UPILS 2 Voup 23 Vo1 33 ENT CRS UPL 2 v5up 24 Naino 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 14 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 1 commu nication paths BN C CRS UPCE tS VOU 224 V 2Cp 3 3 ENT CRSSUPCP I SVO UDAN o Cpo A ENT GCRS UPCP aV o UD AAA VODE ENT CRS UPCP a V U0 2r VoD S ENIT CRSSUPCP iiy UDr V50C0 3 4 ENT CRSSUPCP TiVo UD eVo Cpo ENT CRS UPCP ii voU ZA Voc p 3 37 ENT CRS UPCP 7 voup 24 VoCp 3 4 END CRS UPCE ss voup 24 v59C0 3 5 Step 15 Define the cross connections between V5 line termination bearer channels and V5 1 timeslots BNI CRS BCIS tL bCcH421 Vv5ots l_ 13 BN ORS bC lott Veber 42 2 vote 173 ENT CRSSBCI S sl tbc 4321 vots 37 BN CRS BCLS os Lt beH435 2 vote l 44 BNI CRS BCIS 1 tbe 44 1 v5ts l 5 BNE CRS BCIS 4 ct be 44 2 V75ts 1 6 Step 16 Move the ISDN lines in service ED TLEN Sea ess se a Se EDS EN Sebo Satet sees BDSLEN Ss Les443 ce 1LSs Step 17 Move the V5 link in service RDS Vols eons es Se Step 18 Move the V5 1 int
262. a ROC id as the key to this table and the service state primary and secondary When a ROC is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ROC id If no service state is contained in the command the service state OOS is used The command is rejected if a table en try with the specified ROC id already exists Since provisioning and maintenance of the E1 feeder equipment layer and IO_E1 slot layer fora ROC are the same as for ALL the same tables are used Table LL interface Data for the LL interface are stored in the LL interface table and in the leased line timeslot table There is one LL interface table and one leased line timeslot table per AnyMedia Access System The LL interface table contains an LL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder the service state pri mary and secondary and the provisioning data When an LL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the LL interface id and the E1 feeder If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default pro visioning data and service state OOS are used When an LL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the leased line timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The leased line timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an LL interface is rejected if either a table entry
263. a e S ap T ooo cq E IO_E1 P pack 5 AID packiype parameter service state 1 FACS00 f provdata OOS NAC wn EEE a N 5 r EEE a eo pow SCS e a a Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 43 Table structure of SPLL ROC service via V5 1 interface 4 118 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services NTU provisioning Table ROC Data for the ROC are stored in the ROC table There is one ROC table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a ROC id as the key to this table and the service state primary and secondary When a ROC is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ROC id If no service state is contained in the command the service state OOS is used The command is rejected if a table en try with the specified ROC id already exists Since provisioning and maintenance of the E1 feeder equipment layer and IO_E1 slot layer fora ROC are the same as for PLN the same tables are used Example Figure 4 44 page 4 119 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning an SPLL ROC ENT V5UP v5up 1 lt roc 1 Itype S S PLL ENT V5I v5i 1 v5type v52 ENT V5L v5l 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 IO El E i User port l Interface o C V5 x specific Protocol type in 4xE1 feeder data terface ide
264. able is created the TL1 command must contain the UGLL subscriber id and ULL inter face id If the command is given and accepted the AnyMedia Access System cross connects autonomously all 32 timeslots of the UGLL subscriber to the 32 timeslots of the ULL interface The timeslot number of the UGLL subscriber and of the ULL interface is the same 1 1 mapping The TL1 command to create the un structured leased line service is rejected if either the UGLL subscriber entry or theULL interface entry do not exist or are already used by another unstructured leased line service Example Figure 4 37 page 4 108 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a UGLL subscriber 4 112 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 1 LP S504 ENT UGLLN It 2 hdsl hdsl 1 fdrsrc l0_E1 ENT ULLL ulll 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 HDSL AP HDSL sa pack interface i ULL link ata HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data AVE EL adr dat scriber data up to 4 sub ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 1 1 apmode UPP ENT CRS ULLL It 2 ulll 1 Figure 4 40 Provisioning data for a UGLL subscriber line example 4 5 5 11 Remote operations channel ROC ROC in the A remote operations channel ROC is used for transporting management infor AnyMedia Access mation between the AnyMedia Access System and the Graphical System Inter System face GSI EM in the case
265. abled services using this HDSL interface Step 8 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 9 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV LT AID where ALD 1t 1 1024 lt all 3 36 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services GLL subscriber growth i S Step 10 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT GLLN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 11 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 12 provisioning information the RT RV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 11 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT GLLN see Chapter 4 6 34 page 4 193 Step 12 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 8 page 3 58 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 37 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UVLL subscriber growth ese ee 3 3 4 11 UVLL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface with application mode UPP exists Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the pr
266. ade via SW download ee Step 9 Click on Connect This enables the system to download the software file with the ex tension bin System Response The report event message on the screen is software download in progress The progress bar appears in the FTP Data Transfer Facility window The software is downloaded to the COMDAC During the software download process the FAULT LED flashes at a rate of 2 Hz After successful software download an automatic side switch standby COMDAC becomes active COMDAC occurs followed by a system restart Go to Step 11 Step 10 Click on Open This enables the system to download the software file with the ex tension dld System Response The report event message on the screen is software download in progress The progress bar appears on the screen The software is down loaded to the COMDAC During the software download process the FAULT LED flashes at a rate of 2 Hz This process will last approxi mately three hours System Response Once the software download process is com plete the COMDAC self initializes All LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes After successful software download an automatic side switch standby COMDAC becomes active COMDAC occurs followed by a system restart Step 11 Create a new GSI AEM connection by
267. ademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AnyMedia is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies HiGain is a registered trademark of ADC Telecommunications Inc 2000 Internet Explorer is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Windows 95 and Windows 98 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation Quality Management System The Quality Management System QMS for Lucent Technologies Multiservice Access has been registered to ISO 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas DNV since June 1993 ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide It is a model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Telefax to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH How Are We Doing Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation Please use a copy of this page for your comments 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas a S S y 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document Make it more brief concise Add more step by step procedures tutorials Add more troubleshooting information Make it less technical Add more better quick reference aids Improve the index Improve the overview introduction Improve the ta
268. ady to insert them into slots m f possible open all circuit packs at a static safe work position using prop erly grounded wrist straps and static dissipating table mats If a static dissi pating table mat is used be sure that it is clean to ensure a good discharge path IMPORTANT Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge hb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge An electrostatic discharge wrist strap with a resistance between 250 KQ and tad 1 5 MQ should be worn when handling AnyMedia Access System packs to pre vent possible damage to the packs Before using the wrist strap check the wrist Strap for shorts opens and proper resistance value Do not use a wrist strap that does not pass these checks Hold packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal facilities Always observe the ESD instructions m Always store and transport circuit packs in static safe packaging Shielding is not required unless specified m Ensure that the rack is grounded m Keep all static generating materials such as food wrappers plastics and foam packaging away from all circuit packs On removal from the shelf im mediately put circuit packs into static safe packages m Whenever possible maintain relative humidity above 20 percent ESD wrist strap To reduce the possibility of ESD damage the shelves and the racks are equipped with a grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves u
269. ain shelf Clicking on View Shelf Subshelves Subshelf n displays the ONU Sub shelf n m Inventory Clicking on View Inventory Telephony shows the inventory data and ser vice states of an equipped pack Clicking on View Inventory Data opens a window to display the inventory info for data packs m Cross Connection Report Clicking on View Cross Connection Report shows the status of data cross connections Data Status Clicking on View Data Status shows the status of data ports 1 38 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions m TLISI MIB Clicking on the View TL1SI opens a window to enter TL1 commands or to monitor system output see Chapter 1 5 7 page 1 35 m Options Clicking on the View Options menu option opens a window for setting GSI options Select the topic for further description of the operations performed Logfile allows you to enter a log file name and to store it in a direc tory All the TL1 input and output which is shown in the TL1SI View window is logged that way if Active is checked Logfile Startup Appl Log Session n T Active _Lancel CAPROGRAM FILESSANYMEDIASG SI capt Bitdi Figure 1 29 Options Menu Logfile Startup allows you to select the start up mode Off line disconnected learn mode Connect to the System Ask User When starting the GSI the user is asked whether the GSI should be started in off line or conne
270. al state triggered by the operator The operator intends to move the unit from IS to OOS but needs a positive acknowledgment from the network to succeed 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 53 Configuration management for narrowband services Services Le Table 4 6 Examples of secondary service states Continued Secondary service state Meaning UEQ Unequipped The hardware is not present FLT Fault Hardware fault detected FEF Family of equip a whole group for example a subshelf is not ment failed accessible 4 5 3 1 V5 switched services Logical V5 entities To fulfill the layered model in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 the logical entities V5 link V5 interface V5 user port POTS line and ISDN line are introduced These entities are created and assigned by TL1 commands The following sections describe these entities for V5 1 and V5 2 4 5 3 1 1 V5 1 service Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 It 1 It1024 voup l voup 769 V5t l V5I 16 v5l 1 V5I 16 It 1 1024 voup l voup 769 V5i l v5i 16 v5I 1 v5l 16 el 1 1 1 e1 1 4 4 oo Al o ISDN line D Interface V5 link me Application pack Physical sub V5 x specific Protocol type in E1 data ai ada 4 x E1 feeder data scriber data data terface identifier D ay tes Gets E een ete E ey ee Ge see a i ee ee Ee T a a EA ee te Zs ee he Itbc 1 1 Itoc 1024 2 v5ts
271. ameters are as follows PAPARE IP 0 0 0 0 SUBMASK 0205 02 60 REMIP 0050 0 INTSTATE DOWN Related provisioning commands SET IP RTRV IP SID The default source identifier SID is system00 Related provisioning commands SET SID RTRV HDR Autonomous Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data storage all autonomous messages are message map routed to all operations interfaces provisioning CIT all TL1IMAINTENANCE all TLIMEMORYADMINISTRATION all TL1OTHER1 all TLITEST eli Related provisioning commands ENT MSGMAP RTRV MSGMAP ENT OSAC MAP RTIRV OSACMAP Security Upon initialization of the nonvolatile data storage the following user names and provisioning passwords are established LUCENTO1 UI PSWD 01 LUCENTO2 UI PSWD 02 Related provisioning commands ED USER SECU RTRV USER SECU ENT USER SECU 4 32 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters Customer The default configuration identifier for the customer configuration defining the data configuration set to be used by the system is CFGID 28 Related provisioning commands SET CFG CUST RTRV CFG CUST SW CFG ISDN configuration The default configuration identifier for the ISDN configuration defining the data set to be used by the system is CFGID 1 that is POTS only Related provisioning commands SET CFG ISDN RTRV CFG ISDN SW CFG Time and date Upon initialization the time and d
272. an ISDN AP is rejected at provi sioning time Each provisioned POTS subscriber allocates a Z port on the equipment layer The AnyMedia Access System supports a retrieval on the equipment layer with the physical access identifier as key to show the operator which Z ports are already allocated and which ones are not used for any service yet To activate the service for a POTS subscriber it must be associated to an already existing V5 x interface The POTS subscriber must be associated to a V5 x user port and in the case of V5 1 the subscriber bearer channel must be additionally cross connected to a V5 1 timeslot According to Figure 4 2 page 4 52 several objects have to be provisioned for the lines and the service assignments layer These objects are POTS subscriber V5 x interface and V5 x cross connection For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a POTS service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 16 page 4 70 Issue 7 December 2000 4 69 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning V5 user port F 2 user portia Line Term type used LineTerm parameter 22 I S ZO 2 PIN prov data V5 interface m ECO ey a ae AD protocoliype sericestte T ae ee o a pests gt Ss E ma ooo oS Line Term POTS subscriber PLN Si AID used service parameter served V5 ES Y Zport
273. and V5 x interface Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 user port and a V5 interface The V5 identification for example Layer 3 address for POTS and enve lope function address for ISDN of the user port to be cross connected must be unique within the specified V5 interface Multiple user ports can be assigned to a single interface Assumptions V5 user port and V5 x interface have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS UPI GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNIT CRS UPLt3 ALDI ALD L 2 sl pVar P VARI 4 where AID1 v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port AID2 eo eS le ko AID of the V5 interface PVAR VoIpVar Ll s32 4 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS UPI sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is
274. and system turn up procedures Setting up IP routing 2 3 14 Setting up IP routing Purpose Instruct the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table Up to 32 routing entries in the static routing table can be sup ported on the AnyMedia Access System Routing support on the AnyMedia Access System will enable to interconnect AnyMedia Access System s communi cations interfaces ROC 10BaseT and CIT with other communications interfaces and network devices connected to them This will allow remote access to the AnyMedia Access System and interoperability with the AEM and the GSI This procedure has to be executed if the equipment is not directly connected that is the connection of the GSI AEM to the AnyMedia Access System is established via a router For example it is possible to connect the GSI AEM via E1 ROC using a router and a transport network to an AnyMedia Access System and via the COMDAC of this AnyMedia Access System over LAN connection to other AnyMedia Access Systems Procedure Step 1 Create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table Follow the ENT ROUTE GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT ROUTE DESTINATION SUBMASK GATEWAY METRIC where DESTINA Destination internet protocol IP TION address The destination address is the network or host IP address reached via this route Use 0 0 0 0 address with
275. and the provisioning data When a DLL subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain the DLL subscriber id and the U port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The command is re jected if either a table entry with the specified DLL subscriber id already exists or the specified U port is already being used by another client Table LL interface Data for the LL interface are stored in the LL interface table and in the leased line timeslot table There is one LL interface table and one leased line timeslot table per AnyMedia Access System The LL interface table contains an LL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder the service state pri mary and secondary and the provisioning data When an LL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the LL interface id and the E1 feeder If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default pro visioning data and service state OOS are used When an LL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the leased line timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The leased line timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an LL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the spec ified LL interface id a
276. annel connection protocol Bearer channel con The bearer channel connection protocol is part of the V5 2 interface specification nection protocol Under the control of this protocol the available 64 kops bearer channels of the 2 Mbps links of the V5 2 interface are assigned dynamically to the subscriber pay load channels on a per call basis The LE is responsible for the assignment of the bearer channels It is possible to assign different subscriber payload channels to the same 64 kbps bearer channels at different times In this way concentration is achieved The concentration ratio is the number of subscriber payload channels to the available V5 2 bearer channels 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 55 Configuration management for narrowband services Services ESE For a V5 2 interface in a multi link configuration communication channels CCs can be protected In addition to the active communication channels standby channels may be defined which are used for protection of the active channels If an error occurs on an active channel the protection protocol switches the traffic associated to this communication channel to another standby channel which then becomes active V5 2 CC protection Figure 4 5 shows as an example the cross connections for communication chan nels protection from the viewpoint of provisioning 4 56 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Network side V5
277. apter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 125 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 10 For a multilink V5 2 interface Define the V5 2 protection group by entering ENT V52PG see Chapter 4 6 26 page 4 179 Step 11 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 2 timeslot by entering ENT CRS PGTS see Chapter 4 6 27 page 4 180 Step 12 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 communication channel by entering ENT CRS PGCC see Chapter 4 6 28 page 4 182 Step 13 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 14 Define the POTS line by entering ENT PLN see Chapter 4 6 11 page 4 156 Step 15 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 16 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 17 Move the POTS line in service by entering ED PLN see Chapte
278. are ALL subscriber LL interface and leased line service Table structure of For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of an ALL an ALL service service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 25 page 4 87 4 86 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning LL services gt WY subscriber bearer LL timeslot id service state gm channel id WY J Ox E 26 Ce a es m A o y y O LL timeslot 3 AD femes T 3 eM a e as Sooo o Sees e y y 3 a e a e E z 231s S a S ooo ee ee Z m a Line Term ALL subscriber LL interface WY AID usedZpor service state parameter AID usedteeder service state parameter open ee e ToS pemn eM IEW T o CE e S 3 ECE E e o e eo o S Eo o T wa o T _ 2 AD_ service state served subscriber AID _ service state parameter served interface m oa S S e S 8 eh osm n et E L Z JAE gt lt pov da r a ee e ry gt OF est ie e Sa ey ein eee Ske m W ME a E a e e Z diia 16 31 IS Al subscrd ees Ge oa ee S 16 32 oT eee E a S AP IO_E1 P pack S AD APipe sevis AD packiype parameter service state a E e st 1 ffo f povo O0S WAC o p Pm pom eE e l a O 3 ECE To Bes es es 7 s EC S a e proved Wo W e a a A 15 nne tone 16 LPZz100 IS Note Paramet
279. as to be obeyed to provide IO_E1 pack protection IO_E1 protection slot IO_E1 slots 3 nc paca ee om fea w Figure 2 5 Numbering of IO_E1 slots Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge bh Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the shelf doors by turning the latches Step 3 Verify that the jumpers on the IO_E1 are set in the correct position 120 Q for symmetrical cable 75 Q for coaxial cable If the jumpers are not in the correct position adjust them The default delivery set ting is 120 Q gt NOTE All nine jumpers on one IO_E1 pack see Figure 2 6 page 2 37 must be set to the same setting either 120 or 75 Q according to the E1 cable used 2 36 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures IO_E1 installation View of O_E1 components side faceplate to the right 09 09 m L WwW Re I Ww anil OU O U 09 m L WwW
280. ased line via V5 1 interface 3 77 3 3 13 3 Degrowth of a ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 interface 3 7 8 3 3 14 Service node interfaces degrowth 3 79 3 3 14 1 V5 2 degrowth link without communication channel s 3 79 3 3 14 2 V5 2 degrowth link with communication channel s 3 80 3 3 14 3 V5 2 degrowth secondary link 3 82 3 3 14 4 V5 x degrowth interface 3 83 3 3 14 5 V3 link degrowth 3 85 3 3 14 6 Leased line link degrowth 3 86_ 3 3 14 7 Unstructured leased line link degrowth 3 87 3 3 15 Degrowth from a mixed POTS and ISDN to a POTS only configuration 3 88 3 3 16 Degrowth from a configuration with ONU to a configuration without ONU 3 89 3 3 17 Degrowth of provisioning variants 3 90 3 3 18 Managed NTU degrowth 3 91 3 4 Related commands 3 92 3 4 1 Provisioning an Optical Network Unit 3 92 3 4 2 Provisioning a cross connection between ONU Subshelf feeder port and AnyMedia Mainshelf server port 3 93 3 4 3 Moving an Optical Network Unit in service 3 94 3 4 4 Moving a V5 x interface out of service 3 99 3 4 5 Moving a V5 x link out of service 3 96 3 4 6 Moving an HDSL interface out of service 3 98 3 4 7 Moving a POTS line out of service 399 3 4 8 Moving an ISDN BRA line out of service 3 100 3 4 9 Moving a V5 ISDN PRA line out of service 3 101 3 4 10 Moving a V3 ISDN PRA line out of service 3 102 3 4 11 Moving an analog leased line subscriber out of service 3 103 3 4 12 Moving a digital leased line subscrib
281. at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BD ALON SAL D e334 Po where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ALLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 103 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a DLL subscriber to OOS rr E 3 4 12 Moving a digital leased line subscriber out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a digital leased line subscriber entity to OOS To change the administrative primary ser vice state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED DLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command B aN A Pes lt P Ly where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected
282. ata scriber data up to 4 sub scriber lines Internally 32 64 kbps cross connections externally one 2 Mbps cross connection 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 16 V3 ISDN PRA lines can be provisioned Figure 4 6 Functional diagram of V3 Logical V3 entities Each of up to 16 V3 links transports the full E1 2Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected V3 ISDN PRA subscriber 4 5 3 3 Non V5 permanent leased lines Logical LL entities According to the layered model in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 the logical entities LL link ULL link and ALL DLL VLL GLL UVLL and UGLL subscriber are created and assigned by TL1 commands This section describes these entities 4 58 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services ee 4 5 3 3 1 Analog leased lines Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 Ill 1 IIl 16 It 1 1 1024 2 eii cel eAed en lt scriber LL link ne Application pack Physical sub E1 data 4 x E1 feeder scriber data Itoc 1 1 Itbc 1024 1 2 lIts 1 1 llts 16 31 1 The AP can be loc
283. ate information AP service state information Port state information 363 211 112 Hardware identifiers retievable for the IO_E1 packs are as follows m PCDE the impedance of the E1 feeder termination which is set by jump ers on the IO_E1 pack The ONU Subshelves are uniquely identified by a number This number is set by DIP switches on the ONU backplane and can be retrieved as part of the subshelf inventory data m PCDE the subshelf identifier Primary and secondary slot state information is also retrievable for each pack Primary slot state the valid values are as follows m IS in service m OOS out of Service Secondary slot state only exists for primary service state OOS the valid values are as follows m SWDL Software download m FLI Fault m INIT Initialization including diagnostics m UEQ Unequipped m FEF Family of equipment failed The AP service state information represents the provisioning view whether an AP and what kind of AP for example ISDN AP POTS AP is assigned to which AP slot The primary and secondary AP service state information is also retrievable for each pack Primary AP service state the valid values are as follows m S In service m OOS Out of service The secondary AP service state only exists for primary service state OOS the valid values are as follows m NAC Not accessible m MEA Mismatch of equipment attribute m SHD Shutting down The port state informati
284. ate PV1 READY An exception to this rule is if the cross connection is exactly the same as the one which exists in the current interface dataset or in another provisioning variant in state PV1 READY Such a cross connection does not violate the integrity of the provisioning variant and is there fore allowed 4 7 7 7 2 Checks on objects in current system dataset Creation checks At creation of an object in the current system dataset no additional checks against any provisioning variant are performed This is not necessary because the al ready defined checks against the current system dataset are sufficient Deletion checks A deletion of an object in the current system dataset must not violate the integrity of already existing provisioning variants If an object is cross connected in a provi sioning variant regardless its state PVO NOT_READY or PV1 READY the sys tem ensures that it can not be deleted Integrity checks A change of an object in the current system dataset must not violate the integrity of already existing provisioning variants This means that the system ensures that changing an attribute of an object in the current system dataset Is in harmony with the integrity rules in all provisioning variants Examples for these changes are the layer 3 address of V5 user ports or link identifier of V5 links If such a parameter is changed it is checked in each provisioning variant if the value is still acceptable in its provisioning
285. ate are set to the following Poma OE TIME 00 00 00 DATE 70 01 01 Related provisioning commands ED DAT RTRV HDR Exercise schedule The default exercise schedule exercise interval and start time of the day of exer cise to perform periodic exercises on the COMDAC is set to one a week at 3 00 am INVL 07 DAY STM 03 00 Related provisioning commands SCHED EX RTRV EXSCHED Equipage Upon initialization the equipage provisioning for the system is as follows provisioning eons is comdac 1 2 R Related provisioning commands ED CONFIG RTRV CONFIG POTS subscriber The default POTS subscriber parameters which are established by initialization of parameters the nonvolatile data storage NVDS are as follows TG 0 RG PPM N BN if FCL LOW Related provisioning commands ED PLN DFLT RTRV PLN DFLT ISDN BRA The default ISDN BRA subscriber parameters which are established by initializa subscriber tion of the nonvolatile data storage NVDS are as follows parameters GINFO q BC Bl Related provisioning commands ED ILN DFLT RTRV ILN DFLT 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 33 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters rr Te ee V5 ISDN PRA The default V5 ISDN PRA subscriber parameters which are established by initial subscriber ization of the nonvolatile data storage NVDS are as follows parameters STS 1 GINFO N CBIT 0 0 Related provisioning commands ED PRALN DFLT RTRV PR
286. ate block output format is used using the general guidelines specified in Bellcore TR NWT 000831 comment line preceded by and ended by The pair of charac ters and is used to delimit free format text lt terminator gt The character is used for normal termination The gt character means that more segments associated with this response message will follow under another header 13 2 4 Normal response examples This is one user screen example of a complete execution of a command showing the command input input acknowledgment and a normal response RTRV EQPT SYS00 comdac 1 1 1234 IP ctag1234 lt SYSOO 96 10 26 16 42 11 M 1234 COMPLD comdac 1 TYPE COMDAC APP COM100 ICC S1 2 CLEI SAIUKOOBAA ECI 6CECI2 SLN 950c12123456 1IS 7 This is another example of a complete execution of a command displaying the command input input acknowledgment and a normal response DLT AP SYS00 ap 1 12 124365 XLIV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 IP 124365 lt SYSOO 96 07 11 13 01 11 M 124365 COMPLD 7 13 3 Error response 13 3 1 Definition An error response is returned when an input TL1 command cannot be executed at all due to system problems and or errors in the input TL1 command 13 3 2 Error response format An error response is displayed in the following format Format SCL PL PALES SD YIMM DD HAs MM SoC lt 1r M etag DENYKGES lt LII gt ERCD lt cr gt lt
287. ate model transi tions of V5 entities are not obeyed Nevertheless after switch over the defined 4 246 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning ne state within the new context is entered As example a line termination in service state In Service which was part of the former active provisioning variant but not in the new provisioning variant will enter the state In Service Not Associated af ter the switch over although this state transition is not defined in the normal state model 4 7 9 Fault handling 4 7 9 1 Failed startup after switch over Fault handling by As the re provisioning procedure only ensures that the provisioning variant identi network fier is correct but not the dataset behind it it may happen that the AN and the LE management are working with total different datasets afterwards This problem can not be solved by either the AN or the LE and must be fixed from the network manage ment Therefore the system has no special fault handling for this case If after a successful switch over procedure the V5 interface is not able to recover again due to for example different primary and secondary link assignments it will be alarmed as in normal operation 4 7 9 2 Switch back to old provisioning variant Fall back version If the operator recognizes a failure or inconsistencies after a successful switch over it is possible to fall back to the old provis
288. ated actions You need to know how to write in Basic to use this facility or select File Scripting New Text Script a text script is a plain text sequence of commands System Response If Macro Script was selected the GSI Script Fa cility window for macros Figure 1 37 page 1 48 opens 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 47 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands a GSI Script Facility alelana elm ol Ss of nl a Sub Main fh got FS S c End Sub Figure 1 37 GSI Script Facility window for macros System Response If Text Script was selected the NotePad text ed itor window opens te File Edit Search Help Figure 1 38 NotePad Text Editor for creating text scripts Step 2 Type in the desired TL1 commands one per line using the identical syntax as if typing directly at the TL1SI prompt 1 48 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands gt NOTE Text script files have the extension txt macro script files have the extension SCI gt NOTE For similar commands use the COPY and the PASTE function of the editor to create identical commands and then edit in the differences for example to keep the command the same but change the AID parameters Step 3 When you have completed entering TL1 commands save the file From the editors menu bar select File Save Step 4 Exit the respective text editor From
289. ated in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 496 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 7 Functional diagram of ALL Logical ALL Each leased line link object may contain provisioning data for its associated E1 in entities terface which are administered through TL1 commands Up to 31 analog leased lines can be cross connected to one leased line link For leased line timeslots no provisioning data are necessary The leased line timeslots can be cross con nected to the physical subscriber lines The association is done by setting up a cross connection between that bearer channel and the leased line timeslot 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 59 Configuration management for narrowband services Services ee 4 5 3 3 2 Digital leased lines Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 Ill 1 Ill 16 It 1 It 1024 2 OMe elidi 061 Euer E 4 x E1 feeder LL link E1 data scriber Physical sub scriber data up to 3 itbc 1 1 Itbc 1024 3 2 lIts 1 1 llts 16 31 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 dr
290. ated the transaction of taking the installed pe ripheral SW image into operation System Response The following report event messages can ap pear on the screen IF THE REPORT EVENT MESSAGE is THEN peripheral pack software End of steps download finished oeripheral pack SW download remove and insert the appropriate ap failed plication pack and the following report event message occurs oeripheral pack SW download failed cleared Then Step 1 to Step 3 will be per formed automatically End of steps System Response If the report event message peripheral pack SW download failed appears once more then call the local customer support for assis tance End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 31 Configuration management for narrowband services Default provisioning parameters 4 4 Default system provisioning parameters Default system This section provides a summary of the default provisioning parameters for the parameters AnyMedia Access System The listed parameter values are restored when the INIT SYS TL1 command is executed during the initialization of the system Synchronization The default system synchronization parameters which are established by initial parameters ization of the nonvolatile data storage are as follows SYNCNMODE ipa LPPRI el 1 1 1 LPSEC e1 1 2 1 Related provisioning commands SET SYNCN RTRV SYNCN IP address The default internet protocol IP address par
291. atic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the AnyMedia Mainshelf doors by turning the latches Step 3 Verify that the jumpers on the IO_E1 are set in the correct position 120 Q for symmetrical cable 75 Q for coaxial cable If the jumpers are not in the correct position adjust them The default delivery set ting is 120 Q gt NOTE All nine jumpers on one IO_E1 pack see Figure 2 6 page 2 37 must be set to the same setting either 120 Q or 75 Q according to the E1 cable used A protection pack only protects service packs with the same termina tion impedance settings 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 39 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Adding IO_E1 pack protection o E Step 4 Insert the IO_E1 pack FAC500B into the IO_E1P slot see Figure 2 5 page 2 36 With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top por tion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up all LEDs on the IO_E1 light for a short interval followed by a
292. ation lasts no more than one minute then the FAULT LED has to extin guish 3 14 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth ee Step 3 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 4 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 7 Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU System Response All LEDs on all installed packs light for approxi mately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status Step 5 Verify which alarm is raised for the AP by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV ALM AIDTYPE where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT ADL All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NTFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 6 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LED of the AP still does not illuminate then replace the AP see Step 2 and repeat from Step 4 Step 7 Verify that the application pack is correctly provisioned by entering RTRV AP IF THEN the RTRV AP command reports that use the ENT AP command to enter the the AP is not provisioned provisioning information go to Step 8 the RTRV AP command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order the
293. ation is stored on the COMDAC Every time an HDSL interface is newly synchronized this information is fetched from the NTU The information is provided by a TL1 command on the equipment layer to the GSI AEM Managed NTU in The managed NTUs provide the following inventory data ventory data Model identifier m Hardware version m Firmware version The managed NTU inventory is retrieved through the ISDN port using the TL1 command RTRV EXTEQPT 4 262 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services a 4 9 3 Purpose Retrieving equipment RTRV EQPT Retrieving equipment This procedure is to retrieve equipment information for all packs Inventory infor mation includes the physical identifier and state information Follow the RTRV EQPT GSI operation Procedure Step 1 363 211 112 Or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV EOP Ts LALD where AID all ap i tl 16 apa la 1 Cait comdac t 1 2 comdac l all sh 1 1oel 1 1 4 ioel 1 all ioelp 1 LOhndde 1 1 2 Lads a pata Lo apal ells eau comdac lL L274 comdac l all sha toels i fI 4 Oe l al LOSlp ly 1 oOndleH l l 24 ORC Weal SUbap 1 t 05 b oy subap l o alLl subap all Ssubep l c 7 l4 subcp all subsh i 6 subsh all AID of the piece of equipment to be retrieved all packs application pack all application packs communication inte
294. ber 2000 4 225 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a managed NTU Le 4 6 57 Editing provisioning data of a managed NTU Purpose This procedure is to edit the provisioning data of an NTU entity Parameters not supplied by the operator do not change already supplied provisioning data A change of provisioning data is only allowed if the DLLN entity associated with the NTU is in the service state OOS or does not exist Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED NTU GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED NTU AID speed SPEED clkmode CLKMODE databits DATABITS vl4mode V14MODE PESZCES RILSZCLS irr tS RIS Iy ELsSdqSRESD dsrdtr DSRDTR remlp REMLP bytetiming BYTETIMING extclk EXTCLK astimer ASTIMER asretrytimer ASRETRYTIMER where ATD ntu 1 384 AID of the NTU SPEED 128K 14K4 19K2 1K2 2K4 48K 4K8 56K 64K 9K6 speed of the subscriber interface provided by the NTU 128K 128 kbps 14K4 14 4 kbps 19K2 19 2 kbps 1K2 1 2 kbps 2K4 2 4 kbps 48K 48 kbps 4K8 4 8 kbps 56K 56 kbps 64K 64 kbps 9K6 9 6 kbps Possible values of this parameter depend on the NTU type For V 35 NTUs only the speeds 48K through 128K are valid For V 24 NTUs only the speeds 1 2K through 19 2K are valid For X 21 NTUs all speeds are valid 4 226 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a managed NTU a CLKMODE
295. bles of contents Improve the organization structure Include more figures Add more examples Add more detail Please provide details for the suggested improvement Uuuu OOUUOOUO Name ________ 22 22 Lee Telephone Number ___________________ Company Organization _____________ _ _ Dalt eeoa bo hya Poe aata ne Address When you have completed this form please fax it to the address on top of this page Title AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 Contents About this document XVII 1 Overview XVII 2 Conventions used in this document XIX 3 Related documentation XXII 4 How to order this document XXV 5 How to comment on this document XXV 6 General safety information XXVI 7 Appearance of the safety instructions XXVIII 8 Relevant safety instructions XXX 9 Electrostatic discharge considerations XXXI 10 Overview XXXV 11 TL1 command input XXXV 12 Input acknowledgment XLI 13 TL1 command output XLII 14 Autonomous response messages XLVI 1 GSI software for narrowband services 1 1 1 1 General 1 1 1 2 GSI software installation from CD ROM 1 9 1 3 Starting and terminating the GSI and system access 1 13 1 4 Performing GSI functions 1 24 1 5 System displays and windows 1 28 1 6 General GSI functions 1 36_ 1 7 Working with TL1 commands 1 43 1 8 NE Operations 195 1 9 Provisioning 1 56 1 10 Fault management functions 1 58 1 11 HDSL Performance Moni
296. cated on an application pack capa ble of supporting ALL It is possible to pre provision all entities to the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provi sioning of an ALL subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the applica tion pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and supplies its Z ports for ser vice Therefore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capa ble of serving the subscriber For example the provisioning of a 25th subscriber on a 24 Z port AP is rejected at provisioning time Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked With a cross connection the subscriber s terminal equipment TE is connected to a service node for routing PLL service circuits The ALL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders which are exclusively used for this purpose For provisioning an analog leased line service also the layered structure as shown in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that three objects have to be provisioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer Issue 7 December 2000 4 85 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Le before the AnyMedia Access System can provide an analog leased line service These three objects
297. cation pack 15 port 1 HDSL interface 1 and 2 line termination 61 bearer channel 1 2 and 3 timeslot 5 6 and 7 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack BNI LORLs 0e ls lsg Step 2 Define the LL link ENT LELE S Vb oes ele la lH 4 3 Step 3 Define the application pack BNI APS Tap leros 43 LPooUls ts Lo Step 4 Define the HDSL interfaces ENT HDSLi hos laletssdrop drop l 1 1 apmode pp Step 5 Define the VLL subscriber BNI VGUN tLiSol ss hdsl hds l type Vj0 Slt Ss Z nes l2 4 316 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 6 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot ENT CRS LLTS 1ltbc 61 1 1lts 6 2 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 2 llts 6 3 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 3 1llts 6 4 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 4 1lts 6 7 PENI CRS bhls A tbc 61 5 boSs 6 357 BNC H CRO Li ts etic be 6 16 l1ts o 9 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 7 llts 6 10 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 8 llts 6 11 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 9 llts 6 12 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 10 llts 6 13 ENT CRS LLTS ltbc 61 11 1llts 6 14 PNI CRS LETS ss 1cbCc cl l4 LLes 6 L5 Step 7 Move the VLL subscriber in service EDSVELN tole ess To Step 8 Move the HDSL interfaces in service BDHADols shdsd e rnr shee Step 9 Move the LL link in service BOS tie sa osss eS End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 317 Configuration management
298. ce One UVLL subscriber allocates one HDSL logical interface 32 logical timeslots which is provisioned for unstructured 2 Mbps leased line application mode No other service can be provided by the allocated HDSL logical interface If no service state is contained in the command default service state OOS is used If a UVLL subscriber is created its own access identifier is entered internally to the HDSL logical timeslot table The command is rejected if either a table entry with the specified UVLL subscriber id already exists or the HDSL logical interface is not able to support the UVLL service subscriber A UVLL subscriber allocates all 32 timeslots of the logical HDSL interface These timeslots must be cross connected to timeslots provided by the unstructured 2 Mbps link All 32 timeslots are cross connected internally to the same unstruc tured 2 Mbps link and the timeslot number of the UVLL subscriber must be the same as for the unstructured 2 Mbps link The 32 cross connections are done au tonomously by the system if the UVLL subscriber is cross connected to the un structured 2 Mbps link via GSI AEM Timeslot and frame integrity are maintained DTU T TTT TTT ET ot EE unstructured 2 Mbps link HDSL logical timeslots Figure 4 36 UVLL related timeslot mapping 4 106 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Table ULL Data for the U
299. ce for an unique UVLL subscriber are allocated in the same E1 feeder UVLL independent The UVLL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders of V5 which are exclusively used for unstructured leased line purpose Provisioning For provisioning a UVLL service also the layered structure as shown in Figure 4 2 objects of UVLL page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that four objects have to be provi subscribers sioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a UVLL service These four objects are HDSL interface UVLL subscriber ULL interface and ULL service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a UVLL service UVLL service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 35 page 4 105 4 104 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ULL services UVLL subscriber id l ULL interface id H C E E ee eee gt A i UN m We OD Qs ZO Line Term UVLL subscriber UVLLN m AID HDSL interface parameter service state u l if hdst2 prov data IS z a a ee x Fe een eee eee E T ean ee See E a pw Gs ke D HDSL timeslots z AID userTS__ user _ line type serv state S ea a o s e 3 r T e 3 man o e o ET oD z CEE a eee
300. ce is done by provisioning The association of a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber to a V5 2 interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 Provisioning of an Prior to provisioning of a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber an HDSL logical interface must HDSL interface be provisioned on the lines layer m The HDSL logical interface must be provisioned on top of one or two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL application pack The HDSL logical interface has to be provisioned in single pair mode or in point to point mode The usage of one or two HDSL ports depends on the provi sioned HDSL application mode one for single pair mode 16 timeslots and two for point to point mode 31 timeslots HDSL logical interfaces autocre ate HDSL logical timeslots which may be used by the services After that a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber can be provisioned on top of the HDSL logical in terface The used HDSL logical timeslots are specified in the provisioning command ENT PRALN Note that on top of an HDSL logical interface also other services and a service mix can be provisioned The Table 4 9 shows which services can be provisioned on top of an HDSL logi cal interface The NTU at the customer premise must be able to support the cho sen service Table 4 9 Services depending on HDSL application mode Unstructured Point to point V3 point to point to point Point to multi Different per HDSL point per Single pair per per HDSL point p
301. ce one V5 ISDN PRA subscriber is sup PRA subscribers ported The AnyMedia Access System supports a retrieval on the equipment layer to show the operator which HDSL timeslots on an HDSL logical interface are al ready allocated and which ones are not used for any service yet Service activation To activate the service for a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber it must be associated to an of V5 ISDN PRA already existing V5 2 interface The V5 ISDN PRA subscriber must be associated subscribers to a V5 2 user port The V5 2 user port must be associated to a V5 2 interface 4 76 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Provisioning According to Figure 4 2 page 4 52 several objects have to be provisioned for the objects of V5ISDN lines and the service assignments layer These objects are V5 ISDN PRA sub PRA subscribers scriber V5 2 interface and V5 2 cross connection Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a V5 V5 ISDN PRA ISDN PRA service also describing the relationships between the tables can be service found in Figure 4 20 page 4 78 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 77 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 user port user portid J Une ype EE E E E e NO Fo I a Line Term V5 ISDN PRA subscriber PRALN AID HDSL service nr of start parame served V5 interface state TS
302. ce packs lIO_E1 m Upto 16 application packs APs for narrowband services POTS APs ISDN APs HDSL APs OAPs for ONU or for broadband services AFM ADSL APs 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 29 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows Le m Upto 2 IO HDLC packs m Optionally one TAP100 1 5 3 1 Pack area Pack menu The packs are displayed with their current LED states For each pack a menu can be opened by clicking on it using the right mouse button These menus provide the following functions Retrieving specific equipment information m Retrieving alarms m Displaying inventory data Retrieve Equipment Retrieve Alarms felt est Inventor O Ke Figure 1 20 Menu for packs Retrieve equipment To retrieve specific equipment information for a pack first open the menu for the respective pack by clicking on it using the right mouse button Select the menu option Retrieve Equipment Retrieve alarms To retrieve all currently active alarms for a pack first open the menu for the respec tive pack by clicking on it using the right mouse button Select the menu option Retrieve Alarms Inventory data To show inventory data for a pack open the menu for the respective pack by click ing on it using the right mouse button Select the menu option Inventory Data 1 5 3 2 Status display Status display The status display is used to display various messages or prompts for the opera tor B
303. cedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 149 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5CP V5CC ESE 4 6 8 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 communication paths and V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 communication path and a V5 communication channel Only one communication path of type ISDNF ISDNP and ISDNS can be cross connected to the same communication channel For non ISDN communication paths the V5 interface must be in administrative pri mary service state OOS out of service if the communication channel is cross connected to a timeslot The protection protocol communication path is created and cross connected automatically by the system for a multilink interface Multiple communication paths can be assigned to a single communication channel Assumptions V5 x communication path and V5 x communication channel have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS CPCC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS CPCC AID1 AID2 pvar PVAR where ALD v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path AID2 v5cec 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel PVAR VopVar l s2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related
304. ces Cross connection V3LN V3L M ese ee 3 4 46 Deleting a cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V3 ISDN PRA sub scriber and a V3 link The administrative primary service state of the line termina tion must be OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT CRS V3L AID1 AID2 where AID1 eal aLo24 AID of the line termination AID2 v3l1 1 16 AID of the V3 link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS V3L sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 138 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection LLBC LLTS ee ee 3 4 47 Deleting a cross connection between leased line termination bearer channel and leased line timeslot Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a leased line termination bearer channel and a leased line link timeslot Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in the administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS LLTS GSI operation or
305. ch is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 217 Configuration management for narrowband services Creating a new routing table entry E SeSe 4 6 54 Creating a new routing table entry Purpose This procedure is to instructs the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table Up to 32 routing entries in the static routing table can be supported on the AnyMedia Access System Routing support on the AnyMedia Access System will enable to interconnect AnyMedia Access System s communications interfaces ROC 10BaseT and CIT with other commu nications interfaces and network devices connected to them This will allow re mote access to AnyMedia Access System and interoperability with OSs the AEM and the GSI Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT ROUTE GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT ROUTE DESTINATION SUBMASK GATEWAY METRIC where DESTINA Destination internet protocol IP TION address The destination address is the network or host IP address reached via this route Use 0 0 0 0 address with a 0 0 0 0 submask to indicate a default route Use a required IP address with a 255 255 255 255 submask to indicate a host route SUBMASK IP address for the submask The submask is a 32 bit value containing one bits for the net work
306. charge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Identify current standby O_ HDLC pack Follow the RTRV IOHDLC GSI operation to identify the standby pack or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV IOHDLC AID where AID iohdlc 1 1 2 1ohdilc l all System Response The O_ HDLC with the switch state parameter STBY is the standby IO HDLC Step 3 Remove the standby IO _HDLC System Response The report alarm message on the screen is pack missing or power fault Step 4 Insert the new O_ HDLC IDC500B into the free slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up both LEDs on the IO HDLC light for approximately 5 s The report alarm message on the screen is pack missing or power fault cleared Step 5 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 6 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 9
307. ching where N can be 1 to 4 service IO_E1 packs protected by one protection pack IO_E1P An IO_E1 protection switch may be initiated either manually via TL1 command or automatically due to an IO_E1 pack fault detected by status monitoring and test ing Revertive The IO_E1 pack protection switching is revertive that means the traffic is switched protection back from the IO_E1P to the service IO_E1 pack once the fault causing the pro tection switch disappears Revertive protection switching is only applicable for au tomatic protection switches Protection The pack protection is achieved by switching the four E1s from an active IO_E1 switching pack to the IO_E1P pack The pack protection is controlled by the active COM DAC The IO_E1 pack processor is not involved in the protection switching opera tion of the packs since pack protection must work even if the pack processor fails gt NOTE For protection switching of the IO_E1 packs only the protection pack lO_E1P must be an IO_E1 pack with apparatus code FAC500B 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 283 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching CO ee 4 11 6 Protection switch characteristics The following tables list how each protected pack or element in the system is pro tected its protection switching behavior and whether or not it can be switched on demand Table 4 13 COMDAC protection Protection Automatic Manual mode switch Switch mode
308. ck port entity E1 feeder of the pack must serve any service Removing all service from E1 feeders of an IO_E1 service pack reverts an autonomous protection switch Deleting the O_E1 protection pack provisiones the system for unprotected IO_E1 configuration This procedure automatically deletes the related E1 feeders supplied by the IO_E1 service pack and tears down any loopback on these feeders When de installing an IO_E1 pack no gap should be left between packs to be protected Assumptions IO_E1 is in administrative primary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT IOE1 GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT IOE1 AID where AID ioel 1 1 4 ioelp 1 AID of the lO_E1 ioel 1 1 4 E1 pack ioelp 1 E1 protection pack Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT IOE1 section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 127 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5CP V5CC ee 3 4 36 Deleting a cross connection between V5 communication path and V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V5 communication pa
309. cking disabled ENABLED external clocking enabled ASTIMER 0 255 anti streaming timer The managed NTUs include an anti streaming mechanism which is used to prevent a faulty DTE from permanently disrupting a network of NT Us connected as a hub This timer sets the time in seconds that the RTS line must be continuously held high to acti vate the anti streaming mecha nism If this parameter is set to 0 then the anti streaming mecha nism is disabled ASRETRY 0 255 TIMER anti streaming retry timer This timer sets the time in min utes that the RTS line must be continuously held low to deacti vate the anti streaming mecha nism once it has been activated If this parameter is set to 255 then once activated the anti streaming mechanism will not deactivate until the NTU is reset or this parameter is changed Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED NTU section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 229 Configuration management for narrowband services Changing default prov data of NTU Le 4 6 58 Changing default provisioning data of a managed NTU Purpose This procedure is to edit the default provi
310. cking on the Window Arrange Icons menu option allows you to arrange the minimized windows Currently opened GSI windows The name of the active window is checked Other windows are displayed in the list If a window is minimized selecting it from the menu will restore it to its original size 1 6 5 Help Help menu The Help function provides information about various operating steps or window displays 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 41 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions a Contents The Help Contents menu option gives an overview of the contents of the help function m Using Help The Help Using Help menu option provides information on how to use the help function TL1 Commands The Help Commands Procedures menu option provides information about the TL1 commands description About The Help About menu option displays a window which provides informa tion on the GSI software version the TL1 database version and license in formation 1 42 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands 1 7 Working with TL1 commands 1 7 1 General Overview In the GSI TL1 commands can be selected and executed in different ways m Entering the respective TL1 command directly in the TL1SI View Chapter 1 5 7 page 1 35 m Selecting the respective TL1 commands through a GSI dialog m Executing TL1 script files What you will find In this secti
311. click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established System Response Upon power up all LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a flashing FAULT LED during COMDAC self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 5 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures COMDAC installation TET TT EE Step 3 Once self initialization has finished verify that the FAULT LED extin guishes and the ACTIVE LED lights also alarm LEDs may light The colours of the LEDs and their meaning is described in chapter 5 of the Applications Planning and Ordering Guide APOG IF THEN the FAULT LED extinguishes and the go to Step 4 ACTIVE LED lights the FAULT LED does not extinguish execute the Software upgrade via boot and or the ACTIVE LED does not download simplex mode procedure light see Chapter 4 3 5 Step 4 If duplex mode is desired insert the second COMDAC into the COM 2 slot for the location of the slot see chapter 5 of the Applications Planning and Ordering Guide APOG System Response Upon power up all LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes Step 5 Once self initialization has finished verify that the FAULT LED extin guishes and that the
312. configuration should be normally set during initial installation but can be changed at anytime afterwards if the system service requirements change to support switched ISDN too The de fault setting for the configuration identifier is 1 which means POTS only mode The ISDN configuration is activated with the SW CFG command see Switching system configuration Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 gt NOTE For ISDN configuration and for mixed configuration POTS ISDN an IO_HDLC pack is required Procedure Step 1 Retrieve the active standby configuration POTS ISDN Follow the RTRV CFG ISDN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV CFG ISDN System Response The CFGID shows the ISDN configuration mode the system is currently using The CFGID is 1 for a POTS only mode that is for all applications not requiring an O_ HDLC pack and 2 for a mixed POTS ISDN mode Step 2 IF THEN ACTIVE CFGID is set to 1 go to Step 3 ACTIVE CFGID is set to 2 go to the Switching system configuration procedure Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 Step 3 Set the configuration to ISDN mode Follow the SET CFG ISDN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Sel CRE LS DNs 22 3CrGrDp where CFGID must be set to 2 System Response COMPLD End of steps Next procedure Switching system configuration see Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 2 18 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedur
313. connected via the select the port to which the cable from EIA 232C interface the CIU is connected by selecting one of COM1 to COM4 Go to step 9 the GSI PC is connected via LAN select LAN Go to step 18 Step 9 Click on Settings System Response The Communication Settings pop up window opens ie Communication Settings Op x Baud Rate Options 19200 57600 l Multi NE Mode l Single NE Mode Shelf IP Address Modem fi 23 248 223 212 F Keep Alive Figure 1 14 Communication settings window Step 10 Under Baud Rate select 19200 gt NOTE The COMDAC reads the communications rate from the PC and matches it if possible autobaud detection If for some reason the chosen baud rate fails select another rate and try again The only time the maximum commu nications rate 115200 is useful is for software download Step 11 Select your system Options Single NE Mode means Connection of the GSI PC to only one system via the EIA 232C serial link 1 18 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating a Single NE Mode PPP means Connection of the GSI PC to only one system via the EIA 232C serial link using the point to point protocol PPP Multiple NE Mode means Connection of the GSI PC to a multiple systems ring configu ration via the EIA 232C serial link For this mode you must enter the shelf IP address Select one from the selection
314. connection Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the LL link by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 Step 3 Define the ROC by entering ENT ROC see Chapter 4 6 52 page 4 215 Step 4 Set the IP address of the ROC by entering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 Step 5 Instruct the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 Step 6 Define the cross connection between remote operations channel and LL timeslot by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 53 page 4 217 Step 7 Move the ROC in service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 4 6 55 page 4 220 Step 8 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 4 5 7 4 2 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 1 inter face Purpose This procedure is to create a semipermanent leased line link ROC connection via V5 1 interface Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 137 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface
315. considerations General notes on Electrostatic discharge ESD for example caused by touching with the hand can ESD destroy semiconductor components The correct operation of the complete sys tem is then no longer assured All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to electrostatic dis charge ESD The electrostatic discharge can also affect the components indi rectly via contacts or conductor tracks Packs containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostatic dis charge are identified by warning labels bearing the barred hand symbol Precautions The following list of precautions should be observed when handling circuit packs to prevent damage by electrostatic discharge ESD m Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can be damaged by ESD 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXXI About this document General safety information CO ee m Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic discharge Use conducting floor and bench mats which are conductively connected to the rack ESD bonding point m Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to the rack ESD bonding point m Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins m Observe warning labels on bags and cartons Whenever possible do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until re
316. contacts are fully established System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the pre loaded COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are pack missing or power fault cleared pack initialization in progress data memory update in progress pack anitrala zation Tinishedy data memory update completed NVPS verification in progress system software version mismatch NVPS verification completed Issue 7 December 2000 4 17 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl o E ___ ee Step 7 Copy the newly loaded software version from the pre loaded COM DAC to the formerly standby COMDAC Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the standby COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condi tion CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events system software version mismatch cleared copy program memory in progress copy program memory complete data memory update in progress data memory update completed NVPS verification in progress NVES verification completed
317. correct go to Step 4 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 3 Enter the provisioning information of the line by entering ENT DLLN see Chapter 4 6 32 page 4 188 Step 4 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 6 page 3 58 Step 5 Optionally for managed NTUs define the NTU entity by following Growth to a configuration with managed NTU see Chapter 3 3 11 page 3 65 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 31 System modification growth degrowth for NB services VLL subscriber growth ese ee 3 3 4 9 VLL subscriber growth Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface is provisioned Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface is provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 5 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 3 an HDSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Verify whether there is free capacity on the HDSL interface Follow the RTRV HDSLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ROERV EDSLiS 73D where AID noskise 2512 l 31 AID of the HDSL interface timeslot Step 4 IF THEN the RTRV HD
318. criber is rejected if either a table entry with creationofaV5ISDN the specified line termination id already exists or the specified HDSL timeslot is al PRA subscriber ready being used by another client A V5 ISDN PRA subscriber can only serve one user port service assignment a further creation of a user port service Is re jected The creation is also rejected if the related HDSL logical interface is not pro visioned or the requirements defined by its provisioning data cannot be fulfilled The checks if the related hardware can support the V5 ISDN PRA subscriber are made in the equipment layer Example Figure 4 21 page 4 80 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber Two arrows indicate that the corresponding command performs both The definition of the entity and the definition of the cross connection between the two entities 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 79 Configuration management for narrowband services ENT AP ap 1 1 LP 501 HDSL AP Application pack data up to 4 sub scriber lines Port provisioning ENT PRALN It1 hdsl 2 nts 7 sts 1 HDSL V5 ISDN interface PRA line bo HDSL specific Physical sub data scriber data ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 1 1 apmode P ENT V5UP v5up 1 It 1 ltype P R ALN ENT V5I v5i 1 v5type v52 ENT V5L v5l 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 lO El a o User port Interface o Vb link Eo o u V5 x specific
319. cript see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 1 36 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions a SeSe x 8 Scripting Cancel Clicking on the File Scripting Cancel menu option stops a running script see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 m Save As Currently not used m Print a File Opens the window for printing out a file e Rages fon tne f Figure 1 26 Print window m Printer Setup Opens the window for setting up the printer Print Setup mooo AutoS elect Tray Figure 1 27 Print Setup window 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 37 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions CO ee Exit Clicking on the File Exit menu option terminates the GSI session For other possibilities to terminate the GSI session see Chapter 1 3 8 page 1 23 Before terminating the program the operator is prompted for confirmation GSI El 2 Exit Graphical System Interface Figure 1 28 Exit GSI confirmation window 1 6 2 Edit Edit menu From the Edit menu the user can Copy from the TL1SI View to the clipboard Paste from the clipboard to the TL1SI View or to any other editor 1 6 3 View gt NOTE It is recommended to switch on the Logfile option Active is checked to have proper information for service View menu In the View menu the following actions can be started 8 Shelf Clicking on View Shelf Main Shelf displays the AnyMedia M
320. cted mode 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 39 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions m Lomech bo tie Spstenn 3 E be bo AEk Uzer Figure 1 30 Options Menu Startup TL1 allows you to select the display mode for the TL1 commands menu Show long TL1 Menus in Columns Narrow Columns Expert Mode Shows only a short form of the commands eens MENN I Shovnloray TE Menuet lalunire P Haron Eoumnne Eepert ede Figure 1 31 Options Menu TL1 m Help allows you to define your Web browser and its path used for viewing the TL1 command descriptions 1 40 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions Loofile Startup Browser for TL1 Help C Program Files Microsoft Internet explore Find Figure 1 32 Options Menu Help Toolbar Clicking on the View Toolbar menu option reveals or hides the GSI toolbar A check mark indicates that the option is selected The GSI toolbar is described in Chapter 1 4 2 page 1 24 m Refresh Shelf Clicking on the View Refresh Shelf menu option refreshes the displayed shelf 1 6 4 Window Window menu In the Window menu the following actions can be started m Tile Clicking on the Window Tile menu option arranges the displayed windows side by side m Cascade Clicking on the Window Cascade menu option arranges the displayed win dows as cascade m Arrange Icons Cli
321. d and then filled with a copy of the current interface dataset This provisioning is still in state PVO and can now be modified At the 2nd step the provisioning variant and or the current system dataset Is incre mentally extended with new objects and associations The integrity as defined for state PVO is secured by the system The related objects in the current system 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 249 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning LS dataset are marked PVO allocated which means that they are now part of a provi sioning variant in state PVO This PVO allocated information is needed to support additional checks which must be performed to ensure the integrity of a provision ing variant in state PVO At the 3rd step the provisioning variant is checked against the current system dataset and other provisioning variants in state PV1 All associations defined in the provisioning variant must be able to be fulfilled by the objects in the current system dataset This means either m thatthe new objects for this interface have no association in the current system dataset or in another provisioning variant in state PV1 or m that the objects are already part of the current interface dataset that is part of the active provisioning and its associations are unchanged or that the objects are already part of the current interface dataset but its as sociations are changed within the inte
322. d for the whole system and is not spe cific for one V5 interface However the current system dataset can be subdivided into parts which are related to a specific V5 interface current interface dataset and into objects which are not yet associated to any V5 interface This distinction is needed to describe the different consistency and allocation checks which need to be performed during creation of provisioning variants contents and provisioning variant state changes 4 7 5 Provisioning variant states and integrity Provisioning The following provisioning variant states are defined For each state a different variant states level of provisioning integrity of the provisioning variant is defined m PVO Not ready for re provisioning PVO integrity means Internal integrity external existence integrity changes allowed In this state only the possibility of an association is ensured This means at establishing a new association in a provisioning variant only the existence of both related objects in the current system dataset is checked It is not checked whether the related objects are already involved in another asso ciation current system dataset or in another provisioning variant which normally prevents the establishment of the association Furthermore the in tegrity within the provisioning variant is checked for example a V5 link timeslot can only be associated if the related V5 link belongs to the V5 in terface in this provisioning varian
323. d for unstructured leased line subscribers FAC500B is required m Provision the IO_E1 pack type to the database locally or remotely at the AnyMedia Access System using the GSI EM interface m Perform an LED test m Provision a logical link for each feeder on the IO_E1 to add capacity to an existing V5 x interface or to create a new V5 x interface V3 interface leased line interface or unstructured leased line interface Procedure Step 1 Verify that the correct O_E1 is equipped in the correct slot based on the engineering work order IF THEN the slot is unequipped install the correct IO_E1 type go to Step 2 the slot is equipped with the incorrect contact the provisioning center to verify lO_E1 type the work order and or to determine whether the IO_E1 should be re placed the slot is equipped with the correct go to Step 9 IO_E1 type Step 2 Insert a new IO_E1 into the appropriate slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place If a new pack is installed check the jumper settings System Response After the IO_E1 is inserted all LEDs on the IO_E1 light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at 1 Hz during IO_E1 self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than one minute then the FAULT LED ha
324. d line link degrowth Purpose To delete service of a leased line link including optionally the related subscrib ers and the application pack Procedure Step 1 Move the LL link out of service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 3 4 18 page 3 110 Step 2 Move all associated leased line subscribers check via RTRV CRS LLTS and RTRV LT out of service by entering ED ALLN see Chapter 3 4 11 page 3 103 ED DLLN see Chapter 3 4 12 page 3 104 ED VLLN see Chapter 3 4 13 page 3 105 ED GLLN see Chapter 3 4 14 page 3 106 or ED ROC see Chapter 3 4 20 page 3 112 Step 3 Delete all cross connections between leased line subscriber bearer channels and the leased line link by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapter 3 4 47 page 3 139 Step 4 Optionally delete the leased line subscriber entities by entering DLT ALLN see Chapter 3 4 49 page 3 141 or DLT DLLN see Chapter 3 4 50 page 3 142 DLT VLLN see Chapter 3 4 51 page 3 143 DLT GLLN see Chapter 3 4 52 page 3 144 or DLT ROC see Chapter 3 4 59 page 3 151 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 5 Delete the LL link by entering DLT LLL see Chapter 3 4 56 pag
325. d the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes System Response The report event messages on the screen are a pack missing or power fault cleared pack initialization in progress data memory update in progress A pack initialization tinished System software version mismatch data memory update completed System Fault If the COMDAC fails to flash or the FAULT LED fails to extinguish the COMDAC is probably faulty Repeat Step 5 4 8 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl a Step 9 Force a protection switch to the new pre loaded COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter FRCD or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 FRCD System Response A system restart occurs Step 10 Reconnect the GSI AEM by selecting the LAN or the COM port Step
326. dancy check 4 CRC4 N do not check CRC4 y check CRC4 FESD De wa t far end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10 PST To 009 administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service gt NOTE The far end E1 signal degrade is only applicable if CRC4 is used 4 184 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a leased line link ee Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT LLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 185 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an unstructured LLL BE SeSe 4 6 30 Provisioning an unstructured LL link Purpose This procedure is to create an unstructured leased line link Optionally the admin istrative primary service state of the link can be given The unstructured leased line link is used for transporting the full E1 2 Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected unstructured leased line subscriber If the equipped IO_E1 pack version does not support an unstructured leased line link an alarm will be raised and the link
327. database if the NVDS is corrupt or if an already backed up version of the NVDS has to be reinstalled Assumptions The PC GSI has an NVDS backup file Procedure Step 1 Follow the WRT DB GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message WRT DB Once this command is successfully completed the GSI transfers the file with the extension sdb connection via CIT port in non PPP mode or bdb connection via TELNET which contains the NVDS data to the system Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the WRT DB section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 4 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Software management ee 4 3 Software management NVPS Software management is used to manage the nonvolatile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System The AnyMedia Access System has reprogrammable program memories One pro gram memory resides in each COMDAC If the system is in simplex mode the system has one copy of the program memory If the system is in duplex mode it has two copies of the program memory The AnyMedia Access System routinely audits the integrity of the NVPS If the system is i
328. ded remote op erations channel PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ROC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 112 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an IO_E1 to OOS 3 4 21 Moving an IO_E1 out of service or changing the protection permission Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state or the protec tion permission of one IO_E1 pack entity The IO_E1 pack protection is disabled by setting the protection pack to OOS Changing the administrative primary ser vice state neither affects a protection switch in effect nor inhibits a switch back to the service pack The protection permission controlling autonomous protection switches can be changed even if the IO_E1 service pack is in administrative pri mary service state IS Inhibiting protection switching reverts an autonomous pro tection switch unconditionally for the specified IO_E1 pack To change the admin istrative primary service state only the primary service state must be given Changing the administrative primary service state tea
329. detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V3LN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 213 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a V3 link in service BE SeSe 4 6 51 Moving a V3 link in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V3 link to IS Assumptions V3 link has already been provisioned and is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BD VS Le ALD ee ta PST where ALD v31 1 16 AID of the V3 link PST iS administrative primary service state Ts in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V3L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 214 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a ROC 4 6 52 Provisioning a remote operations channel Purpose This procedure is to create an embedded remote operation cha
330. dministrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED UGLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED UGLELN lt AILD 24r PST where AID beat i 1024 AID of the line termination PST 00S administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED UGLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 108 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a V3 link out of service ae 3 4 17 Moving a V3 link out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V3 link entity to OOS Assumptions The V3 link is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BDH VS LitAL De see eS where AID v31 1 16 AID of the V3 link PST OOS administrative primary service state OOs out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V3L sec
331. e 3 148 Step 6 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated O_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 3 86 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Unstructured LL link degrowth ee ee 3 3 14 7 Unstructured leased line link degrowth Purpose To delete service of an unstructured leased line link including optionally the re lated subscribers and the application pack Procedure Step 1 Move the ULL link out of service by entering ED ULLL see Chapter 3 4 19 page 3 111 Step 2 Move all associated unstructured leased line subscribers check via RTRV CRS ULLL and RTRV LT out of service by entering ED UVLLN see Chapter 3 4 15 page 3 107 or ED UGLLN see Chapter 3 4 16 page 3 108 Step 3 Delete all cross connections between unstructured leased line sub scriber bearer channels and the unstructured leased line link by en tering DLT CRS ULLL see Chapter 3 4 48 page 3 140 Step 4 Optionally delete the unstructured leased line subscriber entities by entering DLT UVLLN see Chapter 3 4 53 page 3 145 or DLT UGLLN see Chapter 3 4 54 page 3 146 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4
332. e OAP lights permanently because the optical link at the OCP is not installed or a fault or facil ity alarm occurs on the optical link carrier line failure End of steps Next procedure Provisioning of the ONU Subshelf see Chapter 2 3 23 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 55 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Provisioning of the subshelf A 2 3 23 Provisioning of the ONU Subshelf Purpose This procedure is to create and to provision an ONU Subshelf Assumption OAP is correctly provisioned m Fibre cable for the optical link is connected to OAP Background The ENT SUBSHELF command defines the logical subshelf number and the type of the subshelf With the creation of the logical subshelf its related subshelf con troller pack slot and the subshelf application pack slots for further provisioning are automatically created The related subshelf feeder port is also automatically cre ated which must be cross connected with a AnyMedia Mainshelf server port to de fine which AnyMedia Mainshelf server port shall support the subshelf The admin istrative primary service state of the subshelf after creation is Out of Service and must be changed after the cross connection to In Service for providing service Procedure Step 1 Define the ONU entity by entering ENT SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT SUBSHELF AID SUBSH_TYPE where ALD subsh 1 8 AID of the subshelf
333. e UPP by en tering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 4 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where ATD hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 5 IE THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 7 the HDSL interface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 6 3 40 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UGLL subscriber growth ee Step 6 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 7 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV LT IAID where AID 1t 1 1024 Leal Step 8 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT UGLLN command to en line is not provisioned ter the provisioning information go to Step 9 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 10 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent
334. e UVLL or one UGLL subscriber line 2 Mbps gt NOTE A mix of services V5 x and leased lines on one E1 feeder is not possible Layered Figure 4 2 page 4 52 gives an overview of the service provisioning in general in provisioning model the AnyMedia Access System A layered model has been chosen for describing the provisioning capabilities The layers are used for explanatory purposes only they are not explicitly visible for the operator at the GSI TL1SI View The arrows in the figure show the interactions between the different functional entities An ar row pointing down means that a higher entity requires the usage of allocates lower functional entity or releases deallocates it In some cases also provision ing data are transmitted An arrow in the opposite direction refers to an informa tion path where maintenance information for example service state condition changes Is transmitted from the lower entity to the higher entity The parts needed for service activation are m Service assignments All attributes related to a certain subscriber object which refer to a certain interface are administered by different cross connections and V5 user port objects m V5 service objects V5 user port object Cross connection V5 user port lt gt V5 interface Cross connection V5 timeslot lt gt V5 line termination bearer channel V5 1 only Cross connection V5 timeslot lt gt ROC V5 1 only The cross c
335. e a standby provisioning variant it must be in state NOT READY and all contents must be deleted before To quickly delete all contents of the provisioning variant use the command INIT V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 4 page 4 257 No standby provisioning variant entries for a V5 interface must exist to delete the re lated V5 interface itself Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT V5PVAR AID where AID v5pvar 1 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5PVAR sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 157 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a managed NTU a SeSe 3 4 66 Deleting a managed NTU entity Purpose This procedure is to delete one NTU entity There must not be any DLLN entity us ing the NTU Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT NTU GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DEl NiUe AID where ALD ntu 1 384 AID of the NTU Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detail
336. e beginning The proce dures will identify the specific TL1 message needed and a list of input parameters that can be used in the specific procedure being described but the operator must refer to the AnyMedia Access System Command and Message Manual for the de tails on each message 4 5 2 Access identifiers AID Definition of access An access identifier AID is used to address a particular physical component or identifier logical component within or terminated on the AnyMedia Access System Types of AIDs There are two types of AIDs m Physical AlDs are normally based on the physical equipment hierarchy of ten employing an equipment unit name and or unit number Logical AlDs are based on the logical system entities such as logical lines or logical links The AnyMedia Access System supports AlDs that uniquely identify a single sys tem entity and or AlDs that specify multiple system components in the input TL1 messages 4 5 2 1 AID format AID structure The AnyMedia Access System AIDs contain zero to three AID parameters nor mally used to specify a single system component using the following format entity type parameter1l1 parameter2 parameter3 AIDs with specified When an AID containing the AID entity type and one to three AID parameter s is parameters specified at the input TL1 message each AID parameter has a valid range of po sitional value s N M where N and M in the set of braces are positive intege
337. e can be given The number of bearer channel objects of the ISDN BRA subscriber as specified in the command are created automatically by the system Assumptions Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT ILN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT ILN ALD 3 23cr00 DROP Gintlo GINFO be BC LESTI where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination DROP drop 1 1 16 1 32 Subdrop i 67 les fe ti S250 AID of the physical drop GINFO N Y performance measurement grad ing Information N no grading information required Y grading information required BC B1 B2 BOTH bearer channel usage B1 only B1 channel B2 only B2 channel BOTH both B1 B2 channels PST 1IS 00S administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service 4 162 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an ISDN BRA line a Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ILN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 163 Configuration management for
338. e cross con nected to anything Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5CC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Dhl VoC Cea where AID yoo iLL eA AID of the V5 communication channel Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5CC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 131 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5L V5I M ese ee 3 4 40 Deleting a cross connection between V5 link and V5 x interface Purpose This procedure is to delete cross connections between a V5 link and a V5 inter face The contained timeslots of the link must not be cross connected to anything and the link must not be operational Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS LI GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DEL CRS LitsALDL ALDZ 3 32 pVvar P VARI where AIDI v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link AID2 v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface PVAR VIpVer ta s2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 inte
339. e current system dataset and other provisioning variants by entering ED V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 2 page 4 254 Step 5 Switch over to the new V5 provisioning variant by entering SW V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 5 page 4 258 End of steps 4 250 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning 4 7 12 2 Scenario for moving subscribers between interfaces Dual homing Scenario dual Moving subscribers between interfaces is a mean for recovery of V5 interface fail homing ures Subscribers are associated to two or more interfaces and in case that the preferred interface A fails the subscribers are moved with few management ac tions to a backup interface B This is achieved by provisioning variants for both in terfaces The preferred interface gets a provisioning variant without the subscrib ers PVAR 20 and the backup interface gets a provisioning variant with the sub scribers which shall be protected PVAR 60 These provisioning variants can be created at any time and are used in case of a failure First the provisioning variant of the failed interface is activated to free up the subscribers The old provisioning dataset is now available as standby provisioning variant of the failed interface A and must be set not available Afterwards the provisioning variant of the backup interface is set to available and then activated by a switch over to put the sub scribers into service on V
340. e customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 125 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an application pack E SeSe 3 4 34 Deleting an application pack Purpose This procedure is to delete one application pack entity No application pack port entity of this application pack must serve any service This command automati cally deletes the related application pack port entities drops supplied by the ap plication pack Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT AP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT AP AID where AID ap 1 1 16 AID of the application pack Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT AP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 126 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an IO_E1 pack ee 3 4 35 Deleting an IO_E1 pack Purpose This procedure is to delete one IO_E1 pack entity The specified IO_E1 pack must be in administrative primary service state OOS and must be not involved in a pro tection switch Additionally no IO_E1 pa
341. e is to request a switch over to another V5 provisioning variant for a specified V5 interface If the related V5 interface is operational the connected ex change is requested to initiate a provisioning variant switch whereas if the related V5 interface is not operational the switch over is directly performed within the sys tem without interaction with the connected exchange If the V5 interface is operational the connected exchange can reject the request In case where the specified provisioning variant exists and the request is granted in the connected exchange the operator is informed about the preparation to switch over by a blocking started status condition At the start of the actual switch over a re provisioning in progress status condition is raised which is cleared after the successful switch over completion Additionally a report switch informs the op erator about the switch over It must be noted that the start moment of the switch over procedure is determined by the connected exchange and is not in the re sponsibility of the system For requesting a switch over the specified provisioning variant for the specified V5 interface must be available and in the READY state in the provisioning variant ta ble Procedure Step 1 Follow the SW V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW V5PVAR AID1 AID2 where AID1 v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface where the provisioning variant shall be switched
342. e physical ports are associated with IO_E1s and APs respectively A functional model of the E1 ports is shown in Figure 4 13 page 4 65 This figure indicates the AlDs that are referenced when provisioning E1 logical cross connections to the physical ports 4 64 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Subscriber ports 363 211 112 el 1 1 1 el 1 1 2 el 1 1 3 el 1 1 4 el 1 2 1 el 1 2 2 el 1 2 3 el 1 2 4 e1 1 3 1 e1 1 3 2 el 1 3 3 el1 1 3 4 e1 1 4 1 el 1 4 2 el1 1 4 3 el 1 4 4 O O O IO_E1 pack 1 lO El pack 2 lO El pack 3 lO El pack 4 Figure 4 13 Functional diagram of E1 ports Services A similar functional diagram for the subscriber lines associated with the APs is shown in Figure 4 14 page 4 66 Issue 7 December 2000 4 65 Configuration management for narrowband services Application pack 1 e g LPU112 Application pack 8 e g LPZ100 Application pack 1 e g LPP 100 Application pack 8 e g LPS501 Subdrop 1 1 1 Subdrop 1 1 2 Subdrop 1 1 3 Subdrop 1 1 12 Subdrop 1 8 1 Subdrop 1 8 2 Subdrop 1 8 3 Subdrop 1 8 32 Subdrop 8 1 1 Subdrop 8 1 2 Subdrop 8 1 3 Subdrop 8 1 24 Subdrop 8 8 1 Subdrop 8 8 2 Subdrop 8 8 3 Subdrop 8 8 4 Application pack 1 e g LPP 100 Application pack 2 e g LPU430 Application pack 3 e g LPU112 Application pack 16 e g LPZ100 Mainshelf
343. e same as for the V3 interface The 32 cross connections are done autonomously by the system if the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber is cross connected to the V3 link via GSI AEM Timeslot and frame integrity are maintained cross connections OTL TET TET EAT ET et EEE V3 link HDSL logical timeslots Figure 4 23 V3 ISDN PRA related timeslot mapping 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 83 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table V3 link Data for the V3 link are stored in the V3 link table There is one V3 link table per AnyMedia Access System The V3 link table contains an V3 link id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder and the service state primary and secondary When an V3 link is to be created the TL1 command must contain the V3 link id and the E1 feeder If no service state is contained in the command ser vice state OOS is used The command to create an V3 link is rejected if either a table entry with the specified V3 link id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table HDSL Data for the HDSL interface are stored in the HDSL interface table There is one interface HDSL interface table per AnyMedia Access System The HDSL interface table contains an HDSL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL ports the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an HDSL inte
344. e state IS operational and in the state stand by For a successful IO_E1 pack protection switch the packs must be installed in as cending order with no unequipped packs in between Additionally the E1 feeder termination impedance of the service pack must match with the protection pack The IO_E1 protection switch tears down any loopback on E1 feeders served by the addressed IO_E1 pack Assumptions A second operational COMDAC is installed m Protection IO_E1 pack is installed and provisioned 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 287 Configuration management for narrowband services Switching to protection Te ee Procedure Step 1 Follow the SW TOPROTN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command oW TOPROTN AIDIYPEH ALD A MODE where AIDTYPE EQPT access identifier type EQPT equipment AID Core tOelL 14 a access identifier core l core side ioel 1 1 4 E1 pack MODE LE RCD ENA IBA Tt protection switch mode priority FRCD forced INHIBIT inhibit The values of the protection switch mode have the following meaning FRCD This mode requests a protection switch to the standby COMDAC and then suppresses further manual or periodic protection switches The forced protection switch remains in effect until it is reset by SW TOWKG or an automatic protection switch is performed A forced switch is only performed if the standby COMDAC is functional For IO_E1 the forced mode requests a protectio
345. e system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW TOPROTN EQPT section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 5 Remove the standby COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack missing or power fault 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 7 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl ETE EE eeeeeeO __ ee Step 6 Enable the protection switching of the COMDAC Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message SW lTOWKG BROP TL sCcore 1 2 RESET System Response The report event message on the screen is comdac side switch forced reset Step 7 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW TOWKG EQPT section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures Step 8 Insert a pre loaded COMDAC with new software load With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf an
346. e termination bearer channels and V5 1 timeslots by entering DLT CRS BCTS see Chapter 3 4 25 page 3 117 Step 4 Delete the cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 communication path entity by entering DLT CRS UPCP see Chapter 3 4 26 page 3 118 Step 5 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 interface entity by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 6 Delete the specified V5 user port entity by entering DLT V5UP see Chapter 3 4 28 page 3 120 Step 7 Delete the specified ISDN BRA subscriber entity by entering DLT ILN see Chapter 3 4 30 page 3 122 gt NOTE The bearer channel objects of the ISDN BRA subscriber are automatically deleted by the system Step 8 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 9 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP End of steps 3 68 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth 3 3 12 3 V5ISDN PRA subscriber degrowth Purpose This procedure is to remove a single V5 ISDN PRA subscriber Procedure Step 1 Move the specified V5 ISDN PRA line out of service by entering ED PRALN see
347. e the CPY V5PVAR sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 256 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Initializing a V5 provisioning variant 4 8 4 Initializing a V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedure is to initialize a V5 provisioning variant to its initial contents All as sociations defined for the specified provisioning variant are deleted To initialize a provisioning variant it must be in state NOT_READY Procedure Step 1 Follow the INIT V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command INI T VoPVAR 2ALD where AID v5pvar 1 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant gt NOTE The provisioning variant must be in state NOT READY Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the INIT V5PVAR sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 257 Configuration management for narrowband services Switching a V5 provisioning variant E SeSe 4 8 5 Switching a V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedur
348. e we doing A comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document Table of contents list of figures list of tables for both volumes About this document Defines the purpose of the document and the intended audience Also included are topics about the conventions used in the docu ment related documentation how to order documents and how to comment on this document Chapter 1 GS software for narrowband services Describes the system requirements the installation the operation and the functions of the GSI NB used for OAM amp P purposes and the methods to perform Configuration management Fault management Performance management Security management Chapter 2 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Describes the procedures for initial system turn up with pre loaded as well as with non loaded COMDAC Chapter 3 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Describes the system reconfiguration adding and removing pack protection and system growth and degrowth for narrowband ser vices Chapter 4 Configuration management for narrowband services Describes the database and software management the default sys tem provisioning parameters and the provisioning and service acti vation the inventory management clock synchronization manage ment and protection switching for narrowband services Chapter 5 Fault management for narrowband s
349. ectly provisioned and set to IS by en tering RTRV AP IF THEN the RTRV AP command reports that use the ENT AP command to enter the the OAP is not provisioned provisioning information go to Step 3 the RTRV AP command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order the RTRV AP command reports that go to procedure Connecting the optical the OAP is correctly provisioned link to the OAP Chapter 2 3 22 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 53 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures OAP installation a Step 3 Create the OAP pack entity by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 If the OAP is not loaded with the correct software the AnyMedia Access System autonomously downloads the correct ver sion System Response peripheral pack system software version Mismatch Th peripheral pack software download in progress peripheral pack system software version mismatch cleared peripheral pack software download fin ished Ts End of steps Next procedure Connecting the optical link to the OAP see Chapter 2 3 22 2 54 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Connecting optical link to the OAP ee 2 93 22 Connecting the optical link to the OAP Purpose Provide the optical link between the OAP AnyMedia Mainshelf and the OCP ONU Subshelf Assumption a OAP is ins
350. ed but setting the top Errored blocks checkbox Not all types of statistics are available for all packs For instance the HDSL pack does not support Severely Errored Seconds collection Thresholds set on this screen also set alarm threshold levels Statistics are col lected for every instance if an error however an alarm event will not be raised un less the number of errors exceeds the threshold Thresholds may be provisioned without hardware being present The Set Default button fills the screen with the original factory defaults you still need to press Apply to set them on the pack Press View Log to move to the next screen Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions a SeS HDSL Performance Log The HDSL Performance Log window displays statistics collected by the system The COMDAC will only send statistics if there are some to send ie it will never send a zero When you reset the statistics the statistics registers will be set to zero Unavail able time is never reset it always shows the last Six unavailable time periods a Performance Log for HDSL Main 1 drop 1 Current 15 min from 1 75 on 31 July 2000 Near end all 200 35 Complete Current 15 min from 1 15 on 31 July 2000 Far end a 100 7 a Complete 15 min from 2 00 on 10 July 2000 Near end a 290 5 46 Complete 15 min from 2 00 on 10 July 2000 Far end FOO 202 17 45 Incomplete Unavailable T
351. ed by another V3 service Example Figure 4 24 page 4 85 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber 4 84 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 3 LP 503 HDSL AP Application pack data ENT V3LN lt 2 hdsl hdsl 1 ENT V3L v3l 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 HDSL V3 ISDN interface PRA line V3 link HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data data scriber data ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 3 2 apmode V 3P P ENT CRS V3L It 2 v3l 1 Figure 4 24 Provisioning data for a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber line example 4 5 5 5 ALL subscribers ALL subscribers in the AnyMedia Access System Connection of ALL subscribers Provisioning of ALL subscribers ALL independent of V5 Provisioning objects of ALL subscribers 363 211 112 An analog leased line ALL service is used for purposes other than telephony for example data transmission with modems The AnyMedia Access System sup ports ALL according to ITU M 1020 M 1025 and M 1040 An ALL subscriber is connected to the network via a leased line interface 64 kbps timeslot The association of an ALL subscriber with a leased line interface timeslot is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 An ALL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the lines layer to a Z port of the equipment layer lo
352. ed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT NTU section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 158 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Contents 4 1 Contents 4 1 4 2 Database management 4 2 4 2 1 NVDS database backup 4 3 4 2 2 NVDS database restoration 4 4 4 3 Software management 4 5 4 3 1 Software upgrade via pre loaded COMDAC replacement duplex mode 4 7 4 3 2 Software upgrade via software download duplex mode 4 13 4 3 3 Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in duplex mode without database evolution 4 16 4 3 4 Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in simplex mode without database evolution 4 22 4 3 5 Software upgrade via boot download simplex mode 4 26 4 3 6 Software upgrade via SW download of peripheral packs 4 30 4 4 Default system provisioning parameters 4 32 4 5 Provisioning and service activation 4 42 4 5 1 Introduction 4 42 4 5 2 Access identifiers AID 4 42 4 5 2 1 AID format 4 42 4 5 2 2 Special cases of AlDs 4 43 4 5 2 3 Equipment AlDs 4 44 4 5 2 4 Operations interfaces AlDs 4 45 4 5 2 5 Miscellaneous AlDs 4 46 4 5 3 Services 4 47 4 5 3 1 V5 switched services 4 54 4 5 3 1 1 V5 1 service 4 54 4 5 3 1 2 V5 2 service 4 55 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 or Contents 4 5 3 2 V3 services 4 58
353. ejected if either a table entry with the specified GLL sub scriber id already exists not all of the required HDSL logical timeslots can be allo cated or the HDSL logical interface is not no more able to support the GLL ser vice Line termination bearer channels are created according to the number of al located HDSL timeslots Table LL interface Data for the LL interface are stored in the LL interface table and in the leased line timeslot table There is one LL interface table and one leased line timeslot table per AnyMedia Access System The LL interface table contains an LL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder the service state pri mary and secondary and the provisioning data When an LL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the LL interface id and the E1 feeder If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default pro visioning data and service state OOS are used When an LL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the leased line timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The leased line timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an LL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the spec ified LL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table HDSL Data f
354. em from duplex to simplex mode Follow the ED CONFIG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED CONFIG AID NR where AID comdac 1 1 or comdac 1 2 AID of removed COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack missing or power fault cleared Step 14 Run the NVDS database script file with the provisioning data see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 25 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via boot download rr Te ee 4 3 5 Software upgrade via boot download simplex mode Purpose Software release upgrades or bug fixes via boot download to the COMDAC in or der to prepare a pre loaded COMDAC Assumptions The COMDAC has to be inserted in slot COM 1 comdac 1 1 A PC running the correct GSI software version as specified in the system release description SRD Procedure Step 1 Restore the system to its default value set at the factory gt NOTE Execution of the TL1 command INIT SYS will drop the data communication links between GSI AEM and the system all provisioning data except the IP address of the COMDAC and the SID address will be lost Follow the INIT SYS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command INIT SYS System Response A GSI ATTENTION window opens Click on YES The system performs a restart System Response A GSI status window opens indicating that the
355. ember 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ALL subscriber degrowth ee ee ee 3 3 12 5 ALL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified analog leased line subscriber out of service by entering ED ALLN see Chapter 3 4 11 page 3 103 Step 2 Delete the cross connection between leased line termination bearer channel and leased line link timeslot by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapter 3 4 47 page 3 139 Step 3 Delete the specified analog leased line subscriber entity by entering DLT ALLN see Chapter 3 4 49 page 3 141 Step 4 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 5 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 6 If the LL link is not being used by another leased line subscriber op tionally perform the leased line link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 6 page 3 86 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 71 System modification growth degrowth for NB services DLL subscriber degrowth ese ee 3 3 12 6 DLL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified digital leased line subscriber out of service by entering ED DLLN see Chapter 3 4 12 page 3 104 Step 2 Delete all
356. ember 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Switch from POTS only to mixed ee Step 5 Verify which alarm is raised for the O_ HDLC by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV ALM AIDTYPE 3 where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT A All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NTFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 6 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LEDs of the IO_HDLC still do not illuminate then replace the IO_HDLC see Step 2 and repeat from Step 4 Step 7 Verify that the IO_HDLC is correctly provisioned by entering RTRV IOHDLC TE THEN the RTRV IOHDLC command reports use the ENT IOHDLC command to en that the IO_HDLC is not provisioned ter the provisioning information go to Step 8 the RTRV IOHDLC command reports contact the provisioning center to verify different provisioning information the engineering work order the RTRV IOHDLC command reports go to Step 9 that the IO_HDLC is correctly provi sioned Step 8 Create the IO HDLC entity by entering ENT IOHDLC see Chapter 4 6 12 page 4 158 At the provisioning of the IO_HDLC the administrative primary ser vice state must be set to IS 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 61 System modification grow
357. ent The user can select a specific operation and run any of the TL1 commands for it with simple button clicks The user can also launch a TL1SI View through the GSI and enter command line messages 1 1 2 System requirements for the GSIW Recommended The GSI is supported on PCs with the following recommended equipment equipment Table 1 1 Requirements for the GSI Hardware software Requirements Computer Processor A Pentium IIl processor is recommended A Pentium 586 processor is the minimum acceptable Display SVGA video board or higher resolution 1024 x 768 pixel resolution for 17 color monitor 800 x 600 for laptop Peripheral Miscellaneous Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device Interfaces Free EIA 232 port COM1 COM2 UART 16550 recommended Ethernet card for TCP IP LAN communication 1 2 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System Requirements for the GSI ee Table 1 1 Requirements for the GSI Continued Hardware software Requirements Cables in suitable length for connection to CIT port on CIU For directly connecting from the PC serial port s to the CIT port on the front of the CIU optional but required for local CIT port access the fol lowing cable is required Serial straight through EIA 232 cable Rx connected to Rx with the following connector configuration Male 9 pin D sub connector on the CIU side Connector fitting to the serial output of the PC GS
358. ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Follow the ENT V5I GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT Volo ALD 22s VotVpe VOLYPE vouird V sil 1D Vopvar V5PVAR sdth SDTH fmon FMON voed V5ED where AID v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface V5TYPE ayo V5 interface protocol type v51 V5 1 interface V5IFID 0 16777215 V5 interface unique identifier V5PVAR 0 127 V5 interface active provisioning variant 3 46 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 1 growth a SDTH Borer en service degrade threshold in per centage FMON N Y HDLC flag monitoring N no Y yes V5ED 1 2 edition of the v5 protocol stan dard to be used ak V5 edition 1 2 V5 edition 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier and the V5 interface active provisioning variant must be identical to that of the local exchange gt NOTE The service degrade threshold in percentage is not applicable for V5 1 Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5I section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures Step 4 Verify the provisioning information of the V5 l
359. eous contact contact closure Logical managed ntu 1 384 ntu flexrate ntu NTU 4 5 2 4 Operations interfaces AIDs Operations The following table contains the AIDs for the AnyMedia Access System operations interfaces AIDs interfaces Table 4 4 Operations interfaces AIDs Entity AID Explanation TL1 message virtual vc 1 4 vc virtual circuit port circuit Craft interface termi __cit 1 cit mainshelf nal port FTP virtual port ftp FTP virtual port TELNET virtual port telnet 1 2 telnet virtual port Ethernet interface eth 1 eth ethernet interface Logical subshelf craft subcit 1 8 subcit logical subshelf interface terminal port Remote operations roc 1 roc remote operations chan channel nel 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 45 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning and service activation CO ee 4 5 2 5 Miscellaneous AIDs Miscellaneous The following table contains the miscellaneous AlDs for the AnyMedia Access AIDs System Table 4 5 Miscellaneous AIDs Entity AID Explanation Logical COMDAC re core 1 core shelf source Logical line termina It 1 1024 It line termination tion Logical line termina Itbc 1 1024 1 31 Itoc line termination bearer tion bearer channel channel Logical Test line tIn 1 8 tIn test line V5 x interface vbi 1 16 vb5i v5 x interface V5 x link v5l 1 16 v5l v5 x link V 5 x timeslot vdts 1 16 1
360. ep 5 Insert a pre loaded COMDAC with the new software load into the slot COM 1 With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip 4 16 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl 363 211 112 of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the contacts are fully established Step 6 System Response After the pack is inserted all LEDs on the pre loaded COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initialization then the FAULT LED extinguishes and no LED lights The system performs a restart This process lasts no more than three minutes Insert the formerly active COMDAC into the slot COM 2 With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place gt NOTE Keep pressing after the click until the
361. eport is generated and the inventory data is available again Step 1 Follow the RTRV EQPT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message RTRV EQPT AID where AID subsh 1 8 System Response The subshelf identifier appears within the out put parameter PCDE in the TL1SI View Step 2 Verify that the subshelf identifier is as specified in the engineering work order and has the same value as the number in the subshelf AID Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section RTRV EQPT in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 2 64 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting ONU alarm input contacts Next procedure IF THEN the inventory data are correct terminate the session by selecting File Exit from the menu bar the inventory data are not correct execute the Setting ONU Subshelf iden tifier via DIP switch procedure see Chapter 2 4 1 page 2 58 2 4 7 Setting miscellaneous ONU alarm input contacts The miscellaneous alarm inputs for the ONU Subshelf must be provisioned ac cording Table 5 1 see Chapter 5 4 1 8 page 5 17 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 65 Initial na
362. equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a GLL 4 98 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service There fore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capable of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked The number of timeslots depends on the type of the requested service see Table 4 8 page 4 62 All the timeslots providing the service for an unique GLL subscriber shall be allocated in the same E1 feeder In the subscriber s AID line termination bearer channel the last number that is the bearer channel number designates the channel 1 is the 1st channel 31 is the 31st channel GLL independent The GLL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders of V5 which are exclusively used for leased line purpose Provisioning For provisioning a digital leased line service also the layered structure as shown objects of GLL in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that four objects subscribers have to be provisioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the
363. er 4 102 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 3 LP 501 ENT GLLUN It 2 hdsl hdsl 1 sts 6 nts 5 ENT LLL Ill 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 HDSL AP Application pack data up to 4 sub HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data AETV oader HDSL GLL sub interface scriber LL link scriber data ENT HDSL hdsl 1 drop drop 1 3 2 apmode P M i ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 2 6 llts 1 1 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 2 7 lIts 1 3 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 2 8 Ilts 1 4 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 2 9 llts 1 7 ENT CRS LLTS Itoc 2 10 lIts 1 9 Figure 4 34 Provisioning data for a GLL subscriber line example 4 5 5 9 UVLL subscribers UVLL subscribers in the AnyMedia Access System Connection of UVLL subscribers Provisioning of UVLL subscribers 363 211 112 The AnyMedia Access System supports unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines ser vices via V 35 V 36 or X 21 interface The interface is provided by means of an NTU which is the far end of an HDSL transmission system UVLL services are provided by connecting 32 64 kbps timeslots supplied by two HDSL ports to 32 timeslots of one E1 port located on an IO_E1 pack FAC500B Both the subscriber and the service node side have to be provisioned to support unstructured 2 Mbps leased line For the service node side this has to be done for the E1 feeder The E1 feeder is used for unstructured 2 Mbps leased line service only The ass
364. er service types interface HDSL interface HDSL interface interface HDSL link V5 ISDN PRA up to 31 bearer not applicable upto16 bearer not applicable not applicable G 703 channels in channels in cluding TS 16 cluding TS 16 V3 ISDN PRA not applicable 32 bearer chan not applicable not applicable not applicable G 703 nels including TS 0 V5 ISDN PRA up to 31 bearer not applicable upto16 bearer not applicable not applicable G 703 VLL channels for V5 channels for V5 ISDN PRA in ISDN PRA in cluding TS 16 cluding TS 16 remaining remaining timeslots for timeslots for VLL VLL 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 75 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Le Table 4 9 Services depending on HDSL application mode Continued Unstructured Point to point V3 point to point to point Point to multi Different per HDSL point per Single pair per per HDSL point per service types interface HDSL interface HDSL interface interface HDSL link GLL up to 31 not applicable upto 16 not applicable upto15 timeslots in timeslots in timeslots cluding TS 16 cluding TS 16 TS 16 not used VLL up to 31 not applicable upto 16 not applicable upto15 timeslots timeslots timeslots GLL VLL up to 31 not applicable upto 16 not applicable upto15 timeslots for timeslots for timeslots for GLL remaining GLL remaining GLL TS 16 not timeslots with timeslots
365. er 3 4 47 page 3 139 Step 3 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 4 Delete the specified digital leased line subscriber entity by entering DLT VLLN Chapter 3 4 51 page 3 143 Step 5 If HDSL timeslots of the HDSL interface are used by other subscrib ers move the specified HDSL interface entity in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 6 If no other HDSL timeslot of the HDSL interface is used optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 7 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 8 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 9 If the LL link is not being used by another leased line subscriber op tionally perform the leased line link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 6 page 3 86 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 73 System modification growth degrowth for NB services GLL subscriber degrowth Le 3 3 12 8 GLL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified digital leased line subscriber out of service by entering ED GLLN see Chapter 3
366. er channel objects of the leased line subscriber are automatically deleted by the system and the allocated HDSL timeslots are released Assumptions The leased line subscriber and the used HDSL interface are in administrative pri mary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT VLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT VLLN AID where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT VLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 143 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a GLL subscriber M ese ee 3 4 52 Deleting an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according G 703 Purpose This procedure is to delete one n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity accord ing to G 703 The leased line subscriber must be in administrative primary service state OOS without any secondary service state and its bearer channels must not be cross connected to leased line link timeslots Additionally the used HDSL inter face must be in administrative primary service state OOS The bearer channel ob jects of the leased line subscribe
367. er out of service 3 104 3 4 13 Moving an n x 64 kbps leased line according V 35 V 36 or X 21 out of service 3 105 3 4 14 Moving an n x 64 kbps leased line according G 703 out of service 3 106_ 3 4 15 Moving a UVLL subscriber out of service 3 107 3 II o rr Contents 3 4 16 Moving a UGLL subscriber out of service 3 108 3 4 17 Moving a V3 link out of service 3 109 3 4 18 Moving a leased line link out of service 3 110 3 4 19 Moving an unstructured leased line link out of service 3 111 3 4 20 Moving a remote operations channel out of service 3 112 3 4 21 Moving an IO_E1 out of service or changing the protection permission 3 113 3 4 22 Moving an IO_HDLC out of service 3 114 3 4 23 Moving an application pack out of service 3 119 3 4 24 Moving an Optical Network Unit out of service 3 116 3 4 25 Deleting a cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot 3 117 3 4 26 Deleting a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 x communication path 3 118 3 4 27 Deleting a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 x interface 3 119 3 4 28 Deleting a user port 3 120 3 4 29 Deleting a POTS line 3 121 3 4 30 Deleting an ISDN BRA line 3 122 3 4 31 Deleting a V5 ISDN PRA line 3 123 3 4 32 Deleting a V3 ISDN PRA line 3 124 3 4 33 Deleting an HDSL interface 3 125 3 4 34 Deleting an application pack 3 126 3 4 35 Deleting an IO_E1 pack 3 127 3 4 36 Deleting a cross connection between V5 communication path and
368. erface in service PDR Lee ores Ss End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 299 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples Le 4 12 3 Example for provisioning a V5 2 POTS interface Purpose This example is to create a V5 2 POTS service with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 and 3 on IO_E1 2 link 1 and 2 communication channel 1 and 2 timeslot 15 and 16 communication path 1 2 3 and 4 appli cation pack 13 and 14 line termination 42 43 and 44 user port 22 23 and 24 protection group 1 and 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier the V5 link identifier the logical V5 com munication channel identifier and the layer 3 addresses must be identical to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 V5 link identifier 12 and 13 logical V5 communication channel identifier 42 and 43 layer 3 addresses 1000 1001 and 1002 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface BNIT VoLPetvVoOb 5 252 VOCy DE KoA VOLE LdU Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack BNIHLTOR LSet poe 1 2 Step 3 Define the V5 links ENIS Vobtivol lr ieres l 2 VoLRID LZ ENT VSL Vol 2r Se lse l 3 VSLRKLDSI 3 Step 4 Define the cross connections between V5 links and V5 2 interface ENT GCGRSS LULIS S VOLS ENTSCRSSLL eivol 7 vols Step 5 Define the V5 communication channels BNE V5CC et voece 3 1t2 tvocevd 42 gt
369. ers in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 25 Table structure of ALL service 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 87 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Te ee Table ALL Data for the ALL subscriber are stored in the ALL subscriber table There is one subse ber ALL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line ter mination id as the key to this table a reference to the used Z port the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an ALL sub scriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain the ALL subscriber id and the Z port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the com mand default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The command is rejected if either a table entry with the specified ALL subscriber id already exists or the specified Z port is already being used by another client Table LL interface Data for the LL interface are stored in the LL interface table and in the leased line timeslot table There is one LL interface table and one leased line timeslot table per AnyMedia Access System The LL interface table contains an LL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder the service state pri mary and secondary and the provisioning data When an LL interface is to be created the TL1 command
370. ervice state is not used in all cases Examples of secondary ser state vice states are described in Table 4 6 page 4 53 For example OOS UEQ means that the unit is not operational because it is not equipped in the shelf The service state of a unit of a certain layer see Figure 4 2 page 4 52 may depend on ser vice states of units of lower layers for example the state of a logical line depends on the state of a port Administrative On the logical lines layer and on the packs layer additionally there is an adminis service state trative service state whose primary service state is changeable via TL1 com mands The operator can set the desired mode for operation IS or OOS This ad ministrative primary service state is stored in NVDS and is never changed auto matically by the system The administrative service state allows the operator for example to remove lines from service for a certain time The secondary service state displays the current usability of the unit for example IS NOP means that the unit is Supposed to be working but currently a fault prevents it from being opera tional If an administrative service state is set by the operator this service state is used in the system for example it is shown in retrieve commands Table 4 6 Examples of secondary service states Secondary service state Meaning NAC Not accessible The unit is not accessible NOP Not operational The unit is not operational SHD Shutting down SHD is a speci
371. ervices Describes alarms and events on demand line testing alarm symp toms correlation tables and trouble clearing procedures for narrow band services Chapter 6 Performance management for narrowband services Describes the activities for performance management for narrow band services Chapter 7 Security management for narrowband services Describes the activities for security management for narrowband services Chapter 8 Power node preventive maintenance Describes maintenance intervals and activities for batteries XVIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document Conventions Abbreviations and Acronyms Lists the acronyms used to replace the longer expressions the acro nyms represent Glossary Defines terms that may be unfamiliar to the user Index Lists in alphabetical order the specific subject information in the doc uments All procedures referring to the ATM xDSL part of the AnyMedia Access System can be found in the Commands and Procedures which are included on the cus tomer documentation CD ROM 2 Conventions used in this document Terms used The following are terms used in this USM that may have a different meaning than alpabetically the general or common use of the term ordered a b cables refer generically to the tip ring pair cables that attach to the face plate of all application packs APs m Inthe AnyMedia Access System the term access means that the syste
372. es rr Te ee 4 12 12 Example for provisioning a UGLL interface Purpose This example is to create a UGLL interface with the following parameters E1 feeder 2 on IO_E1 3 unstructured link 4 application pack 12 port 1 HDSL interface 8 line termination 63 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack ENT FORI t lt 26eLl 3 Step 2 Define the application pack ENTAR SADALA ELP OGS 0 Step 3 Define the unstructured leased line link ENT ULLG SUL lade relse Step 4 Define the HDSL interfaces BENT HDSL vhdsl r rdrop drop lL 12 1 apmode upp Step 5 Define the unstructured leased line subscriber ENT UGLLN 26 63 2 sr nds L ends Ll 0 fdrsrc L0O ET Step 6 Define the cross connection between unstructured leased line sub scriber and unstructured leased line link ENTSCRS ULLE es LE G ULLE Step 7 Move the unstructured leased line subscriber in service ED JGELN Vitasos22 lt 2315 Step 8 Move the HDSL interfaces in service ED HDoSbsrnds l ora les 4 322 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 9 Move the unstructured leased line link in service PD Cis lacs Pes eee se End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 323 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples TT ee 4 12 13 Example for provisioning an ROC carried over leased line interface Purpose This example is to create a remote operation
373. es Switching system configuration ae 2 3 7 Switching system configuration Purpose This command switches the standby system configurations customer configura tion and ISDN mode to active The system performs an autonomous restart for reconfiguring after completion of this command After the restart the active and standby system configuration are equal This command should only be used dur ing initial turn up of the system from experienced maintenance personnel because of the service affecting restart Step 1 Activate the configurations set in Chapter 2 3 5 page 2 17 Setting the customer configuration and Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 Setting ISDN mode configuration Follow the SW CFG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW CFG System Response COMPLD The system performs a reset and af ter recovery the system runs with the configurations set in Chapter 2 3 5 page 2 17 and Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 gt NOTE The GSI session will be disconnected after issuing this command The ses sion must be reestablished after recovery of the system see Chapter 2 3 2 page 2 7 Step 2 Verify the current customer configuration Follow the RTRV CFG CUST GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV CFG CUST System Response The CFGID shows the customer configuration the system is currently using The CFGID matches the values given in the system release description SRD Step 3
374. ess 1 3 1 Starting the GSI Purpose To start the GSI Procedure Step 1 The GSI is started after installation by selecting the GSI program in the Windows 95 start menu System Response The GSI main window is displayed OAO WO o o o oO oO oO Icon for activating the Windows 95 menu GSI title bar GSI top menu GSI toolbar Button for terminating application GSI status bar Oe amp oOWO Figure 1 8 GSI start screen and main window with control elements 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 13 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating ee Language The language used for the GSI is English GSI modes The GSI can be run in two modes m Off line mode or learn mode disconnected from the system This mode starts when you first launch the GSI For working in the learn mode no login is required because no information concerning the user ad ministration is stored in the GSI m Connected mode connected to the system At the first start up you will be asked to specify your start up options This option can be modified using the Options menu Startup see Figure 1 30 on page 1 40 startup Options How would you like to work with GSI on Startup Offline Learn Mode Connect to the System Set As Default Change the Ask User preference to the above option 20 vou won t be asked again Figure 1 9 Startup options 1 3 2 Setting the program windows Main Window In the main window of
375. eters Table 4 2 Alarm severity defaults Continued Provisioned Severity AID Condition Service Effect Level S S S S CF FAN MJF a TAMPER ACF FAN PMJ IS EXT LOA OS Al MJF None submc 1 8 1 8 TAMPER EXTM wase oao aoo Related provisioning commands SET ALMCDE RTRV ALMCDE NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA A SA A A A NSA NSA om NSA om mn NSA fe NSA fe NSA fox NSA fe NSA fe NSA fe NSA om sa fom sa fom safe safe sa fom mn 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 41 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning and service activation o ee 4 5 Provisioning and service activation 4 5 1 Introduction Definition Service activation is the process of preparing the AnyMedia Access System for service by configuring the cross connections between a local exchange LE and an access network element ANE The ANE is responsible for the physical con nection or termination of subscriber lines whereas the LE is responsible for switching and call processing including the knowledge of supplementary ser vices Charging etc Overview This chapter describes the activation of services in general and contains the pro cedures needed to activate service at the AnyMedia Access System Since this chapter makes numerous references to TL1 messages needed to execute the procedures the used access identifiers are listed at th
376. f V5 2 the subscriber is as sociated with a V5 2 interface where its 64 kbps timeslots are selected on a per call basis The association of the D channel signaling types to the communication paths of the V5 x interface is always done by provisioning The association of an ISDN BRA subscriber to a V5 x interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 A concentration of ISDN BRA subscribers is only possible in the case of V5 2 An ISDN BRA subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the lines layer to a U port of the equipment layer located on an ISDN application pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of an ISDN BRA subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its U ports for service There fore it is possible to check at provisioning time of any subscriber whether the re lated pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capable of serving the subscriber For example the provisioning of a 13th subscriber on an ISDN AP with 12 U ports is rejected at provisioning time Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked For ex ample the provisioning of an ISDN BRA subscriber on a POTS AP is rejected at provisioning time Each provisioned ISDN BRA sub
377. f the AP Follow the TST CCT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command To PaCCTe ALD where AID subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 62 AID of the physical drop A rejection message is sent if a drop circuit that is specified in the command is undergoing manual test access either monitor or split ting or if the AP that serves the requested drop circuit is missing Step 10 If the command request completes successfully the following nor mal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID CT_ RESULT RESULT2 7 where ATD subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 52 AID of the physical drop CT_RESULT CT FAIL CT OKAY circuit test result CT FAIL circuit test failed CT OKAY circuit test passed RESULT2 lt string gt consisting of 0 to 60 characters additional test result information Step 11 If one of the tests fails replace the AP and repeat Step 9 again Step 12 IF THEN the object to grow is a POTS sub go to Step 1 of the POTS subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 22 the object to grow is an ISDN BRA go to Step 1 of the ISDN BRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 23 the object to grow is a V5 ISDN PRA _ goto Step 1 of the V5 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 24 3 20 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth ee IF THEN the object to grow is a V3
378. f the The following functions can be performed by clicking on the appropriate toolbar GSI toolbar Icon Table 1 6 Toolbar functions Toolbar option Information in Connect and log intoa Connects to a session Chapter 1 3 5 page 1 16 session Disconnect and log out of Disconnects a session Chapter 1 3 6 page 1 22 a session Retrieve current equip Retrieves current equip Chapter 1 6 3 page 1 38 ment ment Retrieve alarms and con Retrieves current alarms Chapter 1 5 4 page 1 31 ditions Open event log Opens the Event Log Chapter 1 5 6 page 1 33 window TL1SI View Opens the TL1SI View Chapter 1 5 7 page 1 35 All TL1 commands Launches the TL1 com Chapter 1 7 2 page 1 43 mands window TL1 commands for con Launches the TL1 com figuration management mands window for con figuration management 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 25 GSI software for narrowband services Performing GSI functions E SeSe Table 1 6 Toolbar functions Toolbar option Information in TL1 commands for fault Launches the TL1 com Chapter 1 10 page 1 58 management mands window for fault management TL1 commands for secu Launches the TL1 com rity management mands window for secu rity management Web browser Opens your Web browser Chapter 1 6 5 page 1 41 for viewing the TL1 com mands descriptions On line Help Opens the On line Help Chapter 1 6 5 page 1 41 window Abort Aborts command cur rently bein
379. faceplate connector is not plugged in faceplate connecior is faulty cable is faulty application pack is faulty the FAULT LED remains dark the AP may be faulty try another AP and repeat Step 5 For ONU The optical link may be down install the optical link the FAULT LED remains dark on the probably the power supply is faulty Are second AP too the LEDs POW1 and POW2 on the CIU lit If not the fuses may be faulty check the following fuses n an AC rack check the fuses F1 and F2 in the CPS2000 right side In a DC rack check the circuit breakers in the Rack Connection Panel RCP F1 and F7 for AnyMedia shelf 1 F2 and F7 for AnyMedia shelf 2 F3 and F9 for AnyMedia shelf 3 If the LED CLF on the Optical Appli a fault or facility alarm occurs on the cation Pack OAP lights perma optical link carrier line failure or nently the optical link between the OAP and the OCP is not installed If the LED CLF on the Optical Con a fault or facility alarm occurs on the troller Pack for ONU OCP lights optical link carrier line failure or permanently the optical link between the OAP and the OCP is not installed System Response The pictorial representation of the system is updated to show the installed AP packs at the connected GSI and the inventory data are refreshed Step 8 Repeat Step 3 through Step 7 for all APs listed in the engineering work order 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 45
380. feeders Additional a manual switch back requests a new protection switch if the service pack is in administrative primary service state IS and not inhibited from IO_E1 pack protection switching A loopback on E1 feeders served by the protection pack is torn down Assumption A second operational COMDAC is installed m Protection IO_E1 pack is installed and provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the SW TOWKG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command OW TOWKG AIDIYPR IAID gt 2 MODE where AIDTYPE EQPT access identifier type EQPT equipment AID core 1 io0elp 1 access identifier core 1 core side ioelp 1 E1 protection pack MODE RESET protection switch mode RESET reset The value of the protection switch mode has the following meaning RESET This mode resets a protection switch inhibit and re leases a forced protection switch Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW TOWKG section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 289 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing configuration rr Te ee 4 11 7 3 Editing configuration ED CONFIG Purpose The ED CONFIG Edit
381. fest themselves as clicking in voice calls distortion of video retrans modes mission in data calls or dropping of data or facsimile fax calls altogether Correct synchronization engineering will ensure transmission quality and network perfor mance by reducing timing slips and limiting network degradation from synchroni zation faults that are passed on to the AnyMedia Access System The system supports two different timing modes m External synchronization mode m Free running mode Clock transparency The unstructured 2 Mbps leased line via E1 feeder provides clock transparency The clock transparency provided by a network is a mechanism to transport the clock information provided at one subscriber s end through the network to the oth ers subscriber s end The clock needs not to be synchron to the network clock 4 10 1 External synchronization mode External The AnyMedia Access System recovers timing from ne m One of the up to 16 E1 feeder ports 2 048 Mbps interface or from m The station clock interface 2 048 MHz Synchronization Optionally a second E1 feeder port or the station clock interface can be desig protection nated as protection timing input Clock sources for Figure 4 50 shows different external clock sources for the AnyMedia Access AnyMedia Access system System 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 271 Configuration management for narrowband services Different timing sources Attributes of the external synchro
382. fication growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth i S Step 12 IF THEN the object to grow is a POTS sub go to Step 1 of the POTS subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 22 the object to grow is an ISDN BRA go to Step 1 of the ISDN BRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 23 the object to grow is a V5 ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the V5 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 24 the object to grow is a V3 ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the V3 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 28 the object to grow is an ALL subscriber go to Step 1 of the ALL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 30 the object to grow is a DLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the DLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 31 the object to grow is a VLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the VLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 32 the object to grow is a GLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the GLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 35 the object to grow is a UVLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the UVLL subscriber growth procedure on page 3 38 the object to grow is a UGLL sub go to Step 1 of the UGLL subscriber scriber growth procedure on page 3 40 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 17 System modification growth degrowth for NB services AP and subscriber growth ese ee 3 3 4 2 Application pack growth in the ONU Procedure Step 1 Verify that the correct A
383. fining view options and for getting help These functions are con tained in the following menus a File m Edit View m Window Help 1 6 1 File File menu In the File menu the following actions can be started m 8 Scripting New Macro Script Clicking on the File Scripting New Macro Script menu option launches the visual script window in which code script files can be edited Chapter 1 7 4 page 1 47 Macro script files are written for executing in teractive programmed and more complex scripts macros Macro script files are written in a Basic script language that is you need to know how to write in Basic to use this utility m 8 Scripting New Text Script Clicking on the File Scripting New Text Script menu option launches the NotePad text editor window in which text files can be edited Chapter 1 7 4 page 1 47 Text script files are written to run sequences of commands m 8 Scripting Open Clicking on the File Scripting Open menu option opens a file dialog win dow in which code script files or text files can be opened see Chapter 1 7 5 page 1 49 m 8 Scripting Run Clicking on the File Scripting Run menu option opens a file dialog where predefined script files can be executed see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 m 8 Scripting Pause Clicking on the File Scripting Pause menu option momentarily stops a running script see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 m Scripting Resume Clicking on the File Scripting Resume menu option restarts a paused s
384. formation ee The system is safe in normal operation There are however some potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated In particular these arise during the m Opening of housings or equipment covers Manipulation of any kind within the equipment even if it has been discon nected from the power supply Disconnection of optical or electrical connections through possible contact with m Live parts m Laser light Hot surfaces m Sharp edges or m Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge 6 2 General safety requirements In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum it is imper ative to observe the following rules a Installation configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective documenta tion Due to the complexity of the unit system the personnel requires special training The unit system must be operated by expert and authorized users only The user must operate the unit system only after having read and under stood the chapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation For complex systems additional training is recommended Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel must be carried out and documented Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system in cluding the software must be carried out by qualified Lucent Tech nologies pers
385. g Le 4 5 7 2 V3 ISDN PRA service Purpose This procedure is to create a V3 ISDN PRA service Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the V3 link by entering ENT V3L see Chapter 4 6 47 page 4 210 Step 3 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 5 Define the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber by entering ENT V3LN see Chapter 4 6 48 page 4 211 Step 6 Define the cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link by entering ENT CRS V3L see Chapter 4 6 49 page 4 212 Step 7 Move the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber in service by entering ED V3LN see Chapter 4 6 50 page 4 213 Step 8 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 9 Move the V3 link in service by entering ED V3L see Chapter 4 6 51 page 4 214 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 131 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning Te ee 4 5 7 3 Non V5 permanent leased lines The following sections describe the provisioning of the V5 independent non switched services m analog leased lines services ALLs m digital leased lines services DLLs m nx 64 kbps leased line services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 VLLs m 1x64 kbps leased line services according G 703 GLLs 4 5 7 3 1 Analog
386. g and 108 298 670 363 211 1102 Ordering Guide APOG User Service Manual USM Vol 1 108 298 811 363 211 1122 P Narrowband Services 363 211 133 Not separately order able Included on CD ROM 363 211 2062 P Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL services Installation Manual for AC powered racks Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and DC powered racks Customer Documentation on 108298787 363 211 114 4 CD ROM 363 211 2072 P Optical Network Unit ONU Installation Manual for In 108626367 363 211 1502 ONU for Indoor Applica door Applications ONU IMI tions Optical Network Unit ONU Installation Manual for Out 363 211 155 ONU for Outdoor Appli door Applications OQNU IMO In preparation cations 631 600 2949 52C Outdoor Electronics Installation Manual Cabinet 92C International Indoor Description and Installation 640 250 308 Electronics Cabinet In preparation Mass Provisioning Tool for User Manual 108408733 363 211 116 V5 Services AnyMedia Element Man User Service Manual ee 363 211 486 as l A AEM Customer Documentation on 363 21 1 487 elease 1 7 CD ROM WaveStar ADM 4 1 System Manual 108436312 9594 401 20451 1 For the ordering address see How to order this document XXII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document Related documentation Table 1 List of documents Continued CIC Ordering Component Manual Type Comcode Number LCS 4 1 V
387. g executed 1 4 3 Comparing the options for performing GSI functions For several functions there is more than one possibility to perform them Table 1 7 Options for performing GSI functions Connect to a session NE Operations Connect Chapter 1 3 5 page 1 16 Disconnect a session NE Operations Disconnect Chapter 1 3 6 page 1 22 Retrieve current equipment View Refresh Shelf Chapter 1 6 3 page 1 38 Retrieve current alarms Fault Alarms Chapter 1 5 4 page 1 31 Open the Event Log window Fault Events Chapter 1 5 6 page 1 33 Open the TL1SI View View TL1SI MIB Chapter 1 5 7 page 1 35 Launch the TL1 commands TL1 Commands window Chapter 1 7 2 page 1 43 1 26 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Performing GSI functions Table 1 7 Options for performing GSI functions Launch the TL1 commands L1 Commands Configura Chapter 1 9 page 1 56 window for configuration tion Mgmt management Launch the TL1 commands TL1 Commands Fault Mgmt Chapter 1 10 page 1 58 window for fault manage ment Launch the TL1 commands TL1 Commands Security Chapter 1 8 page 1 53 window for security manage Mgmt ment Open the Web browser for Help Commands Procedures viewing the TL1 commands descriptions Chapter 1 6 5 page 1 41 Open the On line Help win Help Contents Chapter 1 6 5 page 1 41 dow Abort command currently TL1 Commands Abort Com being executed mand
388. ges 122 1 3 8 Terminating the GSI 1 23 1 4 Performing GSI functions 1 24 1 4 1 Top menu 1 24 1 4 2 Toolbar 1 24 1 4 3 Comparing the options for performing GSI functions 1 26 1 5 System displays and windows 1 28 1 5 1 Overview 1 28 1 5 2 GSI start screen and main window 1 28 1 5 3 Shelf view 1 29 1 5 3 1 Pack area 1 1 5 3 2 Status display 1 30 1 5 4 Alarms and conditions reporting window ToL 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 I o rr Contents 1 5 5 System log 1 32 1 5 6 Event Log 1 33 1 5 7 TL1SI View 1 35 1 66 General GSI functions 1 36 1 6 1 File 1 36 1 6 2 Edit 1 38 1 6 3 View 1 38 1 6 4 Window 1 41 1 6 5 Help 1 41 1 7 Working with TL1 commands 1 43 1 7 1 General 1 43 1 7 2 Executing TL1 commands through a GSI dialog 1 43 1 7 3 Defining and Executing TL1 Commands 1 45 1 7 4 Creating Script Files 1 47 1 7 5 Editing Script Files 1 49 1 7 6 Using the Script Facility Function 1 50 1 7 7 Running Script Files 1 52 1 8 NE Operations 1 53 1 8 1 Overview 1 53 1 8 2 NE Operation Menu 1 53 1 9 Provisioning 1 56 1 9 1 Overview 1 56 1 9 2 Provisioning Menu 1 56 1 10 Fault management functions 1 58 1 10 1 Overview 1 58 1 10 2 Fault menu 1 58 1 11 HDSL Performance Monitoring 1 62 1 II Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services 1 1 General What you will find In this chapter you will find the following information A short description of the management concept m System requirements m Instructi
389. given 11 2 4 2 Spec block optional The second optional message payload block is the spec block gt NOTE The spec block is used as a name defined SPECIFIC DATA parameter block This means each parameter has to be specified as lt parametername gt lt parametervalue gt e g DROP drop 1 2 24 The parameters in this block are separated by commas and each parame ter is positionally independent of other parameter s in the same block The comma is even necessary when an optional parameter is not given 11 2 4 3 State block optional The third optional message payload block is the state block gt NOTE The state block is used as a position defined STATE parameter block This means each parameter is positionally dependent on other parameter s in the same block The parameters in this block are separated by commas The comma is even necessary when an optional parameter is not given A parameter block always follows a colon and contains a possibly empty list of parameters separated by commas In TL1 trailing colon block separators may be omitted if there are no parameters entered in those last blocks Example RTRV ALM EOPT Since the TID and CTAG are optional parameters the command name followed by the required semicolon is an acceptable input format The semicolon must be sent with the input command to indicate the end of a com plete TL1 input message If the semicolon then the AnyMedia Access System
390. hapter 3 2 2 2 page 3 11 you want to prepare one pre loaded COMDAC upgrade more in the warehouse by following the AnyMedia Access Software upgrade via boot down Systems load simplex mode procedure see Chapter 4 3 5 page 4 26 prepare more pre loaded COMDAGCs in the warehouse by following the Prepare pre loaded COMDAC by copying an existing pre loaded COMDAC procedure see Chapter 3 2 2 1 page 3 9 and then at each site go to the Replacing COMDAC COM500 by COM507 procedure see Chapter 3 2 2 2 page 3 11 the new COMDAC s are pre loaded with go to the Replacing COMDAC the correct SW COM500 by COM507 procedure see Chapter 3 2 2 2 page 3 11 3 8 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release TT TT FF eS ee 3 2 2 1 Prepare pre loaded COMDAC by copying an existing pre loaded COMDAC Purpose This procedure is performed to prepare pre loaded COMDACs if a pre loaded COMDAC according to the procedure Software upgrade via boot download sim plex mode exists see Chapter 4 3 5 page 4 26 The copying procedure lasts approximately 40 minutes for each COMDAC Assumptions m A pre loaded COMDAC COM501 with the new software version is inserted in the system m The system is running in simplex mode m A GSI is connected to the system Protection switching of the COMDAC is not inhibited verify via the TL1 command RTRV STATE EQPT Procedure Step
391. have equipment the following equipment readily at hand m APCrunning the GSI software application m and you must be properly logged into the system 4 2 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Read database 4 2 1 NVDS database backup Purpose To create a copy of the database backup for configuration data security reasons gt NOTE The backup file must have the extension sdb connection via CIT port in non PPP mode or bdb connection via TELNET Procedure Step 1 Follow the RD DB GSI operation Or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message where FN lt string gt consisting of 1 to 12 characters out of a z A Z 0 9 file name to which the NVDS will be copied Once this command is successfully completed the GSI transfers the file which contains the NVDS data from the system with the file ex tension FN to the GSI AEM Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the RD DB section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 3 Configuration management for narrowband services Restore database ee 4 2 2 NVDS database restoration Purpose To restore the NVDS
392. he AN discards all received messages from the LE and additionally suppresses all alarming related to the V5 inter face while being in state RE PRO IN PROGRESS m after the switch over in the AN the AN changes its state to READY and restarts the V5 interface as in normal operation The restart of the interface may be delayed to ensure that the LE detects an inter face down condition and also restarts the interface This delay time includes the re provisioning itself from the time on where the system stops the datalinks and is customer dependent from none delay up to 95 seconds as for normal V5 interface startups This delay time for the re provisioning procedure is a customer specific value in the system 4 236 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning AN LE _ VE SSSIEYRE PROVISIONING test whether variant Oe eT is available in LE p READY 7 Swi CHOVER TO NEW van ANG request switch over aLOCKING STARTED i a gt ae 7 gwiTCH OVE _ o TO NEW VARIAN switch over accepted RE PRoy SIONING re provisioning of data G STARTED internally block user ports stop V5 interface delay time of interface _ restart if necessary restart V5 interface H re provision ing of data Beere ames a restart interface normal interface startup messages unblock ports unblocking of ports required message y opti
393. he V5 1 interface in service BOS Vokes vom o nes tole End of steps 4 328 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples 4 12 15 Example for provisioning an ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 interface Purpose This example is to create a remote operations channel ROC carried over semi permanent leased line via V5 2 interface with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 and 3 on E1 plug in 2 link 1 and 2 communication channel 1 and 2 timeslot 15 and 16 communication path 1 2 3 and 4 user port 26 protection group 1 and 2 IP address 192 168 0 1 submask IP address 255 255 255 252 remote IP address 192 168 0 2 and the parameters for the de fault route destination IP address 0 0 0 0 submask IP address 0 0 0 0 gateway IP address 192 168 0 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier the V5 link identifier the logical V5 com munication channel identifier and the layer 3 addresses must be identical to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 V5 link identifier 12 and 13 logical V5 communication channel identifier 42 and 43 layer 3 address 1000 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface ENTSYVDI RIVO L 3 AIVO Lype YD VOLE La 0 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack ENIS 20Ob lre Oe le Ts Step 3 Define the V5 links ENTS VoL VoL less se l elad 22
394. he command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED GLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 205 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a UVLL in service BE SeSe 4 6 43 Moving a UVLL subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line subscriber entity according V 35 V 36 or X 21 UVLL sub scriber to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED UVLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SUV NS ALD tan POL where AID Jes ial 0244 AID of the line termination PST a administrative primary service state ES in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED UVLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu
395. he managed NTU by entering DLT NTU see Chapter 3 4 66 page 3 158 Step 2 Delete all digital leased line subscriber entities using the managed NTU by following the DLL subscriber degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 12 6 page 3 72 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 91 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Provisioning an ONU 3 4 Related commands This section gives a detailed description of the commands used in the degrowth procedures The commands for the growth procedures are described in the chap ter Provisioning and service activation on page 4 42 3 4 1 Provisioning an Optical Network Unit Purpose This procedure is to create an Optical Network Unit ONU Subshelf The ENT SUBSHELF command defines the logical subshelf number and the type of the subshelf With the creation of the logical subshelf its related subshelf controller pack slot and the subshelf application pack slots for further provisioning are auto matically created The related subshelf feeder port is also automatically created which must be cross connected with an AnyMedia Mainshelf server port to define which AnyMedia Mainshelf server port shall support the ONU Subshelf The ad ministrative primary service state of the ONU Subshelf after creation is Out of Service and must be changed after the cross connection to In Service for pro viding service Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt e
396. hen the OAP entity is deleted optionally disconnect the optical link from the SC type fibre connector on the faceplate of the speci fied OAP put protective caps on the fiber connector of the optical link and on the connector on the OCP and remove the implicated OAP DANGER Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation The AnyMedia Access System operates with invisible laser radiation of Laser Class 1 Laser radiation can cause considerable injuries to the eyes Never look into the end of an exposed fibre or pack optical connectors as long as the optical source is switched on This applies particularly to the connections of the OAP and the OCP Always observe the laser warning instructions End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 89 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Degrowth of provisioning variants Le 3 3 17 Degrowth of provisioning variants Procedure Step 1 Change the state of the standby provisioning variant to NOT_READY by entering ED V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 2 page 4 254 Step 2 Delete the contents of the standby provisioning variant by entering INIT V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 4 page 4 257 Step 3 Delete the standby provisioning variant by entering DLT V5PVAR see Chapter 3 4 65 page 3 157 End of steps 3 90 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Managed NTU degrowth ee 3 3 18 Managed NTU degrowth Procedure Step 1 Delete t
397. hey are not suitable by en tering ED NTU DFLT see Chapter 4 6 58 page 4 230 Step 2 Define the NTU entity by entering ENT NTU see Chapter 4 6 56 page 4 221 Step 3 Optionally edit the provisioning data of the NTU entity by entering ED NTU see Chapter 4 6 57 page 4 226 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 65 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Subscriber degrowth a 3 3 12 Subscriber degrowth Purpose Subscriber degrowth includes deleting service from a specified application pack AP IF THEN the object to degrow is a POTS sub go to Step 1 of the POTS subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 67 the object to degrow is an ISDN BRA go to Step 1 of the ISDN BRA sub subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 68 the object to degrow is a V5 ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the V5 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 69 the object to degrow is a V3 ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the V3 ISDN PRA sub subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 70 the object to degrow is an ALL sub go to Step 1 of the ALL subscriber de scriber growth procedure on page 3 71 the object to degrow is a DLL sub go to Step 1 of the DLL subscriber de scriber growth procedure on page 3 72 the object to degrow is a VLL sub go to Step 1 of the VLL subscriber de scriber growth procedure on page 3 73 the object to degrow is a GLL sub go to Step 1 of the GLL subscriber de scr
398. iber degrowth procedure on page 3 69 to delete all user ports and all ISDN PRA lines 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 83 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 x degrowth interface o ELLE Step 10 Delete all cross connections between communication paths and communication channels by entering DLT CRS CPCC see Chapter 3 4 36 page 3 128 Step 11 Delete all V5 communication paths by entering DLT V5CP see Chapter 3 4 37 page 3 129 Step 12 Delete all cross connections between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslots by entering DLT CRS CCTS see Chapter 3 4 38 page 3 130 Step 13 Delete all V5 communication channels by entering DLT V5CC see Chapter 3 4 39 page 3 131 Step 14 Delete the cross connection between V5 link and V5 x interface by entering DLT CRS LI see Chapter 3 4 40 page 3 132 Step 15 Delete the V5 link by entering DLT V5L see Chapter 3 4 41 page 3 133 Step 16 Delete the V5 x interface by entering DLT V5I see Chapter 3 4 42 page 3 134 Step 17 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 3 84 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V3 link degrowth TT EE ee 3 3 14 5 V3 link degrowth Purpose To
399. iber growth procedure on page 3 74 the object to degrow is a UVLL sub go to Step 1 of the UVLL subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 75 the object to degrow is a UGLL sub go to Step 1 of the UGLL subscriber scriber degrowth procedure on page 3 76 gt NOTE When blocking a V5 link an SPLL ROC on this link can no longer be used In this case no transmission over the bearer channel used by the SPLL ROC is possible that is no management connection is possible until the V5 link is unblocked again via the GSI AEM Therefore it is recommended for a V5 2 interface to install two V5 links so that the LE has to switch to the sec ond one automatically in case the first is blocked As the SPLL ROC is handled like a V5 subscriber it is possible to block it In this case also no transmission over the bearer channel used by the SPLL ROC is possible until the V5 subscriber is unblocked again via the GSI AEM 3 66 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services POTS subscriber degrowth ee ee 3 3 12 1 POTS subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified POTS line out of service by entering ED PLN see Chapter 3 4 7 page 3 99 Step 2 IF THEN the subscriber is connected toa V5 1 go to Step 3 interface the subscriber is connected toa V5 2 go to Step 4 interface Step 3 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot by ente
400. ices V5 re provisioning CO ee 4 7 11 Alarms 4 7 11 1 Re provisioning in progress status condition Status condition The system raises a status condition during the re provisioning procedure to in form the operator On receipt of a Switch over to variant message from the LE and acceptance to switch over by the system the status condition is raised and cleared when the subsequent interface restart begins This status condition is raised at a switch over initiated by the AN as well as a switch over initiated by the LE 4 7 11 2 Blocking started transient status condition Transient status The reception of a Blocking Started message is reported with a transient status condition condition report to the operator This informs the operator that the connected local exchange may now block the related user ports A transient status condition was chosen because no finish criterion for a set clear condition exists in the AN 4 7 11 3 Alarm suppression No alarming of V5 During an active re provisioning procedure that is while in state PV2 entities IN PROGRESS the normal alarming of V5 entities is temporarily disabled All raised alarms are cleared at entering this state and re raised if they persist after wards This behavior ensures that alarms are cleanly handled and no alarms are misinterpreted due to different provisioning variant datasets 4 7 12 Re provisioning scenarios 4 7 12 1 Extension of dataset Scenario exten
401. if either a table entry with the specified ULL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already be ing used by another client Table HDSL Data for the HDSL interface are stored in the HDSL interface table There is one interface HDSL interface table per AnyMedia Access System The HDSL interface table contains an HDSL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL ports the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an HDSL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the HDSL interface id and the HDSL port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used When an HDSL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the HDSL interface timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The HDSL interface timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an HDSL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified HDSL interface id al ready exists or the specified HDSL port is already being used by another client Table ULL Data for the unstructured leased line service are stored in the ULL services table services There is one ULL services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains the UGLL subscriber id and the ULL interface id When an entry in this t
402. ifier AID for addressing the AnyMedia Access System components This parameter identifies the entity within the system to be acted upon by the input message e g logical line or logi cal E1 which is being provisioned e g It 42 AIDs are required for most TL1 com mands and they must be valid for the AnyMedia Access System gt NOTE For some security management and system administration TL1 commands the user identifier UID or machine identifier is used instead of the AID in this field AID is lower case however if the user identifier or machine identifier is used as AID then it is case sensitive 11 2 2 3 Correlation tag CTAG optional The third staging parameter block is the correlation tag CTAG This field is used to associate the command message to the corresponding response message Issue 7 December 2000 XXXVII The CTAG input parameter has the following characteristics m The CTAG is optional and the AnyMedia Access System accepts an input command without a CTAG If the CTAG is not given the AnyMedia Access System checks its syntax If the TL1SI operations then the AnyMedia system assigns Access System will a CTAG value as part of the CTAG is syntactically copy the associated the input TL1 message correct CTAG and send the same CTAG in the appro priate position of the ac knowledgment and or the output response If the TL1SI operations then the AnyMedia system assigns but Access
403. igured it will take a significant amount of time to poll all NT Us m Upto 384 NTUs can be managed by the AnyMedia Access System The following table lists the supported types of managed NTUs Table 4 11 Supported managed NTUs V 35 NTU AS2063 M14_ 48 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 128 kbps X 21 NTU AS2062 M9 1 2 kbps 2 4 kbps 4 8 kbps 9 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 19 2 kbps 48 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 128 kbps V 24 NTU AS2064 M11 1 2 kbps 2 4 kbps 4 8 kbps 9 6 kbps 14 4 kbps 19 2 kbps Managed NTU For provisioning a managed NTU also the layered structure as shown in configuration Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies An NTU is configured using the TL1 command ENT NTU The user must set the TYPE parameter to the type of NTU being cre ated Depending on this TYPE further type specific parameters can be set As implied by Figure 4 2 page 4 52 the user has to provision the DLLN after provi sioning the NTU Furthermore the NTU can only be modified when the DLLN is out of service Type Model Supported speeds Once an NTU has been configured physically connected and layer1 has activated then the COMDAC is able to determine its real interface type If that does not match the configured interface this fact is signaled to the user Managed NTU The managed NTU attributes configurable by the AnyMedia Access System are configurable parameters m NTU interface type m NTU speed m Data clocking mode m Character length m V 14 mode m RTS to CT
404. ilable on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 219 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a ROC in service i S 4 6 55 Moving a remote operations channel in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an embed ded remote operations channel ROC to IS Assumptions ROC has already been provisioned and is in administrative primary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ROC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED ROGH TA LD oTa PST where ATD roc l AID of the embedded remote op erations channel PST as administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ROC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 220 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a managed NTU 4 6 56 Provisioning a managed NTU Purpose This procedure is to create an NTU entity with its operator supplied provisioning data or defaults It specifies a physical drop of an L
405. iled information on the command and the error responses see the DLT PLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 121 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an ISDN BRA line BE SeSe 3 4 30 Deleting an ISDN BRA line Purpose This procedure is to delete one ISDN BRA subscriber entity The entity and its bearer channel must not be cross connected to a V5 user port or a V5 timeslot Its administrative primary service state must be OOS The bearer channel objects of the ISDN BRA subscriber are automatically deleted by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT ILN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT ILN AID where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT ILN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 122 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V5 ISDN PRA line ee 3 4 31 Deleting a V5 ISDN PRA line Purp
406. ime stat Unavailable Time finish 12 10 3 July 2000 to 12 25 3 July 2000 14 10 3 June 2000 to 16 25 3 June 2000 4 01 17 Feb 2000 to 12 00 21 Feb 2000 e oe 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 63 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions E SeSe 1 64 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Contents 2 1 Introduction 2 2 Assumptions 2 3 System turn up procedures at AnyMedia Mainshelf location 2 3 1 COMDAC installation 2 362 CIU installation and GSI connection 2 3 3 Verifying the COMDAC software 2 3 4 Clearing the NVDS provisioning Memory 23 0 Setting the customer configuration 2 3 6 Setting ISDN mode configuration 2 3 Switching system configuration 2 3 8 lO_ HDLC non protection installation 2 3 9 Adding IO_HDLC pack protection 2 3 10 Setting the source ID 2 3 11 Setting the date and time 2 3 12 Setting autonomous messages to GSI AEM 2 3 13 Setting the IP address 2 3 14 Setting up IP routing 2 3 15 lO _ E1 installation 2 3 16 Adding IO_E1 pack protection 2 3 17 Setting clock synchronization parameters 2 3 18 Application pack installation 2 3 19 Establishing the ROC interface 2 3 20 Verifying proper system turn up 2 3 21 OAP installation 2 3 22 Connecting the optical link to the OAP 2 3 23 Provisioning of the ONU Subshelf 363 211 112 Issue 7 hk be be on ie on be N NO P No i O No as N No na
407. imeslot O transparently to a cross connected unstructured 2 Mbps leased line subscriber according V 35 V 36 or X 21 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 63 Configuration management for narrowband services Services 4 5 3 3 6 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according G 703 Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 ulll 1 ulll 16 hdsl 1 hdsl 512 It 1 1 1024 2 JOEREI HET 4 HDSL AP HDSL _ len Application pack interface i ULL link c HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data 4x E1 feeder data scriber data up to 4 sub Internally 32 64 kbps cross connections externally one 2 Mbps cross connection 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf If the AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 fei Subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 16 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 12 Functional diagram of UGLL Logical UGLL Each of up to 16 unstructured leased line links transports the full E1 2 Mbps ca entities pacity including timeslot O transparently to a cross connected unstructured 2 Mbps leased line subscriber according G 703 4 5 4 Physical ports E1 ports The physical ports of the AnyMedia Access System provide feeder E1 connec tions and subscriber a b pairs Th
408. in the link are auto matically deleted Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT LLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT ELLITAID where AID 111 1 16 AID of the leased line link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT LLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 148 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an unstructured LL link ee ee 3 4 57 Deleting an unstructured leased line link Purpose This procedure is to delete an unstructured leased line link The link must not be cross connected Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Dit U tiles LD where AID qe I AID of the unstructured leased line link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT ULLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 1
409. inating the GSI Terminating the The GSI can be terminated in five different ways GSI m By selecting the File Exit menu option in the GSI top menu By selecting the Close menu option in the Windows 95 menu This menu is displayed by simply clicking on the icon in the top left corner of the GSI main window or by the key combination Alt SPACE m By double clicking on the icon in the top left corner of the GSI window m By clicking on the symbol in the top right corner of the GSI window m By using the key combination Alt F4 Before quitting the GSI the operator is prompted for confirmation GSI x a Exit Graphical System Interface Figure 1 16 Exit GSI confirmation window 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 23 GSI software for narrowband services Performing GSI functions 1 4 Performing GSI functions Overview The GSI provides different possibilities to perform internal functions and manage ment functions These functions can be initiated via Top menu Toolbar In most cases the choice depends on the operator s personal preference For a list of the different functions and possibilities see Chapter 1 4 3 page 1 26 1 4 1 Top menu Top Menu The top menu is used to activate internal system functions and functions from the management functions such as NE operations provisioning and fault management gt NOTE The executable functions depend on the user privileges see Table 7 2 page 7 3
410. ine out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V5 ISDN PRA line to OOS To change the administrative primary service state only the pri mary service state and the shutdown mode must be given Assumptions The V5 ISDN PRA line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED PRALN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED PRALN A 0Ds 2 s MODE 3 APSE where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination MODE F RCD NORM shutdown mode FRCD forced The PRA sub scriber is immediately put to OOS with disrupting all active calls NORM normal The subscriber is shut down in cooperation with the connected exchange which means for example that all active calls on the PRA subscriber can finish before the shutdown PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED PRALN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 101 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving V3 ISDN PRA line to OOS ee 3 4 10 Moving a V
411. ing is dis played Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Software version of the COMDAC for example Release 1 3 0 User Privilege for example User Privilege Privileged The pictorial representation of the shelf is updated to reflect a live view of the shelf System Fault If the user ID and password do not match accessing the system is not allowed Go to step 15 End of steps 1 3 6 Terminating system access Purpose To cancel terminate a login session from the GSI The GSI will not be closed Assumption m The GSI keeps running Procedure Step 1 The session can be terminated in two different ways Click on the CA icon in the toolbar Select the File Disconnect menu option in the menu bar System Response In the status bar the message OffLine is dis played BB OffLine HB Not Connected Figure 1 15 Status display End of steps 1 3 7 Autonomous messages Autonomous The system can be provisioned to send or not to send autonomous messages messages This can be done temporarily commands INH MSG and ALW MSG or perma nently see Chapter 5 4 3 If at least one autonomous message is inhibited an in dication is given in the status bar All autonomous messages related to configura tion changes database changes and all other autonomous messages are logged in the event log file event log 1 22 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating 1 3 8 Term
412. ing variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS UPCP 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 169 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5UP V5CP ee section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 170 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5BC V5TS 4 6 19 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 line termination bearer channel or a remote operations channel and a timeslot of a V5 1 interface The related V5 user port of the line termination bearer channel must be cross connected already to the same V5 1 interface which contains the specified V5 timeslot The V5 timeslot type must be a bearer channel and not be being used as communicatio
413. ing variant state transitions 4 241 4 47 Re provisioning interface state transitions 4 242 4 48 Re provisioning scenario extension of dataset 4 249 4 49 Re provisioning scenario moving subscribers between interfaces dual homing 4 252 4 50 Different system clock sources 4 272 4 51 Synchronization source selection 4 273 E S 5 Fault management for narrowband services 5 1 5 1 Location possibilities of HDSL faults example 5 12 5 2 Alarming concept example 5 14 5 3 Alarm signaling paths 5 16 5 4 GSI status display 5 20 5 5 Alarms and conditions reporting window 5 20 X Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Figures 5 6 Cabling for integrated testing 5 33 5 7 TAP B related relays 5 34 5 8 Schematic detection test scenario of a test termination 5 52 5 9 Test installation example 1 5 81 5 10 Test installation example 2 5 82 5 11 E1 line loopback 5 97 5 12 Location of U interface loopbacks related to NT 5 101 5 13 Location of U interface loopbacks related to managed NTU 5 102 5 14 HDSL loopbacks in point to point mode V3 point to point mode unstructured point to point mode 5 108 5 15 HDSL loopbacks in single pair mode 5 108 5 16 HDSL loopbacks in point to multipoint mode 5 109 5 17 BER test during loopback at NTU in point to point mode 5 110 5 18 DIP switch for ONU addressing 5 268 5 19 Location and settings of the jumpers MP1 MP2 on the RGU 5 271 ME SS 6 Performance management for narrowband services 6 1 E S
414. ing variant used before if the new one does not come up due to dataset inconsistencies between the AN and the LE 4 7 2 4 Switch over to new variant procedure initiated in LE Initiation in the LE This procedure is initiated by the operator in the LE or as a result of a prior Switch over procedure initiated in AN Behavior of the AN On receipt of a Switch over to variant message from the LE the AN checks the availability of the requested provisioning variant in its database and grants the re quest or not m ifthe provisioning variant is not available the AN responds with a Cannot Re Provision message and for both the LE and the AN the Switch over procedure initiated in LE stops mu if the provisioning variant is available that is in state READY the AN re sponds with a Re Provisioning started message and m the LE starts the actual switch over From the AN point of view it is not defined how long this period lasts in the LE m the AN changes to state RE PRO IN PROGRESS and performs the actual switch over This means that the AN internally blocks all re lated user ports to Suppress originating messages moves the cur rently active dataset to a standby provisioning variant activates the requested standby provisioning variant dataset and restarts the V5 interface From the AN point of view it is not defined whether the connected LE keeps the datalinks of the V5 interface established Due to this reason t
415. ing variants Each provisioning variant may con tain the same or contradictory associations compared to other provisioning vari ants of the same or another V5 interface See Chapter 4 7 5 page 4 239 for de tails Beside the various standby provisioning variants which may exist in the system there is exactly one active provisioning variant per V5 interface These active pro visioning variants of all V5 interfaces form the current system dataset 4 7 4 Current system dataset contents Contents of current The current system dataset is the sum of all V5 related provisioning data of the system dataset system which is currently provisioned and actually used It contains all V5 objects and V5 associations Note that also V5 objects like V5 user ports or V5 links which are not associated to any V5 interface are included It contains the following ob jects m V5lI V5 interface m V5L V5 link m V5CC V5 communication channel 4 238 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning a m V5CP V5 communication path m V5PG V5 protection group m V5UP V5 user port which exist only once in the current system dataset they are not replicated or pro visioned in each provisioning variant and may be associated to a V5 interface or not plus m the active provisioning variants that is the associations of all V5 interfaces in the system Therefore the current system dataset is vali
416. ink entity specified by the engineering work order by entering the command RTRV V5L IF THEN the RTRV V5L command reports that use the ENT V5L command to enter the V5 link entity is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 5 the RTRV V5L command reports that go to Step 7 the V5 link entity is provisioned with the correct provisioning information the RTRV V5I command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 47 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 1 growth CO S Step 5 Create a V5 link entity with its 31 timeslots The V5 link has the ini tial administrative primary service state OOS out of service All 31 timeslots are automatically created and provisioned for bearer ser vice by default Follow the ENT V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT V5L AID v5lLkKid V5SLKID el K1 nesd NESD l4 teSd FESD where AID Vole i l AID of the V5 link V5 link identifier Not used for V5 1 VOLKID El el 1 1 4 1 4 V5 physical feeder identifier NESD ea aa near end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10 FESD ae ae ee far end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 104 gt NOTE The V5 link identifier is only used in the case of the V5 2 pro
417. input acknowledgment terminator TL1 command output General information Definition A TL1 output response is a message sent from the AnyMedia Access System in response to an input TL1 command Types of output responses The types of output messages sent from the AnyMedia Access System are the fol lowing m Normal response m Error response Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 13 1 3 13 1 4 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 General format An output response message consists of one or more segments Each segment includes a header line followed by a primary line and then followed by one or more optional secondary lines Each segment is terminated by a terminator that is a semicolon or a greater than sign gt The gt character is used to termi nate all but the last segment of a multisegment output message while the char acter is used to terminate the last message segment Long output responses A very long output message the length of the message is unlimited is sent in multiple segments and each segment is not more than 4096 characters per specifications in TR NWT 000831 Each intermediate segment is terminated by a greater than sign gt and the last segment of a multisegment output message is terminated by the semicolon All segments use the same CTAG value that is equal to the CTAG value of the corresponding input TL1 command Normal response Definition A normal response is returned when a
418. interface but a signaling embedded in the ATM cell stream mg Mixed configuration means a configuration of the AnyMedia shelves includ ing packs for narrowband services and for broadband services m Narrowband services typically include POTS services permanent leased line PLL and ISDN as well as n times 64 kbps to 2 Mbps m The term pack is generally used for circuit packs COMDAC CIU IO_E1 lO HDLC PFU AFME3 AFMDS3 and application packs APs The term system application is used here for the AnyMedia Access System when the text refers to it how a certain network element is used with re spect to services m he term system configuration is used here for the AnyMedia Access System when the text refers to it as a system equipped with certain packs or units for a certain application including the related database m TL1 system interface TL1SI means any interface for operations using TL1 commands m V5 x is used whenever the following text refers to V5 1 as well as to V5 2 XX Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document Conventions a TN m XDSL service means any broadband service transmitted over twisted pairs Examples are ADSL universal asymmetric digital subscriber line UDSL and very high bit rate digital subscriber line VDSL m In this manual the subscriber interface for analog POTS is named Z inter face In some countries this interface can be called a b interface where the a leg sometimes ma
419. ion In non revertive switching the repaired element becomes the new standby element Automatic and manual switching is possible for the revertive mode as well as for the non revertive mode Protected elements Protection switching is provided for the following elements m COMDAC automatic manual 1 1 m Synchronization sources automatic manual 1 1 m V5 2 communication channels automatic manual N M m IO HDLC packs automatic manual 1 1 m O_E1 packs automatic manual 1 N 4 11 1 COMDAC protection COMDAC The COMDAC provides the core functions including bandwidth management and protection timeslot interchange function The system supports both duplex and simplex operation modes Both active and standby units are continuously monitored Duplex operation mode supports the following m Manual side switching is hitless 4 280 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching T IiOU MUMU m In service software upgrade m Side switch at hardware faults 4 11 2 Synchronization source protection Synchronization The system is synchronized to an external clock signal 2 048 MHz The external source protection clock signal is selected by provisioning from one of the 16 physical E1 feeder ports or from the station clock interface SCI The system supports the provision ing of one protection synchronization source Both active and standby sources are continuously mo
420. ion on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5PVAR sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 253 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a V5 provisioning variant ee 4 8 2 Editing a V5 provisioning variant Purpose This procedure is to edit the provisioning variant identifier and the provisioning variant state of a provisioning variant Parameters not given by the user will not overwrite already given provisioning data The provisioning variant identifier must be unique within the related V5 interface that is must be different from the active provisioning variant identifier and any other standby provisioning variant identifier for the related V5 interface To change the provisioning variant identifier the provi sioning variant must be in state NOT_ READY or READY Only in the NOT_READY state the contents of the provisioning variant can be changed In this state the provisioning variant is not available for re provisioning and any switch over request from the connected exchange for this provisioning variant is rejected by the system To set a provisioning variant to available for a switch over the provisioning variant state must be changed to READY At the change from NOT_READY to READY additional checks on the provisioning variant conten
421. ionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 79 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 2 degrowth link with CC Le 3 3 14 2 V5 2 degrowth link with communication channel s Purpose E1 feeder bandwidth degrowth of a specified V5 2 interface Assumption Only V5 links are to be deleted which are not primary or secondary link and which carry one or more communication channels For the deletion of V5 links not carrying any communication channel see Chapter 3 3 14 1 page 3 79 for the de letion of a primary link see Chapter 3 3 14 4 page 3 83 for the deletion of a sec ondary link see Chapter 3 3 14 3 page 3 82 Procedure Step 1 Move the V5 2 link out of service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 3 4 5 page 3 96 gt NOTE This will increase the concentration ratio Step 2 Wait until the link is shut down service state has changed from OOS SHD to OOS Alternatively move the V5 2 link out of service with the mode FRCD gt NOTE Moving the V5 2 link out of service with the mode FRCD is service affect ing Step 3 Move the V5 2 interface out of service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 3 4 4 page 3 95 gt NOTE Moving the V5 2 interface out of service is service affecting for all
422. ioning the IP address Procedure Step 1 Follow the SET IP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message SETIP ALD rzi 2 o LP lis ubmask SUBMASK remip REMIP intstate INTSTATE where AID cit 1 eth 1 roc 1 access identifier cit 1 Craft Interface Terminal Port eth 1 Ethernet Interface roc l Remote Operations Channel IP Internet protocol IP address The initial IP address for each communication interface is 0 0 0 0 This parameter is appli cable to all AlDs cit 1 eth 1 roc 1 To remove an IP address from the interface enter 0 0 0 0 ad dress on the corresponding inter face An interface IP address can not be changed to a new one if there are routing entries in the routing table associated with the old IP address 2 30 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the IP address a SeS SUBMASK IP address for the submask The submask is a 32 bit value containing one bits for the net work ID and zero bits for the host ID The initial value with no IP address entered is 0 0 0 0 Af ter the IP address has been en tered the default sulbmask value should correspond to the class of the destination IP For example if 135 5 17 1 is entered for the des tination the default submask value is the class B default mask 255 255 0 0 Class A 0 0 0 0 127 x x x Class B 128 x x x 191 x x x Class C 192 x x x 223 x X X where
423. ioning variant used before The sys tem maintains the old provisioning variant in state PV1 READY if it is logical con sistent or otherwise in state PVO NOT _READY In the first case it is possible to reactivate the old provisioning variant by initiating another switch over again As for normal switch over requests this switch back can only be successful if the old provisioning variant is also still available in the local exchange See Chapter 4 7 2 3 page 4 236 for details 4 7 10 Recovery 4 7 10 1 Storage of provisioning variants Provisioning All data related to provisioning variants are stored in non volatile memory and variants in NVDS therefore persist after system recovery 4 7 10 2 Recovery during re provisioning Used provisioning If a system recovery occurs during a re provisioning procedure it depends on the variant depends on PVx state what provisioning variant will be used after the subsequent system re PVx state covery If the re provisioning procedure was accepted that is the Re provisioning Started message was sent and the state PV2 IN PROGRESS was entered by the system the new provisioning variant identifier is stored in NVDS and the sys tem will recover with the new dataset Every recovery before this point will lead to the old provisioning variant even if some messages preparing the switch over were already exchanged 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 247 Configuration management for narrowband serv
424. iption in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 94 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a V5 x interface to OOS ae 3 4 4 Moving a V5 x interface out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V5 inter face to OOS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state may be given Assumptions The V5 x interface is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5I GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command eS es Ae es PS Le where AID v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V5I section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 95 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a V5 x link out of service E SeSe 3 4 5 Moving a V5 x link out of service Purpose This procedure is to change
425. ired pack be comes the new standby pack Both IO_HDLCs receive the same data they have the same provisioning informa tion and they perform the same frame relay functions but only data from the ac tive IO HDLC is routed through the TSI In case of a switch for example for pro tection the only actions to take is a reconfiguration of the COMDAC s TSls An IO_HDLC pack protection switch may be initiated either manually via TL1 com mand or automatically due to an IO_HDLC error detected by status monitoring and testing 4 11 5 IO_E1 protection IO_E1 protection Protection status The IO_E1 pack protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System when an IO_E1 pack fault is detected The sys tem supports both protected and unprotected IO_E1 operations In case of pro tected operations the IO_E1 P packs will run in an active and standby mode The pack protection is controlled by the active COMDAC In order to meet a short switch over time the protection pack IO_E1P is popu lated with the provisioning information during pack initialization and kept up to date in case of reconfigurations The protection status refers to the pack protection state and indicates whether an IO_E1 pack protection switch has been executed or not It also indicates which kind of protection switch automatic or manual has been executed The following protection states are defined Active Indicates the pac
426. is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS ULLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 140 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting an ALL subscriber I 3 4 49 Deleting an analog leased line subscriber Purpose This procedure is to delete one analog leased line subscriber entity Its bearer channel must not be cross connected to a leased line link timeslot The bearer channel object of the Analog Leased Line subscriber is automatically deleted by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT ALLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT ALLN AID where AID o eet Loa AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT ALLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 141 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a DLL subscriber M ese ee 3 4 50 Deleting a digital lea
427. ist Figure 1 12 Selection list example 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 15 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating ee 1 3 4 Program operation by mouse Operation by Mouse Table 1 5 Program operation by mouse Desired Effect Operation Open a menu in the top By a left mouse click on the menu option menu bar Select menu options inthe By a left mouse click on the menu option menu bar Select panels and buttons By a left mouse click on the appropriate button Select options in the top Open the menu by pressing the left mouse button and moving the cursor menu to the desired option in the menu Open a menu for a pack By a right mouse click on the appropriate pack Select menu option in a pack By a left mouse click on the menu option in a pack menu menu Confirm input By a left mouse click on Display the window short in Position the cursor on the respective object formation 1 3 5 Accessing the AnyMedia Access System for narrowband services Purpose Access the AnyMedia Access System via the GSI on a PC The GSI can be connected to the AnyMedia Access System in two different ways see Chapter 1 1 3 page 1 5 m Via a local connection Via a remote connection Assumptions The shelf doors are closed m The system has been properly installed m The shelf includes a CIU that is running properly 1 16 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating
428. ized to an in put E1 signal or station clock however it can be configured for free running oper ation to facilitate turn up and testing Free running operation is an abnormal con dition The signal which is selected as the system timing reference must be a reliable and stable signal The reference signal should have synchronization traceable to a primary reference source PRS this will usually be the case if the reference E1 signal is sourced by a digital switch or by a digital cross connect system Procedure Step 1 Follow the RTRV SYNCN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV SYNCN Step 2 The message response will indicate the current synchronization mode LPD or FRNG the primary and secondary synchronization references LPPRI and LPSEC the currently active synchronization source ASRC and the usability of both synchronization refer ences Step 3 If the retrieved synchronization provisioning data differs from the de sired data then execute the next procedure to change the data see Chapter 4 10 8 page 4 277 End of steps 4 276 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Setting synchronization mode o E N 4 10 8 Setting synchronization mode SET SYNCN Purpose This procedure is to configure the system for loop timed mode and setting the pri mary and secondary synchronization reference sources This procedure is neces sary only if the sy
429. k which is currently responsible for carrying the traffic in a protected configuration 4 282 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching T IiOU MUMU m Standby Indicating the pack which is currently responsible for providing the protec tion but is not carrying service because no protection switch has been re quested that is it is also applicable for a protection pack which is faulty or set to OOS Automatic switch Indicates a service pack where traffic has been switched over automatically to the protection pack The protection status is also shown in case the pro tection pack is not able to carry the traffic due to a pack fault or moving it to OOS after the automatic switch Manual switch Indicates a service pack where traffic has been switched over manually to the protection pack The protection status is also shown in case the protec tion pack is not able to carry the traffic due to a pack fault or moving it to OOS gt NOTE In a protected IO_E1 configuration IO_E1P provisioned the protection sta tus is shown in any case regardless of the service states of service or pro tection pack This means that also in service state OOS the protection sta tus is shown If the IO_E1P is deleted however unprotected IO_E1 configu ration the protection status is not applicable anymore 1 N protection The AnyMedia Access System provides 1 N protection swit
430. k which is to be used Optionally the administrative primary service state of this line can be given The bearer channel objects of the digital leased line sub scriber are created automatically by the system The service state of the managed NTU if provisioned has no effect on the service state of the DLL If the DLLN service is to be provided using a managed NTU then the managed NTU entity must be provisioned before the DLLN by using the ENT NTU com mand Once a DLLN is provisioned on a drop then the subsequent use of an ENT NTU command on the same drop is rejected Assumptions Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT DLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT DLLN AID drop DROP autoact AUTOACT bandwidth BANDWIDTH PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination DROP Larop l _ l Lope tlas2 y Sub drop 1 6 1 6 i SZ ky AID of the physical drop AUTOACT N Y automatic line activation N no Y yes 4 188 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a digital leased line BANDWIDTH B1 B1_B2 B1_B2_D B1_D B2 B2_D D bearer channels to allocate A list of channel names select from B1 B2 and D separated by symbols Consult managed NTU type for the default value if relevant ENT NTU command has been received otherwise an
431. lasts approximately 40 minutes Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the standby COMDAC currently the formerly active COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condition CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events system software version mismatch cleared copy program memory in progress copy program memory complete Step 3 Disable the protection switching of the COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter INHIBIT or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 INHIBIT System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAC side switch inhibited Step 4 Remove the new COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack missing or power fault Step 5 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOWKG BOPT core 1 s RESET System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAC switch forced reset Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 for all needed COMDACs End of steps 3 10 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth degrowth 32 22 Replacing COMDAC COM5S00 by COM501 Purpose Replace the COMDACs COM500 by the new type COM501 Assumptions
432. ld look with the command input format and the input acknowledgment RTRV EQPT SYS00 comdac 1 1234 Input acknowledg IP 1234 ment example lt Example Input acknowledgment format RTRV EQPT SYS00 comdac 1 1234 Input command IP Acknowledgment code 1234 CTAG new line lt Acknowledgment terminator 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XLI 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 12 3 4 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 XLII Input acknowledgment parameters Input acknowledgment code in progress IP The AnyMedia Access System supports the in progress IP acknowledgment code This code means that the input request has been initiated and an output message will follow If the system resource is available but the output response cannot be sent within 2 seconds after the AnyMedia Access System has started to execute the input command one IP acknowledgment is sent indicating that the system will send an output response shortly One IP acknowledgment is sent then a period is sent every 2 seconds starting at the fourth second to indicate to the user that the system is still in the process of sending an output message Correlation tag This is the correlation tag CTAG of the input TL1 command to which the ac knowledgment refers End of acknowledgment The input acknowledgment is ended with a carriage return lt cr gt and a line feed lt lf gt Acknowledgment terminator The less than lt character is the
433. le by entering ED NTU DFLT see Chapter 4 6 58 page 4 230 Step 5 For DLL via managed NTU define the NTU entity by entering ENT NTU see Chapter 4 6 56 page 4 221 Step 6 Define the digital leased line subscriber by entering ENT DLLN see Chapter 4 6 32 page 4 188 Step 7 Define the cross connections between line termination bearer chan nels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 8 Move the digital leased line subscriber in service by entering ED DLLN see Chapter 4 6 40 page 4 203 Step 9 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 End of steps 4 5 7 3 3 N x64 kbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Purpose This procedure is to create an n x 64 kbps leased line service according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the LL link by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 Step 3 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 5 Define the digital leased line subscriber by entering ENT VLLN see Chapter 4 6 33 page 4 190 Step 6 Define the cross connections between line termination bearer chan nels and LL timeslots by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 13
434. leased line link An HDSL interface operating in single pair or point to point mode is connected to one NTU and can support one of V 35 V 36 or X 21 service Additionally a V5 ISDN PRA service or n x 64 kbps leased line service according to G 703 GLL can be provided In the point to multipoint mode two NTUs are connected and each can support VLL service and additionally one GLL service per NTU In this case all services provisioned for the NTU connected to the first drop of an HDSL interface can use HDSL timeslots 1 up to 15 Services provi sioned for other NTU connected to the second drop can use the remaining HDSL timeslots 17 up to 31 The command Is rejected if any of the service combinations is violated the specified HDSL interface does not exist or is not in the administra tive primary service state OOS the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL pack are exhausted at least one of the provisioned HDSL timeslots does not exist or is used by another service The created leased line subscriber indicates an External Condition Mismatch as secondary service state if the service is not supported by the actual connected NTU at customer premises Assumptions m Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned m HDSL interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT VLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT VLLN AID type TYPE hdsl H
435. leased lines services Purpose This procedure is to create an analog leased lines service Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the LL link by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 Step 3 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 Define the analog leased line subscriber by entering ENT ALLN see Chapter 4 6 31 page 4 187 Step 5 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot by entering ENT CRS LLTS see Chapter 4 6 37 page 4 200 Step 6 Move the analog leased line subscriber in service by entering ED ALLN see Chapter 4 6 39 page 4 202 Step 7 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 End of steps 4 5 7 3 2 Digital leased lines services Purpose This procedure is to create a digital leased lines service Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 2 Define the LL link by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 4 132 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning a Step 3 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 4 For DLL via managed NTU verify the values in the NTU default pro file by entering RTRV NTU DEFLT and optionally correct them if they are not suitab
436. lf gt Display Position blank line header line primary line secondary unquoted line 4 character error code explanatory text lt cr gt lt lf gt secondary comment line more line s for error message specifics lt cr gt lt lf gt more optional comment lines last line for rror message specifics lt er gt lt lt gt more optional comment lines 13 3 3 Error response parameters terminator The format parameters are explained in the following table Parameter lt cr gt lt f gt SID YY MM DD HA MMs SoS 363 211 112 Explanation carriage return and line feed system identifier of the AnyMedia Access System year month day Note 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 38 lt yy lt 69 are invalid values hour minute second Issue 7 December 2000 XLV M indicates an output response CTAG correlation tag of the input TL1 message to which the acknowledgment refers DENY a key word meaning the command cannot be executed ERCD 4 character error code field lt terminator gt The character is used for normal termination The use of the gt character means that more segments as sociated with this response message will follow under another header 13 3 4 Error response example This is how the user s screen would look with an error response SYSOO 96 10 26 16 42 11 M 123456 DENY IIAC Input Invalid Access Identifier AID is missing wrong or
437. lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface subscribers allocates up to two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL appli cation pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without hav ing real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service Therefore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capa ble of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested sub scriber type and the application pack can be checked All 32 timeslots providing the service for an unique V3 ISDN PRA subscriber are allocated in the same E1 feeder V3 independent of The V3 is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders which V5 are exclusively used for V3 purpose Provisioning For provisioning a V3 service also the layered structure as shown in Figure 4 2 objects of V3 ISDN page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that four objects have to be provi PRA subscribers sioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a V3 service These four objects are HDSL interface V3 ISDN PRA subscriber V3
438. link and V3 service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a V3 V3 service service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 22 page 4 82 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 81 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning V3 services E SS Z W ss E E E DO Ym OD Qs Line Term V3 ISDN PRA subscriber V3LN Z 2 mD lt eA ana Z Z O O gt o Q O Cc p D HDSL timeslots AD user TS user Tne type serv state ge L C w ESE E A E E ly a z e eee aes ee ee AID usedieeder servies e A ea Eo S 5 PE L E Cae e 4 8 Te ei ae canal oa oS L State og e e eee C E eo ee eee ce ee ae ae eee E Port z AID service state served HDSL Tog interface AID service state parameter servedinteriace O ee A A S e ee See 12 00s AUTO deutdate LS gt E z C A E O RAREN SS ea 7 S e e OO T O T EEE A 5 e e CAS oe e a a 5 ee a eee e a F Ke AP IO_E1 P pack E AD Pe servicestae AID pack ype parameter service state 2 E aie aancaee 1 ffo poe foose o a es el ae a e re eo 7 ae eoe e Se 5 ce a eo po ST s E es PAO as B oe none 16 LPS503 IS Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 22 Table structure of V3 service 4 82 Issue7
439. link 4 201 4 6 39 Moving an analog leased line subscriber in service 4 202 4 6 40 Moving a digital leased line subscriber in service 4 203 4 6 41 Moving a VLL subscriber in service 4 204 4 6 42 Moving a GLL subscriber in service 4 205 4 6 43 Moving a UVLL subscriber in service 4 206 4 6 44 Moving a UGLL subscriber in service 4 207_ 4 6 45 Moving a leased line link in service 4 208 4 6 46 Moving an unstructured leased line link in service 4 209 4 6 47 Provisioning a V3 link 4 210 4 6 48 Provisioning a V3 ISDN PRA line 4 211 4 IV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 es TTT Contents 4 6 49 Provisioning a cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link 4 212 4 6 50 Moving a V3 ISDN PRA line in service 4 213 4 6 51 Moving a V3 link in service 4 214 4 6 52 Provisioning a remote operations channel 4 215 4 6 53 Provisioning a cross connection between remote operations channel and leased line timeslot 4 217 4 6 54 Creating a new routing table entry 4 218 4 6 55 Moving a remote operations channel in service 4 220 4 6 56 Provisioning a managed NTU 4 221 4 6 57 Editing provisioning data of a managed NTU 4 226 4 6 58 Changing default provisioning data of a managed NTU 4 230 4 7 V5 re provisioning 4 234 4 7 1 Introduction 4 234 4 7 2 V5 protocol 4 234 4 7 2 1 Verify re provisioning procedure 4 235 4 7 2 2 Switch over to new variant procedure initiated in AN 4 235 4 7 2 3 Switch over to new variant initiated in AN on non operational
440. list or the address book see step 17 Step 12 Check the Keep Alive check box if you want to prevent the GSI from being logged out by the system in case of inactivity Step 13 Check Modem if you want to connect to the system via a dial up modem connection For this mode you must enter the phone num ber of the system side modem Step 14 To confirm your entries click on the button OK System Response The Communication Settings pop up window closes Step 15 Enter the User Identifier login where UID User Identifier login This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null Grouping of UID string val ues for this command is not al lowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alphanu meric character string 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 19 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating a Step 16 Enter the Password Identifier password where PID Password Identifier password Always associated with a login UID Grouping of PID string val ues for this command is not al lowed The GSI PID parameter is hidden while it is entered in the PID text box It is a case sensi tive string containing 6 to 10 al phabetic numeric and symbol characters where at least two characters are non alphabetic and one is a symbol for exam ple amp _ lt gt The default logins have a privileged security class These use
441. lready exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table LL services Data for the leased line service are stored in the leased line services table There is one leased line services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains a double key one is the line termination bearer channel id and the other is the leased line timeslot id Additionally it contains the service state When an entry in this table is created the TL1 command must contain the leased line timeslot id and line termination bearer channel id The TL1 command to create the leased line service is rejected if either the leased line timeslot entry or the leased line subscriber bearer channel entry does not exist or are already used by another leased line service It is also rejected if all the timeslots of a given subscriber are not over the same E1 feeder Example Figure 4 28 page 4 93 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a DLL subscriber 4 92 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 1 LPU112 ENT LLL Ill 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 12 sub scriber Application pack Physical sub 4xEl XE feeder data scriber data ENT DLLN It 1 drop drop 1 1 1 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 1 1 llts 1 1 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 1 2 llts 1 2 ENT CRS LLTS Itbc 1 3 llts 1 3 Figure 4 28 Provisioning data for a digital leased line
442. m provides the primary service interface for the subscriber to enter the net work m ADSL line refers to the twisted copper pair carrying broadband and narrow band services When referring to the broadband signal only the term data is used m ADSL modem means the ADSL data circuit terminating equipment at the subscriber s site AFM is used in text sections where only the function of the ATM feeder is described independent of the interface E3 DS3 m The AIM feeder multiplexer AFME3 provides an E3 ATM user network in terface If a DS3 interface is required the ATM feeder multiplexer AFMDS3 has to be used instead m Broadband services are supported in the AnyMedia Access System using ATM cell transfer via asymmetrical digital subscriber line ADSL m The term customer premises equipment CPE in general covers sub scriber s installation and subscriber s terminal For ADSL lines the CPE consists among other equipment of an ADSL mo dem and a Splitter to separate the narrowband signal from the data signal If both units are meant as a whole the term customer premises equipment CPE is used in this manual m Theterm DS3 interface refers to a bitrate of 44 736 Mbps and a framing ac cording to ITU T recommendations G 804 1 432 and ANSI T1 107 without specifying the physical interface 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XIX About this document Conventions TO O I I I OoOo O m The term DSX 3 interface refers to every
443. m The AnyMedia Access System runs in duplex mode two COMDACS are inserted m One pre loaded COMDAC COM501 with the new software version is avail able m The operator is properly logged into the system m There are no alarms in the AnyMedia Access System Procedure Step 1 Follow the Software upgrade via pre loaded COMDAC replacement duplex mode procedure see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 7 End of steps 3 3 Growth degrowth Different growth This section defines system and pack growth and degrowth for example adding and degrowth and deleting subscribers Sample scenarios demonstrate the methods for per scenarios forming different growth and degrowth situations gt NOTE If abnormal conditions or a discrepancy to the engineering work order oc cur contact the provisioning center 3 3 1 System growth Modification of System growth is defined as the installation and turn up of either feeder and or capacity distribution capacity to an existing operational Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Additional feeder capacity may be needed for adding subscribers to existing V5 2 interfaces or for adding a PLL service The system supports the ability to modify capacity smoothly without interrupting existing service Basic growth System growth can include the following four basic operations epcranone Addition of APs to empty shelf slot positions m Addition of IO_E1 packs to empty shelf slot positions m Provisioning of logical interface
444. mand description in HTML for mat which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 267 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving external equipment rr Te ee 4 9 4 Retrieving external equipment RTRV EXTEQPT Purpose This procedure is to retrieve the inventory data for one or more external equip ment units which are connected to physical drops Additionally some external equipment may also use this command to return status information This com mand is only applicable for U and HDSL drops For U drops it is only applicable to drops which have a configured DLLN and NTU The equipment inventory is up dated each time the related drop becomes operational and is activated for service that means communication to the external equipment is established Status infor mation if any is to be returned is retrieved from the external equipment each time the command is issued If the related drop is not operational and activated for ser vice then no inventory or status information is returned however the command will still succeed Procedure Step 1 Follow the RTRV EXTEQPT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV EXTEOPT T ALD where AID all Arop 13 Lao ja bag JGEOps1i L Lo aall Lope Ly SuUbGLOpS Lao fio pa SAEF SULAP ALn AeA aLL Subdrop ti oT all Supa rop alt
445. mation ee DANGER Serious injury is definite or likely WARNING Serious injury is possible CAUTION Minor injury is definite likely or possible or material damage to the product or in the product environment is definite or likely IMPORTANT Material damage to the product or in the product environment is possible NOTICE A fault i e considerable impairment to operation will be caused or may be caused Warning symbols The following warning symbols are used Table 3 Warning symbols Symbol Common application General warning about a danger Warning about a dangerous electrical voltage Warning about laser radiation Warning about explosion Warning about battery acid Warning about devices sensitive to electrostatic dis charge ESD The safety instructions for the classes Danger Warning and Caution always have a warning symbol the Important and Notice safety instructions can but do not always have a warning symbol 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXIX About this document General safety information Le This document may contain safety labels such as WARNING CAUTION IMPOR TANT and NOTICE Special safety The aspects of handling of components sensitive to electrostatic discharge instructions ESD and laser safety are of vital importance for equipment in the AnyMedia Access System The key safety instructions for these subjects are summarized in Chapter 9 Electr
446. meslot id and line termination bearer channel id The TL1 command to create the leased line service is rejected if either the leased line timeslot entry or the leased line subscriber bearer channel entry does not exist or are already used by another 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 101 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ETE eee ee leased line service It is also rejected if all the timeslots of a given subscriber are not over the same E1 feeder Table GLL bearer For having a uniform view from the upper service layer the HDSL logical timeslots channels which can start anywhere between 1 and 31 with the exception of timeslot 16 and which are not always including the timeslot 16 HDSL logical timeslot 16 is not included as long as the number of HDSL logical timeslots is less than 31 are mapped to a GLL bearer channel table In this table the sequence of the HDSL logical timeslots is kept but it starts always with the bearer channel number 1 For an example of the relationship between the different kinds of timeslots see Figure 4 33 page 4 102 joe connections vee en E l M a i e GLL bearer channels GLL subscriber LL interface 7 a B a 7 i 5 z we Za P Za HDSL logical timeslots Figure 4 33 GLL related timeslots relationships Example Figure 4 34 page 4 103 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a GLL subscrib
447. messages the ENTI MSGMAP Enter Mes sage Mapping command allows a GSI interface to receive only certain types of autonomous messages or none at all This command allows all alarm capabilities both autonomous and retrieved reporting of a remote GSI AEM to be provision able as disabled The turn up default is to send all messages to all GSI AEM 2 26 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting messages to GSI AEM O y A Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT MSGMAP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message ENT MSGMAP str NTI Ds MSGI YPE I ACTION where INTID Interface Identifier indicates the type of interface and can assume the following values CIT TELNET 1 TELNET2 TLIMAINTENANCE TL1MEMORYADMINISTRATION TL1OTHER1 TLITEST For GSI only CIT and TELNET are applicable MSGTYPE _ Message Type is either ALL All types of autonomous mes sages ALM Alarm autonomous message type DBCHG Database change autonomous message type ENV Environment alarm autonomous message type EVT Event autonomous message type except TCA LED LED status autonomous mes sage type SESSION Login Logout Session SW Protection Switch REPT SW TCA Threshold crossing alert autono mous message type ACTION This is either ENABLED or DIS ABLED If it is ENABLED the au tonomous message type is re ported If it is DISABLED the au tonomous message type
448. mmunication channel and V5 timeslot PNT CRS CClS v5ce 3 gt Lj vots 7 L6 gt Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths ENTH V5OCP is voCo 3 L2o 2 VoD ype Otr BNI VOCPs tv 9C0 3 Z2t ODL Yype pst Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel ENT GCRS CPCC V2C0 3 17 V5CC 3 L EN T CRS CPCG rv Cp S 2 7 56C s 1 Step 10 Define the remote operations channel FNI ROCs sroc ls Step 11 Assign the IP address information to the ROC SBi TPA OCa la e TPS 92a oo 0 1 SUBMASK LSOGLZ ISAS Oe ZO ey REMIPS I2 s Fogy INES ITATE UP Step 12 Create a default routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System Static routing table using the ROC by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 ENT ROUTES er Oui Bucs OleOle dace oe Oca Step 13 Define the ROC user port BNI VSUP ppvoup 252 147 lo ype SSPLL Le roc 1 vol3addr 1000 Step 14 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 1 interface ENE CRo VURLS voup 2Z 07 vo1 33 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 327 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 15 Define the cross connections between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot ENT CRS BCGlS roc l vors 15 Step 16 Move the remote operations channel in service BDSROC S TOC LI aaao Step 17 Move the V5 link in service ED V5 LS SVvoiLa liasa Tr PS Step 18 Move t
449. mple for provisioning a V5 2 ISDN BRA interface Purpose This example is to create a V5 2 ISDN BRA service with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 and 3 on IO_E1 2 link 1 and 2 communication channel 1 and 2 timeslot 15 and 16 communication path 1 2 3 5 6 and 7 application pack 13 and 14 line termination 42 43 and 44 user port 22 23 and 24 protection group 1 and 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier the V5 link identifier the logical V5 com munication channel identifier and the envelope function addresses must be identical to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 V5 link identifier 12 and 13 logi cal V5 communication channel identifier 42 and 43 envelope function ad dresses 1000 1001 and 1002 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface ENTSVo E ANV oL 252 VOCy DE KoA No LE LdU Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack BNIHLTOR LSet I06 lelsz Step 3 Define the V5 links ENIS Vobtivol lr ieres l 2 VoLRID LZ ENT VSL Vol 2r Se lse l 3 VSLRKLDSI 3 Step 4 Define the cross connections between V5 links and V5 2 interface ENT GCGRSS LULIS S VOLS ENTSCRSSLL eivol 7 vols Step 5 Define the V5 communication channels BNE V5CC et voece 3 1t2 tvocevd 42 gt ENTS VCC 4 5CCH347 22 22 5CCLO 45 gt 4 304 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples
450. mptions HDSL logical interface in V3 point to point mode has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V3LN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT VSLN A LD etrendsl BDSis PSE where ALD 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination HDSL naskls pe aero ee AID of the HDSL interface PST 75 005 administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V3LN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 1 HiGain is a registered trademark of ADC Telecommunications Inc 2000 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 211 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V3LN V3L i ee 4 6 49 Provisioning a cross connection between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V3 ISDN PRA sub scriber and a V3 link It provides a transparent 2Mbps cross connection including timeslot O through the system This cross connection is of type 1 to 1 which means that you can connect exactly one V3 ISDN PRA subscriber to one V3 link and viceversa None of the both entities must be cr
451. must contain the LL interface id and the E1 feeder If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default pro visioning data and service state OOS are used When an LL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the leased line timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The leased line timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an LL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the spec ified LL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table LL services Data for the leased line service are stored in the leased line services table There is one leased line services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains a double key one is the line termination bearer channel id and the other is the leased line timeslot id When a leased line service is to be created the TL1 command must contain the leased line timeslot identity and the line termination bearer channel identity The TL1 command to create the leased line service is re jected if either the line termination bearer channel entry or the leased line timeslot entry do not exist or are already being used by another leased line service Example Figure 4 26 page 4 89 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning an ALL subscriber 4
452. n o0 No AR ia N h la N A i N D be nN on la N x oo O De oo oo Na oo O ba oo gt Bas Fx amp aN N D N be O1 k ja on oo j on on be on op December 2000 2 I A SSS Contents 2 3 24 Terminating the session 2 57 2 4 System turn up procedure at ONU Subshelf location 2 58 2 4 1 Setting ONU Subshelf identifier via DIP switch 2 58 2 4 2 OCP installation at ONU Subshelf 2 60 2 4 3 Connecting the optical link to the OCP 2 61 2 4 4 Application pack installation at ONU Subshelf 2 62 2 4 5 GSI connection at the RMC and logging on 2 63 2 4 6 Verifying the inventory data of the ONU Subshelf and terminating the session 2 64 2 4 7 Setting miscellaneous ONU alarm input contacts 2 65 2 II Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures 2 1 Introduction Pack information System turn up procedure at mainshelf location 363 211 112 This section describes the procedures for initial system turn up up to service pro visioning The Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System can be reconfig ured at any time after turn up When a pack is installed for the first time the FAULT Light Emitting Diode LED lights for a short time then flashes at a rate of 1 Hz to indicate that it is undergoing self initialization For some packs for example IO HDLC the time for self initialization is so short that the flashing
453. n switch to a functional and idle protection pack and the protection switch remains in effect until it is reset by SW TOWKG INHIBIT This mode inhibits periodic protection switching and is applicable for the COMDAC only This means the current protection switching state is frozen The pro tection switching inhibit remains in effect until the protection switching is reset by SW TOWKG or an automatic protection switch is performed Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the SW TOPROTN sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 288 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Switching to working 4 11 7 2 Switching to working SW TOWKG Purpose The SW TOWKG command instructs the system to reset any previous manual protection switch requests on the COMDAC and enables the periodic protection Switching for the COMDAC again For IO_E1 packs this command reverts uncon ditionally an IO_E1 pack protection switch to the service pack An IO_E1 pack protection switch is always reverted regardless protection permission or slot equi page A reverted switch to a not operational O_E1 pack disrupts the served ser vice on the related E1
454. n LL in service i S 4 6 39 Moving an analog leased line subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an analog leased line subscriber entity to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ALLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDZA LUN AALDERS n EEPL where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST as administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ALLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 202 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving an LL in service ee 4 6 40 Moving a digital leased line subscriber in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a digital leased line subscriber entity to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state
455. n channel or already be cross connected to a line termination bearer channel Assumptions V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot have already been provi sioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS BCTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNT CRo BC ret AIDI GAHA ovaLr PVARI gt where AID1 ltbc 1 1024 1 2 roc i AID of the V5 line termination bearer channel or remote opera tions channel AED v5ts 1 16 1 31 AID of the V5 1 timeslot PVAR VoOpVar l 324 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS BCTS 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 171 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5BC V5TS ee section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI me
456. n input command is executed successfully Normal response format The normal response is displayed in the following format Format Display Position lt er lt f gt lt gt blank line SID YY MM DD HH MM SS lt cr gt lt lf gt header line M ctag COMPLD lt cr gt lt lf gt primary line Optional quoted line lt cr gt lt 1f gt secondary quoted line and or optional comment line lt cr gt lt lf gt secondary comment line and or more secondary lines terminator Normal response parameters The format parameters are explained in the following table Parameter Explanation lt ors lt it gt carriage return and line feed SID system identifier of the AnyMedia Access System 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XLIII YY MM DD year month day Note 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 38 lt yy lt 69 are invalid values HH MM SS hour minute second M indicates an output response CTAG correlation tag of the input TL1 command to which the response refers COMP LD completion code indicating successful execution of in put request quoted line preceded and followed by double quote A pair of double quotes is used to delimit an expression that can be parsed The format for the quoted line should follow the TL1 message output format defined in Bellcore s TL1 messages If the output format is not defined in Bellcore s document the general aid common block specific block st
457. n of the ISDN BRA line by entering ENT ILN see Chapter 4 6 14 page 4 162 Step 4 Create the V5 user port entity associated to the ISDN BRA line by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 5 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 2 page 3 56 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 23 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth ee 3 3 4 5 V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth Assumption A V5 2 interface is available Procedure Step 1 Verify whether an HDSL interface with application mode PP or SP exists Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hds1l 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface with application the provisioning information go to mode PP or SP is provisioned Step 7 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 3 such an HDSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Verify whether an ISDN PRA service is provisioned on the HDSL in terface Follow the RTRV HDSLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV HDSLI S ALD where AID hdsitis 41 512 1314 AID of the HDSL interface timeslot Step 4 IE THEN the RTRV HDSLTS command reports go to Step 5 that no ISDN PRA service is provi sioned on the HDSL interface the RTRV HDSLTS command repor
458. n on the command and the error responses see the ED V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 97 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an HDSL interface to OOS rr E 3 4 6 Moving an HDSL interface out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an HDSL interface entity For an HDSL interface no shutdown is possible therefore the change to OOS is traffic affecting for enabled services using this HDSL interface Assumptions The HDSL interface is in administrative primary service state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command yD ods AID cee ay where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED HDSL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 98 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB
459. n simplex mode the system will check the checksum of the NVPS If the system is in duplex mode the system will check the program version of both copies of the NVPS Program storage The NVPS in the COMDAC is reprogrammable The AnyMedia Access System is capable of modifying these reprogrammable program memories through a soft ware download operation The software download impacts the provided service after downloading by a sys tem restart New software A new software release can be deployed to the AnyMedia Access System by release three methods COMDAC replacement for example with pre loaded COMDAC service affecting SA Simplex software boot download service affecting SA Duplex software download non service affecting NSA during software download but service affecting SA during COMDAC activation non ser vice affecting from R1 4 and later gt NOTE The downtime for a software boot download to an AnyMedia Access System in simplex mode can significantly be shortened by temporarily us ing a second COMDAC and putting the system into duplex mode while downloading Procedures The recommended procedures for performing a software upgrade are Software upgrade via pre loaded COMDAC replacement duplex mode Software upgrade via software download duplex mode Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in duplex mode without data base evolution Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in simplex mode witho
460. n the two entities ENT AP ap 1 1 LP Z100 ENT V5UP v5up L It1 LTY PE PLN ENT V5I v5i 1 v5type v52 ENT V5L v5l 1 e1 e1 1 1 1 Ky EEA POTS line Interface o VSlink H of _ Application pack Physical sub V5 x specific Protocol type in E1 data ol ey Rea d t cerber dat dat terface identifier ENT PLN It 1 drop drop 1 1 1 ENT CRS UPI v5up 1 v5i 1 ENT CRS Li v5I 1 v5i 1 Figure 4 17 Provisioning data for a V5 2 POTS subscriber line example 4 5 5 2 ISDN BRA subscribers Connection of An integrated services digital network basic rate access ISDN BRA subscriber ISDN BRA has the transmission capability of two B channels 2 x 64 kbps and one D chan subscribers nel 16 kbps The B channels are transported in the bearer channels of the V5 x 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 71 Configuration management for narrowband services Le Provisioning of ISDN BRA subscribers Allocated U ports of ISDN BRA subscribers Service activation of ISDN BRA subscribers Provisioning objects of ISDN BRA subscribers Table structure of an ISDN BRA service 4 72 ssue 7 December 2000 Port provisioning interface the D channel is transported in the communication paths of the V5 x in terface An ISDN BRA subscriber can be connected to the network via a V5 1 or V5 2 interface In the case of V5 1 up to two B channels are associated with up to two 64 kbps timeslots of a V5 1 interface In the case o
461. narrowband services Provisioning a V5 ISDN PRA line Le 4 6 15 Provisioning a V5 ISDN PRA line Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber line with its default values via the PRALN default command ED PRALN DFLT or with the provisioning data entered by the operator It specifies the HDSL interface the start timeslot and the number of timeslots excluding timeslot 16 which shall be used on the HDSL in terface Optionally the administrative primary service state of this V5 ISDN PRA line can be given The specified HDSL interface must be in primary service state OOS out of service and must operate in single pair or in point to point applica tion mode The timeslot 16 of the HDSL interface must be available and is auto matically allocated The V5 ISDN PRA service is denied if the HDSL interface al ready supplies G 703 leased line or V5 ISDN PRA service at least one of the pro visioned timeslots is used by another user no D64 HDLC termination is available or the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL AP are exhausted Assumptions HDSL interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT PRALN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT PRALN AI Di333 nadsSi HDSL sts S15 necs Nis 7GinLo GINE OC fpCcb2t CBiri S PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination HDSL haste tS 4 AID of the HDSL interface STG 1 31 start HDSL timeslot NTS
462. nchronization provisioning information retrieved in the preceding step needs to be modified Background Only the respective standby timing reference source can be changed To change the currently active timing reference source a synchronization switch must be per formed beforehand by entering OPR SYNCNSW see Chapter 4 10 9 Procedure Step 1 Follow the SET SYNCN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SETH SYNCN TS fi LSYNCNMODE sLopri EPPRE Llpsec LPSEC where SYNCNMODE FRNG LPD synchronization mode FRNG free running LPD external synchronization LPPRI el 1 1 4 1 4 Sselk 1 primary loop synchronization el 1 1 4 1 4 E1 physical port feeder side sclk 1 station clock LPSEC el l f1 4 f lA hy sclk 1 secondary loop synchronization el 1 1 4 1 4 E1 physical port feeder side sclk 1 station clock Supply the desired synchronization reference IO_E1 slot and line numbers To disable synchronization protection enter the same ref erence for both the primary and secondary sources gt NOTE Primary and secondary loop synchronization are only applicable if synchro nization mode is LPD 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 277 Configuration management for narrowband services Setting synchronization mode ee Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the c
463. nd procedures for ATM xDSL services in pdf format Installation Manual for DC Rack Configurations and Single Shelf in pdf format Installation Manual for AC Rack Configurations in pdf format ONU Installation Manual for Indoor Applications ONU IMI in pdf format Mass Provisioning Tool for V5 Services User Manual MPT USM in pdf format Description of TL1 commands in HTML format a For the ordering address see How to order this document 1 Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated XXIV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document How to order this document 4 How to order this document Ordering number The ordering number for the AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual is 363 211 112 Order procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and or to request placement on the standing order list send or call in an order as follows Telephone Order Monday through Mail Order Friday Lucent Technologies Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST FAX from USA Attention Priscilla Stanley 1 800 566 9568 email pfstanley lucent com FAX Worldwide 2855 N Franklin Road P O Box 19901 1 317 322 6699 USA Indianapolis IN 46219 Customer Information Center a For ordering a purchase order number or charge card number is required with all orders Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies One time orders One time orders include the conte
464. nection For this mode you must enter the phone num ber of the system side modem Step 17 To confirm your entries click on the button OK System Response The Communication Settings pop up window closes Step 18 Enter the User Identifier login where UID User Identifier login This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null Grouping of UID string val ues for this command is not al lowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alphanu meric character string 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 11 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection TET TT EE Step 19 Enter the Password Identifier password where PID Password Identifier password Always associated with a login UID Grouping of PID string val ues for this command is not al lowed The GSI PID parameter is hidden while it is entered in the PID text box It is a case sensi tive string containing 6 to 10 al phabetic numeric and symbol characters where at least two characters are non alphabetic and one is asymbol for example amp _ lt gt The default logins have a privileged security class These user ID and password pairs are the defaults to which the system returns if the Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS is cleared User ID Password LUCENT0O1 UI PSWD 01 LUCENT02 UI PSWD 02 gt NOTE If a change of user ID or pass
465. nels depends on the application mode of the specified HDSL interface and is shown in Table 4 8 page 4 62 Table 4 8 N in dependence on the HDSL interface application mode Max number of subscriber bearer Interface application mode channels PM Point to multipoint 2x15 PP Point to point 31 SP Single pair 16 4 62 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services 4 5 3 3 5 Unstructured 2 Mbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 ulll 1 ulll 16 hdsl 1 hdsl 512 It 1 11024 2 61 1 11 e14 8 oer EY Qf Application pack interface scriber ULL link GE HDSL specific Physical sub E1 data 4 x E1 feeder data scriber data Internally 32 64 kbps cross connections externally one 2 Mbps cross connection 1 The AP can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf or in the ONU Subshelf Ifthe AP is located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf the AIDs drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 er Subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 16 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 11 Functional diagram of UVLL Logical UVLL Each of up to 16 unstructured leased line links transports the full E1 2 Mbps ca entities pacity including t
466. ng timeslot 0 V3LN UPP HDSL unstructured point to point 1 NTU 2 drops 32 timeslots including timeslot 0 UGLLN UVLLN SP HDSL single pair 1 NTU 1 drop 16 timeslots PRALN GLLN VLLN PM HDSL point to multi point 2 NTUs 2 drops 30 timeslots 2 x 15 GLLN VLLN TS 3 31 number of payload timeslots available to carry user data This parameter must not be specified it is reserved for future use PST TIS0093 administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service gt NOTE The number of drops that constitute the line interface depends on the APMODE For HDSL APMODESSP PP PM UPP or V3PP The first physical drop to be used for the HDSL interface must be an odd numbered drop of an HDSL AP In single pair application mode only this drop is used the next consec utive drop is not used In all other application modes the next even num bered drop is also used If the HDSL interface operates not in point to mul tipoint or single pair mode a single drop fault leads also to a transmision interruption on the second drop 4 160 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an HDSL interface gt NOTE The application mode implicitly defines the number of NTUs to be con nected the number of allocated drops the number of created HDSL timeslots and the possible services PRALN GLLN VLLN UGLLN UV LLN or V3L
467. ng in progress In this state no additional integrity checks are performed or are necessary for the provisioning variant The provisioning variant is switched with the current interface dataset and enters afterwards the state PV3 The old cur rent interface dataset is maintained as provisioning variant Depending on whether the old current dataset is from the V5 standards point of view a complete configuration the state of the old current interface is changed to state PV1 or state PVO This differentiation must be done because the old dataset was not necessarily logical consistent So a logical consistency check must be performed on the old current dataset to decide whether it is brought to state PVO inconsistent or PV1 consistent m PV3 Active PV3 integrity means Internal integrity external allocation integrity changes allowed In this state the integrity of the provisioning dataset in this case the current interface dataset in combination with the current system dataset and other provisioning variants in state PV1 2 3 is ensured by the checks defined for the current system dataset This state does not ensure a logical consis tency which allows in any case the activation of this dataset While editing the active provisioning variant with the related V5 interface in service state OOS this cannot be guaranteed and is also not required Per V5 interface only one provisioning variant in state PV3 can exist 4 240 Issue 7 December 2000 363 2
468. ng input If an out of lock event occurs on both timing references the COMDAC reference PLL is likely to be at fault although this could signal a synchronization network fault see Chapter 5 6 12 page 5 159 System synchronization alarms When one reference input is active and the other input has failed due to an out of lock condition the system cannot generate an alarm it can only generate an event message since the COMDAC can only detect out of lock on the active in put Once the COMDAC switches off the reference it can no longer detect the con dition The controlled slip second CSS counts can be used by maintenance per sonnel to determine if the problem with that reference input still exists 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 275 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving synchronization mode ee 4 10 7 Retrieving synchronization mode RTRV SYNCN Purpose Retrieve the synchronization mode and if appropriate a synchronization refer ence source for the system Assumptions The following must be installed for service but it is not necessary to store the syn chronization provisioning information m IO _E1 pack s CIU for station clock Background Correct system synchronization is necessary to prevent clicks pops and dropped calls for POTS and narrowband special services and to assure high quality data and facsimile services When the system is providing subscriber service it must be synchron
469. ni zation mode Synchronization source selection 7 Na re Ns k og a e9 a Data Data Network Network 5 gt E T O EE E1 s ats E1 s 3 T 3 y i d Transport i 4 Network ccese E1 s o E1 s System 3 i k 3 4 a oe ee a 2 Legend 1 Clock from transport network 2 048 MHz 2 Clock from clock distribution equipment Clock Supply 3 For clock recovery from E1 Equipment CSE 1 or 2 are used alternatively Figure 4 50 Different system clock sources Since the E1 feeder signals may be sourced from different network elements NEs all of these NEs and the station clock if applicable must derive their timing from a timing source traceable to the same primary reference source PRS The system distributes the recovered timing internally Attributes of the external synchronization mode include m Any of the 16 E1 ports or the station clock can be selected as the primary and secondary reference sources m The primary reference source default is the first E1 feeder of the first lO_E1 see Figure 4 51 on page 4 273 m The secondary reference source default is the first E1 feeder of the second lO_E1 see Figure 4 51 on page 4 273 gt NOTE The system starts up with the default synchronization mode loop timed Clock synchronization managm LPD the primary reference source is port one on IO_E1 pack number one and the secondary reference source is
470. ning The possible services on top of an HDSL logical interface de pendent on the provisioned application mode are shown in Table 4 9 page 4 75 Provisioning of A VLL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the VLL subscribers lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface allo cates up to two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL applica tion pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a VLL 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 93 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Le subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service There fore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capable of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked The number of timeslots depends on the type of the requested service see Table 4 7 page 4 61 All the timeslots providing the service for an unique VLL subscriber shall be allocated in the same E1 feeder In the subscriber s AID line termination bearer channel the last number that is the bearer channel number designate
471. nitored The protection switch is automatically initiated upon de tection of faults in the active synchronization source or on demand 4 11 3 V5 2 communication channel protection V5 2 CC protection A V5 2 interface can be configured to support communication channel CC pro tection in a multi link configuration The protection covers a single link fault ina V5 2 interface that is it supports up to three standby timeslots which protect the active CCs In the event of a link fault the carried CCs are switched hitlessly and non revertively to the standby timeslots On recovery of the faulty link the former CC timeslots are used as new standby timeslots V5 protection In addition to the active communication channels standby channels may be de switching fined which are used for protection of the active channels If an error occurs on an active channel the protection protocol switches the traffic associated to this com munication channel to another standby channel which then becomes active 4 11 4 IO_HDLC protection IO_HDLC The IO_HDLC provides the frame relay function of D channel messages between protection the ISDN subscribers connected to an AnyMedia Access System and a number of V5 communications channels and vice versa The protection status refers to the pack protection switching state The protection status changes on system driven protection switches automatic and routine switches as well as on manual protection switches ini
472. nk growth Assumption The IO_E1 pack used for the V3 service is a FACSOOB Procedure Step 1 Verify the provisioning information of the V3 link specified by the en gineering work order by entering the RTRV V3L command IF THEN the RTRV V3L command reports that use the ENT V3L command to enter the V3 link is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 2 the RTRV V3L command reports that go to Step 3 the V3 link is provisioned with the cor rect provisioning information the RIRV V3L command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Create a V3 link entity by entering ENT V3L see Chapter 4 6 47 page 4 210 Step 3 Move the V3 link in service by entering ED V3L see Chapter 4 6 51 page 4 214 Step 4 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 4 page 3 57 End of steps 3 52 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Leased line link growth ee ee 3 3 6 4 Leased line link growth Procedure Step 1 Verify the provisioning information of the leased line link LLL spec ified by the engineering work order by entering the RTRV LLL com mand IF THEN the RTRV LLL command reports that use the ENT LLL command to enter the LLL is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 2 the RTRV LLL command reports that go to Step 3 the LLL is provisioned with the correct provi
473. nk in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 18 Move the V5 1 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 138 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning 4 5 7 4 3 ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 2 inter face Purpose This procedure is to create a semipermanent leased line link ROC connection via V5 2 interface Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 links by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 gt NOTE When blocking a V5 link an SPLL ROC on this link can no longer be used In this case no transmission over the bearer channel used by the SPLL ROC is possible that is no management connection is possible until the V5 link is unblocked again via the GSI AEM Therefore it is recommended to in stall two V5 links so that the LE can switch to the second one automatically in case the first is blocked As the SPLL ROC is handled like a V5 subscriber it is possible to block it In this case also no transmission over the bearer channel used by the SPLL ROC is possible until the V5 subscriber is unblocked again via the GSI AEM Step 4 Define the cross connections between V5 links and V5 2 interface by e
474. nnel entity The IP parameters and the interface state for remote operations channel must be set with the SET IP command The HDLC flag monitoring timer parameter defines the pe riod in seconds after loss of receiving HDLC flags where the remote operations channel shall be regarded as failed Optionally the administrative primary service state can be given the default is OOS out of service The remote operations channel can be cross connected to a leased line interface or to a V5 interface us ing the single channel semi permanent leased line capability For transport via a leased line interface the remote operations channel is cross connected to a leased line timeslot For transport via a V5 interface a single channel semi perma nent leased line V5 user port which allocates the remote operations channel is cross connected to a V5 interface Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT ROC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNIT ROG tALD es 23 tmon F MON PRSTI where AID roc 1 AID of the embedded remote op erations channel FMON 0 239 HDLC flag monitoring The HDLC flag monitoring timer defines the period in seconds af ter loss of receiving HDLC flags where the remote operations channel shall be regarded as failed To disable the HDLC flag monitoring the timer must be set to 0 Pei tIS OOS administrative primary service state TS in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response p
475. nt AID parameter to specify on which provisioning variant dataset it shall act on If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the command addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface If the commands are executed without a given provisioning variant AID they behave as in the former system releases to ensure backward compatibility to management systems As the active provisioning variants of each interface are also contained in the pro visioning table they also have a provisioning variant AID This implies that the cur rent interface datasets can be changed via management commands without spec ifying a provisioning variant and additionally with the provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant for each interface Issue 7 December 2000 4 243 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning rr TE ee 4 7 7 4 Changing provisioning variant states Provisioning Once a provisioning variant is created and filled with data in the state PVO variant state NOT READY it may be set to available with a TL1 command by the operator At changes this state change to PV1 READY the system performs the additional checks to ensure the integrity as described in Chapter 4 7 5 page 4 239 If the integrity is not given the state change is denied by the system The transient state PV2 IN PROGRESS is entered on acceptance of a switch over request from the con nected e
476. nt for narrowband services Moving a V5 link in service ee 4 6 24 Moving a V5 link in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V5 link to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions V5 link has already been provisioned and is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command Fe a Fe es PAS Le where AID v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link PST Ss administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 177 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a V5 x interface in service BE SeSe 4 6 25 Moving a V5 x interface in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V5 inter face to IS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state may be given Assumptions V5 x interface has already been
477. nter the following TL1 command ENT SUBSHELF AID SUBSH_TYPE gt where AID subsh 1 8 AID of the subshelf SUBSH_TYPE ONUOI1 subshelf type ONU01 Optical Network Unit 8 slot subshelf Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT SUBSHELF section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 92 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection ONU mainshelf OOOO i 3 4 2 Provisioning a cross connection between ONU Subshelf feeder port and AnyMedia Mainshelf server port Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between an ONU Subshelf feeder port and an AnyMedia Mainshelf server port It defines which server port in the AnyMedia Mainshelf shall support which ONU Subshelf The ONU Subshelf to be supported must be provisioned before and defines the logical subshelf number in the subshelf feeder port AID This cross connection is of type 1 to 1 which means that you can connect one subshelf feeder port to one server port Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS SUBSHELF GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRo SsUBSHEEE 2ALDL ALDZ where AID1 Subrdrs
478. nterface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 10 gt NOTE The change to OOS is traffic af fecting for enabled services us ing this HDSL interface Step 10 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 11 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRVEeLE IAID where AID 1t 1 1024 sige Step 12 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports that the use the ENT PRALN command to en line is not provisioned ter the provisioning information go to Step 13 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 14 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 13 Enter the provisioning information of the V5 ISDN PRA line by enter ing ENT PRALN see Chapter 4 6 15 page 4 164 Step 14 Create the V5 user port entity associated to the V5 ISDN PRA line by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 3 26 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB
479. ntering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 59 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Switch from POTS only to mixed ese ee 3 3 8 Switch from a POTS only to a POTS and ISDN mixed configuration Procedure Step 1 Verify that the correct O_ HDLC IDC500B is equipped in the cor rect slot based on the engineering work order IE THEN the slot is unequipped install the correct IO_HDLC type IDC500B go to Step 2 the slot is equipped with the incorrect contact the provisioning center to verify IO_HDLC type the work order and or to determine whether the IO_HDLC should be re placed the slot is equipped with the correct go to Step 7 IO_HDLC type IDC500B Step 2 Insert a new IO_HDLC IDC500B into the appropriate slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in posi tion by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up both LEDs on the IO_HDLC light for approximately 5 s Step 3 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 4 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 7 Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU System Response All LEDs on all installed packs light for approxi mately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status 3 60 Issue 7 Dec
480. ntering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot with timeslot type CC by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Step 10 Define the ROC by entering ENT ROC see Chapter 4 6 52 page 4 215 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 139 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 11 Set the IP address of the ROC by entering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 Step 12 Instruct the NE to create a new routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 Step 13 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP set LTYPE SSPLL LT roc 1 see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 14 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 15 For a multilink V5 2 interface Define the V5 2 protection group by entering ENT V52PG see Chapter 4 6 26 page 4 17
481. ntifier ues ENT ROC roc 1 ENT CRS UPI v5up 1 v5i 1 ENT CRS LI v5l 1 v5i 1 Figure 4 44 Provisioning data for an SPLL ROC via V5 2 interface example 4 5 6 Provisioning of managed NTUs Description of A managed NTU is a 2B1Q ISDN digital subscriber line NTU which is fully man managed NTUs aged by the AnyMedia Access System The NTU provides the subscriber a single channel operating at one of many speeds depending on the NTU type and config uration from 1 2 kbps through to 128 kbps Speeds below 56k are provided using the X 50 Div 3 standard except for 1 2 kops which uses a proprietary protocol Speeds of 64 kbps or below use only the first B channel of the digital leased line Management of managed NTUs is performed via the D channel so that channel is not available to the subscriber The NTU management requires the use of one of the HDLC channels on the COMDAC The use of a single HDLC channel to manage all NTUs imposes the following restrictions m The AnyMedia Access System can communicate with one NTU at a time m lf an NTU is not responding then any time spent waiting for the NTU to time out blocks communication with other NTUs This time out is at most 10 seconds 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 119 Configuration management for narrowband services NTU provisioning o E ___ ee m Managed NTUs must be polled on a regular basis to acquire alarm infor mation With a single HDLC channel available and many NTUs conf
482. nts for the current document issue in effect at the time of order Standing orders You may request an update on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribu tion for all reissues of the document 5 How to comment on this document Document The first sheet in this manual after the title page is the feedback form How Are comment We Doing procedure Please use this form to fax your comments and suggestions concerning the USM 363 211 112 to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXV About this document General safety information 6 General safety information This section lists the safety information needed for the AnyMedia Access System for system turn up after installation has been completed operating provisioning and maintaining the system Make sure that you read this section carefully and that you understand all the safety information in this section The safety information in this section includes m Important general safety instructions m Appearance and classification of safety instructions m Understanding electrostatic discharge ESD and avoiding damage from ESD m Lightwave safety m Special safety instructions for handling batteries gt NOTE If you do not understand any of the safety information in this section please see your manager immediately Yo
483. nu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 172 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving a POTS line in service ee 4 6 20 Moving a POTS line in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a POTS line to IS To change the administrative primary service state only the primary service state must be given Assumptions POTS line line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED PLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BD SP Nese eee Ly where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST Ss administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED PLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 173 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving an ISDN line in service BE SeSe 4 6 21 Moving an ISDN BRA line in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an ISDN BRA line to IS To change the administrative primary service state no other pa
484. o 2 X 2 Figure 2 6 E1 jumper settings for 120 Q symmetrical cable Figure 2 6 shows the jumper settings for 120 Q symmetrical cable For 75 Q coaxial cable all jumpers have to be on the opposite side Step 4 Insert the IO_E1 into one of the slots specified With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top por tion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place Step 5 Repeat Step 4 for all IO_E1 packs that are specified System Response Upon power up all LEDs on the IO_E1 light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at 1 Hz during lO_E1 self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than one minute System Response The pictorial representation of the system is updated to show the installed IO_E1 packs at the connected GSI Step 6 Verify that the IO_E1s appear correctly on the pictorial representa tion of the shelf and that only the ACTIVE LED remains lit on the IO_E1 packs 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 37 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures IO_E1 installation TET TT EE Step 7 Verify the correct termination impedance jumper settings by retrieval of the inventory data of all installed IO_E1 packs by entering the TL1 command RTRV EQPT see Chapter 4 9 3 page 4 263 The output parameter PCDE must reflect the expected terminati
485. oUp 2 2 VO1 37 ENF CRS UP IS Vollp 23 V51 3 ENI CRG UPLY iv oUp 24 V0L s 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 295 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 14 Define the cross connections between V5 line termination bearer channels and V5 1 timeslots ENT CRS BGIlS2 dU bCc 47 L vors Lel ENL CRO BCIS s r beH4e Vots BINT S CORS BC ls sole be 44 1 Vvore 1 37 Step 15 Move the POTS lines in service ED PLN LeeHa y ecs soe ED FPLN loH4e4 2 x4 ee BOS ENS We Sa Ae ee Sl oe Step 16 Move the V5 link in service BS VS toy Oe Pee eee Step 17 Move the V5 1 interface in service BDH Vo LA o is te Sy End of steps 4 296 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples 4 12 2 Example for provisioning a V5 1 ISDN interface Purpose This example is to create a V5 1 ISDN service with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 on O_E1 2 link 1 communication channel 1 timeslot 1 to 6 and 16 communication path 1 3 4 and 5 application pack 13 and 14 line termination 42 43 and 44 bearer channel 1 and 2 user port 22 23 and 24 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier and the envelope function addresses must be identical to those of the local exchange In this example the follow ing values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 envelope function ad dresses 1000 100
486. ociation of a UVLL subscriber with an unstructured leased line interface is made on the service assignments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 The HDSL logical interface can operate in several modes which have to be provi sioned at the TL1 interface For UVLL service the unstructured point to point mode HDSL must be provisioned All possible services on top of an HDSL logi cal interface dependent on the provisioned application mode are shown in Table 4 9 page 4 75 A UVLL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface allo cates up to two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL applica tion pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provisioning of a UVLL subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the application pack with its type was provisioned beforehand and provides its HDSL ports for service There Issue 7 December 2000 4 103 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning o E ___ ee fore it is possible to check at the provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capable of serving the subscriber Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked All 32 timeslots providing the servi
487. odically audits the NVDS If the system is in simplex mode this means only one COMDAC is plugged in it checks the self consistency of the NVDS If the system is in duplex mode COMDAC is pack protected it checks self and mutual consistency of both copies of the NVDS NVDS backup The system supports backing up of the NVDS data Backups of the NVDS data are done through the NVDS database download from the NVDS to a graphical system interface GSI AEM NVDS backup will not occur automatically it must be initiated by the operator via TL1 command NVDS restoration The system also supports restoration of the NVDS data NVDS restoration is used Inthe event of a backout of a new software release Inthe case of catastrophic multiple faults of the NVDS The restoration of previous NVDS data is done through the NVDS database download from a GSI AEM NVDS evolution During software upgrades from one release to another the system supports auto matic built in transformation of the database In the AnyMedia Access System this is called database evolution The site specific configuration is completely re tained This advanced feature avoids the complex procedure of retrieving the old data base transforming it off line and reloading it to the upgraded system Procedures The procedures for database management are m NVDS database backup m NVDS database restoration Required To complete the database management procedures successfully you must
488. ol elements 1 13 1 9 Startup options 1 14 1 10 Text input example 1 15 1 11 Scroll bars 1 15 1 12 Selection list example 1 15 1 13 Communications window 1 17 1 14 Communication settings window 1 18 1 15 Status display 1 22 1 16 Exit GSI confirmation window 1 23 1 17 Top menu 1 24 1 18 GSI toolbar 1 25 1 19 Shelf view window example 1 29 1 20 Menu for packs 1 30 1 21 Status bar 1 30 1 22 Alarms and conditions reporting window 1 31 1 23 System log file 1 33 1 24 Event Log window 1 35 1 25 TL1SI View 1 35 1 26 Print window 1 37 1 27 Print Setup window 1 37 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 VII arr Figures 1 28 Exit GSI confirmation window 1 38 1 29 Options Menu Logfile 1 39 1 30 Options Menu Startup 1 40 1 31 Options Menu TL1 1 40 1 32 Options Menu Help 1 41 1 33 GSI toolbar 1 44 1 34 Example TL1 commands selection window for Configuration Management 1 44 1 35 Example Selection of TL1 Command Objects 1 45 1 36 Example TL1 Commands Window 1 46 1 37 GSI Script Facility window for macros 1 48 1 38 NotePad Text Editor for creating text scripts 1 48 1 39 GSI Script Facility window for text 1 51 1 40 NE Operation Menu 1 53 1 41 Provisioning Menu issu 1 42 Fault menu options 1 58 1 43 TL Commands Selection Window for Fault Management 1 60 1 44 Example Window for Selecting TL1 Command Object for the SET Command 1 60 1 45 TL1 Commands Fault Mgmt Menu 1 61 ME SS 2 Initial narrowband system turn
489. omer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 279 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching BE SeSe 4 11 Protection switching Protection in the Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism when a fault is AnyMedia Access detected in the AnyMedia Access System The COMDAC the IO_HDLC and the System IO_E1 can be protected with a redundant pack Protection switching is based on the following principles m Protected elements are protected either 1 1 or 1 N m Performed as non revertive or revertive switching 1 1 is always non revertive 1 N is always revertive Redundancy of For 1 1 protection one element serves as the active element primary the other protection serves as a protection or standby element For 1 N protection one element serves as the protection or standby element for all N active elements If an active element fails the fault is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the protection element Revertive versus In the AnyMedia Access System protection can be revertive or non revertive non revertive Revertive protection switching implies that the active and standby elements return to their original configuration once the fault causing the protection switching has been repaired Non revertive switching does not return the elements to their original configura t
490. ommand and the error responses see the SET SYNCN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 278 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Operating synchronization switch i 4 10 9 Operating synchronization switch OPR SYNCNSW Purpose This command initiates a manual switching to a synchronization reference source The command is rejected if the current synchronization mode is free running both synchronization reference sources are the same or the state of the target synchro nization reference source is currently not operational Assumptions The following must be installed for service but it is not necessary to store the syn chronization provisioning information m IO _E1 pack s CIU for station clock Procedure Step 1 Follow the OPR SYNCNSW GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command OPR SYNCNSW SWITCHTO where SWITCHTO PRI SEC defines the target synchroniza tion reference source PRI primary reference SEC secondary reference Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the OPR SYNCNSW section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the cust
491. ommand is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V52PG section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 179 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V52PG V52TS LS 4 6 27 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 2 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 2 protection group and a V5 timeslot It creates a standby timeslot which is capable of protecting a communication channel in the same protection group The related interface must be in an administrative primary service state OOS The V5 link which contains the specified timeslot has to be cross connected to the same V5 interface as the specified V5 protection group The V5 timeslot 15 16 or 31 must not be cross connected to any other object The timeslot must be of the communication channel type With the cross connection of timeslot 16 to protection group 1 the secondary link is defined For protection group 2 only up to three cross con nections are allowed Multiple timeslots can be assigned to a single protection group Additionally a D64 network side HDLC termination is allocated Assumptions V5 2 protection group and V5 2 timeslot have alread
492. ommands Fault Mgmt Figure 1 45 TL1Commands Fault Mgmt Menu gt NOTE For the description of all TL1 commands see the TL1 command page in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 61 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions 1 11 HDSL Performance Monitoring 1 62 a0 HDSL Performance HDSL Main 1 provisioned no hardware HDSL Main 2 provisioned no hardware SHDSL Main 3 provisioned no hardware SHDSL Main 4 provisioned no hardware Selected pack SHDSL Main 3 Drop il Collect statistics For Thresholds Near end Far end Enable Performance Monitoring Errored blocks iv E Errored seconds 15 min fe 120 m 0 Errored seconds 24 hrs fw 1728 a 1725 Severely enored seconds 15 min fw E E Severely erored seconds 24 hrs fe 5E m yes z Unavailable Seconds w Start statistics collection at i 2 midnight View Loa Get Default OF Cancel Apply Retrieving thresholds Find HDSL Performance Monitoring under Performance Monitoring HDSL Per formance HDSL Performance monitoring allows you to set and monitor performance statis tics on HDSL packs LPS504 The first screen retrieves and allows you to set thresholds for a selected drop ona pack Statistics collection for all statistics is enabled disabl
493. ompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 2 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ENT HDSL command to enter no HDSL interface with application the provisioning information go to mode UPP is provisioned Step 3 the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 4 such an HDSL interface is provisioned Step 3 Create the HDSL interface entity with application mode UPP by en tering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 4 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where ATD hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface Step 5 IE THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 7 the HDSL interface is in service state OOS the RTRV HDSL command reports that use the ED HDSL command to move the HDSL interface is in service state the HDSL interface out of service go IS to Step 6 3 38 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UVLL subscriber growth ee Step 6 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 7 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RIRV LT IAID where AI
494. on message If a Cannot Re Provision message is re ceived the AN informs the operator with a transient event report that the switch over was rejected by the LE m if the provisioning variant is available the LE may respond with a Blocking started message and mw the LE will internally block all user ports of the V5 interface Nor mally no dedicated user port block messages will be sent to the AN but are nevertheless accepted and processed in the AN if they are sent m the AN sends out a transient event report informing the operator about the reception of this message No blocking is performed by the AN autonomously after receiving this message The AN will con tinue as in normal operation 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 235 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning Te ee 4 7 2 3 Switch over to new variant initiated in AN on non operational V5 interface Non operational V5 To allow the re provisioning procedure also for pre provisioning or in case of interfaces transmission failures the system allows to initiate the switch over also on non op erational V5 interfaces AS no communication to the LE is possible the AnyMedia Access System grants the switch over request by the operator immediately and switches the provisioning variants A later V5 interface startup will then use the new data without any special treatment towards the LE This behavior allows the switch back to the old provision
495. on CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 105 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a GLL subscriber to OOS rr E 3 4 14 Moving an n x 64 kbps leased line according G 703 out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according G 703 to OOS To change the administrative primary service state no parameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The corresponding leased line line termination is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED GLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED GLENS ALD es see SLs where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED GLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 106 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a UVLL subscriber to OOS I 3 4 15 Moving a UVLL subscriber out of
496. on impedance selected in Step 3 End of steps gt NOTE The IO_E1 pack can be used for service only when it is provisioned by en tering the TL1 command ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Next procedure Adding IO_E1 pack protection see Chapter 2 3 16 if applicable otherwise Set ting clock synchronization parameters see Chapter 2 3 17 2 38 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Adding IO_E1 pack protection 2 3 16 Adding IO_E1 pack protection Purpose An additional IO_E1 pack is used to provide 1 N protection for the IO_E1 packs That is it serves as the protection or standby element for all N active packs where 1 lt N lt 4 If an active IO_E1 pack fails the failure is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the protection pack IO_E1 pack protection is achieved by switching the input E1s from the faulty pack to the protection IO_E1 To regain IO_E1 pack protection the faulty pack must be replaced and then the inputs from the IO_E1 protection pack are switched back to the replaced IO_E1 pack revertive mode The IO_E1 protection pack has to be a FAC500B and must be installed in the IO_E1P slot see Figure 2 5 page 2 36 Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrost
497. on management for narrowband services Provisioning a VLL subscriber gt NOTE HDSL timeslot 16 is spared except all 31 timeslots in the point to point mode or all 16 timeslots in the single pair mode of an HDSL interface shall be used for one service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT VLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 192 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a GLL subscriber ee 4 6 34 Provisioning a GLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to create an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity according G 703 GLL with its default or operator specified provisioning data It specifies the HDSL interface the start HDSL timeslot and the number of HDSL timeslots Optionally the administrative primary service state of this line can be given The bearer channel objects of the leased line subscriber are created automatically ac cording to the specified number of HDSL timeslots and must all be cross con nected to timeslots of the same leased line link An HDSL interface operating in single pair or point to point mode is connected to one NTU and can suppor
498. on represents the physical ports which are provided by the particular POTS AP and ISDN AP installed in the AnyMedia shelf The port state information consists of the port service state the entry of the served subscriber line and the line type The primary and secondary port state information is also re trievable for each port Primary port state the valid values are as follows Issue 7 December 2000 4 261 Configuration management for narrowband services Inventory management ETE eee ee m IS In service m OOS Out of service The secondary port state only exists for primary service state OOS the valid val ues are as follows MON Monitor only for ISDN AP mw NAC Not accessible a IST Test active 4 9 1 Inventory for ONU Subshelf entities If the connection to the ONU Subshelf is lost all subshelf pack inventory data is not retrievable any more and for all equipped packs an UNPLUG report is gener ated After recovery of the ONU Subshelf connection the AnyMedia Mainshelf performs a new equipage and inventory data retrieval For all equipped ONU packs OCP and APs a new PLUGIN report is generated and the inventory data is available again 4 9 2 NTU inventory data The HDSL network termination unit NTU is not part of the AnyMedia Access System The NTU is able to provide the following inventory data m Product name m HW configuration m SW version m Serial number Manufacture date This inform
499. on you will find the following information m Executing TL1 commands through a GSI dialog m Defining and executing TL1 commands m Creating script files Editing script files m Using script mode m Running script files 1 7 2 Executing TL1 commands through a GSI dialog Overview TL1 commands can be executed in two different ways m Via TL1 command selection windows Opened using the toolbar see Figure 1 33 on page 1 44 a Viathe TL1 commands menu TL1 command se TL1 command selection windows exist for ECON SVINE OWS m All TL1 commands TL1 commands for configuration management m TL1 commands for fault management m TL1 commands for security management m Abort Command The TL1 command selection windows can be displayed by clicking on the respec tive icon in the toolbar Figure 1 33 on page 1 44 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 43 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands TL1 commands for security management TL1 commands for fault management TL1 commands for configuration management All TL1 commands Figure 1 33 GSI toolbar Clicking on one of these buttons opens a window containing all TL1 commands used for the selected functional area Configuration Mgmt ie ES Figure 1 34 Example TL1 commands selection window for Configuration Management The command selection window containing all TL1 commands can also be dis played by clicking on the button TL1 Cmds in the command area
500. onal message Figure 4 45 Re provisioning initiated from AN message flow in a successful scenario 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 237 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning Ee 4 7 3 Provisioning variant contents Contents of The following entities may be part of a provisioning variant Pee m CRS LI Cross connection V5 link lt gt V5 interface variants m CRS CCTS Cross connection V5 communication channel lt gt V5 link timeslot m CRS CPCC Cross connection V5 communication path lt gt V5 com munication channel m CRS UPI Cross connection V5 user port lt gt V5 interface m CRS BCTS Cross connection line termination bearer channel lt gt V5 link timeslot only V5 1 m CRS UPCP Cross connection V5 user port lt gt V5 communication path only ISDN m CRS PGTS Cross connection V5 protection group lt gt V5 link timeslot m CRS PGCC Cross connection V5 protection group lt gt V5 commu nication channel m V5TS V5 link timeslot usage bearer channel communication channel A provisioning variant contains only the associations between the various objects related to a V5 interface and not the objects itself The objects as V5 link V5 user port V5 communication channel etc are always part of the current system dataset that is they exist only once in the system Provisioning variants are always related to exactly one V5 interface One V5 inter face may have several provision
501. one of the above listed faults occur the corresponding transceiver function HW immediately sets the clock output to high The O_E1 does not wait until it actually reports one of the fault conditions If the affected clock is selected as reference in put the COMDAC can detect this condition immediately The IO_E1 does not enable the clock output to the COMDAC until it has cleared the fault condition 4 10 4 Clock recovery from station clock interface SCD SCI clock recovery In addition to the E1 reference clocks the CIU delivers the station clock SC to the COMDACs SCI fault condition The CIU monitors the following fault conditions on the received SC Loss of signal LOS If the above listed fault occurs the corresponding transceiver function HW imme diately sets the clock output to high The CIU does not wait until it actually reports the fault condition If the affected clock is selected by the COMDAC as reference input the COMDAC can detect this condition immediately The CIU does not enable the clock output to the COMDAC until it has cleared the fault condition 4 10 5 Clock recovery from COMDAC COMDAC clock The COMDACs generate the internal system clock from the primary or secondary recovery reference clock If both references fail the COMDACs switch to free running mode until one of the references recovers COMDAC fault condition The COMDAC receives LOS LOF HBER and AIS indications for each E1 from the IO_E
502. onfiguration management for narrowband services Service provisioning Le 4 5 7 1 5 V5 2 ISDN PRA service Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 2 ISDN PRA service Assumption The system is configured to support switched ISDN services Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Step 10 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 11 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 12 Define the V5 ISDN PRA line by entering ENT PRALN see Chapter 4 6 15 page 4 164
503. oning V5 communication paths Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 communication path entity within a V5 interface The protection communication path will be created automatically by the system if needed It must not be provisioned The communication path types BCC only V5 2 CTRL LCTRL only V5 2 and PSTN can only be provisioned once per V5 interface For a V5 1 interface 3 ISDNF 3 ISDNP and 1 ISDNS communication paths can be provisioned whereas for a V5 2 interface up to 47 communication paths from each type are allowed Assumption V5 interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V5CP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT VOCP AlDityIvookype VOP LYE where AID v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path V5PTYPE BCC CTRL ISDNF ISDNP ISDNS LCTRL PSTN V5 communication path type BCC bearer channel connec tion CTRL common and port control ISDNF ISDN D channel frame ISDNP ISDN D channel packet ISDNS ISDN D channel signal ing LCTRL link control PSTN public switched telephone network Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5CP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Pro
504. onnection objects always logically associate a user port to acertain V5 interface In some cases additionally a physical asso ciation by providing the V5 timeslots to be used is done for exam ple V5 1 m V3 service objects Cross connection V3 subscriber lt gt V3 link m LLservice objects Cross connection leased line timeslot lt gt LL line termination bearer channel 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 49 Configuration management for narrowband services Services ee Cross connection leased line timeslot lt gt ROC m ULL service objects Cross connection unstructured leased line link lt gt unstruc tured G 703 V 35 V 36 or X 21 leased line subscriber m Lines Layer m V5 interface objects V5 interface V5 links V5 timeslots V5 logical communication channels CC V5 communication path CP V5 2 protection group Cross connection V5 interface lt gt V5 link Cross connection V5 CP lt gt V5 logical CC Cross connection V5 protection group lt gt V5 logical CC Cross connection V5 protection group lt gt timeslot V5 physical CC Cross connection V5 logical CC lt gt timeslot V5 physical CC m V3 interface objects V3 links m LL interface objects Leased line links Leased line timeslots m ULL interface objects Unstructured leased line links m POTS subscriber objects POTS subscriber
505. onnel or by expert personnel authorized by Lucent Technologies All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability No components spare parts must be used other than those recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents The unit system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by the user to a person in responsibility 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXVII About this document General safety information ee The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be cor rectly connected to the protective earth Never connect to 60 V The unit system must be operated only with the connections and un der the environmental conditions as described in the documentation The removal or disabling of safety facilities the clearing of faults and errors and the maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualified personnel only The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measur ing and test equipment Transport storage and operation of the unit system must be under the permissible conditions only See accompanying documentation and information on the unit system Calibrations special tests af
506. ons for installation and starting the program m Structure of the system display m System management m Working with TL1 commands General notes on Configuration management m Fault management m Security management gt NOTE You will not find specific information about how to configure and manage the Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Cross references point to sections in other chapters providing this information gt NOTE Narrowband Generally the GSI is usable for narrowband services as well as for broad capabilities band services This User Service Manual for Narrowband Services reflects only the GSI capabilities for narrowband services The GSI capabilities for ATM xDSL services can be found in the Commands and Procedures which are included on the customer documentation CD ROM 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 1 GSI software for narrowband services System Requirements for the GSI ee 1 1 1 Overview Overview The AnyMedia Access System graphical system interface software GSI is a soft ware running on a PC that provides a graphical user interface to the AnyMedia Access System supporting the OAM amp P functions of the system The GSI contains narrowband and broadband functionality GSI functionality Whether accessing the system remotely or locally a user using the GSI sees a graphical representation of the AnyMedia shelf complete with buttons and pull down menus which are used to monitor and manage the equipm
507. ontinuously held low to deacti vate the anti streaming mecha nism once it has been activated If this parameter is set to 255 then once activated the anti streaming mechanism will not deactivate until the NTU is reset or this parameter is changed Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED NTU DFLT sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 233 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning 4 7 V5 re provisioning 4 7 1 Introduction Definition The re provisioning capability is defined in the ETSI standard EN 300 324 1 and Usage of re provisioning in the ITU standards G 964 and G 965 Re provisioning allows the operator of V5 networks to enter standby V5 interface provisioning datasets in both the local ex change LE and the access network AN without disturbing existing services of the V5 interface In the AnyMedia Access System the standby provisioning datasets are stored within the system itself and not for example in the related AEM The creation of standby provisioning datasets can be performed asynchro nously and without notice to each other in the local exchange and the access netwo
508. oo0 1 CSs 3 5 Issue 7 December 2000 4 309 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples o E ___ ee Step 11 Define the HDSL interfaces BNI HDSL hasl i2 333 drop drop l 13 1 apmode pp ENT HDSL jhdsl Zsirrdrop crop 1 14 3 apmede sp Step 12 Define the V5 ISDN PRA lines ENT PRALN 1t Sl 2hdsl hdsl 1 nts 13 BENT PRALN 2lt 52 3 2hdsl hdsl 2 nts 15 Step 13 Define the ISDN user ports ENT V5UP v5up 31 ltype PRALN lt l1t 51 v5efaddr 71 ENT V5UP v5up 32 ltype PRALN lt 1t 52 v5efaddr 72 Step 14 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 inter face ENT CRo UP Lev oupHs1y voL 3s BRIS CRS UPT iV Sup 52 7 7 Le Step 15 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 commu nication paths BN H CRO UPUP Ts V Up Ll VC p ENT CRO SUPCR volp aoa LA aapa D ENT CRS UPCP Vvoup o1 VoCcp 3 i gt ENT CRO UPCP e4Voup 32 VoCp 3 9 BNT CROSUPUCP S VoU oA VIC D 3 5 ENT CRS UPCPS3VoUp o2Z pv Cp o 15 Step 16 Define the V5 2 protection groups ENT VeZPGerysZ2pg e 1 BNTHVOZPGs 25 20G 3 27 4 310 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 17 Define the V5 timeslot type EDSVSOLOLeVOCS 2 LoOrT ri Vot otYyYDE L LC ED VSTSA Vot S 2I ra VOESty pe CCe Step 18 For V5 2 protection define the cross connections between V5 2 pro tection groups and V
509. op 1 16 32 are used if the AP is located in the ONU the AIDs subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 are used 2 Within the range of 1 1024 a maximum number of 384 subscriber lines can be provisioned Figure 4 8 Functional diagram of DLL Logical DLL Each leased line link object may contain provisioning data for its associated E1 in entities terface which are administered through TL1 commands Up to 31 DLL bearer channels can be cross connected to one leased line link For leased line timeslots no provisioning data are necessary The leased line timeslots can be cross con nected to the physical subscriber bearer channels The association is done by set ting up up to three cross connections 2B 1D between the bearer channels and the leased line timeslots The three bearer channels have to be in the same leased line link The possible AlDs for DLL subscriber channels are shown in Table 4 10 page 4 89 4 60 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Services 4 5 3 3 3 N x64 kbps leased lines services according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Subdrop 1 1 1 subdrop 8 8 32 or 2 drop 1 1 1 drop 1 16 32 Ill 1 IIl 16 hdsl 1 hdsl 512 It 1 1 1024 eii cel eAed HDSL AP HDSL Application pack interface scriber data HDSL specific Physical sub data scriber data en lt 4 x E1 feeder LL link E1 data up to 4 sub Itoc 1
510. operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET ROCs At where AID roc l AID of the embedded remote op erations channel Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT ROC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 151 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a routing table entry Ee 3 4 60 Deleting a routing table entry Purpose This procedure is to instruct the NE to delete a routing entry from the AnyMedia Access System static routing table Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT ROUTE GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT ROUTE DESTINATION GATEWAY where DESTINA Destination internet protocol IP TION address The destination address is the network or host IP address reached via this route GATEWAY Gateway IP Address The gate way address is the IP address of the gateway through which pack ets are sent to the destination ad dress Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT
511. or IO_E1 pack protection supporting autonomous and manual protection switches Autonomous protection switches are performed in case of pack faults for an lO_E1 service pack in administrative primary service state IS actually serving us ers on the E1 feeders For a successful IO_E1 pack protection switch it is manda tory that the IO_E1 packs are installed in ascending order with no unequipped packs in between and that the pack in the protection slot IO_E1P is a FAC500B Additionally the E1 feeder impedance of IO_E1 packs to be protected must match with the protection pack Protection switching is not denied if one of these condi tions is not kept but an asynchronous report is sent for the IO_E1 packs to be pro tected This procedure automatically creates the IO_E1 pack port entities E1 feeder The protection permission is only applicable to O_E1 service packs and if not specified is set to allowed for the created pack entity The administrative pri mary service state is set to IS as default Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT IOE1 GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNT DOR LSS ALD za LOR TYP By ROP z3 PST where AID ioel 1 1 4 ioelp 1 AID of the lO_E1 ioel 1 1 4 E1 pack ioelp 1 E1 protection pack IORITYPE FAC500 type of the IO_E1 pack FAC500 IO_E1 pack PROTN ALW INH protection permission ALW allowed INH inhibited administrative primary service state Is in service
512. or a nailed up modem connection For accessing the system locally and remotely an Ethernet connection via the LAN connector in the shelf connection panel SCP can be used Telnet session TCP IP protocol In this case the PC has to be equipped with Eth ernet capability For accessing the system remotely a connection via a router and an ROC Telnet session via ROC remote operations channel provisioned within an E1 feeder can be used In this case the PC has to be equipped with Eth ernet capability Issue 7 December 2000 1 5 GSI software for narrowband services Connecting PC to CIU Local Connection Remote Connection E1 ROC within E1 Gsi2 ieeeecaa o Cert yy WR ANETT EES HA LAN Connector on SCP Ethernet ir E E E OR Oe og i LAN Connector on SCP Ethernet AnyMedia Mainshelf CIT port EIA 232C GSI EIA 232C Note The figure is intentionally kept simple It shows only how to connect to the OAM amp P interfaces It does not show the different components in network configurations For detailed network configuration examples see the Applications Plan ning and Ordering Guide 1 The ROC can be within a V5 x link or within a leased line interface 2 Instead of a GSI an AEM can be connected 3 Equipment dependent Figure 1 1 Possibilities to connect the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System CIU connection Table 1
513. or example COMPLD default lt Timeout Value Set the value in seconds for each command of the script to run Within this time period the string defined in String to match must be re ported Time Delay Set the value in seconds for a time delay be tween execution of commands Prompt On Failure When checked it prompts you when the script has failed Auto Clear When checked it automatically clears the win dow display The file will not be deleted The following commands buttons are to be used for controlling the execution of the script file Run Starts execution of the selected script file Pause Momentarily stops the running script file Single Step Executes a single step of the script file Stop Stops a running script End of steps gt NOTE Selecting a line with the left mouse button and clicking on the Run button starts execution at that line Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services 1 8 NE Operations 1 8 1 Overview system Working with TL1 commands NE Operations is the system activity for operations that control and configure the In the GSI actions concerning configuration management are performed in the fol lowing ways m By performing functions of the NE Operation menu options see Figure 1 40 on page 1 53 m By executing TL1 commands gt NOTE The actions performed by the two possibilities are different 1 8 2 NE Operation Menu NE Ope
514. or the HDSL interface are stored in the HDSL interface table There is one interface HDSL interface table per AnyMedia Access System The HDSL interface table contains an HDSL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL ports the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an HDSL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the HDSL interface id and the HDSL port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used When an HDSL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the HDSL interface timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The HDSL interface timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an HDSL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified HDSL interface id al ready exists or the specified HDSL port is already being used by another client Table LL services Data for the leased line service are stored in the leased line services table There is one leased line services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains a double key one is the line termination bearer channel id and the other is the leased line timeslot id Additionally it contains the service state When an entry in this table is created the TL1 command must contain the leased line ti
515. orage NVDS an autonomous message is sent to the GSI This is assumed to occur unless specifically inhibited therefore it is not stated explicitly in the procedure each time unless there is some rea son to emphasize it m The following equipment is readily at hand APCrunning the GSI software application One or two COMDACs CIU Oneor two lO_HDLC pack s if switched ISDN services have to be supported IO _ E1 packs Applications Packs APs ONU Subshelf with packs if necessary A customer generated engineering work order specifies the following infor mation Type and location of needed packs COMDAC software file name Source ID IP address lO E1 slot s Synchronization parameters if default not used How to connect the application pack cables to the MDF Used line impedance for the E1 feeders and for the clock cable In the user service manual 120 Q impedance is described for 75 Q the description applies accordingly A mix of 120 Q and 75 Q on one IO_E1 pack is not allowed 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 3 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Assumptions m The correct version of the COMDAC software to be downloaded is on the hard disk of the PC m Refered to the AnyMedia Mainshelf COMDAC simplex mode is covered as well as duplex mode gt NOTE The COMDAC generally comes with pre loaded software a software ver sion on the PC hard
516. ore al locates all HDSL timeslots of the specified HDSL interface No bearer channel ob jects are created for this subscriber because no individual bearer channels must be cross connected but instead the subscriber must be cross connected to an un structured leased line link The command is rejected if the specified HDSL interface does not exist is not in the administrative primary service state OOS the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL pack are exhausted the HDSL interface application mode does not support this service or the HDSL interface is used by another service The created un structured leased line subscriber indicates an External Condition Mismatch as secondary service state if the service is not supported by the actual connected NTU at customer premises Assumptions m Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned m HDSL interface has already been provisioned in unstructured point to point application mode Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT UVLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENTSUVGE ON Al Ds ss 2 hdsl ADShE tarsre FPDRSRE type TYPE txclLk TXCLK cts CTS dsr DSR lksad RESD i PSTI3 where ATD It 1 1024 AID of the line termination HDSL Hhdsl i 512 AID of the HDSL interface FDRSRC AP ELIOT feeder source AP Fl reserved for future use TOENI E1 feeder on IO _E1 pack 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2
517. ormation has the for mat P 1234567 H 123456789 S 123456789 C 0101010101 U 0 A 0 L 0101010101010101 Where P is the product identifier a 7 character string H is the hardware version a 9 character string S Is the software version a 9 character string C is the control line information 1 character for each of the10 control lines Each control line is one of 0 Off 1 On T Toggling U is the loop status information 1 character It is one of 0 NTU not looped L NTU looped by AnyMedia Access System F NTU looped by front panel but ton R NTU looped by remote NTU C NTU looped by loop control line A Is the anti streaming state in formation 1 character It is one of 0 Off 1 On L is the LEDs status information 1 character for each of the 16 LEDs Each LED is one of 0 Off 1 On Step 3 If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For de tailed information on the command and the error responses see the RTRV EXTEQPT section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 270 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Clock synchronization managm 4 10 Clock synchronization management Different Network synchronization is critical for error free services Synchronization prob synchronization lems will mani
518. ormed autonomously for updating the peripheral image of a pack with an image version stored in COMDAC because a pack with a different version is inserted gt NOTE The software download of peripheral packs is performed autonomously via COMDAC if the peripheral pack is provisioned Assumptions m There are no alarms in the AnyMedia Access System and the peripheral packs are working in the correct manner m In a mainshelf subshelf configuration the optical link s between the Opti cal Application Pack OAPs and the Optical Controller Pack for ONU OCPs is are correctly installed m The OAP s and the ONU Subshelf s must be provisioned gt NOTE The software download procedures are applicable for the OAP s in the AnyMedia Mainshelf and for OCP s in the ONU Subshelves Background The peripheral SW download procedures may be initiated by one of the following occurrences m After COMDAC SW update m Pack recovery after pack insertion or replacement m Link up for OCP in ONU Subshelf When one of the conditions applies the COMDAC checks the validity of periph eral images of loadable pack s When on either pack the peripheral image is in valid the peripheral pack SW download procedure is started autonomously It comprises two main parts m Peripheral pack SW installation is the procedure of copying the peripheral SW image from the COMDAC s nonvolatile memory to that of the peripheral pack The peripheral pack is kept r
519. ose This procedure is to delete one V5 ISDN PRA subscriber entity The entity must not be assigned to a V5 user port Its administrative primary service state must be OOS without any secondary service state Additionally the used HDSL interface must be in administrative primary service state OOS The allocated HDSL timeslots and the D64 HDLC termination are released Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT PRALN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT PRALN AID where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT PRALN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 123 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V3 ISDN PRA line ae 3 4 32 Deleting a V3 ISDN PRA line Purpose This procedure is to delete a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber entity according ETS 300 233 ITU G 962 The V3 ISDN PRA subscriber must be in administrative pri mary service state OOS without any secondary service state and must not be cross connected to a V3 link Additionally the used HDSL interface must be in ad ministrative primary service state OOS All HDSL timeslots
520. oss connected already Assumptions V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS V3L AID1 AID2 where AID1 eS fal O24 AID of the line termination AID2 v3l1 1 16 AID of the V3 link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS V3L sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 212 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving V3 ISDN PRA line in serv a SeSe 4 6 50 Moving a V3 ISDN PRA line in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber line to IS Assumptions The corresponding line termination is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V3LN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VSEN SI ALD Iss PST where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination PST a Jo administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For
521. ostatic discharge considerations 8 Relevant safety instructions WARNING Risk of injury due to untrained personnel Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this document These procedures allow exposure to high electrical energy and or current that may result in electric shock and or injury to untrained personnel during servicing maintenance and installation of this system Do not allow non service person nel to access electrical wiring Read and understand all instructions and warning labels Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the manu als DANGER Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation AnyMedia Access System systems operate with invisible laser radiation Laser radiation can cause considerable injuries to the eyes Never look into the end of an exposed fibre or pack optical connectors as long as the optical source is switched on This applies particularly to the connections of the optical packs of the WaveStar ADM 4 1 to the OAP in the AnyMedia Main shelf to the OCP in the ONU Subshelf and to the optical link between them Always observe the laser warning instructions DANGER Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug or the power filter unit PFU AN Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes Ensure that the DC circuit breaker on the fuse panel is in the OFF position be fore removing or inserting the power supply plug o
522. ot the case the services and the IO_E1 packs must be rear ranged Step 2 Insert the IO_E1 protection pack by following the procedure Adding IO_E1 pack protection see Chapter 2 3 16 page 2 39 Step 3 Create the IO_E1 pack entity by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 4 Verify that the protection permission for all IO_E1 service packs which shall be protected is set to ALW protection switching allowed by entering RTRV IOE1 If it is inhibited INH change it to ALW by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 63 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth to ONU configuration Le 3 3 10 Growth from a configuration without ONU to a configuration with ONU Procedure Step 1 Install an OAP by following the procedure OAP installation see Chapter 2 3 21 page 2 53 Step 2 Connect the optical link to the OAP by following the procedure Con necting the optical link to the OAP see Chapter 2 3 22 page 2 55 Step 3 Provision the ONU Subshelf by following the procedure Provisioning of the ONU Subshelf see Chapter 2 3 23 page 2 56 End of steps 3 64 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth to NTU configuration 3 3 11 Growth to a configuration with managed NTU Procedure Step 1 Verify the values in the NTU default profile by entering RTRV NTU DFLT and correct them if t
523. ovisioning an ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 1 interface Purpose This example is to create a remote operations channel ROC carried oversemi permanent leased line via V5 1 interface with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 4 on E1 plug in 2 link 7 communication channel 1 timeslot 1 and 16 communication path 1 and 2 user port 25 IP address 192 168 0 1 submask IP address 255 255 255 252 remote IP address 192 168 0 2 and the parameters for the default route destination IP address 0 0 0 0 submask IP address 0 0 0 0 gateway IP address 192 168 0 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier and the layer 3 addresses must be identi cal to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 layer 3 address 1000 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface BNISVOLI VOL S 252 Volt ype vol y voLlEe1d 07 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack BNL LOnLe Soe L Sta 2 Step 3 Define the V5 link ENT Vo berv odl i arrels l as Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface ENT CRO LI VoL aN O Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel ENT SHV5CCes7oCea3 14 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type EDH VoLS IV LS m LO na Vo LSC YDER 4 326 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 co
524. p 10 Define the application pack by entering ENT AP see Chapter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 11 Define the ISDN line by entering ENT ILN see Chapter 4 6 14 page 4 162 Step 12 Define the user port by entering ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 13 Define the cross connection between user port and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS UPI see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Step 14 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 2 commu nication paths by entering ENT CRS UPCP see Chapter 4 6 18 page 4 169 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 127 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 15 For a multilink V5 2 interface Define the V5 2 protection group by entering ENT V52PG see Chapter 4 6 26 page 4 179 Step 16 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 2 timeslot by entering ENT CRS PGTS see Chapter 4 6 27 page 4 180 Step 17 For V5 2 protection define the cross connection between V5 2 pro tection group and V5 communication channel by entering ENT CRS PGCC see Chapter 4 6 28 page 4 182 Step 18 Move the ISDN line in service by entering ED ILN see Chapter 4 6 21 page 4 174 Step 19 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 20 Move the V5 2 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 128 lIssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 C
525. p 2 Delete the cross connection between UGLLN subscriber and V3 link by entering DLT CRS ULLL see Chapter 3 4 48 page 3 140 Step 3 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 4 Delete the specified UGLLN subscriber entity by entering DLT UGLLN Chapter 3 4 54 page 3 146 Step 5 Optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 6 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 7 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 8 Optionally perform the unstructured leased line link degrowth proce dure see Chapter 3 3 14 7 page 3 87 End of steps 3 76 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ROC degrowth 3 3 13 Remote operations channel ROC degrowth 3 3 13 1 Degrowth of a ROC carried over leased line interface Purpose To delete a leased line link ROC connection Procedure Step 1 Move the ROC out of service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 3 4 20 page 3 112 Step 2 Instruct the NE to delete the routing entry using the ROC within the AnyMedia Access System static
526. p 3 Define the V5 link BND Vo lno Volele eae a2 ae Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface ENL CRS Lbe toll vos Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel ENT SCs 7 oCCc o 17 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type ED VOTOt vores Le Los te Vor etype cG 4 294 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples a Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot PNT CRS CClS v5oce 3 gt Lj votsal 16 gt Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths ENTH V5OCP is voCo 3 L2o 2 VoD ype Otr BNI VOCPs tv 9C0 3 Z2t ODL Yype pst Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel ENT GCRS CPCC V2C0 3 17 VoCC 3 L BEN T CRS CPCG rv C S 2 7 56C s 1 Step 10 Define the application packs ENTAR Sopa lalod shbPPLou ENTSAP 2 ap l 145 72LPPLo0 Step 11 Define the POTS lines ENT PLN 1t 42 drop drop 1 13 1 ppm y ENI PLN s sLt 43 5421drop drop 1 13 2 0pm y ENT PLN 1t 44 drop drop 1 14 1 ppm y Step 12 Define the POTS user ports ENT VSUP v5up 22 ltype PLN lt 1t 42 v5l3addr 1000 ENI VSUP 3VOUD 23 ti LC ype PLN le li 43 vol3addr 1001 ENT V5UP v5up 24 ltype PLN lt 1t 44 v5sl3addr 1002 Step 13 Define the cross connections between user ports and V5 1 inter face ENI CRS UPI Sv
527. p 5 Insert the Application pack AP into the AP slot specified in the en gineering work order With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indenta tion on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place Step 6 Attach the faceplate connector Raise the slider until the entire slot is visible IMPORTANT Disconnection of faceplate connector Do not press down on the rounded indentation on the top of the slider Pressing down on the rounded indentation on the top of the slider causes the faceplate connector to disconnect This action affects customer service 2 44 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Application pack installation a Step 7 Align the top of the faceplate connector with the top of the slot Press the faceplate connector firmly until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up the Fault LED on the AP lights for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during AP self initialization Self initialization lasts no more than one minute IF THEN the FAULT LED lights and flashes as go to Step 8 described the FAULT LED lights permanently check for one of the following faults
528. p 9 the IO_E1 is correctly provisioned Step 8 Create the IO_E1 pack entity by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 3 44 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Service node interfaces growth ee Step 9 IF THEN the object to grow is a V5 1 interface go to Step 1 of the V5 1 growth proce dure on page 3 46 the object to grow is a V5 2 interface go to Step 1 of the V5 2 growth proce dure on page 3 50 the object to grow is a V3 interface go to Step 1 of the V3 growth proce dure on page 3 52 the aim is to grow the number of LLL go to Step 1 of the LLL growth proce dure on page 3 53 the aim is to grow the number of ULLL go to Step 1 of the ULLL growth pro cedure on page 3 54 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 45 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 1 growth ese ee 3 3 6 1 V5 1 growth Procedure Step 1 Verify the provisioning information of the V5 1 interface specified by the engineering work order by entering the command RTRV V5I IF THEN the RTRV V5I command reports that use the ENT V5I command to enter the the V5 interface is not provisioned provisioning information go to Step 2 the RTRV V5I command reports that go to Step 4 the V5 interface is provisioned with the correct provisioning information the RT RV V5I command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify
529. p up window opens is Communication Settings Op x Options l Hulti NE Mode I Single NE Mode PPP l Single NE Mode Shelf IP Address Modem fi 23 248 223 212 F Keep Alive Figure 2 3 Communication Settings window Baud Rate 19700 57600 38400 1152700 Step 13 Under Baud Rate select 19200 2 10 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection gt NOTE The COMDAC reads the communications rate from the PC and matches it if possible autobaud detection If for some reason the chosen baud rate fails select another rate and try again The only time the maximum commu nications rate 115200 is useful is for software download Step 14 Select your system Options Single NE Mode means Connection of the GSI PC to only one system via the EIA 232C serial link Single NE Mode PPP means Connection of the GSI PC to only one system via the EIA 232C serial link using the Point to Point Protocol PPP Multiple NE Mode means Connection of the GSI PC to a multiple systems ring configu ration via the EIA 232C serial link For this mode you must enter the shelf IP address Step 15 Check the Keep Alive check box if you want to prevent the GSI from being logged out by the system in case of inactivity Step 16 Check Modem if you want to connect to the system via a dial up modem con
530. parameters INAWdINOA SMOVd 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Table V5 ISDN Data for the V5 ISDN PRA subscriber are stored in the V5 ISDN PRA subscriber PRA subscriber table There is one V5 ISDN PRA subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line termination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL interface and the allocated HDSL timeslots the administrative service state primary and secondary the provisioning data and a reference to the user port which is supported if any is supported When a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termination id the HDSL interface and the number of HDSL timeslots excluding timeslot 16 If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provi sioning data and service state OOS are used The user port id is read only at this layer The user port id is entered by the operator when a V5 user port related to this line termination is created This way allows the operator to find the relation ship to the upper layer The same method is used at the equipment layer If a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber is created its own access identifier is entered internally in the HDSL timeslot table Line termination bearer channels are created according to the number of allocated HDSL timeslots Restrictions for the The creation of a V5 ISDN PRA subs
531. peeds 1 2K through 19 2K are valid For X 21 NTUs all speeds are valid CLKMODE ASYNC SYNC data clocking mode sets whether the NTU is operating in synchro nous or asynchronous mode This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs ASYNC asynchronous SYNC synchronous DATABITS ACOPIO number of data bits The charac ter lengh does not include the start and stop bit This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous V14MODE BASIC EXTENDED This parameter sets whether the NTU is operating in V 14 basic or extended mode This parameter is only valid for V 24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous 4 222 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a managed NTU ee RISZCTS 411M5 I2BITS request to send to clear to send delay sets the delay inserted be tween the time that the sub scriber equipment raises RTS and the NTU responds with CTS 11MS 11 1ms delay from RTS to CTS 12BITS 12 bit delay from RTS toCTS RTS OFF ON STD request to send sets the mode of the control line for X 21 NTUs or RTS line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs OFF control signal is always off ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard RLSD ON STD receive line signal detection sets the mode of the indication line for X 21 NTUs or RLSD line for V 35 and V 24 NTUs ON control signal
532. point to multipoint mode 5 115 5 18 Definition table headings 5 120 XIV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Tables 5 19 COMDAC alarms 5 123 5 20 IO _E1 P pack alarms 5 124 5 21 Feeder E1 signal alarms 5 132 5 22 V5 interface alarms 5 135 5 23 Remote operation channel ROC alarms 5 139 5 24 1O HDLC pack alarms 5 141 5 25 Application pack alarms 5 146 5 26 U interface alarms 5 151 5 27 Managed NTU alarms 5 153 5 28 HDSL interface alarms 5 155 5 29 CIU alarms 5 158 5 30 System synchronization alarms 5 159 5 31 System data memory and software program integrity alarms 5 161 5 32 Sample miscellaneous alarms recommended for locally AC powered rack 5 163 5 33 Externally noticed fault conditions and customer complaints 5 165 5 34 ONU Subshelf alarms 5 166 5 35 Sample miscellaneous alarms for Optical Network Unit ONU 5 167 ME SS 6 Performance management for narrowband services 6 1 6 1 Performance monitoring event reports 6 3 6 2 Possible threshold crossing condition types 6 9 6 3 Possible values of the threshold level depending on the other parameters 6 12 6 4 Supported measurements depending on the pack type 6 16 ME SS 7 Security management for narrowband services 7 1 7 1 Security parameters 7 2 7 2 Security classes 7 3 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XV arr Tables 8 Power node preventive maintenance 8 1 8 1 Required maintenance intervals 8 1 8 2 Suggested maintenance routines additionally 8 2
533. provisioned and is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5I GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VS LCE ALD 3 acs P oe where AID v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface PST iS administrative primary service state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V5I section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 178 lIssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a protection group a 4 6 26 Provisioning a V5 2 protection group Purpose This procedure is to create a protection group 1 or 2 for a V5 2 interface Protec tion group 2 can only be created if protection group 1 already exists At creation of protection group 1 the protection communication path is automatically created and cross connected to protection group 1 Assumptions V5 2 interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V52PG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT Vo2ZPG AID where AID v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the c
534. pter 4 7 5 page 4 239 the creation or deletion of a cross connec tion in a provisioning variant is only allowed in state PVO NOT_READY Creation checks At the creation no additional checks against any other provisioning variant are performed This is not necessary because the already defined checks concerning the existence of both related objects within the current system dataset and the in tegrity checks in the context of the provisioning variant are sufficient Example A CRS BCTS cross connection is only allowed if both objects exist in the current system dataset and the related CRS UPI cross connection exists within the provi sioning variant context Deletion checks At deletion of a cross connection in a provisioning variant no additional checks against the current system dataset or any other provisioning variant are per formed This is not necessary because the already defined checks for the current system dataset but now within the provisioning variant context are sufficient Ex ample A CRS UPI cross connection must not be deleted if stilla CRS BCTS cross connection exists Allocation checks At the transition to the provisioning variant state PV1 READY additionally the al location is checked The allocation checks which are performed are the same as the already defined checks for the current system dataset The related objects must not be cross connected already in the current system dataset or in another provisioning variant in st
535. r 2 3 18 Application pack installation gt NOTE Common units and APs are keyed differently It is not possible to plug an AP into a common unit slot and vice versa End of steps Next procedure GSI connection at the RMC and logging on see Chapter 2 4 5 2 62 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures GSI connection at the RMC SEF _ ee 2 4 5 GSI connection at the RMC and logging on Purpose Provide the connection between the local GSI and the Optical Controller Pack for ONU OCP Assumption m The Remote Maintenance Connection RMC interface includes an EIA 232C connector on the faceplate of the OCP For GSI operations the optical link has to be operational Background Functionally the RMC is a remote CIT interface of the AnyMedia Mainshelf see chapter 1 which enables the maintenance personnel to connect to the COMDAC in the AnyMedia Mainshelf The RMC interface supports the proprietary GSI pro tocol over EIA 232 The RMC interface has TL1 functionality reduced to the initial provisioning and maintenance functions which will usually be performed locally at the ONU Neither autonomous reports will be provided at this interface nor a software download and database backup and restore is possible The RMC interface indicates an error information to the operator if no operational link to the AnyMedia Mainshelf exists Procedure Step 1 When self initialization is complete and the OCP i
536. r 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples 4 12 8 Example for provisioning a digital LL interface Purpose This example is to create a digital leased lines service with a traffic capacity of two B channels and one D channel with the following parameters E1 feeder 4 on lO_E1 2 link 6 application pack 15 port 1 line termination 60 bearer channel 1 2 and 3 timeslot 5 6 and 7 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack ENTSITOR Ls oe l 152 Step 2 Define the LL link ENT bhi LLL 6s el el 1 2 4 5 Step 3 Define the application pack BNISAP rap l bot Pr PUlL iz or BNI AP tt ep 1 L5 4 LPUSs0 Step 4 Define the digital leased line subscriber ENT DGELN2tLo 60 se drop drop 1 15 1 gt Step 5 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot ENT CRo hh oes toe 60 1 LITS G BNI H CRS EETS tLe be 60 2 LITS 00 ENT CRS CLIS 2 obCe 60 3 1 1ts o 75 Step 6 Move the digital leased line subscriber in service ED DELCN 26 Oe eS Step 7 Move the LL link in service BDH bbb tab Wb 6 sis EO End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 315 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples rr TF ee 4 12 9 Example for provisioning a VLL interface Purpose This example is to create a VLL interface with the following parameters E1 feeder 3 on IO_E1 4 link 6 appli
537. r 4 6 20 page 4 173 Step 18 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 19 Move the V5 2 interface in service by entering ED V5l see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 4 126 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning Le 4 5 7 1 4 V5 2 ISDN BRA service Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 2 ISDN BRA service Assumption The system is configured to support switched ISDN services Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Define the V5 communication channel by entering ENT V5CC see Chapter 4 6 4 page 4 145 Step 6 Define the V5 timeslot type by entering ED V5TS see Chapter 4 6 5 page 4 147 Step 7 Define the cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot by entering ENT CRS CCTS see Chapter 4 6 6 page 4 148 Step 8 Define the V5 communication paths by entering ENT V5CP see Chapter 4 6 7 page 4 149 Step 9 Define the cross connection between communication paths and communication channel by entering ENT CRS CPCC see Chapter 4 6 8 page 4 150 Ste
538. r ID and password pairs are the defaults to which the system returns if the nonvolatile data storage NVDS is cleared User ID Password LUCENT0O1 UI PSWD 01 LUCENT02 UI PSWD 02 gt NOTE If a change of user ID or password is desired see the Security manage ment for narrowband services procedures Chapter 7 1 20 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating Step 17 If you select LAN you will have the following display s Communications LUCENTO1 Enter an IP address in the input field or select one from the selec tion list The addresses in the selection list are the same that appear in the address book H Address Book P Address NE Name Location To select an item from the address book mark the desired IP address and press OK or double click on the IP ad dress To remove an item mark the IP address to be removed and press the DEL key on the keyboard Click Edit to change the selected item click New IP Address to enter a new entry in the address book a Address Book To accept a new entry or changes press OK otherwise press Cancel 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 21 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating E SeSe Step 18 Click on Connect in the Communications window System Response After the connection is established the Connec tion Window closes If the TL1SI View is opened the follow
539. r all subscribers served by this interface Step 2 Delete the cross connection between V5 2 protection group 1 and standby timeslot by entering DLT CRS PGTS see Chapter 3 4 43 page 3 135 Step 3 Delete the cross connection between V5 2 protection group 1 and V5 communication channel by entering DLT CRS PGCC see Chapter 3 4 44 page 3 136 Step 4 Delete the protection group 1 by entering DLT V52PG see Chapter 3 4 45 page 3 137 Step 5 Delete the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering DLT CRS LI see Chapter 3 4 40 page 3 132 Step 6 Delete the V5 link by entering DLT V5L see Chapter 3 4 41 page 3 133 Step 7 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used optionally move the impli cated IO_E1 out of service by entering ED IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 21 page 3 113 delete the IO_E1 pack entity by enter ing DLT IOE1 see Chapter 3 4 35 page 3 127 and remove the lO_E1 Step 8 Move the V5 x interface in service by entering ED V5I see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 End of steps 3 82 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 x degrowth interface I 3 3 14 4 V5 x degrowth interface Purpose To delete service of a specified V5 1 or V5 2 interface including optionally the related user ports subscriber lines and application pack Assumption In the case of V5 2 this procedure only applies if the V5 2 interface has a single link For the degrowth of a V5
540. r are automatically deleted by the system and the allocated HDSL timeslots are released Assumptions The leased line subscriber and the used HDSL interface are in administrative pri mary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT GLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT GLLN AID where ALD 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT GLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 144 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a UVLL subscriber ee 3 4 53 Deleting a UVLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to delete one unstructured leased line subscriber entity accord ing V 35 V 36 or X 21 UVLL The subscriber must be in administrative primary service state OOS without any secondary service state and must not be cross connected to an unstructured leased line link Additionally the used HDSL inter face must be in administrative primary service state OOS The allocated HDSL timeslots are released Assumptions The leased line subscriber and the used HDSL interface are in administrative pri mary service s
541. r degrowth ee eee 1 ee 3 3 12 9 UVLL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified UVLLN subscriber out of service by entering ED UVLLN see Chapter 3 4 15 page 3 107 Step 2 Delete the cross connection between UVLLN subscriber and V3 link by entering DLT CRS ULLL see Chapter 3 4 48 page 3 140 Step 3 Move the specified HDSL interface entity out of service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 3 4 6 page 3 98 Step 4 Delete the specified UVLLN subscriber entity by entering DLT UVLLN Chapter 3 4 53 page 3 145 Step 5 Optionally delete the specified HDSL interface entity by entering DLT HDSL see Chapter 3 4 33 page 3 125 Step 6 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 7 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP Step 8 Optionally perform the unstructured leased line link degrowth proce dure see Chapter 3 3 14 7 page 3 87 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 75 System modification growth degrowth for NB services UVLL subscriber degrowth ese ee 3 3 12 10 UGLL subscriber degrowth Procedure Step 1 Move the specified UGLLN subscriber out of service by entering ED UGLLN see Chapter 3 4 16 page 3 108 Ste
542. r end of an HDSL transmission sys tem GLL subscribers are described here the description of VLL subscribers can be found in Chapter 4 5 5 7 page 4 93 GLL services are provided by connecting a number of bearer channels supplied by a GLL entity with the same number of timeslots of an E1 feeder located on an lO_E1 The GLL is provisioned on top of an HDSL logical interface The GLL ser vice can be located in the AnyMedia Mainshelf as well as in the ONU Subshelf There are no differences concerning provisioning aspects The E1 feeder has to be provisioned to be used for permanent leased lines purposes The association of a GLL subscriber with a leased line interface is made on the service assign ments layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 The HDSL logical interface can operate in several modes which have to be provi sioned at the TL1 interface GLL service depends on these modes Therefore knowledge of these HDSL specifics is required for understanding of GLL sub scriber provisioning The possible services on top of an HDSL logical interface de pendent on the provisioned application mode are shown in Table 4 9 page 4 75 A GLL subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the lines layer on top of an HDSL logical interface The HDSL logical interface allo cates up to two HDSL ports of the equipment layer located on an HDSL applica tion pack It is possible to pre provision all entities in the database without having real hardware
543. r is created automatically by the system Assumptions Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT ALLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command PNI ALUN AID rarop DROP r tg IG IEF RGIS Pst where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination DROP Crop l alo pat leo 2 yy SUbarOp te so ha Tilo pag 1s See AID of the physical drop TG tio t 8 transmit gain in decibels relative to the digital reference point in steps of 0 5 RG 12 to 3 receive gain in decibels relative to the digital reference point in steps of 0 5 administrative primary service state Is in service OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ALLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 187 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a digital leased line Le 4 6 32 Provisioning a digital leased line Purpose This procedure is to create a digital leased line subscriber entity with its default or operator specified provisioning data It specifies a physical port of an application pac
544. r power filter unit CAUTION Risk of injury if only one 48 V DC power feeder is disconnected The AnyMedia shelf maybe equipped with two 48 V DC input power feeders Disconnecting one power feeder will not de energize the AnyMedia shelf Disconnect both power supply cables when removing power from the AnyMedia shelf XXX Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document General safety information a T IMPORTANT Destruction of packs in the event of a short circuit A short circuit in the AnyMedia Access System can cause destruction of elec tronic components and thus malfunctioning of the complete system You must therefore not handle objects such as a screwdriver in the pack area Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or cause a short circuit IMPORTANT Destruction of components by incorrect handling Before replacing a pack check the identification code to ensure that the proper pack is being used CAUTION Destruction of LEDs by improper handling of packs Take care to avoid damaging the LED s that protrude through the openings in the faceplate of the packs during handling and pack installation When installing a pack place your thumbs on the rounded indentations of the latch to lock the pack in position Do not use your palm because your hand may slip and break LEDs that protrude through the openings of the faceplate 9 Electrostatic discharge
545. r service optionally exe cute the V5 x interface degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 4 page 3 83 End of steps 3 78 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Service node interfaces degrowth a 3 3 14 Service node interfaces degrowth 3 3 14 1 V5 2 degrowth link without communication channel s Purpose E1 feeder bandwidth degrowth of a specified V5 2 interface Assumption Only V5 links are to be deleted which are not primary or secondary link and do not carry any communication channel For the deletion of V5 links carrying com munication channels see Chapter 3 3 14 2 page 3 80 for the deletion of a pri mary link see Chapter 3 3 14 4 page 3 83 for the deletion of a secondary link see Chapter 3 3 14 3 page 3 82 Procedure Step 1 Move the V5 2 link out of service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 3 4 5 page 3 96 gt NOTE This will increase the concentration ratio Step 2 Wait until the link is shut down service state has changed from OOS SHD to OOS Alternatively move the V5 2 link out of service with the mode FRCD gt NOTE Moving the V5 2 link out of service with the mode FRCD is service affect ing Step 3 Delete the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering DLT CRS LI see Chapter 3 4 40 page 3 132 Step 4 Delete the V5 link by entering DLT V5L see Chapter 3 4 41 page 3 133 Step 5 If no other feeder of the IO_E1 is used opt
546. rameter FRCD or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW LORROIN HOPT 3 cCore 1 2E RCD System Response The standby COMDAC currently the formerly active COMDAC starts up System Response The report event messages on the screen are comdac side switch forced set data memory update in progress data memory update completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete Step 15 Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message SW OWKG BOP TT core 2 2 2RERoR Ty System Response The report event message on the screen is comdec side switch forced reser Step 16 Disable the protection switching of the standby COMDAC currently the formerly active COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter INHIBIT or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 INHIBIT System Response The report event message on the screen is GOMDAC Side Switch anhibited 4 10 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl a Step 17 Remove the new pre loaded COMDAC System Response The report event message on the screen is pack Missing or power fault Step 18 Enable the protection switching of the COMDAC Follow the SW TOWKG EQPT GSI operation with parameter RESET or at the prompt enter the following TL1
547. rations menu option 363 211 112 Figure 1 40 NE Operation Menu iE Provisioning Fault Connect Disconnect Database Backup SW Download Restore Program Copy Reboot Initialize System Boot Download Protection Switch System Log Security V5 Retrieve LL Retrieve Via the Configuration menu option the following actions can be performed Connect The NE Operations Connect menu option is used to set up communica tion to the AnyMedia Access System see Chapter 1 3 5 page 1 16 m Disconnect The NE Operations Disconnect menu option is used to terminate com munication to the AnyMedia Access System see Chapter 1 3 6 page 1 22 Issue 7 December 2000 1 53 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands a m Database The NE Operations Database Backup menu performs a backup which transfers the current database from the system to the GSI PC The NE Operations Database Restore menu performs a restore which transfers a backed up database from the GSI PC to the system The NE Operations Database Reboot menu performs a reboot of the sys tem Data only SW Download The NE Operations SW Download Download menu performs a software download from the GSI PC to an already loaded system The NE Operations SW Download Activate menu activate the software Data only The NE Operations SW Download Reboot menu performs a reboot of the system Da
548. re of a POTS service 363 211 112 A POTS subscriber can be connected to the network via a V5 1 or V5 2 interface In the case of V5 1 it is associated with a specific 64 kbps timeslot of a V5 1 inter face In the case of V5 2 it is associated with a V5 2 interface where the current 64 kbps timeslot is selected on a per call basis The association of a POTS sub scriber to a V5 x interface is made on the service assignment layer Figure 4 2 page 4 52 A concentration of POTS subscribers is only possible in the case of V5 2 A POTS subscriber of the AnyMedia Access System must be provisioned on the lines layer to a Z port of the equipment layer located on an application pack capa ble of supporting POTS It is possible to pre provision all entities to the database without having real hardware equipped at that moment Nevertheless the provi sioning of a POTS subscriber on an application pack is only possible if the appli cation pack with its type was provisioned before and supplies its Z ports for ser vice Therefore it is possible to check at provisioning time of any subscriber whether the related pre provisioned application pack from the lower layer is capa ble of serving the subscriber For example the provisioning of a 25th subscriber on a 24 Z port AP is rejected at provisioning time Furthermore the compatibility of the requested subscriber type and the application pack can be checked For ex ample the provisioning of a POTS subscriber on
549. rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS PGCC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 136 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a protection group a 3 4 45 Deleting a V5 2 protection group Purpose This procedure is to delete a protection group of a V5 2 interface The protection group must not be cross connected to a communication channel or a timeslot Protection group 2 must be deleted before protection group 1 On deletion of protection group 1 the protection communication path is automatically deleted Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V52PG GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT V52PG AID where AID v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V52PG section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 137 System modification growth degrowth for NB servi
550. rface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS LI section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 132 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V5 link ee 3 4 41 Deleting a V5 link Purpose This procedure is to delete a V5 link entity The link must not be cross connected to any interface All 31 V5 timeslots of this link are automatically deleted Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DETaV ole IAID where AID v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or
551. rface for example V5 user ports are re associated to other ISDN communication paths The related objects in the current system dataset are marked PV1 allocated which means that they are now part of a provisioning variant in state PV1 This PV1 allocated information is needed to support additional checks which must be performed to ensure the integrity of a provisioning variant in state PV1 At the 4th step the actual switch over is performed The object associations de fined in the provisioning variant are activated and added to the current interface dataset The associations of the old current interface dataset are still available as standby provisioning variant for switch back purposes Purpose The following procedure is an example for extending the dataset of a V5 interface Procedure Step 1 Define a new V5 provisioning variant by entering ENT V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 1 page 4 253 Step 2 Fill the new V5 provisioning variant with a copy of the current that is ACTIVE provisioning variant dataset or of a standby provisioning variant by entering CPY V5PVAR see Chapter 4 8 3 page 4 256 Step 3 Extend the new V5 provisioning variant with new associations to ex isting or new objects by following the Growth degrowth procedures using the AID of the V5 provisioning variant specified in step 1 see Chapter 3 3 page 3 11 Step 4 Set the provisioning variant state to READY to check the new V5 provisioning variant against th
552. rface for V3 service is to be created the TL1 command must contain the HDSL interface id the HDSL port and the application mode V3 point to point If no service state is contained in the command the service state OOS is used When an HDSL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the HDSL interface timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The HDSL interface timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an HDSL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified HDSL interface id al ready exists or the specified HDSL port is already being used by another client Table V3 services Data for the V3 service are stored in the V3 services table There is one V3 ser vices table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a double key one is the V3 subscriber id and the other is the V3 link id When an entry in this table is created the TL1 command must contain the V3 subscriber id and V3 link id If the command is given and accepted the AnyMedia Access System cross connects autonomously all 32 timeslots of the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber to the 32 timeslots of the V3 link The timeslot number of the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and of the V3 link is the same 1 1 mapping The TL1 command to create the V3 service is re jected if either the V3 subscriber entry or the V3 link entry does not exist or are al ready us
553. rface unit COMDAC both COMDACs shelf E1 pack allE1 packs E1 protection pack lO_HDLC pack Issue 7 December 2000 4 263 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving equipment ee iohdlc _ both lO HDLC packs i aL L subap subshelf application pack PERDIS fo subap all application packs in one sub 1 8 shelf all subap all application packs in all sub all shelves subcp subshelf OCP 1 8 1 subcp all subshelf OCPs all subsh subshelf ios subsh all subshelves all Step 2 If the command request completes successfully the following nor mal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID TYPE APP ICC ECI CLEI SLN PVRSN PCDE PST SST 7 where AID ap 1 1 16 ciu l comdeqc l il 7 5 sn il Lroel l 4 14 Oelp L OMG Les b Zoho sapan T F imoa SubGcp Lao FAL subsh 1 8 AID of the equipment for which equipage information is reported TYPE LSErINg gt consisting of 11 characters Pack type This is the mnemonic name that identifies the general type of function provided For ex ample the IO_E1 pack type is IOE1 and CIU pack type is CIU 4 264 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving equipment ee APP LOCEN consisting of 6 to 8 characters Apparatus code The APP uniquely identifies the specific function provided by the pack Packs with different
554. ribed in Chapter 1 7 3 page 1 45 Step 5 Click on Add to Script System Response The TL1 command is added to the script file Step 6 Select and define the next command you want to add to the script file Step 7 To save the defined script file click on Save as Step 8 To close the GSI Script Facility window either click on Command Mode in the TL1 command window or close the GSI Script Facility window by clicking on the X symbol in the top right corner End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 51 GSI software for narrowband services 1 7 7 Purpose Working with TL1 commands gt NOTE After selecting the command attribute AID the TL1 command is added to the script automatically Running Script Files Procedure Step 1 1 52 Step 2 To execute a predefined script file containing TL1 commands From the menu bar select File Scripting Run System Response You are prompted for a file name Enter the desired file name for example tl1 txt System Response If a file with extension scr is selected the GSI Script Facility window for macros opens Figure 1 37 page 1 48 System Response If a file with extension txt is selected the GSI Script Facility window for text opens Figure 1 39 page 1 51 In this window the following attributes can be set for running the script file String to match Enter a string which is expected to be reported for successful command execution f
555. ring DLT CRS BCTS see Chapter 3 4 25 page 3 117 Step 4 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 user port entity and V5 interface entity by entering DLT CRS UPI see Chapter 3 4 27 page 3 119 Step 5 Delete the specified V5 user port entity by entering DLT V5UP see Chapter 3 4 28 page 3 120 Step 6 Delete the specified POTS subscriber entity by entering DLT PLN see Chapter 3 4 29 page 3 121 gt NOTE The bearer channel object of the POTS subscriber is automatically deleted by the system Step 7 If no other drop of the application pack is being used optionally move the specified application pack entity out of service by entering ED AP see Chapter 3 4 23 page 3 115 and delete the specified ap plication pack entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 8 When the application pack entity is deleted optionally remove the implicated AP End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 67 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ISDN BRA subscriber degrowth ee 3 3 12 2 ISDN BRA subscriber degrowth Purpose This procedure is to remove a single ISDN BRA subscriber Procedure Step 1 Move the specified ISDN BRA line out of service by entering ED ILN see Chapter 3 4 8 page 3 100 Step 2 IF THEN the subscriber is connected toa V5 1 go to Step 3 interface the subscriber is connected toa V5 2 go to Step 4 interface Step 3 Delete all cross connections between V5 lin
556. rk at different times The equality of these both standby provisioning datasets is in the responsibility of the overall network management The activation of a standby provisioning dataset can be initiated on demand either at the local exchange or the access network and is then performed via the V5 message proto col between the two nodes Both involved systems check the existence but not the equality of the provisioning dataset to be switched to block all associated user ports of the V5 interface then switch over to the new provisioning dataset and un block all user ports again In this way a change from one provisioning dataset to another can be accomplished with a minimum of downtime of existing services The re provisioning capability should not be used for incremental changes of sin gle user ports or single V5 links Incremental changes on the active dataset with single TL1 commands is still available and should be used because these actions do not disturb existing service of the interface The main reason to use re provi sioning instead of incremental changes is the need to change a huge amount of provisioning data at a dedicated time for example at disaster recovery or reorga nization of the network 4 7 2 V5 protocol Basic This section describes the re provisioning from the protocol point of view The ba re provisioning sic procedure of a switch over to a new variant initiated in the AN is procedure m optionally verifying that the
557. rmat which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 47 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Establishing the ROC interface ee Step 3 IF THEN the remote operations channel is to go to Step 4 be cross connected to a leased line interface the remote operations channel is to create a V5 user port entity of type be cross connected to a V5 interface single channel SPLL see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Growa V5 x interface by following Service node interfaces growth Chapter 3 3 6 page 3 43 Create a cross connection between the V5 user port and the V5 x interface see Chapter 4 6 17 page 4 168 Then go to Step 8 Step 4 Provision a permanent leased line link Follow the ENT LLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT LLL AID el EK1 nesd NESD crc4 CRC4 piteso EP Bol Pot iis where AID 111 1 16 AID of the leased line link El el 1 1 4 1 4 The V5 physical feeder to be used NESD tei 4 near end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 LBER 10 4 LBER 104 2 48 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Establishing the ROC interface Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 CRC4 N do not check CRC4 Y check CRC4 FESD CCS ree far end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 10
558. routing table by entering DLT ROUTE see Chapter 3 4 60 page 3 152 Step 3 Set the IP parameters for the ROC to the initial default values by en tering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 Step 4 Delete the cross connection between remote operations channel and LL timeslot by entering DLT CRS LLTS see Chapter 3 4 58 page 3 150 Step 5 Delete the ROC by entering DLT ROC see Chapter 3 4 59 page 3 151 Step 6 If the LL link is not used by another leased line subscriber optionally execute the leased line link degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 14 6 page 3 86 End of steps 3 3 13 2 Degrowth of a ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 1 interface Purpose To delete a semipermanent leased line link ROC connection via V5 1 interface Procedure Step 1 Move the ROC out of service by entering ED ROC see Chapter 3 4 20 page 3 112 Step 2 Instruct the NE to delete the routing entry using the ROC within the AnyMedia Access System static routing table by entering DLT ROUTE see Chapter 3 4 60 page 3 152 Step 3 Set the IP parameters for the ROC to the initial default values by en tering SET IP see Chapter 2 3 13 page 2 30 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 77 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ROC degrowth CO S Step 4 Delete the specified cross connection between V5 line termination bearer channel and V5 1 timeslot by entering DLT CRS BCTS see Chapter 3 4 25 page 3 117 Step
559. rovided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT ROC section in 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 215 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a ROC ee the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 216 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection ROC LLTS o E N 4 6 53 Provisioning a cross connection between remote operations channel and leased line timeslot Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection from a ROC to a leased line link timeslot Both entities must already be provisioned and not yet be cross con nected Assumptions ROC and leased line timeslot have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS LLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT GCGRS LETOTIALDI ALD where RID roc 1 AID of the embedded remote op erations channel ALD lits 1 16 1 31 AID of the leased line link timeslot Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS LLTS sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format whi
560. rovision ing influence Procedure Step 1 Follow the TST V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command TSL VOPVAR SPA Dib Pi vopvar VOP VAR where AID v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface where the provisioning variant shall be veri fied V5PVAR 0 127 provisioning variant identifier to be verified Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the TST V5PVAR sec tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 259 Configuration management for narrowband services Inventory management E SeSe 4 9 Inventory management Procedure for This procedure describes the steps needed for inventory management to retrieve inventory information about the AnyMedia Access System and the individual packs management Assumptions This procedure assumes that m The following packs have been installed correctly COMDAC CIU m The following software has been installed correctly GSI software application if the PC GSI is to be used m The operator is properly logged into the system Background Retrievable pack inventory items include the following m TYPE a mnemonic name that identifies the kind
561. rovisioning data for a V5 ISDN PRA subscriber line example 4 80 4 22 Table structure of V3 service 4 82 4 23 V3 ISDN PRA related timeslot mapping 4 83 4 24 Provisioning data for a V3 ISDN PRA subscriber line example 4 85 4 25 Table structure of ALL service 4 87_ 4 26 Provisioning data for an analog leased line example 4 89 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 IX arr Figures 4 27 Table structure of DLL service 4 91 4 28 Provisioning data for a digital leased line example 4 93 4 29 Table structure of VLL service 4 95 4 30 VLL related timeslots relationships 4 97 4 31 Provisioning data for a VLL subscriber line example 4 98 4 32 Table structure of GLL service 4 100 4 33 GLL related timeslots relationships 4 102 4 34 Provisioning data for a GLL subscriber line example 4 103 4 35 Table structure of UVLL service via IO_E1 pack 4 105 4 36 UVLLrelated timeslot mapping 4 106 4 37 Provisioning data for a UVLL subscriber line example 4 108 4 38 Table structure of UGLL service via l O_E1 pack 4 110 4 39 UGLL related timeslot mapping 4 111 4 40 Provisioning data for a UGLL subscriber line example 4 113 4 41 Table structure of LL ROC service 4 115 4 42 Provisioning data for a ROC example 4 117 4 43 Table structure of SPLL ROC service via V5 1 interface 4 118 4 44 Provisioning data for an SPLL ROC via V5 2 interface example 4 119 4 45 Re provisioning initiated from AN message flow in a successful scenario 4 237 4 46 Provision
562. rrowband system turn up procedures Setting ONU alarm input contacts E SeSe 2 66 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Contents 3 1 Introduction 3 1 3 2 Upgrade to a newer release 3 1 3 2 1 Replace IO_HDLC pack s IDC500 by IDC500B 3 2 3 2 1 1 Subprocedure for duplex IO HDLC configuration 3 2 3 2 1 2 Subprocedure for simplex IO HDLC configuration 3 4 3 2 2 Replace COMDAC s COM500 by COM501 3 8 3 2 2 1 Prepare pre loaded COMDAC by copying an existing pre loaded COMDAC os 3 2 2 2 Replacing COMDAC COM500 by COM501 3 11 3 3 Growth degrowth 3 11 3 3 1 System growth 3 11 3 3 2 System degrowth 3 12 3 3 3 Growth scenarios 3 12 3 3 4 Application pack and subscriber growth 3 14 3 3 4 1 Application pack growth in the AnyMedia Mainshelf 3 14 3 3 4 2 Application pack growth in the ONU 3 18 3 3 4 3 POTS subscriber growth 3 22 3 3 4 4 ISDN BRA subscriber growth 3 23 3 3 4 5 V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth 3 24 3 3 4 6 V3 ISDN PRA subscriber growth 3 28 3 3 4 7 ALL subscriber growth 3 30 3 3 4 8 DLL subscriber growth 3 31 3 3 4 9 VLL subscriber growth 3 32 3 3 4 10 GLL subscriber growth 3 35 3 3 4 11 UVLL subscriber growth 3 38 3 3 4 12 UGLL subscriber growth 3 40 3 3 5 Remote operations channel ROC growth 3 42 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 I o Contents 3 3 6 Service node interfaces growth 3 3 6 1 V5 1 growth 3 3 6 2 V5 2 growth adding links 3 3 6 3 V3 link
563. rs with M gt N21 and M is the maximum value within that AID parameter In this case any one and only one of the values within the range can be used to form a valid AID parameter value at the input TL1 message 4 42 ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning and service activation I Example If ap 1 1 16 is specified for the input AID parameter of a TL1 message then the ap AID specified at the input command addresses one entity where is 1 Since there is one AnyMedia Mainshelf and can be 1 through 16 since there are up to 16 application pack slots in the AnyMedia Mainshelf AID case The AnyMedia Access System AIDs are normally shown in lower case The sensitivity AnyMedia Access System is case insensitive in the sense that it can accept AlDs in either lower or upper case However the system normally returns AIDs in lower case For the AnyMedia Access System Documentation always shows AIDs in lower case m When inputting AlDs they can be either upper or lower case m However the system always responds in lower case m Logins are case sensitive 4 5 2 2 Special cases of AIDs Groupings of AIDs The AnyMedia Access System supports special groupings of AlDs for certain TL1 messages m AID with value all m AlD with the right most AID parameter value all AID with a value This AID replaces any AID entity type and its ranges which are defined in the con
564. rs down any loopback of the E1 feeders served by the specified pack Assumption The administrative primary service state of the IO_E1 protection pack is IS and the IO_E1 protection pack is operational Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED IOE1 GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDs LOR bre ALD ess PRO EN rI PST where AID ioel 1 1 4 ioelp 1 AID of the lO_E1 ioel 1 1 4 E1 pack ioelp 1 E1 protection pack FROIN ALW INH protection permission ALW protection switching allowed INH protection switching inhibited Por OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED IOE1 section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 113 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an IO_HDLC to OOS Ee 3 4 22 Moving an IO_HDLC out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of one lO_HDLC entity to OOS The IO_ HDLC pack protection is disabled by setting one pack to OOS Setting the active IO_HDLC to OOS causes a protection switch if the standby pack is in service state IS and
565. rve the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT UGLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 146 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a V3 link ee 3 4 55 Deleting a V3 link Purpose This procedure is to delete a V3 link The V3 link must not be cross connected Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLTI V3it ts ALD where AID v31 1 16 AID of the V3 link Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT V3L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 147 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a leased line link a SeSe 3 4 56 Deleting a LL link Purpose This procedure is to delete a leased line link entity No leased line link timeslot of the link must be cross connected All 31 timeslots contained
566. s TS ter user port a fe 1S 7 1 prov cata ee a es ee ee ee ee a a eens Sea eel a a a Se e ajsa i prow data HDSL timeslots AD userTS wser ne ype sere state w i fe PRAIN S E aar T___ e harie i e PRAN pastost Stet PRAN HDSL logical interface ibaa used HDSL port application mode logical interface operator can read and partly modify service nhe o E ie ep eo i Port served HDSL log interface f 2 ee 2 m a wn wn 2 A AH z Jo bat wn Soo Ce wn e gt N e 5 ee ee 16 3 16 4 WN WN gt gt NOT ee wu AP type service state P5501 iD ie a ae he a E es es as a Fa E w ea o representing hardware operator can read and partly modify Figure 4 20 Table structure of V5 ISDN PRA service 4 78 ssue 7 December 2000 Port provisioning JO0ldaS V5 interface INAWNSISSV V5 timeslot AID testripe service state a saN I I fo a o Tooo y an ooo y e e me N e oy U1 E1 feeder AID service state parameter served ink a AT fear ema Sa o 1a foon pw sre eee ea ee prov data vil as poe A e as rr ee ieee EESE a lO_E1 P pack AID packiype parameter service state Pr FAcs00 prov data OOS NAC Es e ea 3 By E a meo fw o o P T o Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the
567. s available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures 3 50 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 2 growth ee Step 3 Verify the cross connection to the V5 2 interface specified by the en gineering work order by entering the command RTRV CRS LI IF THEN the RTRV CRS LI command reports use the ENT CRS LI command to en that the link is not cross connected ter the cross connection go to Step 4 the RTRV CRS LI command reports go to Step 5 that the link is cross connected Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 2 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 5 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 6 Move the V5 2 interface in service if necessary by entering ED V5I see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 Step 7 IF THEN the object to grow is a POTS sub go to Step 1 of the growth procedure scriber for POTS subscribers on page 3 55 the object to grow is an ISDN BRA go to Step 1 of the growth procedure subscriber for ISDN BRA subscribers on page 3 56 the object to grow is a V5 ISDN PRA go to Step 1 of the growth procedure subscriber for V5 ISDN PRA subscribers on page 3 57 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 51 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V3 link growth M ese ee 3 3 6 3 V3 li
568. s between V3 ISDN PRA subscriber and V3 link ENT CRS Volt leHo3 v5ol 2 Step 7 Move the V3 ISDN PRA subscriber in service BDHV SUN S35 53 38 te Ss Step 8 Move the HDSL interfaces in service BOSHDeokt nde l ls se 1s 4 312 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples Le Step 9 Move the V3 link in service RDS oles hes ee Se End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 313 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples rr Te ee 4 12 7 Example for provisioning an analog LL interface Purpose This example is to create an analog leased lines service with the following param eters E1 feeder 4 on IO_E1 2 link 6 application pack 15 port 1 line termi nation 60 bearer channel 1 timeslot 1 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack ENT TORL 4 0e ls Is zy Step 2 Define the LL link ENT LLE ei 6s se velo 2 4 Step 3 Define the application pack BNT AP i tap l 544 LPP LOO or ENT APADA LA Lo ELPA LOO Step 4 Define the analog leased line subscriber ENISACLN Sirol ss 2drop drop l lS l Step 5 Define the cross connection between line termination bearer chan nel and LL timeslot BNISRCRO bL lot leopec o0q1 LLES 0L Step 6 Move the analog leased line subscriber in service ED ALENS ere o0 sett Ss Step 7 Move the LL link in service By Diet el Gye pe End of steps 4 314 Issue 7 Decembe
569. s channel ROC carried over leased line interface with the following parameters E1 feeder 3 on IO_E1 2 link 5 timeslot 1 IP address 192 168 0 1 submask IP address 255 255 255 252 re mote IP address 192 168 0 2 and the parameters for the default route destina tion IP address 0 0 0 0 submask IP address 0 0 0 0 gateway IP address 192 168 0 2 Procedure Step 1 Define the IO_E1 pack BND LOR Le Oe lS Ess Step 2 Define the LL link BENT SbiGhs el eoe se sehb e lata s CRC4 1 Step 3 Define the remote operations channel EN T ROC rro is Step 4 Assign the IP address information to the ROC SH Do LP ee roc lga IPSI 92 16s 0 1 SUBMASK 293 2 De 20S lt 2 52 REMI PH102 68 0 2 INTSTATE UP Step 5 Create a default routing entry within the AnyMedia Access System Static routing table using the ROC by entering ENT ROUTE see Chapter 4 6 54 page 4 218 ENT ROUTES 264407040700 4080407 192 168 lt 0 2 Step 6 Define the cross connection between remote operations channel and LL timeslot BNI CRo BbLlot lt rOceals LICS 0 Step 7 Move the remote operations channel in service ED ROC z rO le sree Se 4 324 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples Le Step 8 Move the LL link in service PD eee ee eae eLo End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 325 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples Te ee 4 12 14 Example for pr
570. s fully operational verify that the ACTIVE LED remains lit Step 2 Using a serial straight through ElA 232 cable connect the PC via its COM 1 serial port to the EIA 232C port that is marked RMC on the faceplate of the OCP Step 3 Switch on the GSI PC and start Windows 95 Step 4 Go to Chapter 2 3 2 C U installation and GSI connection Step 8 End of steps Verifying the inventory data of the ONU Subshelf and terminating the session see Next procedure Chapter 2 4 6 page 2 64 1 Windows 95 is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 63 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Verifying inventory data subshelf ee 2 4 6 Verifying the inventory data of the ONU Subshelf and terminating the session Purpose To verify the inventory data for the ONU Subshelf Assumption The ONU Subshelf has to be operational Background The ONU Subshelves are uniquely identified by a number This number is set by DIP switches on the ONU backplane and can be retrieved as part of the ONU Subshelf inventory data m PCDE the ONU Subshelf identifier gt NOTE If the connection to the ONU Subshelf is lost all subshelf pack inventory data is not retrievable any more and for all equipped packs an UNPLUG report is generated After recovery of the ONU Subshelf connection the AnyMedia Mainshelf performs a new equipage and inventory data retrieval For all equipped ONU packs OCP and APs a new PLUGIN r
571. s narrowband as well as broadband services The Optical Application Pack OAP is connected via one optical link to the ONU Assumption m The AnyMedia Mainshelf is correctly configured and provisioned see Chapter 4 5 with COMDAC COM501 for software release R1 4 Clu AFM and ADSL AP LPA4OOB for software release R1 4 if broad band service is used m APCrunning the GSI software application m Number of ONUs which shall be connected to the AnyMedia Mainshelf See engineering work order gt NOTE The OAP can be used in the AnyMedia Mainshelf but not in the ONU Sub shelf gt NOTE For broadband services the OAP has to be provisioned on the AFM Refer to the procedure OAP installation growth described in the User Service Manual for Broadband Services 863 211 115 Background The OAP is a 2 slot wide pack and the installation is the same as for any sub scriber interface AP in the AnyMedia Mainshelf The OAP must be inserted in an even numbered AP slot and its adjacent left odd numbered AP slot After the physical plug in the OAP autonomously performs its sanity checks program store inventory tests and built in self test with the usual faceplate LED indications Afterwards it continuously tries to connect to the Optical Controller Pack for ONU OCP to initiate a link start up Procedure Step 1 For OAP installation see Chapter 2 3 18 Application pack installa tion Step 2 Verify that the OAP pack is corr
572. s on E1 feeder m Provisioning of subscriber lines and interface association gt NOTE The four basic growth and degrowth operations may be performed by dif ferent maintenance personnel at different times without the need to com plete one task before the other 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 11 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth degrowth M ese ee Growth from Per default the AnyMedia Access System is provisioned for POTS only operation POTS only mode to mode regardless of whether an O_HDLC is inserted or not within this mode no mixed ISDN POTS switched ISDN services can be provisioned To reconfigure from POTS only to mixed mode with HDLC simplex or duplex re quires the following steps m Inserting IO_HDLC slot HDLC 1 is recommended m Provisioning of IO HDLC m Changing the ISDN mode configuration to mixed POTS ISDN mode via TL1 command Switching the standby system configuration to active via TL1 command The system performs a restart and recovers with POTS ISDN operation mode m Provisioning of switched ISDN services 3 3 2 System degrowth Modification of System degrowth is the removal of feeder and or distribution capacity from an ex capacity isting operational AnyMedia Access System System capacity can be rearranged for load balancing or other needs by combining the growth and degrowth opera tions Degrowth from To change the configuration from mixed mode with HDLC duplex
573. s the channel 1 is the 1st channel 31 is the 31st channel VLL independent The VLL is independent of the V5 x interface It is transported on E1 feeders of V5 which are exclusively used for leased line purpose Provisioning For provisioning a digital leased line service also the layered structure as shown objects of VLL in Figure 4 2 page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that four objects subscribers have to be provisioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a digital leased line service These four objects are HDSL interface VLL subscriber LL interface and leased line service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a VLL VLL service service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 29 page 4 95 gt NOTE To ensure end to end data transmission the CPEs at both subscriber sides have to support the same standards It is up to the network operator to se lect the appropriate CPE devices at both sides 4 94 l ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning LL services ee ee ee channel id A ee fe o OO vo o ee E Eo o Joo gt O wma SSS a T Qs Line Term VLL subscriber VLLN z AID HDSL in service nrof start parame terface state TSs TS ter u 2
574. s to extinguish Step 3 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 4 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 7 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 43 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Service node interfaces growth CO S Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU System Response All LEDs on all installed packs light for approxi mately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status Step 5 Verify which alarm is raised for the IO_E1 by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV ALM AIDTYPE where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT ALL All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NTFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 6 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LEDs of the IO_E1 still do not illuminate then replace the IO_E1 see Step 2 and repeat from Step 4 Step 7 Verify that the IO_E1 is correctly provisioned by entering RTRV IOE1 IF THEN the RTRV IOE1 command reports that use the ENT IOE1 command to enter the IO_E1 is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 8 the RTRV IOE1 command reports dif contact the provisioning center to verify ferent provisioning information the engineering work order the RTRV IOE1 command reports that go to Ste
575. scriber allocates a U port on the equipment layer The AnyMedia Access System supports a retrieval on the equipment layer with the physical access identifier as key to show the operator which U ports are al ready allocated and which ones are not used for any service yet To activate the service for an ISDN BRA subscriber it must be associated to an already existing V5 x interface The ISDN BRA subscriber must be associated to a V5 x user port and in the case of V5 1 the subscriber bearer channels must be ad ditionally cross connected to V5 1 timeslots The V5 x user port must be associ ated to a V5 x interface According to Figure 4 2 page 4 52 several objects have to be provisioned for the lines and the service assignments layer These objects are ISDN BRA sub scriber V5 x interface and V5 x cross connection For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of an ISDN service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 18 page 4 73 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning V5 user port gt o v m user porti LineTerm ype used LneTerm parameter OD Sez S E E OS ooo o p i po eed Zi G e a e DT i Zz a aS S gt S ee 3 maa ooo SS s AID imestotiype servicesiate Line Term ISDN BRA subscriber ILN E a a si AID used service parameter served V5 es a a i E
576. scriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termi nation id the HDSL logical interface and the number of HDSL logical timeslots which shall be allocated If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The command is rejected if either a table entry with the specified VLL subscriber id al ready exists not all of the required HDSL logical timeslots can be allocated or the HDSL logical interface is not no more able to support the VLL service Line termi nation bearer channels are created according to the number of allocated HDSL timeslots Table LL interface Data for the LL interface are stored in the LL interface table and in the leased line timeslot table There is one LL interface table and one leased line timeslot table per AnyMedia Access System The LL interface table contains an LL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used E1 feeder the service state pri mary and secondary and the provisioning data When an LL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the LL interface id and the E1 feeder If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default pro visioning data and service state OOS are used When an LL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the leased line timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key
577. se TL1 commands commands the logical entities are defined and the cross connections between them This chapter shows the procedures for service provisioning in the AnyMedia Access System System normal System responses appear in the TL1SI View window and have the following for response mat sid date time M ctag COMPLD we System fault System faults appear in the TL1SI View window and have the following format sid date time M ctag DENY code definition reason for code 7 For details see the error response section of the appropriate TL1 command in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Proce dures 4 5 7 1 V5 switched services Different The provisioning of V5 switched service is different for V5 1 and V5 2 provisioning for V5 1 and V5 2 4 5 7 1 1 V5 1 POTS service Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 1 POTS service 4 122 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning a Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 1 interface by entering ENT V5I see Chapter 4 6 1 page 4 141 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the V5 link by entering ENT V5L see Chapter 4 6 2 page 4 143 Step 4 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144
578. sed line subscriber Purpose This procedure is to delete one digital leased line subscriber entity Its bearer channels must not be cross connected to a leased line link timeslot The bearer channel objects of the digital leased line subscriber are automatically deleted by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT DLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT DLLN ATD where AID eS esl O24 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT DLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 142 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a VLL subscriber I 3 4 51 Deleting an n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber according V 35 V 36 or X 21 Purpose This procedure is to delete one n x 64 kbps leased line subscriber entity accord ing to V 35 V 36 or X 21 The leased line subscriber must be in administrative pri mary service state OOS without any secondary service state and its bearer chan nels must not be cross connected to leased line link timeslots Additionally the used HDSL interface must be in administrative primary service state OOS The bear
579. selecting the LAN or the COM port Step 12 Copy the newly loaded software version from the COMDAC which was previously in standby mode to the COMDAC which was for merly in active mode Follow the CPY MEM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message CPY MEM System Response During the copy procedure the FAULT LED on the standby COMDAC flashes at a rate of 2 Hz and a status condi tion CPYMEM is raised reported by the following report events 4 14 l ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via SW download a system software version mismatch cleared Copy program Memory im progress copy program memory complete data memory update in progress data memory update completed 5 NVPS verification in progress NVPS verification completed RAM Update in progress RAM Update complete The copy procedure will last approximately 45 minutes and both COMDAGCs are synchronous afterwards Step 13 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the CPY MEM section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 15 Config
580. services 7 1 7 1 Overview 7 1 7 2 Creating a new user 7 5 La Deleting a user ID 7 7 7 4 Modifying the user ID CID password and security class 7 8 7 5 Retrieving login parameters 7 10 7 6 Changing the user s own password 7 11 Tif Retrieving the login status 7 13 Ve 8 Power node preventive maintenance 8 1 8 1 Introduction 8 1 8 2 Required tools 8 2 8 3 Safety 8 3 8 4 Battery string float voltage 8 4 8 5 Battery voltage 8 5 8 6 Voltage ripple for external charging 8 5 8 7 Battery temperature 8 6 8 8 Clean and inspect 8 6 8 9 Retorquing inter battery connections 8 6 8 10 Discharge capacity test 8 7 8 11 Opening the battery connections 8 9 8 12 Flame arrestor vent feature 8 9 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 V arr Contents 8 13 Acid spills and corrosion 8 10 8 14 Installation and maintenance records 8 10 AB Abbreviations and Acronyms AB 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 VI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Figures About this document XVII 1 ESD wrist strap XXXIII 1 GSI software for narrowband services 1 1 1 1 Possibilities to connect the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System 1 6 1 2 Pin assignment of the connecting cable PC to CIU 1 7 1 3 Connection of the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System via DCN 1 8 1 4 Connection of the GSI to the AnyMedia Access System via LAN 1 8 1 5 InstallShield window 1 9 1 6 Setup window 1 10 1 7 Choose destination location window 1 10 1 8 GSI start screen and main window with contr
581. sing wrist straps with a minimum resistance of 250 kQ while handling circuit packs or working ona shelf shelves The jacks are located on the left and right of the rack and are ac cessible from the front When grounding jacks are not provided an alligator clip adapter enables connection to rack s frame ground FRMGND XXXII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document General safety information To Ground Connection Figure 1 ESD wrist strap m Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack ESD bond ing point 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXXIII About this document General safety information E SeSe XXXIV Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 ee TL1 information 10 Overview TL1 transaction language 1 AnyMedia Access System is an ASCII based com mand language The TL1 commands and messages used for the provisioning maintenance and administration of the AnyMedia Access System are described in detail in the Command and Message Manual Ordering Number 363 211 111 Moreover you can access these descriptions on line via the Helo menu TL1 Com mands on the GSI In this chapter you will find a general description of the structure of the TL1 com mands the used parameters and the syntax 11 TL1 command input 11 1 Input format TL1 commands sent to the AnyMedia Access System have the following format verb modifierl modifier2 tid aid ctag general block
582. sion This section illustrates a re provisioning scenario which extends the dataset of a of dataset V5 interface The example given here is for one interface only to reduce the illus tration complexity but can be extended for more interfaces in the same manner 4 248 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning Current Interface Current System Provisioning Variant dataset dataset Step 1 Provisioning variant 20 contains same associations as in current inter face dataset PVAR10 State PVO PVAR 10 PVAR 20 Step 2 Current system datasetis extended with objects provisioning variant 20 i i is extended with associations to objects in current system dataset State PVO g PVAR 10 PVAR 20 p ET G ceca es A ui Y a Step 3 Provisioning variant 20 is checked against current system dataset at setting it available related objects in current system dataset are P V1 allo cated State PV1 PVAR 10 Yyy PVAR 20 Lm Step 4 Re provisioning has taken place provisioning variant 20 is part of cur rent interface dataset old current interface dataset is now provisioning variant 10 in state PV1 PVAR 20 PVAR 10 Legend 2 Y UY Objects only maybe Associations only Associations pre allocated Objects pre allocated Activated objects PVO allocated and associations Figure 4 48 Re provisioning scenario extension of dataset At the 1st step an empty provisioning variant is create
583. sioning data for new NTU entity cre ations A change of the default provisioning parameters does not affect already provisioned NTU entities Parameters not supplied by the operator do not over write already given provisioning data The initial values for the default provisioning parameters are created by the system Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED NTU DFLT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BED NTU DEPEI2 2 222 yeLkmode CLAMODE databits DATABITS vl4mode V14MODE eESZCES RIGZCIS res RTS pr bsd Risp dsrdtr DSRDTR remlp REMLP bytetiming BYTETIMING extclk EXTCLK astimer ASTIMER asretrytimer ASRETRYTIMER where CLKMODE ASYNC SYNC data clocking mode sets whether the NTU is operating in synchro nous or asynchronous mode This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs ASYNC asynchronous SYNC synchronous DATABITS 4677 0 9 number of data bits The charac ter lengh does not include the start and stop bit This parameter is only valid for V24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous V14MODE BASIC EXTENDED This parameter sets whether the NTU is operating in V 14 basic or extended mode This parameter is only valid for V 24 NTUs and where the clock mode is asyn chronous 4 230 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Changing default prov data of NTU a RISZCTS 411M5 I2BITS
584. sioning information the RTRV LLL command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 2 Create a LLL entity with its 31 timeslots All 31 timeslots supplied by this link are automatically created by entering ENT LLL see Chapter 4 6 29 page 4 184 Step 3 Move the LL link in service by entering ED LLL see Chapter 4 6 45 page 4 208 Step 4 IF THEN the object to grow is an ALL subscriber go to Step 1 of the growth procedure for ALL subscribers on page 3 57 the object to grow is a DLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the growth procedure for DLL subscribers on page 3 58 the object to grow is a VLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the growth procedure for VLL subscribers on page 3 58 the object to grow is a GLL subscriber go to Step 1 of the growth procedure for GLL subscribers on page 3 58 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 53 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Unstructured LL link growth M ese ee 3 3 6 5 Unstructured leased line link growth Assumption The IO_E1 pack used for the unstructured leased line service is a FAC500B Procedure Step 1 Verify the provisioning information of the unstructured leased line link ULLL specified by the engineering work order by entering the RTRV ULLL command IF THEN the RTRV ULLL command reports that use the ENT ULLL command to enter the ULLL is not provisioned
585. ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 link ee 4 6 2 Provisioning a V5 link Purpose This procedure is to create a V5 link entity with its 31 timeslots The V5 link has the initial administrative primary service state OOS out of service All V5 timeslots are initially provisioned for bearer service The link identifier parameter is only used for the V5 2 protocol Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V5L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT V5L AID v5lLkKid V5SLKID el K1 nesd NESD fesd FESD where AID v5l 1 16 AID of the V5 link VER LD CUA ZO 93 V5 link identifier El el 1 1 4 1 4 V5 physical feeder identifier NESD ESSES near end E1 signal degrade 7 LBER 10 7 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 107 FESD y e445 far end E1 signal degrade a LBER 10 6 LBER 10 5 LBER 10 4 LBER 104 gt NOTE The V5 link identifier must be identical to that of the local exchange and is only used in the case of V5 2 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 I
586. ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade via boot download Step 15 Click on the OPEN button This enables the system to download the software file System Response The following message appears loader gt dSTART Time xx yy 2z DATA TRANSFER IN PROGRESS lt 3 COMPLETE During the software download process the FAULT LED flashes ata rate of 2 Hz This process will last approximately two hours for an initial system that is a system with low amount of provisioning data When the software download process is complete the following message appears Elapsed Time xx yy 2z All LEDs on the COMDAC light for a short interval followed by a FAULT LED flashing at a rate of 1 Hz during COMDAC self initializa tion Self initialization lasts no more than three minutes gt NOTE The GSI AEM is now disconnected from the system To connect the GSI AEM execute the procedure for accessing the AnyMedia Access System in Chapter 1 3 5 page 1 16 Step 16 Reprovision the AnyMedia Access System see Chapter 4 5 page 4 42 for example Run an NVDS database script file with the provisioning data see Chapter 1 7 7 page 1 52 End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 29 Configuration management for narrowband services SW download of peripheral packs 4 3 6 Software upgrade via SW download of peripheral packs Purpose Software SW download to the peripheral packs is perf
587. ssue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows a SeS System_log Editor Ox File Edit Search Hep 7 This is a SysLog of system system 11 18 38 30 10 98 a EEE system 78 81 81 82 63 53 H COMPLD HSTY f y51 1 E1 PSTNS 1C 76 61 61 61 39 23 Restart PSTN Successfullyy y51 1 E1 CR SERUGRP SA CL 76 61 681 61 39 26 4 US Service degrade threshold excee u51 1 E1 CR INT S8 CL 78 61 61 61 39 19 WUUSlink failed cleared e1 1 1 1 E1 4HJ RAI SA CL 76 61 61 61 39 19 Remote Alarm Indication received cl e1 1 1 1 E1 HJ RAI S 78 01 01 801 39 17 gt Remote Alarm Indication received COH CR SYNCOOS 8A CL 7 6 61 61 61 39 14 System free running cleared e1 1 1 1 E1 HN SYNC NSA CL 76 61 61 61 39 14 sync input failed cleared oe1 1 1 EQPT CPINIT CL 6 61 61 61 39 12 pack initialization finished oe1 1 1 EQPT HJ IMPROPRMUL 3A CL 76 61 61 61 38 32 pack missing or power faul o0e1 1 1 EQPT CPINIT 80 7 6 61 61 61 38 31 pack initialization in progress COM CR SYHCOOS SA 76 61 61 61 38 28 system free running e41 1 1 1 EF1 HN SYNC NSA 78 01 01 81 38 28 sync input failed y51 1 E1 CR SERUGRP SA 78 61 81 61 38 28 4 US Service degrade threshold exceede u51 1 E1 CR INT SA 78 81 81 61 38 28 WUSlink failed oe1 1 1 EQPT HJ IMPROPRMUL S 76 6
588. ssue 7 December 2000 4 143 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5L V5I eS _ _ ee 4 6 3 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 link and V5 x interface Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 link and a V5 inter face Only one V5 link can be cross connected to a V5 1 interface The link identi fier attribute of the link must be unique within a V5 2 interface Multiple links can be assigned to a single interface Assumptions V5 x link and V5 interface have already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS LI GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS Lit ALID1L AID2 3 pvar PVAR where AID v51 1 16 AID of the V5 link AID2 v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface PVAR VopVer ta sz AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used gt NOTE The V5 link identifier must be unique within a V5 2 interface Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct
589. ssumes that m The operator is properly logged into the system m One COMDAC is inserted m There are no alarms in the system A pre loaded COMDAC is available without the provisioning data Procedure Step 1 Prepare an NVDS database script file with the provisioning data see Chapter 1 7 4 page 1 47 Step 2 Clear NVDS database via INIT SYS command gt NOTE Execution of this TL1 command will drop the data communication links be tween GSI AEM and the system all provisioning data except the IP ad dress of the COMDAC and the SID address will be lost Follow the INIT SYS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command INIT SYS System Response A GSI ATTENTION window opens Click on YES The system performs a restart System Response A GSI status window opens indicating that the system is initializing The initialization is complete when a new win dow opens questioning for re connection Step 3 When the initialization is complete remove the active COMDAC slot COM 1 Step 4 Insert a pre loaded COMDAC with the new software load into slot COM 2 With the latches in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf and the bottom portion of the lower latch is behind the lower lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on both top and bottom latches simultaneously until they click into place
590. state IS in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ULLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 209 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V3 link a SeSe 4 6 47 Provisioning a V3 link Purpose This procedure is to create a V3 link Optionally the administrative primary service state of the link can be given The V3 link is used for transporting the full E1 2Mbps capacity including timeslot 0 transparently to a cross connected V3 ISDN PRA subscriber Loopbacks on an E1 feeder carrying a V3 link are not allowed and will be denied If the equipped IO_E1 pack does not support a V3 link an alarm will be raised and the V3 link remains in the not operational service state Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V3L GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BENDTH VsLe tapes elebl PST where ALD v31 1 16 AID of the V3 link El el1 1 1 4 1 4 physical feeder identifier administrative primary service state IS in service OOs out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat
591. strative primary service state only the primary service state and the mode must be given Assumptions ONU is in the administrative primary service state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED AP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDAP Se ATD ose MODE I PST where AID ap 1 1 16 subap 1 8 1 8 AID of the application pack MODE FRCD NORM permission mode which specifies how the application pack shall be brought to OOS FRCD Forced This mode is traffic affecting for operational services provisioned on the drops NORM Normal All switched subscribers provisioned on the drops of the application pack are shutdown in co operation with the switch PST OOS administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED AP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 115 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an ONU out of service rr E 3 4 24 Moving an Optical Network Unit out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an Optical Network Unit subshelf entity
592. t Note The integrity of a provisioning vari ant in state PVO is also ensured at changes in the current system dataset As a consequence there may exist contradictory associations in provision ing variants of state PVO against other provisioning variants in states PVO and PV1 or the current system dataset But each provisioning variant is in itself consistent m PV1 Ready for re provisioning PV1 integrity means Internal integrity external allocation integrity no changes allowed In this state the integrity of the provisioning dataset in combination with the current system dataset and other provisioning variants of the same or dif ferent V5 interfaces in state PV1 2 3 is ensured This means that defined associations in the provisioning variant are checked for their validity No as 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 239 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning a ee sociations exist which prevent the establishment of the associations de fined in the provisioning variant Note The integrity of a provisioning vari ant in state PV1 is also ensured at changes in the current system dataset As a consequence a provisioning variant in state PV1 is ready to get part of the current system dataset by means of a re provisioning procedure Addi tionally the logical consistency regarding V5 standards is checked that is the provisioning variant is accepted to be activated mw PV2 Re provisioni
593. t The HDSL interface timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an HDSL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified HDSL interface id al ready exists or the specified HDSL port is already being used by another client Table ULL Data for the unstructured leased line service are stored in the ULL services table services There is one ULL services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains the UVLL subscriber id and the ULL interface id When an entry in this table is created the TL1 command must contain the UVLL subscriber id and ULL inter face id If the command is given and accepted the AnyMedia Access System cross connects autonomously all 32 timeslots of the UVLL subscriber to the 32 timeslots of the ULL interface The timeslot number of the UVLL subscriber and of the ULL interface is the same 1 1 mapping The TL1 command to create the un structured leased line service is rejected if either the UVLL subscriber entry or theULL interface entry do not exist or are already used by another unstructured leased line service Example Figure 4 37 page 4 108 shows in an example the entities and the necessary TL1 commands for provisioning a UVLL subscriber 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 107 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ENT AP ap 1 1 LP S504 ENT UVLLN It 2 hdsl hdsl 1 fdrsrc lO_E1 ENT ULLL ulll 1 e1 1 1 1 1 HDSL AP U
594. t commands in the same way as the active provisioning data in the past Ev ery table which administers provisioning variant contents is extended with an addi tional key provisioning variant AID to specify to which provisioning variant each entry belongs 4 7 7 2 Provisioning variant table Contents of the The provisioning variants itself not the contents of a provisioning variant are ad provisioning ministered in a table It contains active as well as standby provisioning variants variant table The table administers the V5 interface AID provisioning variant id and the provi sioning variant state The key to each entry is the provisioning variant AID identify ing a provisioning variant for a specific V5 interface The provisioning variant AID is used for addressing a provisioning variant at all TL1 commands later on for ex ample at creation of standby or also active provisioning variant contents Table 4 12 Provisioning variant table Prov variant AID Prov variant state 4 242 Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning Table 4 12 Provisioning variant table Continued Prov variant AID vopvar 4 vopvar 5 vopvar 32 Entries in the provisioning variant table At creation of a V5 interface the system automatically creates an entry in this table with the data as specified at the Enter V5 interface command and the provision ing variant state ACTIVE The
595. t is the current value LPSEC el 1 1 4 1 4 sclk 1 secondary loop synchronization if the secondary synchronization reference is set to the same source as the primary synchroni zation reference then the syn chronization protection switching is disabled el 1 1 4 1 4 E1 physical port sclk 1 station clock initial system default is e1 1 2 1 dynamic default is the current value gt NOTE LPPRI and LPSEC are only applicable when the synchronization mode is LPD 2 42 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting synchr parameters a Step 2 Follow the RTRV SYNCN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 message RTRV SYNCN System Response The message response indicates the system s current synchronization mode LPD or FRNG the primary and sec ondary synchronization references LPPRI and LPSEC and the currently active synchronization source ASRC and the usability PRIST and SECST of the two synchronization sources Step 3 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section SET SYNCN and RTRV SYNCN in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps Next procedure Application pack installation
596. t no extra provisioning must be performed In duplex mode a faulty or missing standby COMDAC is alarmed Duplex mode In duplex mode the system performs a periodical audit of the standby COMDAC and a side switch In the case of a fault of the active COMDAC a non revertive pro tection switch is performed For maintenance actions a manual side switch can be initiated or the automatic side switch can be suppressed Simplex mode To return to simplex non protecting COMDAC mode the second COMDAC must be removed and the command ED CONFIG must be issued to set the second COMDAC to not required see Chapter 4 11 7 3 page 4 290 IO_E1 protection IO_E1 protection is achieved by plugging in an IO_E1 pack in the protection slot and by provisioning the protection IO_E1 pack Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 4 286 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Switching to protection I i 4 11 7 1 Switching to protection SW TOPROTN Purpose The SW TOPROTN command instructs the system to perform an equipment switch with the specified mode or inhibits periodic protection switching on the COMDAC For the COMDAC automatic protection switching cannot be sup pressed For IO_E1 packs this command switches manually from the addressed service pack to the protection pack regardless whether autonomous protection switching is inhibited for the service pack or not The IO_E1 protection pack must be in administrative primary servic
597. t one GLL or one V5 ISDN PRA service and additionally one VLL In the point to multi point mode two NTUs are connected and each can support one GLL service Ad ditionally one VLL service is possible per NTU In the point to multipoint mode all services provisioned for the NTU connected to the first drop of an HDSL interface can use HDSL timeslots 1 up to 15 Services provisioned for the other NTU con nected to the second drop can use the remaining HDSL timeslots 17 up to 31 The command is rejected if any of the service combinations is violated the specified HDSL interface does not exist or is not in the administrative primary service state OOS the timeslots provisioned for the HDSL pack are exhausted at least one of the provisioned HDSL timeslots does not exist or is used by another service The created Leased Line subscriber indicates an External Condition Mismatch as secondary service state if the service is not supported by the actual connected NTU at customer premises Assumptions m Application pack with its port entities drops has already been provisioned m HDSL interface has already been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT GLLN GSI operation Or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT GLLN AID 237 hos HDSL gt sts sis ntcs Nis oe lt where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination HDSL hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface STS 1 31 start HDSL timeslot NTS
598. ta only m Program Copy The NE Operations Program Copy menu allows to copy the non volatile program store from the active to the standby COMDAC m Initialize System The NE Operations Initialize System menu allows to initialize the system The provisioning information will be erased and the system will restart with a default configuration Boot Download Performs a software download from the GSI to the system m Protection Switch The NE Operations Protection Switch COMDAC menu allows in duplex mode to switch from one COMDAC to the other m System Log The NE Operations System Log Retrieve Sys Log menu performs a re trieval of the system log to the GSI PC The NE Operations System Log View Sys log File menu starts a text ed itor to view the system log file m Security The NE Operations Security Current User menu displays a list of all mo mentarily logged on users The NE Operations Security Password Change menu allows the user to change his own password The NE Operations Security User Administration menu allows the sys tem administrator to enter edit or delete user entries of the system 1 54 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Working with TL1 commands m V5 Retrieve Displays a window from which the user can retrieve V5 specific system in formation LL Retrieve Displays a window from which the user can retrieve leased line specific system information 363 211
599. ta set ready and data terminal ready sets the mode of the DSR and DTR control lines This pa rameter only applies for V 24 and V 35 NTUs ON control signal is always on STD control signal follows ITU standard REMLP DISABLED ENABLED remote loop control sets the abil ity of the NTU to initiate remote loopbacks Disabling this at tribute will cause type 3 loop backs placed on the NTU to be denied DISABLED NTU is unable to initiate a remote loopback ENABLED NTU ts able to initiate a remote loopback BYTETIM DISABLED ENABLED ING byte timing sets whether the NTU transmits the byte timing signal out the B pin on the X 21 interface This is only valid for X 21 NTUs where the speed is 64K or 128K Futhermore it may only be enabled if the external clock mode attribute is disabled as the byte timing and external clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 inter face DISABLED byte timing disabled ENABLED byte timing enabled 4 228 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a managed NTU EXTCLK DISABLED ENABLED external clock mode sets whether the NTU uses external clocking This attribute may only be enabled for X 21 NTUs Futh ermore it may only be enabled if the byte timing attribute is dis abled as the byte timing and ex ternal clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 interface DISABLED external clo
600. table There is one leased line services table per AnyMedia Access System This table con tains a double key one is the line termination bearer channel id and the other is the leased line timeslot id Additionally it contains the service state When an entry in this table is created the TL1 command must contain the leased line timeslot id and line termination bearer channel id The TL1 command to create the leased line service is rejected if either the leased line timeslot entry or the leased line subscriber bearer channel entry does not exist or are already used by another 4 96 l Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ne leased line service It is also rejected if all the timeslots of a given subscriber are not over the same E1 feeder Table VLL bearer For having a uniform view from the upper service layer the HDSL logical timeslots channels which can start anywhere between 1 and 31 with the exception of timeslot 16 and which are not always including the timeslot 16 HDSL logical timeslot 16 is not included as long as the number of HDSL logical timeslots is less than 31 are mapped to a VLL bearer channel table In this table the sequence of the HDSL logical timeslots is kept but it starts always with the bearer channel number 1 For an example of the relationship between the different kinds of timeslots see Figure 4 30 page 4 97 e connections i T nO REN RE
601. talled at AnyMedia Mainshelf see engineering work order m Fibre cable for the optical link between AnyMedia Mainshelf and ONU Sub shelf is provided and routed m Fiber termination box is provided and correct connected Procedure Before working with optical fibre cables and connectors bear in mind that the fiber can be energized already In this case please observe the following safety instruc tion CAUTION Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation Although at present the transmitting power levels for Class 1 lasers are below those known to cause injury to the eye at distances greater than 250 mm 10 inches direct exposure should always be avoided Dont look into the end of an exposed fiber or pack optical connectors as long as the optical source is switched on Never view any unterminated optical connector with optical instruments other than indirect image converting devices such as the FIND R SCOPE of FJW Opti cal Systems Inc since viewing optics tend to collimate the energy from an opti cal connector and hence increase the potential risk for injury A Step 1 Connect the already installed fiber to the SC type fiber connector for the optical link on the OAP faceplate Consider that the SC connec tion has a guiding system so that the fiber connector can be inserted in one direction only Step 2 Be sure that the fiber is connected properly in the fiber termination box System Response The LED CLF on th
602. tate OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT UVLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT UVLLN AID where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT UVLLN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 145 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting a UGLL subscriber ae 3 4 54 Deleting a UGLL subscriber Purpose This procedure is to delete one unstructured leased line subscriber entity accord ing G 703 UGLL The subscriber must be in administrative primary service state OOS without any secondary service state and must not be cross connected to an unstructured leased line link Additionally the used HDSL interface must be in ad ministrative primary service state OOS The allocated HDSL timeslots are re leased Assumptions The leased line subscriber and the used HDSL interface are in administrative pri mary service state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT UGLLN GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT UGLLN AID where AID 1t 1 1024 AID of the line termination Step 2 Obse
603. te parameter served interface 2 aM e o o o SS a O 3 mi T2 OOS AUTO defauttdata U9 z CW S O C E e 7 5 eA O a A _ 1 _ _ 5 feat c g ee e vee ees Z 5 Sis pP Ss s provan ur e ol SSS a COO Co o w AP IO_E1 P pack z AID APype service state AID pack ype parameter service state 2 i a E Pi__ FAC500 provda OOS NAC_ D E aa E E N O 2 a ee cae ae 2 CW O ei i i T oe me 16 J LPS501 IS Note Parameters in bold are read only on this level The key of the table is separated by a double line from the parameters Figure 4 32 Table structure of GLL service 4 100 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning Table GLL Data for the GLL subscriber are stored in the GLL subscriber table There is one subscriber GLL subscriber table per AnyMedia Access System This table contains a line ter mination id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL logical interface the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When a GLL subscriber is to be created the TL1 command must contain at least the line termination id the HDSL logical interface and the number of HDSL logical timeslots which shall be allocated If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used The command is r
604. te and time of the system Profile Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM m Service Cross Connects Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM 1 The other equipment menus are for Data only see Commands and Procedures included on the customer documentation CD ROM 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 57 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions 1 10 Fault management functions gt NOTE The executable functions depend on the user privileges see Table 7 2 page 7 3 1 10 1 Overview Fault management provides the user with an overview of all the alarms currently present in the system The user has also the ability to suppress and to resume suppressed autonomous messages to set the alarm attributes to retrieve alarm information to perform tests and protection switching In the GSI actions concerning fault management are performed in the following ways m Performing functions of the Fault menu options see Figure 1 42 m Executing TL1 commands gt NOTE The actions performed by the two possibilities are different 1 10 2 Fault menu Performance Monitoring Window Help Alarms Alarm Configuration Inhibit Allow Messages Events Audible Alarms AFM Event History Test Management Loopback Figure 1 42 Fault menu options Fault menu option Via the Fault menu option
605. tep 1 Retrieve the active standby customer configuration Follow the RTRV CFG CUST GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV CFG CUST System Response The CFGID shows the customer configuration the system is currently using The CFGID is different for each cus tomer For the correct value ask your local customer technical sup port organization Step 2 IF THEN ACTIVE CFGID does not match go to Step 3 ACTIVE CFGID fits go to the Setting ISDN mode configuration procedure Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 Step 3 Set the STANDBY customer configuration to the customer depen dent value Follow the SET CFG CUST GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command om CERG CUS Tp 2 CE GID where CFGID must be set to the appropriate value System Response COMPLD gt NOTE The customer configuration is activated by executing the procedure Switch ing system configuration Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 End of steps Next procedure l l l i Setting ISDN mode configuration see Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 if applicable oth erwise Switching system configuration Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 17 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting ISDN mode configuration E SeSe 2 3 6 Setting ISDN mode configuration Purpose For supporting switched ISDN BRA and V5 ISDN PRA services the standby sys tem configuration must be configured to the ISDN mode This
606. ter 4 6 9 page 4 152 Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack by entering ENT IOE1 see Chapter 4 6 10 page 4 154 Step 3 Define the ULL link by entering ENT ULLL see Chapter 4 6 30 page 4 186 Step 4 Define the HDSL interface by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 5 Define the UGLL subscriber by entering ENT UGLLN see Chapter 4 6 36 page 4 198 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 135 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning o E ___ ee Step 6 Define the cross connections between UGLL subscriber and ULL link by entering ENT CRS ULLL see Chapter 4 6 38 page 4 201 Step 7 Move the UGLL subscriber in service by entering ED UGLLN see Chapter 4 6 44 page 4 207 Step 8 Move the HDSL interface in service by entering ED HDSL see Chapter 4 6 23 page 4 176 Step 9 Move the ULL link in service by entering ED ULLL see Chapter 4 6 46 page 4 209 End of steps 4 136 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Service provisioning 4 5 7 4 Remote operations channel ROC The following sections describe the provisioning of the remote operations channel ROC The system supports two different types of ROC m ROC carried over leased line interface m ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 x interface SPLL ROC 4 5 7 4 1 ROC carried over leased line interface Purpose This procedure is to create a leased line link ROC
607. ter code uniquely identify ing each pack and indicating the date and place of manufacture PVRSN lt string gt consisting of 5 to 10 characters Program version Additional in ventory information for COMDAC and shelves The PVRSN is the version of the software stored in the COMDAC or for the main shelf and subshelf the backplane version PCDE lt StLiIng gt consisting of 6 to 10 characters Program equipment code Addi tional inventory information for subshelves and IO_E1 packs only For the subshelf the PCDE indentifies the subshelf identifier which is set by jumpers on the subshelf backplane The sub shelf identifier must be equal to the number in the subshelf AID Otherwise a provisioning mis match or a mixed up cabling ex ists For IO_E1 packs the param eter indicates the impedance of the E1 feeder termination which is set by jumpers on the IO_E1 pack The value of the imped ance Is in ohms por IS 00S primary service state IS in service OOS out of service 4 266 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Retrieving equipment SST FELT INIT SWD VEO secondary service state FEF family of equipment failed FLT fault INIT initialization SWDL software download UEQ unequipped Step 3 If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For de tailed information on the command and the error responses see the RTRV EQPT section in the TL1 com
608. ter repairs and regular safety checks must be carried out documented and archived Only use tested and virus free diskettes Donot place the shelves on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 7 Appearance of the safety instructions All safety instructions have a uniform appearance They include a signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and cause of the danger the consequences of ignoring the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to minimize the danger In some safety instructions a warning symbol is placed underneath the signal word Example DANGER Arcing on removing or inserting a live power supply plug Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes Ensure that the line circuit breaker on the fuse panel is in the OFF position be fore removing or inserting the power supply plug Classification There are five classes of safety instructions Danger Warning Caution Im portant and Notice The classification is shown in the following table XXVIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document General safety infor
609. ternal clocking signals use the same physical pins on the X 21 interface DISABLED external clocking disabled ENABLED external clocking enabled 4 224 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a managed NTU ASTIMER 0 255 anti streaming timer The managed NTUs include an anti streaming mechanism which is used to prevent a faulty DTE from permanently disrupting a network of NT Us connected as a hub This timer sets the time in seconds that the RTS line must be continuously held high to acti vate the anti streaming mecha nism If this parameter is set to 0 then the anti streaming mecha nism is disabled ASRETRY 0 255 TIMER anti streaming retry timer This timer sets the time in min utes that the RTS line must be continuously held low to deacti vate the anti streaming mecha nism once it has been activated If this parameter is set to 255 then once activated the anti streaming mechanism will not deactivate until the NTU is reset or this parameter is changed Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT NTU section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 Decem
610. th and a V5 communication channel The V5 interface administrative primary service state must be OOS Out Of Service if the communication channel is cross con nected to a timeslot Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS CPCC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DiT CRS CPCCHsAIDIL YG AIDA 4 1 fpVvar e VARA where AIDI v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path AID2 v5cc 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel PVAR Vopvar q L AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS CPCC section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 128 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting V5
611. th degrowth for NB services Switch from POTS only to mixed CO S Step 9 Verify that the ISDN mode is enabled by entering RTRV CFG ISDN IF THEN the RTRV CFG ISDN command re use the SET CFG ISDN command to ports that the ISDN mode is disabled enable the ISDN mode go to that is POTS only configuration Step 10 the RTRV CFG ISDN command re go to Step 12 ports that the ISDN mode is enabled Step 10 Enable the ISDN mode by entering SET CFG ISDN see Chapter 2 3 6 page 2 18 Step 11 Activate the ISDN mode by entering SW CFG see Chapter 2 3 7 page 2 19 Step 12 IF THEN the object to grow is an ISDN BRA go to Chapter 3 3 4 page 3 14 to in subscriber sert an ISDN AP and then to Step 1 of the ISDN BRA subscriber growth pro cedure on page 3 23 the object to grow is an ISDN PRA go to Chapter 3 3 4 page 3 14 to in subscriber sert an ISDN AP and then to Step 1 of the ISDN PRA subscriber growth pro cedure on page 3 24 End of steps 3 62 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Growth to IO_E1 protection config ee ee 3 3 9 Growth from a configuration without IO_E1 protection to a configuration with IO_E1 protection Procedure Step 1 Verify that the installed O_E1 packs are installed in adjacent slots in ascending order beginning with slot O_E1 1 For IO_E1 protection it is necessary that all IO_E1 packs are installed in this manner If this is n
612. th line capacity and feeder capacity must be added The necessary provisioning can be performed remotely or locally by main tenance personnel via the GSI EM at the site Scenario 2 Adding Assume a fully equipped AnyMedia Access System is installed but only part of E1 feeder via the line capacity Is initially required to provide service This approach may be use capacity activation ful in a high growth rate area to reduce the number of maintenance personnel dis patches necessary to install new packs A V5 2 interface using 4 E1s exists on the sysiem Not all of the line capacity or feeder capacity is used A number of Z ports and E1 ports are left without being cross connected Greater than expected traffic is ex perienced on the V5 2 interface and it is desirable to add feeder capacity to re duce the concentration ratio From a remote GSI EM enough E1 feeder capacity is added to the V5 2 to reduce the concentration ratio This capacity activation is achieved without dispatching maintenance personnel to the remote site Comple tion of capacity activation is achieved by assigning the E1 to the existing interface Scenario 3 Load Since it is unlikely that a subscriber moves from one LE to another a move of E1 balancing feeders is assumed unbundling scenario Assume an AnyMedia Access System is installed with three V5 2 interfaces Each V5 2 supports five E1 ports 2 Mbps The three V5 2 interfaces terminate on a different local exchange
613. the GSI all other windows are displayed No GSI window can be placed outside the main window The main window provides the top menu of the GSI see Chapter 1 4 1 page 1 24 The other windows can be placed anywhere in the main window Their size can be maximized and minimized The main window itself can be maximized minimized or moved too Window setting by The GSI windows can be accessed like in any other Windows 95 application Windows 95 menu Therefore the user should be familiar with Windows 95 1 3 3 Individual control elements Control elements Various control elements are used in the individual windows The individual con trol elements are used for the following actions in the program sequence 1 14 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Starting and terminating Buttons Rectangular panel marked with its function the correspond ing function is activated by operating the button For example Confirm input Abort input Cancel Text inputs You can enter data here yourself confirm the input by press ing on the keyboard or the button in the window User Security x Login User ID lucent Ok Figure 1 10 Text input example Scroll bars Scroll up and down or along a list left arrow right arrow Figure 1 11 Scroll bars Selection lists The operator can select an item from the selection list Click on the control triangle of the scroll bar to move up and down the l
614. the ISDN lines in service ED ILLN eae Oe eee ED TEN Skee ste Se ED LLN i lt LES44 se ets Step 20 Move the V5 links in service Plo lt eo Seer ED VLt VoL tte ese Step 21 Move the V5 2 interface in service BD HVA oe 2 ec eL End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 307 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning examples ESE 4 12 5 Example for provisioning a V5 2 ISDN PRA interface Purpose This example is to create a V5 2 ISDN PRA service with the following parameters interface 3 E1 feeder 2 and 3 on IO_E1 2 link 1 and 2 communication channel 1 and 2 timeslot 15 and 16 communication path 1 2 3 5 6 and 7 application pack 13 and 14 port 1 and 3 HDSL interface 1 and 2 line termi nation 51 and 52 user port 31 and 32 protection group 1 and 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier the V5 link identifier the logical V5 com munication channel identifier and the envelope function addresses must be identical to those of the local exchange In this example the following values are used V5 interface unique identifier 0 V5 link identifier 12 and 13 logi cal V5 communication channel identifier 51 and 52 envelope function ad dresses 71 and 72 Procedure Step 1 Define the V5 2 interface BNIT VoLPetvVoOb 5 252 VOCy DE KoA VOLE LdU Step 2 Define the IO_E1 pack BNIHLTOR LSet poe 1 2 Step 3 Define the V5 links ENIS Vobtivol lr ieres l 2 VoLRID
615. the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 4 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 3 Enter the provisioning information of the POTS line by entering ENT PLN see Chapter 4 6 11 page 4 156 Step 4 Create the V5 user port entity associated to the POTS line by enter ing ENT V5UP see Chapter 4 6 16 page 4 166 Step 5 Next steps see Chapter 3 3 7 1 page 3 55 End of steps 3 22 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services ISDN BRA subscriber growth 3 3 4 4 ISDN BRA subscriber growth Assumption A V5 x interface is available Procedure Step 1 Verify that the line termination id is not yet in use Follow the RTRV LT GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command REIERV LI IAID where AID Weeti 1024 Fesa Step 2 Verify that the response matches the provisioning information speci fied by the engineering work order IF THEN the RTRV LT command reports thatthe use the ENT ILN command to enter line is not provisioned the provisioning information go to Step 3 the RTRV LT command reports correct go to Step 4 provisioning information the RTRV LT command reports differ contact the provisioning center to verify ent provisioning information the engineering work order Step 3 Enter the provisioning informatio
616. the cur rent system dataset but now within the provisioning variant context are sufficient 4 7 7 7 5 Checks on V5 link timeslot in current system dataset At changing the V5 link timeslot usage in the current system dataset no additional checks against any provisioning variant are performed This is not necessary be cause the already defined checks against the current system dataset are suffi cient 4 7 8 Service states and transitions Unchanged service The existing service state model of the V5 entities is not changed due to the re state model provisioning feature A re provisioning in progress is indicated by status condition reports and not by an explicit service state The service states may change as in normal operation that is due to hardware errors datalink loss or V5 interface star tup As the system performs an internal stop and restart of the interface during the re provisioning procedure the V5 interface will always cycle through the IS NOP state gt NOTE The service state model of the V5 entities is specified for the current system dataset only The V5 entities do not maintain a separate state model for each provisioning variant context This may lead to situations where for ex ample a V5 user port is still in service state In Service Not Associated al though it is only cross connected to a V5 interface in a standby provision ing variant At the actual switch over of provisioning variants the defined st
617. the following actions can be performed m Alarms Launches the Alarms and Conditions Reporting window see Chapter 1 5 4 page 1 31 m Alarm Configuration Inhibit Allow Messages Inhibits or allows reporting of system events If active each function is indi cated by a check mark m Alarm Configuration Audible Alarms Allows the occurrence of system alarms to be indicated by PC loud speaker If active this function is indicated by a check mark 1 58 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services Fault management functions a SeSe m Events Opens the Event Log window see Chapter 1 5 6 page 1 33 mw AFM Event History Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM Jest Management Data Maintenance Test Data only See Commands and Procedures included on the customer doc umentation CD ROM m Loopbacks Loopbacks allows you to initiate loopbacks for E1 IO_E1 HDSL LPS501 LPS503 LPS504 and ISDN LPU112 LPU430 The types of loopbacks available depend on the pack you choose Loopbacks require hardware to function so the selection window will only be populated once the pack is provisioned and available in hardware a Loopbacks El OF 10 17 ISON LPU112 Main 5 Not loopable Fault Selected pack nn Drop i E Loop Type pooo H i Loop Unloop Refresh ik The comments field is advisary only and may become out of
618. the presence of marginal timing inputs If both the primary and secondary references fail the system will run in free running mode until one of the sources recovers or until new reference sources are provisioned 4 10 2 Free running mode Free running The AnyMedia Access System also supports a free running synchronization synchronization mode that can be selected via a TL1 command For free running operation the mode system derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator The free running mode provides no holdover capability The free running mode is intended only for sys tem turn up and for backup operation during fault conditions 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 273 Configuration management for narrowband services Clock synchronization managm E SeSe 4 10 3 Clock recovery from E1 feeder E1 clock recovery The primary and secondary reference clock from the E1 feeders are defined by the operator Both COMDACs use the primary reference clock If this reference fails automatically the secondary reference clock is used non revertive If both fail the COMDACs switch to free running mode until one of the references recov ers E1 fault condition The IO_E1 monitors the following fault conditions on the received E1 see Chapter 5 6 3 page 5 132 O_ E1 P pack alarms Loss of signal LOS Loss of frame LOF m High bit error ratio HBER two consecutive seconds with BER 10 8 Alarm indication signal AIS If
619. thing that DS3 refers to with the addition of a specific physical interface according to GR 499 The ATM feeder multiplexer AFMDS3 provides a DSX 3 interface In this manual the more general term DS3 interface is used m 1 interface refers to the 2048 kbps digital feeder interfaces of the narrow band system on the network side m 3 interface refers to the 34 368 Mbps digital feeder interfaces of the broadband system that carries the ATM payload cells The E3 interface is provided by the AIM feeder multiplexer AFMES m The AnyMedia Element Manager AEM includes network management Capabilities for narrowband and broadband services m The AnyMedia Graphical System Interface software GSI includes narrow band and broadband services m Theterm GSI AEM stands for the function of the network management system for the AnyMedia Access System independent of using the GSI or the AEM m Theterm AnyMedia Mainshelfis used when the text refers only to the shelf which houses the COMDAC CIU and AFM but not to the ONU Subshelf m Theterm ONU Subshelfis used when the text refers only to the AnyMedia shelf in the ONU housing the OCP which provides the interface for the op tical link to the AnyMedia Mainshelf m Theterm AnyMedia shelves is used whenever the text does not need to distinguish between both types of shelves m nband signaling via E3 ATM or DS3 ATM permanent virtual connection PVC means a signaling not via a special OAM amp P
620. tiated by the operator Protection states The following protection states are defined Active Indicates the pack which is currently responsible for carrying the traffic in a protected configuration m Standby Indicates the pack which is ready for taking over the service from the active pack but is not carrying service because no protection switch has been re quested 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 281 Configuration management for narrowband services Protection switching 1 1 protection Non revertive protection Protection switching If both IO HDLC packs are faulty or both are in service state OOS the protection states remain unchanged gt NOTE In a protected configuration second IO_ HDLC pack provisioned protection states are shown in all cases regardless of the service states of the packs This means that protection states are shown even in service state OOS If the standby pack is deleted however the protection status is not shown For the IO_HDLC 1 1 protection applies where one O_HDLC serves as a service or active pack and the other serves as a standby pack If an active pack fails the fault is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the standby pack The protection switching can also be requested on demand manually For the 1O_ HDLC non revertive protection switching applies which does not re turn the system entities to their original configuration that is the repa
621. ting optical link to the OCP ae 2 4 3 Connecting the optical link to the OCP Purpose Provide the optical link between the OAP AnyMedia Mainshelf and the OCP ONU Subshelf Assumption m OAP and ONU Subshelf are provisioned at the AnyMedia Mainshelf Optical link is provisioned at AnyMedia Mainshelf m OCP is installed at ONU Subshelf with the correct subshelf identifier m ONU subshelf is installed and powered up see Installation Manual IM m Fibre cable for the optical link between AnyMedia Mainshelf and ONU Sub shelf is provided and routed m Fiber termination box is provided and correct connected Procedure Before working with optical fibre cables and connectors bear in mind that the fiber can be energized already In this case please observe the following safety instruc tion CAUTION Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation Although at present the transmitting power levels for Class 1 lasers are below those known to cause injury to the eye at distances greater than 250 mm 10 inches direct exposure should always be avoided Don t look into the end of an exposed fiber or pack optical connectors as long as the optical source is switched on Never view any unterminated optical connector with optical instruments other than indirect image converting devices such as the FIND R SCOPE of FJW Opti cal Systems Inc since viewing optics tend to collimate the energy from an opti cal connector and hence increase
622. tion growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release TTT EEE Step 5 Verify which alarm is raised for the O_ HDLC by following the RTRV ALM GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTIRV ALM AIDTIYPE 7 where AIDTYPE Al1 EQPT ALL All EQPT Equipment System Response The system message indicates the notification code NTFCNCDE for the implicated pack where NTFCNCDE CR MJ MN CR critical alarm MJ major alarm MN minor alarm Step 6 Correct any reported fault or alarm conditions and repeat the LED test If the LEDs of the IO_HDLC still do not illuminate then replace the O_ HDLC see Step 1 and repeat from Step 4 Step 7 Verify that the IO_HDLC is correctly provisioned by entering RTRV IOHDLC IF THEN the RTRV IOHDLC command reports use the ENT IOHDLC command to en that the IO_HDLC is not provisioned ter the provisioning information go to Step 8 the RTRV IOHDLC command reports contact the provisioning center to verify different provisioning information the engineering work order the RTRV IOHDLC command reports go to Step 9 that the IO_HDLC is correctly provi sioned Step 8 Create the O_HDLC entity by entering ENT IOHDLC see Chapter 4 6 12 page 4 158 At the provisioning of the IO HDLC the administrative primary ser vice state must be set to IS Step 9 Perform a side switch of the IO_HDLC packs by Switching to standby pack SW DX EQPT see
623. tion in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 109 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving an LL link out of service M ese ee 3 4 18 Moving a leased line link out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of a leased line link entity to OOS To change the administrative primary service state no pa rameter other than the primary service state must be given Assumptions The leased line link is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED LLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command EDSEL ALD S tee OT where AID deal ia 6 AID of the leased line link PST voos administrative primary service state OOS out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED LLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 110 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a ULL link out of service I 3 4 19 Moving an unstruct
624. tity and a V5 communication path entity Procedure Step 1 Follow the DLT CRS UPCP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DET CRS UPCP FAID I ATIDA e nl OYA ER PVAR where AIDI v5up 1 769 AID of the V5 user port AID2 v5cp 1 16 1 145 AID of the V5 communication path PVAR VopVar l S72 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS UPCP section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 118 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Cross connection V5UP V5l 3 4 27 Deleting a cross connection between V5 user port and V5 x interface Purpose This procedure is to delete a cross connection between a V5
625. tive provisioning variant If no free entry is available the creation of the V5 interface is denied Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT V5I GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT V51I AID v5type VoTYPE v5ifid V5IFID vopvar V5PVAR sdth SDTH fmon FMON voed V5ED where AID v5i 1 16 AID of the V5 interface VO LYPE Wok V52 V5 interface protocol type v51 V5 1 interface v52 V5 2 interface V5IFID 0316777215 V5 interface unique identifier V5PVAR 0 127 V5 interface active provisioning variant 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 141 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning a V5 interface ee SDTH On service degrade threshold in per centage FMON Ng es HDLC flag monitoring N no Y yes V5ED 1 2 edition of the v5 protocol stan dard to be used 1 V5 edition 1 2 V5 edition 2 gt NOTE The V5 interface unique identifier must be identical to that of the local ex change gt NOTE The service degrade threshold in percentage is not applicable for V5 1 Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5I section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 142 I
626. to Step 5 ports that the ISDN mode is disabled Step 3 Set the standby ISDN mode to POTS only mode by entering SET CFG ISDN see Chapter 3 4 62 page 3 154 step 1 Step 4 Activate the POTS only mode by entering SW CFG see Chapter 3 4 62 page 3 154 step 3 Step 5 Optionally delete unused ISDN HDSL application pack entities by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 6 For deleted ISDN application pack entities optionally remove corre sponding ISDN APs Step 7 Optionally delete the IO_HDLC entities by entering DLT IOHDLC see Chapter 3 4 61 page 3 153 Step 8 Optionally remove the IO_HDLCs End of steps 3 88 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Degrowth from ONU configuration I 3 3 16 Degrowth from a configuration with ONU to a configuration without ONU Procedure Step 1 Delete all subscriber entities located on ONU APs by following the Subscriber degrowth procedure see Chapter 3 3 12 page 3 66 Step 2 Move the ONU out of service by entering ED SUBSHELF see Chapter 3 4 24 page 3 116 Step 3 Delete the cross connection between ONU feeder port and AnyMedia Mainshelf server port by entering DLT CRS SUBSHELF see Chapter 3 4 63 page 3 155 Step 4 Delete the ONU entity by entering DLT SUBSHELF see Chapter 3 4 64 page 3 156 Step 5 Optionally delete the specified OAP entity by entering DLT AP see Chapter 3 4 34 page 3 126 Step 6 W
627. to the table and the service state of the timeslot The leased line timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an LL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the spec ified LL interface id already exists or the specified E1 feeder is already being used by another client Table HDSL Data for the HDSL interface are stored in the HDSL interface table There is one interface HDSL interface table per AnyMedia Access System The HDSL interface table contains an HDSL interface id as the key to this table a reference to the used HDSL ports the service state primary and secondary and the provisioning data When an HDSL interface is to be created the TL1 command must contain the HDSL interface id and the HDSL port If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command default provisioning data and service state OOS are used When an HDSL interface is entered correctly the corresponding entries in the HDSL interface timeslot table are updated This table contains the timeslot id as the key to the table and the service state of the timeslot The HDSL interface timeslot table can only be read by the operator The command to create an HDSL interface is rejected if either a table entry with the specified HDSL interface id al ready exists or the specified HDSL port is already being used by another client Table LL services Data for the leased line service are stored in the leased line services
628. tocol Step 6 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT V5L section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures 3 48 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 1 growth ee Step 7 Verify the cross connection to the V5 1 interface specified by the en gineering work order by entering the command RTRV CRS LI IF THEN the RTRV CRS LI command reports use the ENT CRS LI command to en that the link is not cross connected ter the cross connection go to Step 8 the RTRV CRS LI command reports go to Step 9 that the link is cross connected Step 8 Define the cross connection between V5 link and V5 1 interface by entering ENT CRS LI see Chapter 4 6 3 page 4 144 Step 9 Move the V5 link in service by entering ED V5L see Chapter 4 6 24 page 4 177 Step 10 Move the V5 1 interface in service by entering ED V5I see Chapter 4 6 25 page 4 178 Step 11 IF THEN the object to grow is a POTS sub go to Step 1 of the growth procedure scriber for POTS subscribers on page 3 55 the object to grow is an ISDN BRA go to Step 1 of the growth procedure subscriber for ISDN BRA subscribers on page 3 56 End of steps 363 211 112
629. toring 1 62 WM SS P oh 2 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures No a 2 1 Introduction 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 III rr Contents 2 2 Assumptions 2 3 2 3 System turn up procedures at AnyMedia Mainshelf location 2 5 2 4 System turn up procedure at ONU Subshelf location 2 58 3 System modification growth degrowth for NB services 3 1 3 1 Introduction 3 1 OZ Upgrade to a newer release 3 1 3 3 Growth degrowth 3 11 3 4 Related commands 3 92 4 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 1 4 1 Contents 4 1 4 2 Database management 4 2 4 3 Software management 4 5 4 4 Default system provisioning parameters 4 32 4 5 Provisioning and service activation 4 42 4 6 Provisioning commands 4 141 4 7 V5 re provisioning 4 234 4 8 Re provisioning commands 4 253 4 9 Inventory management 4 260 4 10 Clock synchronization management 4 271 4 11 Protection switching 4 280 4 12 Provisioning examples 4 294 E S 5 Fault management for narrowband services 5 1 5 1 Contents 5 1 5 2 Introduction OAM amp P interfaces 5 1 5 3 Maintenance strategy 5 3 5 4 Alarm handling 5 7 5 5 On demand line testing 5 25 IV Issue7 December 2000 363 211 112 Contents 5 6 Alarm tables 5 120 5 7 Trouble clearing procedures 5 170 6 Performance management for narrowband services 6 1 6 1 Introduction 6 1 6 2 Performance management data 6 4 6 3 Performance management operations 6 5 EE 7 Security management for narrowband
630. ts use the ENT HDSL command to create that an ISDN PRA service is provi a new HDSL interface entity go to sioned on the HDSL interface Step 7 3 24 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth Step 5 Verify whether there is free capacity on the HDSL interface Follow the RTRV HDSLTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSLTS AID where AID hoelr serio 12 pias AID of the HDSL interface timeslot Step 6 IF THEN the RTRV HDSLTS command reports use the ENT HDSL command to enter that there are not enough HDSL the provisioning information for an ad timeslots on the HDSL interface which ditional HDSL interface go to Step 7 can be used the RTRV HDSLTS command reports go to Step 8 that there are enough HDSL timeslots on the HDSL interface which can be used Step 7 Create the HDSL interface entity by entering ENT HDSL see Chapter 4 6 13 page 4 159 Step 8 Verify whether the HDSL interface is in service state OOS Follow the RTRV HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command RTRV HDSL AID where AID hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 25 System modification growth degrowth for NB services V5 ISDN PRA subscriber growth CO a a Step 9 IF THEN the RTRV HDSL command reports that go to Step 11 the HDSL i
631. ts are performed to ensure that the system can switch on demand to this provisioning variant If resources used in the provisioning variant are not available to be allocated the change to READY is denied and the command delivers the access identifier of the resource which couldn t be allocated Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED V5PVAR GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED VSPVAR AID vopvar V5PVAR Vopvarst V5PVARST where AID v5pvar 1 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant V5PVAR 0 127 V5 interface provisioning variant identifier V5PVARST NOT_READY READY V5 interface provisioning variant state NOT_READY variant is not available for variant switching READY variant is available for variant switching gt NOTE The provisioning variant identifier specifying the number of the provisioning variant used in the V5 protocol must be unique within each V5 interface 4 254 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Editing a V5 provisioning variant a Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V5PVAR section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112
632. ts have subscribers to be provisioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the AnyMedia Access System can provide a UGLL service These four objects are HDSL interface UGLL subscriber ULL interface and ULL service Table structure of a For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a UGLL service UGLL service also describing the relationships between the tables can be found in Figure 4 35 page 4 105 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 109 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning ULL Services UGLL subscriber id ULL interface id to MB 2 y eE E ey a oe rs ee OD Qs ZO Line Term UGLL subscriber UGLLN zm AID HDSL interface feeder source service state u pt hdsk2 OED IS S z C E a a Ee eae ee e o 2 E Si Cc z D HDSL timeslots 5 AID___ userTS user _ line type serv state x pa A ee a cag E a E 5 Hoa E f ee O 2 eee ee a T AD MAAT C E E Ao oo e 5 E le ee a AID used HDSL port application mode service re feid2 oo 2 State E 6G o e y Oe eee ee ee ae cae eee Port AID service state served HDSL Tog interlace AID_ service state parameter servedinierace mn eg Ee E S f eE 12 OOS ATO eet Ue l E z ___ ae E Cee See 0s m S ae a re es W oe a Z 5 fg B 4 3 IS provdata ULL 2 3 16 4 J
633. ts in the AnyMedia Access System As key to the table the IO_E1 AID is used AP provisioning For creation of a V5 POTS ISDN V3 ISDN PRA or ALL DLL VLL GLL UVLL UGLL service for a subscriber line first an AP has to be provisioned TL1 ENT AP m AP provisioning is performed to establish a desired pack type in a desired slot for example ENT AP lt lpz100 gt This action creates a number of records at the equipment layer according to the number of ports equipped on this AP The AP configuration data is downloaded before the pack state changes to IS Subscriber If a subscriber is created the TL1 command for example ENT PLN or ENT ILN provisioning contains the logical line termination It AID and the physical subscriber line drop AID If no provisioning data or no service state is contained in the command the defaults are used for provisioning and the subscriber state is set to OOS m The configuration settings will be downloaded to the port before the cre ated line termination It is enabled for service 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 67 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning to the SERVICE ASSIGNMENT LAYER from the SERVICE ASSIGNMENT LAYER 5 O Line Term POTS subscriber PLN z AID used service parameter served V5 a 8 Z port state user port nye a fea s po a He D Z ae m 8 D U 33 2 m oos pov dete C E w e as HH HH HEH H
634. ts needed for the application pack are not free on the ONU link For an HDSL application pack the number of timeslots is provisionable for all other narrowband application packs one timeslot per Z drop and two timeslots per U drop are necessary on the ONU link For test application pack drops no timeslots are necessary Additionally the sealing current can be provisioned for an HDSL application pack Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT AP GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT AP AID APTYPE ts TS seal SEAL PST where AID ap 1 1 16 Subap 1 8 1 8 AID of the application pack APTYPE BBP LPF500 LPP100 LPS501 UPS503 LPS504 EPUL LPU O EP2Z1L00 TAP 100 type of the application pack BBP broadband pack LPF500 1 server port 2 slot wide AP LPP100 24 Z ports PPM LPS501 4 HDSL ports LPS503 4 HDSL ports LPS504 4 HDSL ports LPU112 12 U ports LPU430 16 U ports LPZ100 32 Z ports TAP100 1 test port 4 152 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Provisioning an application pack a number of timeslots to be used by an HDSL AP SEAL LOR PR ON sealing current for HDSL sub scriber lines on this AP OFF sealing current off ON sealing current on paT IS OOS administrative primary service state IS in service OOS out of service gt NOTE The parameters number of timeslots and sealing current are only valid if the
635. u should also talk with your manager if you feel you do not understand any procedures in this manual or if you feel you need additional training before performing any of these procedures Not only the general instructions in this chapter on safety must be observed but also the specific safety instructions in the individual chapters Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this document These procedures allow exposure to high electrical energy and or current that may result in electric shock and or injury to untrained personnel during servicing maintenance and installation of this system All safety instructions have a uniform appearance This appearance is described in detail in the Chapter 7 Appearance of the safety instructions gt NOTE The AnyMedia Access System must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be correctly connected to the protective earth Never connect to supply voltage of 60 V which will destroy the equipment 6 1 General notes on safety This system has been developed in line with the present state of the art and fulfils the current national and international safety requirements It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of development expe rience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company XXVI Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 About this document General safety in
636. ue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 GSI software for narrowband services System displays and windows 1 5 7 TLISI View TL1ISI View The operator can launch a TL1SI View through a TL1 command line interface pro Window vided by the GSI In the TL1SI View TL1 commands can be entered directly This window shows all TL1 commands which are sent to the system as well as all output responses re ceived from the system Use the Copy and the Paste function from the Edit menu to simplify text editing TL1 SI Yiew On Host nbg212 Socket 23 ap 1 15 TYPE 1 APP LP21 00 ICC 3 5 ECI 226239 CLEI E5ALCPNBAA SLN 9 APP LP2100 1ICC 3 5 ECl 226239 CLEI FESALCPNBAA SLN 9 OCOB5690435 15 ciu 1 TYPE CIU APP DTP500 ICC 51 ECI CLEI 5LN 97WH96001526 15 comdac 1 1 77PE APP ICC ECI CLEIF SLN 15 comdac 1 2 YPE APP ICC ECI CLEI SLN 003 UEQ oe1 1 1 TY PE TINLAPP TL ICC ECIN CLEI S LNH ioel 1 2 TrPESMNNNLAPP MIN ICCI ECIS CLEI S LNH ioel 1 3 TrPE 10E1 4PP FAC500 ICC 1 1 ECI CLEI SLN 97WH986001 478 1 ioel 1 4 TrPE 10E1 4PP F C500 ICC 1 1 ECI CLEI SLN 97WH986001 494 1 ioelp 1 TrYPE APP 1CC ECI CLEI SLN 005 UE Q sh 1 TrPE APP ICC ECI CLEI SLN Figure 1 25 TL1SI View 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 1 35 GSI software for narrowband services System management functions 1 6 General GSI functions Overview The general system management functions comprise the functions for file man agement for de
637. ue of the param eter in the TL1 command database When not entered in the input command the AnyMedia Access System assumes the current value at the time the command is executed Example ED PLN DFLT tid ctag spec_block The provisionable parameters in the ED PLN DFLT command default to the cur rently provisioned values that are stored in the NVDS unless a new value is specified for change 11 4 3 Parameters with no default values not optional A parameter with no default value which cannot be an optional parameter is not al lowed to have a default value Example XL Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 ENT AP tid AID ctag APTYPE One value must be entered for the AID and one for the APTYPE The AID and APTYPE are not optional 12 Input acknowledgment 12 1 Definition An input acknowledgment is a very short output response from the AnyMedia Ac cess System to an input command If an output response cannot be transmitted within 2 seconds after a complete input command is executed the AnyMedia Access System will first send an input acknowledgment before sending an output response The 2 second counter starts when the operations system starts to exe cute the command not when the complete TL1 input command is received 12 2 Input acknowledgment format An input acknowledgment has the following format acknowledgment code CTAG lt cr gt lt lf gt lt This is how the user s screen display wou
638. unning and executes the old peripheral SW image which is stored on the peripheral pack m Peripheral SW version switchover is the transaction of taking an installed peripheral SW image into operation This is initiated by the COMDAC and also called peripheral SW activation The peripheral SW download is a generic term covering both peripheral SW in Stallation and peripheral SW version switchover both performed in cooperation between COMDAC and peripheral pack 4 30 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW download of peripheral packs a Procedure Step 1 The COMDAC checks autonomously the validity of images of provi sioned peripheral packs against the COMDAC load and copies the peripheral SW image step by step from the COMDAC s nonvolatile memory to those of the peripheral pack s System Response the following status condition messages ap pear on the screen peripheral pack system software version Mismatch peripheral pack system software version mismatch cleared if the peripheral SW download pro cedure Is started Step 2 The peripheral pack is kept running and executes the old peripheral SW image which is stored on the peripheral pack System Response The following status condition message ap pears on the screen peripheral pack software download in progress Step 3 The peripheral SW version switchover takes place autonomously The COMDAC is initi
639. up IP routing if used 15 lO E1 non protection installation 16 Adding IO_E1 pack protection 17 Setting synchronization parameters if not using the default parameters of lO_E1 18 Application pack AP installation 19 Establishing the ROC interface if ROC is used 20 Verifying proper system turn up 21 OAP installation 22 Connecting the optical link to the OAP 23 Provisioning of the subshelf 24 Logging off the mainshelf System turn up 25 Setting subshelf identifier on the ONU backplane via DIP switch procedure at 26 OCP installation 27 Connecting the optical link to the OCP 28 Application Packs AP installation 29 GSI connection at the RMC and logging on 30 Verifying inventory data of the ONU Subshelf 31 Setting miscellaneous ONU alarm input contacts 32 Logging off 2 2 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Assumptions 22 Assumptions The assumptions and conditions for these procedures are as follows m Planning procedure for cabling powering and installation has been done properly The result is available as an engineering work order m The AnyMedia Mainshelf or ONU Subshelf has been properly installed in the appropriate rack m Cabling and powering of the shelves have been completed and verified see the Installation Manual for details gt NOTE Each time that the shelf pack equipage is changed or a change is made to the Nonvolatile Data St
640. up procedures 2 1 2 1 Location of the jumpers on the CIU 2 8 2 2 Communications window 2 10 2 3 Communication Settings window 2 10 2 4 lO HDLC slots 2i 2 5 Numbering of IO_E1 slots 2 36 2 6 E1 jumper settings for 120 symmetrical cable 2 37 2 7 DIP switch for ONU addressing 2 59 VIII Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Figures 3 System modification growth degrowth for NB services 3 1 4 Configuration management for narrowband services 4 1 4 1 Functional diagram of cross connects within the AnyMedia Access System 4 48 4 2 Layered provisioning model of the AnyMedia Access System 4 52 4 3 Functional diagram of V5 1 4 54 4 4 Functional diagram of V5 2 4 55 4 5 Functional diagram of V5 2 cross connects with communication channel protection 4 57_ 4 6 Functional diagram of V3 4 58 4 7 Functional diagram of ALL 4 59 4 8 Functional diagram of DLL 4 60 4 9 Functional diagram of VLL 4 61 4 10 Functional diagram of GLL 4 62 4 11 Functional diagram of UVLL 4 63 4 12 Functional diagram of UGLL 4 64 4 13 Functional diagram of E1 ports 4 65 4 14 Functional diagram of subscriber ports example 4 66 4 15 Table structure of the equipment packs and slots layer 4 68 4 16 Table structure of POTS service 4 70 4 17 Provisioning data for a V5 2 POTS subscriber line example 4 71 4 18 Table structure of ISDN BRA service 4 73 4 19 Provisioning data for a V5 2 ISDN BRA subscriber line example 4 14 4 20 Table structure of V5 ISDN PRA service 4 73 4 21 P
641. uration is temporarily entered 3 4 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Upgrade to a newer release Subprocedure Step 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap that is grounded on the shelf CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Insert the new O_ HDLC IDC500B into the free slot With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top portion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up both LEDs on the IO HDLC light for approximately 5 s Step 3 IF THEN pack initialization fails go to Step 4 pack initialization succeeds go to Step 7 Step 4 Press the LED TEST button on the CIU System Response All LEDs on all installed packs light for approxi mately 10 seconds then the LEDs return to their previous status 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 5 System modifica
642. uration management for narrowband services 4 1 Contents Configuration Configuration management is the system activity for operations that control and management provision the system including the following capabilities l m Database management used to manage the nonvolatile data storage NVDS of the Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Software management used to manage the nonvolatile program storage NVPS of the system Default system provisioning parameters m Provisioning and service activation process of preparing the system for service by defining its function and setting any required options process of preparing the system for service by configuring the cross connections between its bandwidth management entities and setting any required options and moving entities into service m Inventory management system activity of collecting updating and report ing data on system equipage and system status m Clock synchronization management Protection switching automatic recovery mechanisms when a fault is de 363 211 112 tected in the system Issue 7 December 2000 4 1 Configuration management for narrowband services Database management 4 2 Database management NVDS Database management is used to manage the nonvolatile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System The NVDS contains provisioning data Physically the NVDS is implemented via FLASH memory devices on the COMDAC The system peri
643. uration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl Le 4 3 3 Software upgrade via COMDAC replacement in duplex mode without database evolution Purpose Software release upgrades or bug fixes via COMDAC replacement Assumptions This procedure assumes that m The operator is properly logged into the system m Iwo COMDACs are inserted and working in duplex mode m There are no alarms in the system m A pre loaded COMDAC is available without the provisioning data Procedure Step 1 Prepare a TL1 script file with the provisioning data see Chapter 1 7 4 page 1 47 Step 2 Clear the NVDS database via INIT SYS command gt NOTE Execution of this TL1 command will drop the data communication links be tween GSI AEM and the system all provisioning data except the IP ad dresses of both COMDACs and the SID address will be lost Follow the INIT SYS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command INIT SYS System Response A GSI ATTENTION window opens Click on YES The system performs a restart System Response A GSI status window opens indicating that the system is initializing The initialization is complete when a new win dow opens questioning for re connection Step 3 The standby COMDAC copies the NVDS database from the active COMDAC During this process the FAULT LED of the standby COM DAC flashes at a rate of 1 Hz Step 4 After finishing the copy procedure remove the active COMDAC St
644. ured leased line link out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an un structured leased line link entity to OOS Assumptions The leased line link is in the administrative primary state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ULLL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command PDS Uist eo ee Po where AID Gel ed eee Gs Dear a AID of the unstructured leased line link PST OOS administrative primary service state OOs out of service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED ULLL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 3 111 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Moving a ROC out of service M ese ee 3 4 20 Moving a remote operations channel out of service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an embed ded remote operations channel ROC to OOS Assumptions ROC is in the administrative primary service state IS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED ROC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BOS ROC A AID S se PBSI where AID rocs AID of the embed
645. ut da tabase evolution m Software upgrade via boot download simplex mode 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 5 Configuration management for narrowband services Software management gt NOTE After software upgrade procedures without database evolution all NVDS data except IP and SID address are lost The customer has to reprovision the system afterwards as described in the turn up procedure Setting the Side specific condi customer configuration see Chapter 2 3 5 page 2 17 tions for software upgrade procedures IF AND THEN the system configura the NVDS database software upgrade via pre tion is duplex evolution is available loaded COMDAC replace ment duplex mode see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 7 or software upgrade via soft ware download duplex mode see Chapter 4 3 2 page 4 13 the system configura the NVDS database software upgrade via COM tion is duplex evolution is not avail DAC replacement in duplex able mode without database evo lution see Chapter 4 3 3 page 4 16 the system configura the NVDS database software upgrade via COM tion is simplex evolution is not avail DAC replacement in simplex able mode without database evo lution see Chapter 4 3 4 page 4 22 or software upgrade via boot download simplex mode see Chapter 4 3 5 b page 4 26 a see system release description SRD b procedure in order to prepare a pre loaded COMDAC Required To complete the soft
646. variant context 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 245 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning rr Te ee 4 7 7 7 3 Checks on cross connections in current system dataset Creation checks A creation of a cross connection in the current system dataset must not violate the integrity of already existing provisioning variants in state PV1 READY This means that the system ensures that a cross connection is denied if an object is al ready PV1 allocated An exception to this rule is if the cross connection to be created is exactly the same as the one which exists in the provisioning variant Such a cross connection does not violate the integrity of the provisioning variant and is therefore allowed Deletion checks At deletion of a cross connection in the current system dataset no additional checks against any provisioning variant are performed This is not necessary be cause the already defined checks against the current system dataset are suffi cient 4 7 7 74 Checks on V5 link timeslot in provisioning variants As stated in Chapter 4 7 5 page 4 239 a change of the V5 link timeslot usage ina provisioning variant is only allowed in state PVO NOT _READY No additional At changing the V5 link timeslot usage in a provisioning variant no additional checks checks against the current system dataset or any other provisioning variant are performed This is not necessary because the already defined checks for
647. verse back to state ANO all provisioning variants related to a V5 interface must be set to not available by operator command AN2 Re provisioning in progress This state is entered if the access network and the local exchange have agreed to switch to a provisioning variant that is the AN has sent the re provisioning started message In this state the actual change from the old to the new provisioning dataset is performed within both sides According to the standards the AN enters the state ANO after completion of the switch to the new dataset In contradiction to the standards the system switches the old dataset into a standby provisioning variant which is marked avail able to allow a switch back Therefore the AN returns to state AN1 after the switch over procedure Issue 7 December 2000 4 241 Configuration management for narrowband services V5 re provisioning A ANO Not ready for re provisioning first provisioning variant available no provisioning variant available AN2 AN1 Switch over accepted Ready for re provisioning Re provisioning in progress Re provisioning completed Figure 4 47 Re provisioning interface state transitions 4 7 7 Provisioning 4 7 7 1 Provisioning model Unchanged The principles of the existing provisioning model are not changed due to the re provisioning model provisioning feature Provisioning variants are built up with the existing manage men
648. vice versa The IO_HDLC pack has to be installed in one of the two O_ HDLC slots as shown below preferably in the HDLC 1 slot 2 3 4 Procedure Step 1 Attach the Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap and connect it to the ESD bonding point acs wise fo se J Figure 2 4 IO_HDLC slots optional O _ Q ms O IO_HDLC CAUTION Destruction of components by electrostatic discharge sb Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge Ensure that your Electrostatic Discharge ESD wrist strap is secure tad Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outer most edges Never touch the components conductors or connector pins Pay attention to the Electrostatic discharge considerations in the chapter About this document Step 2 Open the AnyMedia Mainshelf doors by turning the latches Step 3 Insert the IO_HDLC into one of the two IO_HDLC slots preferably the most left one see Figure 2 4 With the latch in the open position slide the pack in until the top por tion of the upper latch is behind the upper lip of the shelf Lock the pack in position by pressing firmly on the rounded indentation on the latch until it clicks into place System Response Upon power up both LEDs on the IO HDLC light for approximately 5 s System Response The pictorial representation of the system is updated to show the installed O_ HDLC pack at the connected GSI 363
649. visioning a cross connection between V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 2 protection group and a V5 communication channel The communication channel will be protected if protection group 2 contains a standby protection timeslot The V5 interface must be in an administrative primary service state OOS and the communication chan nel must be cross connected to a timeslot already Protection group 1 can only be cross connected to one V5 communication channel To cross connect protec tion group 2 protection group 1 must already be cross connected Multiple communication channels can be assigned to a single protection group Assumptions V5 2 protection group and V5 communication channel have already been provi sioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS PGCC GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ENT CRS PGCC TALDI ALDZA His 2 pVar e VAR where AID1 v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group AID2 v5cec 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel PVAR VoOpVar L S2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no
650. w the DLT CRS CCTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command DLT CRS CCTS AID1 AID2 pvar PVAR where AID1 v5cc 1 16 1 47 AID of the V5 communication channel AID2 v5ts 1 16 15 16 31 AID of the V5 timeslot PVAR VopVar L S2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the DLT CRS CCTS section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 3 130 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 System modification growth degrowth for NB services Deleting V5 communic channel ee 3 4 39 Deleting a V5 communication channel Purpose This procedure is to delete a V5 communication channel entity The communica tion channel must not have any service this means it must not b
651. ware management procedures successfully you must have equipment the following equipment readily at hand APCrunning the correct GSI software version as specified in the system release description SRD m A pre loaded COMDAC or the software image is stored on the PC 4 6 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services SW upgrade COMDAC repl i 4 3 1 Software upgrade via pre loaded COMDAC replacement duplex mode Purpose Software release upgrades or bug fixes via a pre loaded COMDAC replacement Assumptions This procedure assumes that m The operator is properly logged into the system Iwo COMDACs are installed and configured in duplex mode m There are no alarms in the AnyMedia Access System m A pre loaded COMDAC is available Procedure Step 1 IF THEN the NVDS database evolution is go to Step 2 available see SRD the NVDS database evolution is not go to procedure in Chapter 4 3 3 available page 4 16 Step 2 Create a copy of the NVDS database backup for configuration data security reasons see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 3 Step 3 Disable the protection switching of the active COMDAC Follow the SW TOPROTN EQPT GSI operation with parameter INHIBIT or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command SW TOPROTN EQPT core 1 INHIBIT System Response The report event message on the screen is COMDAC Switch tnihibited Step 4 Observe the response provided by th
652. when the GSI is used remotely The information is transported via an embedded 64 kbps channel that is part of the E1 payload connectivity of the AnyMedia Access System The system supports two different types of ROC m ROC carried over leased line interface m ROC carried over semipermanent leased line via V5 x interface SPLL ROC 4 5 5 11 1 ROC carried over leased line interface LL ROC indepen The ROC carried over leased line interface LL ROC is independent of the V5 x dent of V5 interface It is transported on E1 feeders which can be used for that ROC and for leased line services Provisioning For provisioning an LL ROC also the layered structure as shown in Figure 4 2 objects of an LL page 4 52 applies The given structure implies that three objects have to be provi ROC sioned with data for the lines and the service assignments layer before the ROC can be used These three objects are ROC leased line interface and leased line service Provisioning of an The ROC acts as a virtual port Therefore there is no equipment and slot layer for LL ROC the ROC Provisioning and maintenance of the E1 feeder equipment layer and IO_E1 slot layer is the same as for ALL 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 113 Configuration management for narrowband services Port provisioning rr Te ee Table structure of For every layer one or more tables exist An example of a table structure of a an LL ROC ROC also describing the
653. word is desired see the Security manage ment for narrowband services procedures Chapter 7 Step 20 Click on Connect in the Communications window System Response After the connection is established the Connec tion Window closes If the TL1SI View is opened the following is dis played Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Software version of the COMDAC for example Release 1 3 0 User Privilege for example User Privilege Privileged The pictorial representation of the shelf is updated to reflect a live view of the shelf System Fault If the user ID and password do not match accessing the system is not allowed Go to step 18 2 12 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures CIU installation amp GSI connection ee Next procedure 363 211 112 Step 21 If there is no communication between GSI and the CIT port possible Check the availability of your COM port Are any other Windows 95 applications blocking the COM port Have you installed the correct COM port Check your cable Is the cable connected to your PC and to the CIT port Ils the cable damaged Step 22 Verify that the correct packs are displayed Step 23 It is recommended to open the TL1SI View to see message comple tion responses and the status of commands in progress To open the TL1SI View click on the TL1SI View button Verifying the COMDAC software see Chapter 2 3 3 page 2 14
654. x is any number between 0 and 255 Classes D and E are not used in the system This parameter is applicable to all AlDs cit 1 eth 1 roc 1 REMIP Remote IP address The remote IP address parameter identifies the address of the remote host GSI AEM at the other end of the point to point link This pa rameter is only applicable to the AlDs cit 1 and roc 1 INTSTATE DOWN UP interface state DOWN Interface is disabled UP Interface is enabled for use The interface state parameter is used for enabling and disabling the communication interface The UP value enables the communi cation interface for use and DOWN value disables the inter face so it cannot be used for net work traffic The interface can be enabled only with a valid IP ad dress This parameter is applica ble to all AlDs cit 1 eth 1 roc 1 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 2 31 Initial narrowband system turn up procedures Setting the IP address TET TT EE Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the section SET IP in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps Next procedure Setting up IP routing see Chapter 2 3 14 2 32 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Initial narrowb
655. xchange for the provisioning variant to be switched to The state PV3 ACTIVE is entered either automatically after creation of a V5 interface or during normal operation after a switch over of provisioning variants 4 7 7 5 Copying provisioning variant dataset contents into another standby provisioning variant Copying prov To support a quick creation of a provisioning variant dataset backup the system variant dataset supports a copy command which copies the contents of a provisioning variant into contents another standby provisioning variant in state PVO NOT_READY of the same in terface For this only one copy command must be issued As copy source either the currently active provisioning variant or any other standby provisioning variant can be used This quickly created new standby provisioning dataset can then be used for backup purposes before changing the original provisioning variant or as base for creating another standby provisioning variant A copy operation is only possible to an empty provisioning variant dataset As this command is a kind of macro command a special behavior is considered in case of failures during the command execution If the command is interrupted by a system recovery cycle because of a failure or reset the system rolls back the copy operation with a deletion of the target provisioning variant dataset contents at the subsequent system recovery In this way the roll back mechanism of this command never leaves the
656. y be called tip and the b leg ring Acronyms and ab In the text acronyms are expanded the first time they are used in the main text of a breviations chapter for example permanent leased line PLL If the acronym is a trademark it will not be spelled out A list of acronyms is provided at the end of this docu ment Commands AnyMedia Access System TL1 command names and messages are displayed in constant width font and are uppercase for example RTRV COND Trademarks The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page Trade marks are in italics and the trademarks modify a noun A trademark is not treated as an acronym it is not spelled out or expanded Lucent Technologies trademarks Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark or trademark symbol the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter for ex ample Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Trademarks of other companies The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 XXI About this document Related documentation 3 Related documentation Document list The following is orderable documentation related to the AnyMedia Access System and for additional components Table 1 List of documents CIC Ordering Component Manual Type Comcode Number AnyMedia Access System Applications Plannin
657. y been provisioned Procedure Step 1 Follow the ENT CRS PGTS GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command BNI CRO PGiS 7 ADL ALDZ2 32 ovar PVARl gt where AID1 v52pg 1 16 1 2 AID of the V5 2 protection group AID2 v5ts 1 16 15 16 31 AID of the V5 2 timeslot PVAR VopVvar l s2 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator the com mand addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface Therefore this is the default value and en sures backward compatibility To modify in the active provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning variant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ENT CRS PGTS 4 180 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V52PG V52TS T IiOU MUMU section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu option Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 181 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V52PG V5CC ee 4 6 28 Pro
658. y service state Is in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED PRALN section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 175 Configuration management for narrowband services Moving an HDSL interface in serv BE SeSe 4 6 23 Moving an HDSL interface in service Purpose This procedure is to change the administrative primary service state of an HDSL interface entity to IS Assumption HDSL interface is in administrative primary state OOS Procedure Step 1 Follow the ED HDSL GSI operation or at the prompt enter the following TL1 command ED HDS L ALD ie PSL where ALD hdsl 1 512 AID of the HDSL interface PST iS administrative primary service state Ts in service Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED HDSL section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 4 176 Issue 7 December 2000 363 211 112 Configuration manageme
659. ype BC bearer channel ee communication channel PVAR VopVar l 32 AID of the V5 provisioning variant If no provisioning variant AID is given by the operator and the link is cross connected the command addresses the currently active provisioning variant of the related V5 interface To modify in the ac tive provisioning variant of a V5 interface either no provisioning variant AID only possible if link is cross connected to a v5 inter face must be given or the related provisioning variant AID of the currently active provisioning vari ant can be used Step 2 Observe the response provided by the system If the command is rejected correct the problem and repeat For detailed information on the command and the error responses see the ED V5TS section in the TL1 command description in HTML format which is available on the customer documentation CD ROM or via the GSI menu op tion Help Commands Procedures End of steps 363 211 112 Issue 7 December 2000 4 147 Configuration management for narrowband services Cross connection V5CC V5TS LS 4 6 6 Provisioning a cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot Purpose This procedure is to create a cross connection between a V5 communication channel and a V5 timeslot The interface must be in administrative primary service state OOS out of service A communication channel can be cross connected to only one timeslot 15 16 or 31 The timeslot must not yet
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Manual de Instrucciones Conmutador de vídeo Online-Hilfe - Visage Imaging EDA-PDA Barcode Reader Symbol 8800 - User Guide Print & Apply Series - Nita Labeling Equipment IM-240DME IM-240DWME IM-240DSME IM-240XME IM 取扱説明書 - M Concentra - 株式会社太陽インターナショナル Canton InCeiling 465 DT - 1 - 8844型VFコンバータ 取扱説明書 1.概要 8844は入力電圧を Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file